Garmin G5000

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL
System Maintenance Manual
Contains Instructions for Continued

Airworthiness for STC ST01918WI
190-02313-01 June 2019 Revision 2

© Copyright 2019
Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries
All Rights Reserved
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted,
disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express prior
written consent of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and
of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed and to
print one copy of this manual or of any revision hereto, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this
manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any
unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
How to reach Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 E. 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062 USA
Telephone: 913.397.8200
www.garmin.com
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.

Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road
Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9RB, UK
Phone: +44 (0) 23 8052 4000
Fax: +44 (0) 23 8052 4004
Garmin AT, Inc.

2345 Turner Rd., SE
Salem, OR 97302 USA
Telephone: 503.581.8101
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Revision Revision Date Description
1 6/7/2019 Initial Release
2 6/14/2019 Update definition for fuel sleeving color tracer.
G5000 in Textron Model 560XL System Maintenance Manual Page 2

190-02313-01 Revision 2
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
This document may contain information which is subject to the Export Administration Regulations (“EAR”)
issued by the United States Department of Commerce (15 CFR, Chapter VII Subchapter C) and which may
not be exported, released or disclosed to foreign nationals inside or outside the United States without first
obtaining an export license. A violation of the EAR may be subject to a penalty of up to 10 years
imprisonment and a fine of up to $1,000,000 under section 2410 of the Export Administration Act of the
1979. The preceding statement is required to be included on any and all reproductions in whole or in part
of this manual.
WARNING
This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This Notice is being provided in accordance with California's
Proposition 65. If there are any questions or additional information is required, please refer to our web site
at www.garmin.com/prop65.
WARNING
Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply, Refer to Perchlorate Material Handling
CAUTION
The GDU lens is coated with a special anti-reflective coating that is very sensitive to skin oils, waxes and
abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE ANTI-REFLECTIVE
COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an eyeglass lens cleaner
that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
IMPORTANT
All screen shots used in this document are current at the time of publication. Screen shots are intended to
provide visual reference only. All information depicted in screen shots, including software file names,
versions and part numbers, is subject to change and may not be up to date.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH PAGE
1. INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 17
1.1 CONTENT, SCOPE, PURPOSE ............................................................................................................................... 17
1.2 APPLICABILITY .................................................................................................................................................. 17
1.3 DEFINITIONS/ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................................................................................. 17
1.4 UNITS OF MEASURE .......................................................................................................................................... 19
1.5 REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS .................................................................................................................................. 19
1.6 REVISION AND DISTRIBUTION .............................................................................................................................. 22
2. DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................................. 23
2.1 (ATA 22) AUTO FLIGHT .................................................................................................................................... 27
2.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 27
2.1.2 G5000 AFCS Description and Operation .............................................................................................. 27
2.1.3 Components ......................................................................................................................................... 30
2.2 (ATA 23) COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ................................................................................................................... 36
2.2.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 36
2.2.2 Description and Operation ................................................................................................................... 36
2.2.3 Components ......................................................................................................................................... 40
2.3 (ATA 28) FUEL SYSTEM ..................................................................................................................................... 42
2.3.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 42
2.4 (ATA 30) ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION .................................................................................................................. 44
2.4.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 44
2.5 (ATA 31) INDICATING AND RECORDING SYSTEM .................................................................................................... 45
2.5.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 45
2.5.3 Components ......................................................................................................................................... 63
2.6 (ATA 34) NAVIGATION & EFIS ........................................................................................................................... 67
2.6.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 67
2.6.3 Components ......................................................................................................................................... 68
3. G5000 SOFTWARE & CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................................... 77
3.1 CONFIGURATION MODE OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................................... 77
3.1.1 Placing the G5000 System into Configuration Mode ........................................................................... 77
3.1.2 Navigating Through Configuration Mode Pages ................................................................................. 78
3.2 OBTAINING LRU PART NUMBER, SOFTWARE VERSION & SYSTEM STATUS ................................................................... 79
3.2.1 Using the GTC Avionics Page................................................................................................................ 79
3.2.2 Creating an Aircraft Report .................................................................................................................. 79
3.2.3 System Status Indicators ...................................................................................................................... 80
3.3 SOFTWARE LOADING OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................... 82
3.3.1 Obtaining and Downloading the Software Image ............................................................................... 82
3.3.2 G5000 Hardware/Software Compatibility Check ................................................................................. 87

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3.3.3 Loading Baseline Software and Configuration ..................................................................................... 88
3.3.4 Loading Garmin Optional Equipment and Features ............................................................................. 92
3.3.5 Loading Enablement Card Options ...................................................................................................... 98
3.4 AIRCRAFT REGISTRATION NUMBER ENTRY ........................................................................................................... 100
3.5 CONFIGURATION CONFIRMATION ...................................................................................................................... 101
3.6 SOFTWARE/CONFIGURATION TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................. 102
3.7 G5000 AVIATION DATABASES .......................................................................................................................... 104
3.7.1 Aviation Database Loading ................................................................................................................ 104
3.8 FLIGHT STREAM 510 FIRMWARE REVIEW ............................................................................................................ 105
4. INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTINUED AIRWORTHINESS (ICA) .......................................................................... 107
4.1 AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS ........................................................................................................................... 107
4.1.1 G5000 Autopilot Ground Crew Maintenance Checks ......................................................................... 107
4.1.2 Required Maintenance Checks ........................................................................................................... 108
4.2 SERVICING INFORMATION ................................................................................................................................. 110
4.2.1 Required Tools ................................................................................................................................... 110
4.3 G5000 EQUIPMENT AIRWORTHINESS INSPECTION TIME LIMITS .............................................................................. 112
4.4 VISUAL INSPECTION ......................................................................................................................................... 119
4.4.1 Visual Inspection Criteria ................................................................................................................... 120
4.4.2 Nose Radome Compartment Visual Inspection .................................................................................. 121
4.4.3 Nose Avionics Compartment Visual Inspection .................................................................................. 122
4.4.4 Instrument Panel Visual Inspection .................................................................................................... 125
4.4.5 Pilot Side Panel Visual Inspection ....................................................................................................... 127
4.4.6 Copilot Side Panel Visual Inspection .................................................................................................. 128
4.4.7 Cockpit & Cabin Under‐Floor Visual Inspection .................................................................................. 129
4.4.8 Pedestal Visual Inspection ................................................................................................................. 130
4.4.9 Cabin Aft Pressure Bulkhead Visual Inspection .................................................................................. 131
4.4.10 Tail‐cone Under‐Floor Visual Inspection ............................................................................................ 132
4.4.11 Roll Servo Visual Inspection ............................................................................................................... 133
4.4.12 Tail Compartment Visual Inspection .................................................................................................. 136
4.4.13 Landing Gear Wheel Well Visual Inspection ...................................................................................... 139
4.4.14 Antenna and Exterior Fuselage Skin Visual Inspection ...................................................................... 140
4.4.15 Post Lightning Strike Maintenance Action ......................................................................................... 141
5. MAINTENANCE PRACTICES (G5000 GIFD EQUIPMENT) ............................................................................. 142
5.1 GDU 1450W DISPLAY UNIT ............................................................................................................................ 142
5.1.1 GDU 1450W Removal ........................................................................................................................ 142
5.1.2 GDU 1450W Installation .................................................................................................................... 142
5.1.3 PFD1 Configuration Module Removal & Replacement ...................................................................... 142
5.1.4 GDU 1450W Software & Configuration Loading................................................................................ 144
5.1.5 GDU 1450W Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 146
5.1.6 GDU 1450W Functional Test .............................................................................................................. 153
5.2 GIA 64E INTEGRATED PROCESSOR AND GPS ANTENNAS ....................................................................................... 159
5.2.1 GIA 64E Removal ................................................................................................................................ 159
5.2.2 GIA 64E Installation ........................................................................................................................... 159
5.2.3 GIA 64E Software & Configuration Loading ....................................................................................... 160

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.2.4 GIA 64E Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 162
5.2.5 GIA 64E Functional Check .................................................................................................................. 170
5.3 GSA 9000 SERVO ACTUATOR / GSM 9100 SERVO GEARBOX ............................................................................... 184
5.3.1 GSA 9000/GSM 9100 Removal ........................................................................................................... 184
5.3.2 GSA 9000/GSM 9100 Installation ...................................................................................................... 186
5.3.3 GSM 9100 Inspection ......................................................................................................................... 187
5.3.4 GSA 9000 Software and Configuration Loading ................................................................................. 188
5.3.5 GSA 9000 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................ 190
5.3.6 AFCS Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................ 195
5.4 GMC 7200 AUTOPILOT MODE CONTROLLER ...................................................................................................... 200
5.4.1 GMC 7200 Removal ........................................................................................................................... 200
5.4.2 GMC 7200 Installation ....................................................................................................................... 200
5.4.3 GMC 7200 Software and Configuration Loading ............................................................................... 200
5.4.4 GMC 7200 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................... 201
5.4.5 GMC 7200 Functional Check .............................................................................................................. 202
5.5 GMA 36B AUDIO PROCESSOR ......................................................................................................................... 204
5.5.1 GMA 36B Removal ............................................................................................................................. 204
5.5.2 GMA 36B Installation ......................................................................................................................... 204
5.5.3 GMA 36B Software and Configuration Loading ................................................................................. 205
5.5.4 GMA 36B & Communication System Troubleshooting....................................................................... 207
5.5.5 GMA 36B Functional Test ................................................................................................................... 208
5.6 GTC 575 TOUCHSCREEN CONTROLLER ............................................................................................................... 213
5.6.1 GTC 575 Removal ............................................................................................................................... 213
5.6.2 GTC 575 Installation ........................................................................................................................... 213
5.6.3 GTC 575 Software & Configuration Loading ...................................................................................... 213
5.6.4 GTC 575 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 215
5.6.5 GTC 575 Functional Check .................................................................................................................. 216
5.7 GCU 275 DISPLAY CONTROLLER ....................................................................................................................... 217
5.7.1 GCU 275 Removal .............................................................................................................................. 217
5.7.2 GCU 275 Installation .......................................................................................................................... 217
5.7.3 GCU 275 Software & Configuration Loading ..................................................................................... 217
5.7.4 GCU 275 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 219
5.7.5 GCU 275 Functional Check ................................................................................................................. 219
5.8 GEA 7100 ENGINE AND AIRFRAME UNIT ........................................................................................................... 221
5.8.1 GEA 7100 Removal ............................................................................................................................. 221
5.8.2 GEA 7100 Installation ........................................................................................................................ 221
5.8.3 GEA 7100 Configuration Module (Part Number 011‐02582‐01) ........................................................ 221
5.8.4 GEA 7100 Software & Configuration Loading .................................................................................... 222
5.8.5 GEA 7100 Troubleshooting Aid .......................................................................................................... 224
5.8.6 GEA 7100 Functional Test .................................................................................................................. 231
5.9 GSD 41 DATA CONCENTRATOR ........................................................................................................................ 232
5.9.1 GSD 41 Removal ................................................................................................................................. 232
5.9.2 GSD 41 Installation ............................................................................................................................ 232
5.9.3 GSD 41 Software & Configuration Loading ........................................................................................ 233
5.9.4 GSD 41 Functional Check ................................................................................................................... 235
5.10 GSR 56 IRIDIUM SATELLITE TRANSCEIVER & DUAL‐ELEMENT ANTENNA ................................................................... 241

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.10.1 Removal ............................................................................................................................................. 241
5.10.2 Installation ......................................................................................................................................... 241
5.10.3 GSR 56 Software and Configuration Loading ..................................................................................... 242
5.10.4 Activation of Garmin Connext ............................................................................................................ 242
5.10.5 GSR 56 Functional Test ...................................................................................................................... 243
5.11 GDL 69A XM RECEIVER & ANTENNA ................................................................................................................ 244
5.11.1 Removal ............................................................................................................................................. 244
5.11.2 Installation ......................................................................................................................................... 244
5.11.3 GDL 69A Software and Configuration Loading .................................................................................. 245
5.11.4 GDL 69A Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 245
5.11.5 GDL 69 Functional Test ...................................................................................................................... 247
5.12 GDL 59 DATALINK TRANSCEIVER ....................................................................................................................... 248
5.12.1 GDL 59 Removal ................................................................................................................................. 248
5.12.2 GDL 59 Installation ............................................................................................................................. 248
5.12.3 GDL 59 Software & Configuration Loading ........................................................................................ 248
5.12.4 GDL 59 Functional Test ...................................................................................................................... 248
5.13 GDR 66 VHF TRANSCEIVER & ANTENNA ............................................................................................................ 250
5.13.1 Removal ............................................................................................................................................. 250
5.13.2 Installation ......................................................................................................................................... 250
5.13.3 GDR 66 Software & Configuration ..................................................................................................... 251
5.13.4 GDR 66 Functional Test ...................................................................................................................... 251
5.14 DME‐4000 DME RECEIVER ............................................................................................................................ 252
5.14.1 DME‐4000 Receiver Removal ............................................................................................................. 252
5.14.2 DME‐4000 Receiver Installation ......................................................................................................... 252
5.14.3 DME‐4000 Antenna Removal ............................................................................................................. 252
5.14.4 DME‐4000 Antenna Installation ........................................................................................................ 253
5.15 ADF‐4000 ADF RECEIVER .............................................................................................................................. 254
5.15.1 ADF‐4000 ADF Receiver Removal ....................................................................................................... 254
5.15.2 ADF‐4000 Receiver Installation .......................................................................................................... 254
5.15.3 ADF‐4000 ADF Antenna Removal ...................................................................................................... 254
5.15.4 ADF‐4000 Antenna Installation .......................................................................................................... 255
5.16 GDC 7400 AIR DATA COMPUTER ..................................................................................................................... 256
5.16.1 GDC 7400 Removal ............................................................................................................................ 256
5.16.2 GDC 7400 Installation ........................................................................................................................ 256
5.16.3 GDC 7400 Software & Configuration ................................................................................................. 256
5.16.4 GDC 7400 Functional Test .................................................................................................................. 257
5.17 GTX 3000 TRANSPONDER ............................................................................................................................... 261
5.17.1 GTX 3000 Removal ............................................................................................................................. 261
5.17.2 GTX 3000 Installation ......................................................................................................................... 261
5.17.3 GTX 3000 Bottom Antenna Removal ................................................................................................. 261
5.17.4 GTX 3000 Bottom Antenna Installation ............................................................................................. 262
5.17.5 GTX 3000 Diversity Antenna Removal ............................................................................................... 262
5.17.6 GTX 3000 Diversity Antenna Installation ........................................................................................... 262
5.17.7 GTX 3000 Software & Configuration Loading .................................................................................... 263
5.17.8 GTX 3000 Transponder ‘Set GTX’ Configuration ................................................................................ 264
5.17.9 GTX 3000 Functional Check ................................................................................................................ 265

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.18 PA/SPEAKER AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ................................................................................................ 266
5.18.1 PA/Speaker Amplifier Removal .......................................................................................................... 266
5.18.2 PA/Speaker Amplifier Installation ...................................................................................................... 267
5.19 NOSE AVIONICS COOLING FAN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ....................................................................................... 267
5.19.1 Nose Avionics Cooling Fan Removal .................................................................................................. 267
5.19.2 Nose Avionics Cooling Fan Installation .............................................................................................. 267
5.20 GWX PROCESSOR WEATHER RADAR .................................................................................................................. 268
5.20.1 GWX Processor Removal .................................................................................................................... 268
5.20.2 GWX Processor Installation ................................................................................................................ 268
5.20.3 GWX Processor Software and Configuration Loading ........................................................................ 268
5.20.4 GWX Processor Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................ 269
5.20.5 GWX Processor Functional Test ......................................................................................................... 270
5.20.6 Ground Clutter Suppression and Turbulence Detection Functional Check ......................................... 270
5.21 GPS/WAAS/SXM ANTENNAS ......................................................................................................................... 271
5.21.1 GPS or GPS/WAAS/SXM Antenna Removal ........................................................................................ 271
5.21.2 GPS or GPS/WAAS/SXM Antenna Reinstallation ............................................................................... 271
5.22 G5000 ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR AND HARNESS INFORMATION ............................................................................... 272
5.22.1 GIA 64E Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors ......................................................................................... 272
5.22.2 GEA 7100 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors ...................................................................................... 275
5.22.3 GMA 36B Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors ...................................................................................... 277
5.22.4 GTX 3000 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors ...................................................................................... 279
5.22.5 GDU 1450W Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors ................................................................................. 280
5.22.6 GDC 7400 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors...................................................................................... 281
5.22.7 GDL 69A Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors ........................................................................................ 282
5.22.8 GCU 275 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors ....................................................................................... 283
5.22.9 GMC 7200 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors ..................................................................................... 283
5.22.10 GTC 575 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors .................................................................................... 284
5.22.11 GSD 41 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors ...................................................................................... 285
5.22.12 GWX Processor Aircraft Harness/LRU Connector ........................................................................... 286
5.22.13 GSA 9000 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connector.................................................................................... 287
5.22.14 GDL 59 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors ...................................................................................... 288
5.22.15 GDR 66 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors ..................................................................................... 289
5.22.16 GSR 56 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connector ........................................................................................ 290
5.23 ELECTRICAL BONDING ...................................................................................................................................... 291
5.23.1 Choice of Bonding Method ................................................................................................................. 291
5.23.2 Surface preparation and sealing ........................................................................................................ 292
Method A ........................................................................................................................................................... 292
Method B ........................................................................................................................................................... 292
5.23.3 Bonding Methods ............................................................................................................................... 293
5.23.4 Bond Inspection ................................................................................................................................. 294
5.23.5 Finishing and Sealing ......................................................................................................................... 294
Method A (Nonconductive) ................................................................................................................................ 294
Method B (Conductive) ...................................................................................................................................... 295
5.24 ELECTRICAL BONDING TEST ............................................................................................................................... 299
5.24.1 Requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 299
5.24.2 Test Equipment .................................................................................................................................. 299

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.24.3 Electrical Bonding Procedure ............................................................................................................. 299
6. INTERFACE TESTING ................................................................................................................................. 302
6.1 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL AND PRESSURIZATION INTERFACE CHECKS ...................................................................... 302
6.1.1 Tail De‐ice Pressure CAS Interface Check ........................................................................................... 302
6.1.2 Engine and Wing Anti‐Ice System CAS Interface Check ..................................................................... 302
6.1.3 Bleed Air Over Heat CAS Interface Check ........................................................................................... 303
6.1.4 Air Cycle Machine CAS Interface Check .............................................................................................. 303
6.1.5 Emergency Pressure CAS Interface Check .......................................................................................... 303
6.1.6 Ram Air Temperature A429 Interface ................................................................................................ 303
6.1.7 Cabin Pressurization........................................................................................................................... 304
6.1.8 Wing Over Heat CAS Interface Check ................................................................................................. 304
6.2 ELECTRICAL POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM INTERFACE CHECKS ............................................................................... 305
6.2.1 AC Generator Bearing Interface Check .............................................................................................. 305
6.2.2 Aft J‐Box Interface Check ................................................................................................................... 305
6.2.3 Aft J‐Box Limiter Interface Check ....................................................................................................... 305
6.2.4 G5000 Equipment Electrical Power Checks ........................................................................................ 306
6.2.5 G5000 Electrical & Data Path Check .................................................................................................. 319
6.3 FIRE DETECTION AND EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM INTERFACE CHECKS ........................................................................... 329
6.3.1 Fire Extinguishing System ‐ F/W Shutoff Interface Check .................................................................. 329
6.3.2 Fire Detection System Interface Check ............................................................................................... 329
6.3.3 Fire Bottle Interface Check ................................................................................................................. 329
6.3.4 Fire Warning Interface Check ............................................................................................................. 330
6.3.5 Smoke Detector Interface Check ‐ Optional ....................................................................................... 330
6.3.6 Baggage Smoke Detector Interface Check ‐ Optional ........................................................................ 330
6.3.7 Battery Temperature Interface Check ................................................................................................ 330
6.4 STALL WARNING FUNCTIONAL TEST ................................................................................................................... 331
6.5 RUDDER BIAS CHECKS ...................................................................................................................................... 332
6.5.1 Rudder Bias Operational Interface Check .......................................................................................... 332
6.5.2 Rudder Bias Heater Fail Interface Check ............................................................................................ 332
6.6 FUEL INTERFACE FUNCTIONAL TESTS ................................................................................................................... 333
6.6.1 Fuel Quantity Signal Conditioner Calibration ..................................................................................... 333
6.6.2 Low Fuel Level Annunciation Functional Test .................................................................................... 333
6.6.3 Fuel Quantity Functional Test ............................................................................................................ 333
6.6.4 Fuel Filter Impending Bypass Interface Check .................................................................................... 334
6.6.5 Fuel Cross Feed Interface Check ......................................................................................................... 335
6.6.6 Fuel Temperature 981 Module (005‐01202‐1C‐1) Functional Check ................................................. 335
6.6.7 Fuel Low Level 981 Module (005‐01202‐1C‐2) Functional Check ....................................................... 336
6.6.8 Fuel Quantity System BIT Fault Out 981 Jumper Plug Functional Check (005‐W0035‐09‐7 or 005‐
W0035‐02‐7) ...................................................................................................................................................... 337
6.6.9 APU Fuel Valve Interface Check – Optional ........................................................................................ 337
6.7 HYDRAULIC‐DEPENDENT SYSTEMS ..................................................................................................................... 338
6.7.1 Speed Brake Operational Test ............................................................................................................ 338
6.7.2 Flap Operational Test ......................................................................................................................... 338
6.7.3 Landing Gear Down/Locked Operational Test ................................................................................... 339
6.7.4 Hydraulic Low Fluid Level Test ........................................................................................................... 339

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.7.5 Hydraulic Low Flow Test .................................................................................................................... 339
6.7.6 Two‐Position Horizontal Stabilizer Interface Check ........................................................................... 340
6.7.7 Thrust Reverser Interface Check ........................................................................................................ 340
6.8 LANDING GEAR FUNCTIONAL TESTS .................................................................................................................... 340
6.8.1 Gear Warning Horn ............................................................................................................................ 340
6.8.2 Landing Gear Warning Logic Test ...................................................................................................... 341
6.8.3 Takeoff Warning Alert ....................................................................................................................... 341
6.8.4 Overspeed Protection Test ................................................................................................................. 342
6.9 LIGHTING CHECKS ........................................................................................................................................... 343
6.10 CREW ALERTING SYSTEM TESTS ......................................................................................................................... 344
6.10.1 Master Caution / Master Warning .................................................................................................... 344
6.11 NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TESTS ............................................................................................................ 345
6.11.1 ELT ...................................................................................................................................................... 345
6.11.2 TCAS ................................................................................................................................................... 345
6.11.3 DME 1 Functional Check (Optional) ................................................................................................... 349
6.11.4 DME 2 Functional Check (Optional) ................................................................................................... 349
6.11.5 ADF 1 Functional Check (Optional) .................................................................................................... 349
6.11.6 ADF 2 Functional Check (Optional) .................................................................................................... 350
6.11.7 AHRS Checkout ................................................................................................................................... 350
6.11.8 Radar Altimeter Functional Check ..................................................................................................... 351
6.12 AIRCRAFT DOORS INTERFACE CHECKS ................................................................................................................. 354
6.12.1 Nose Access Doors Interface Check .................................................................................................... 354
6.12.2 Tail Access Doors Interface Check ...................................................................................................... 354
6.12.3 Lavatory Doors Interface Check ......................................................................................................... 355
6.12.4 Emergency Exit Door Interface Check ................................................................................................ 355
6.12.5 Cabin Door and Door Seal Interface Check ........................................................................................ 356
6.13 ENGINE INDICATING CHECKS ............................................................................................................................. 357
6.13.1 Engine Vibration Interface Check ....................................................................................................... 357
6.13.2 EEC Manual Mode Interface Check .................................................................................................... 357
6.13.3 EEC A429 Input Verification ............................................................................................................... 358
6.13.4 Oil Filter By‐Pass Interface Check ....................................................................................................... 358
6.13.5 Engine Ground Idle Interface Check ................................................................................................... 359
6.13.6 Engine Ignition and Start Check ......................................................................................................... 359
6.13.7 Engine Sync Check .............................................................................................................................. 360
6.13.8 Fuel Flow Indication Functional Check ............................................................................................... 361
6.13.9 Fuel Temperature Functional Check ................................................................................................... 362
6.13.10 Oil Pressure Indication Functional Check ....................................................................................... 363
6.13.11 Oil Temperature Indication Functional Check ................................................................................ 364
6.13.12 ITT Indication Functional Check ..................................................................................................... 365
6.13.13 N1 Indication Functional Check ...................................................................................................... 366
6.13.14 N2 Indication Functional Check ...................................................................................................... 366
6.14 AUTOPILOT FUNCTIONAL TESTS ......................................................................................................................... 369
6.14.1 Pre‐Flight Test .................................................................................................................................... 369
6.14.2 AFCS Switch Checks ............................................................................................................................ 370
6.14.3 Autopilot/Underspeed Protection & Stall Warning System Interface Verification ............................ 375
6.14.4 Manual Electric Pitch Trim Speed Check ............................................................................................ 375

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.14.5 Autopilot Operational Checks ............................................................................................................ 376
6.14.6 Autopilot Mistrim Operational Checks ............................................................................................... 377
6.15 HF‐SELCAL FUNCTION CHECK (OPTIONAL) ........................................................................................................ 380
6.16 JAA SSFDR INTERFACE FUNCTION CHECK (IF EQUIPPED) ....................................................................................... 381


190-02313-01 Revision 2
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE PAGE
FIGURE 2‐1, G5000 IN TEXTRON MODEL 560XL ARCHITECTURE (SUMMARY) ............................................................................ 25
FIGURE 2‐2, TEXTRON MODEL 560XL G5000 THIRD PARTY/OEM INTERFACE ........................................................................... 26
FIGURE 2‐3, RED ‘ELE’ MIS‐TRIM ANNUNCIATION ................................................................................................................. 29
FIGURE 2‐4, YELLOW ‘ELE’ MIS‐TRIM ANNUNCIATION ........................................................................................................... 29
FIGURE 2‐5, GIA 64E INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT ................................................................................................................ 31
FIGURE 2‐6, GSA 9000 SERVO AND GSM 9100 SERVO GEARBOX ........................................................................................... 31
FIGURE 2‐7, GMC 7200 AUTOPILOT MODE CONTROLLER ...................................................................................................... 32
FIGURE 2‐8, HEADING SELECT INDICATIONS .......................................................................................................................... 32
FIGURE 2‐9, BANK ANGLE SCALE ......................................................................................................................................... 33
FIGURE 2‐10, FD MODE INDICATIONS ................................................................................................................................. 34
FIGURE 2‐11, AFCS MODE STATUS WINDOW ....................................................................................................................... 35
FIGURE 2‐12, TEXTRON MODEL 560XL VHF COMMUNICATIONS ARCHITECTURE ........................................................................ 38
FIGURE 2‐13, GTC 575 TOUCHSCREEN CONTROLLER ............................................................................................................. 41
FIGURE 2‐14, GCU 275 DISPLAY CONTROLLER ..................................................................................................................... 41
FIGURE 2‐15, GSR 56 SATELLITE RADIO............................................................................................................................... 42
FIGURE 2‐16, GDL 59 DATALINK TRANSCEIVER ..................................................................................................................... 42
FIGURE 2‐17, GDR 66 VHF VOICE/DATALINK TRANSCEIVER ................................................................................................... 42
FIGURE 2‐18, GEA 7100 ENGINE AND AIRFRAME UNIT .......................................................................................................... 63
FIGURE 2‐19, GSD 41 DATA CONCENTRATOR ....................................................................................................................... 63
FIGURE 2‐20, DISPLAY FORMAT AND DIMMING PANEL (DFD PANEL) ........................................................................................ 70
FIGURE 2‐21, GTX 3000 TRANSPONDER ............................................................................................................................. 71
FIGURE 2‐22, GDC 7400 AIR DATA COMPUTER ................................................................................................................... 72
FIGURE 2‐23, GDL 69A SXM RADIO/WXR RECEIVER ........................................................................................................... 72
FIGURE 2‐24, GWX PROCESSOR WEATHER RADAR ................................................................................................................ 72
FIGURE 2‐25, FLIGHT STREAM (FS 510) MULTI‐MEDIA CARD.................................................................................................. 73
FIGURE 2‐26, LITEF LCR‐93 / LCR‐100 AHRS .................................................................................................................... 73
FIGURE 2‐27, ANTENNA LOCATIONS .................................................................................................................................... 76
FIGURE 3‐1, GTC AVIONICS STATUS PAGE ............................................................................................................................ 79
FIGURE 3‐2, CONFIGURATION MODE (SYSTEM STATUS PAGE) .................................................................................................. 80
FIGURE 3‐3, SYSTEM STATUS INDICATORS ............................................................................................................................. 81
FIGURE 3‐4, SOFTWARE/CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................. 88
FIGURE 3‐5, CONFIGURATION MODE (SYSTEM UPLOAD PAGE) ................................................................................................. 90
FIGURE 3‐6, SYSTEM UPLOAD PAGE OPTIONS & FEATURES SELECTION (REF.) ............................................................................. 92
FIGURE 3‐7, AIRCRAFT REGISTRATION (AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION PAGE) ................................................................................ 100
FIGURE 3‐8, CONFIGURATION MODE (CONFIGURATION MANAGER PAGE) ................................................................................ 101
FIGURE 5‐1, GDU1450W (PFD1) CONFIGURATION MODULE INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 143
FIGURE 5‐2, MFD POWER UP PAGE – CITATION EXCEL BASELINE (REFERENCE ONLY) ................................................................ 153
FIGURE 5‐3, MFD POWER UP PAGE – CITATION XLS BASELINE (REFERENCE ONLY) .................................................................. 154
FIGURE 5‐4, MFD POWER UP PAGE – CITATION EXCEL WITH UNDERSPEED PROTECTION (REFERENCE ONLY) ................................. 154
FIGURE 5‐5, MFD POWER UP PAGE – CITATION XLS WITH UNDERSPEED PROTECTION (REFERENCE ONLY) .................................... 155
FIGURE 5‐6, PFD INVALID DATA REFERENCE ....................................................................................................................... 156
FIGURE 5‐7, PFD NORMAL OPERATION (SVS ENABLED) ....................................................................................................... 156
FIGURE 5‐8, GDU REVERSIONARY MODE ........................................................................................................................... 157

190-02313-01 Revision 2
FIGURE 5‐9, GPS STATUS PAGE ........................................................................................................................................ 164
FIGURE 5‐10, GIA I/O CONFIGURATION PAGE ................................................................................................................... 174
FIGURE 5‐11, GSA 9000 SERVO /GSM 9100 GEARBOX SEPARATION .................................................................................... 184
FIGURE 5‐12, GSM 9100 CABLE GUARDS (REF) ................................................................................................................. 185
FIGURE 5‐13, GSM 9100 SERVO CABLE TURNBUCKLE (REF) ................................................................................................. 185
FIGURE 5‐14, GSM 9100 SERVO GEARBOX BRACKET (REF) .................................................................................................. 186
FIGURE 5‐15, GSM 9100 O‐RING AND BASEPLATE SCREWS ................................................................................................. 187
FIGURE 5‐16, GSM 9100 SERVO MOUNT INSPECTION ITEMS ................................................................................................ 188
FIGURE 5‐17, GFC STATUS PAGE ...................................................................................................................................... 190
FIGURE 5‐18, MARKER BEACON SYMBOLOGY ...................................................................................................................... 211
FIGURE 5‐19, GEA7100 CONFIGURATION MODULE WITH THERMOCOUPLE INSTALLATION .......................................................... 222
FIGURE 5‐20, GSD STATUS PAGE ..................................................................................................................................... 235
FIGURE 5‐21, AIRSHOW MAINTENANCE MENU ................................................................................................................... 240
FIGURE 5‐22, AIRCRAFT REGISTRATION CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................................... 264
FIGURE 5‐23, GIA1 AND GIA2 CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT ................................................................................................ 272
FIGURE 5‐24, VIEW OF J601 (COM) CONNECTOR FROM BACK OF GIA ................................................................................... 272
FIGURE 5‐25, VIEW OF J602 (VOR/ILS) CONNECTOR FROM BACK OF GIA .............................................................................. 273
FIGURE 5‐26, VIEW OF J603 (MAIN SERIAL) CONNECTOR FROM BACK OF GIA ......................................................................... 273
FIGURE 5‐27, VIEW OF J604 (MAIN DISCRETE) CONNECTOR FROM BACK OF GIA ..................................................................... 273
FIGURE 5‐28, VIEW OF J605 (I/O 1) CONNECTOR FROM BACK OF GIA ................................................................................... 273
FIGURE 5‐29, VIEW OF J606 (I/O 2) CONNECTOR FROM BACK OF GIA ................................................................................... 274
FIGURE 5‐30, GEA1 AND GEA2 CONNECTOR ARRANGMENT ................................................................................................ 275
FIGURE 5‐31, VIEW OF P71001 CONNECTOR FROM FRONT OF GEA ...................................................................................... 275
FIGURE 5‐34, GMA1 AND GMA2 CONNECTOR ARRANGMENT ............................................................................................. 277
FIGURE 5‐35, VIEW OF J3471 CONNECTOR FROM BACK OF GMA .......................................................................................... 277
FIGURE 5‐36, VIEW OF J3472 CONNECTOR FROM BACK OF GMA .......................................................................................... 278
FIGURE 5‐37, GMA1 AND GMA2 CONNECTOR ARRANGMENT ............................................................................................. 279
FIGURE 5‐38, VIEW OF J3301 CONNECTOR LOOKING AT THE GTX ......................................................................................... 279
FIGURE 5‐39, VIEW OF J3302 CONNECTOR LOOKING AT THE GTX .......................................................................................... 280
FIGURE 5‐40, VIEW OF J14501 CONNECTOR FROM THE BACK OF THE GDU .............................................................................. 280
FIGURE 5‐41, VIEW OF J7400 CONNECTOR ON THE GDC ..................................................................................................... 281
FIGURE 5‐42, GDL 69A AFT VIEW.................................................................................................................................... 282
FIGURE 5‐43, VIEW OF P1111 CONNECTOR ...................................................................................................................... 282
FIGURE 5‐44, VIEW OF J1 CONNECTOR ON THE GCU ........................................................................................................... 283
FIGURE 5‐45, VIEW OF J72501 CONNECTOR ON THE GMC .................................................................................................. 283
FIGURE 5‐46, VIEW OF J5751 CONNECTOR ON THE GTC ..................................................................................................... 284
FIGURE 5‐47, GSD1 AND GSD2 CONNECTOR ARRANGMENT ................................................................................................ 285
FIGURE 5‐48, VIEW OF J411 CONNECTOR ON THE GSD ....................................................................................................... 285
FIGURE 5‐49, VIEW OF J412 CONNECTOR ON THE GSD ....................................................................................................... 285
FIGURE 5‐50, VIEW OF J751 CONNECTOR ON THE GWX ...................................................................................................... 286
FIGURE 5‐51, VIEW OF J90001 CONNECTOR ON THE GSA ................................................................................................... 287
FIGURE 5‐52, GDL 59 CONNECTOR ARRANGMENT ............................................................................................................. 288
FIGURE 5‐53, VIEW OF J591 CONNECTOR FROM BACK OF GDL 59 ......................................................................................... 288
FIGURE 5‐54, GDR 66 CONNECTOR ARRANGMENT ............................................................................................................. 289

190-02313-01 Revision 2
FIGURE 5‐55, VIEW OF J661 CONNECTOR FROM BACK OF GDR ............................................................................................. 289
FIGURE 5‐56, VIEW OF J662 CONNECTOR FROM BACK OF GDR ............................................................................................. 289
FIGURE 5‐57, GSR CONNECTOR ARRANGMENT ................................................................................................................... 290
FIGURE 5‐58, VIEW OF J561 CONNECTOR ON THE GSR ....................................................................................................... 290
FIGURE 5‐59, BONDING SURFACE PREPARATION ................................................................................................................. 291
FIGURE 5‐60, STRUCTURAL DIRECT METAL‐TO‐METAL SURFACE BONDING APPLICATIONS ........................................................... 296
FIGURE 5‐61, EQUIPMENT MOUNT BONDING APPLICATIONS ................................................................................................. 297
FIGURE 5‐62, ELECTRICAL FEED‐THRU BONDING. ................................................................................................................. 298
FIGURE 6‐1, PRE‐FLIGHT TEST .......................................................................................................................................... 369


190-02313-01 Revision 2
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE PAGE
TABLE 1‐1 – REQUIRED DOCUMENTS – EXCEL AND XLS ........................................................................................................... 19
TABLE 1‐2 – REQUIRED DOCUMENTS – EXCEL ....................................................................................................................... 20
TABLE 1‐3 – REQUIRED DOCUMENTS – XLS .......................................................................................................................... 21
TABLE 1‐4 – OTHER REFERENCE DOCUMENTS ....................................................................................................................... 21
TABLE 2‐1 – LEGACY CREW WARNING PANEL ANNUNCIATIONS ................................................................................................ 48
TABLE 3‐1, DATA INDICATOR SYMBOLS ................................................................................................................................ 81
TABLE 3‐2, GARMIN OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT AND FEATURES ..................................................................................................... 93
TABLE 3‐3, ENABLEMENT CARD PART NUMBERS` .................................................................................................................. 98
TABLE 3‐4, SOFTWARE/CONFIGURATION TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................. 102
TABLE 3‐5 – G5000 DATABASES ...................................................................................................................................... 104
TABLE 4‐1, G5000 EQUIPMENT INSPECTIONS ..................................................................................................................... 112
TABLE 4‐2, VISUAL INSPECTION CRITERIA ............................................................................................................................ 120
TABLE 4‐3, NOSE RADOME COMPARTMENT VISUAL INSPECTION PROCEDURE ............................................................................ 121
TABLE 4‐4, NOSE AVIONICS COMPARTMENT VISUAL INSPECTION PROCEDURE ........................................................................... 122
TABLE 4‐5, INSTRUMENT PANEL VISUAL INSPECTION PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 125
TABLE 4‐6, PILOT SIDE PANEL VISUAL INSPECTION PROCEDURE ............................................................................................... 127
TABLE 4‐7, COPILOT SIDE PANEL VISUAL INSPECTION PROCEDURE ........................................................................................... 128
TABLE 4‐8, COCKPIT & CABIN UNDER‐FLOOR VISUAL INSPECTION PROCEDURE .......................................................................... 129
TABLE 4‐9, PEDESTAL VISUAL INSPECTION PROCEDURE ......................................................................................................... 130
TABLE 4‐10, AFT PRESSURE BULKHEAD VISUAL INSPECTION PROCEDURE .................................................................................. 131
TABLE 4‐11, TAIL‐CONE UNDER‐FLOOR VISUAL INSPECTION PROCEDURE ................................................................................. 132
TABLE 4‐12, ROLL SERVO VISUAL INSPECTION PROCEDURE .................................................................................................... 133
TABLE 4‐13, TAIL COMPARTMENT VISUAL INSPECTION PROCEDURE ......................................................................................... 136
TABLE 4‐14, LANDING GEAR WHEEL WELL VISUAL INSPECTION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 139
TABLE 4‐15, ANTENNA AND EXTERIOR FUSELAGE SKIN INSPECTION PROCEDURE ........................................................................ 140
TABLE 4‐16, LIGHTNING STRIKE INSPECTION PROCEDURE ...................................................................................................... 141
TABLE 5‐1, CONFIGURATION MODULE KIT, PART NUMBER 011‐00979‐20 ............................................................................ 143
TABLE 5‐2, GIA 64 INSTALLATION & RETURN‐TO‐SERVICE CRITERIA ....................................................................................... 160
TABLE 5‐3, GIA 64E BASELINE SOFTWARE AND CONFIGURATION FILES ................................................................................... 161
TABLE 5‐4, GIA 1 DISCRETE INPUTS .................................................................................................................................. 175
TABLE 5‐5, GIA 1 DISCRETE OUTPUTS ............................................................................................................................... 178
TABLE 5‐6, GIA 2 DISCRETE INPUTS .................................................................................................................................. 180
TABLE 5‐7, GIA 2 DISCRETE OUTPUTS ............................................................................................................................... 183
TABLE 5‐8, GSA 9000 BASELINE SOFTWARE AND CONFIGURATION FILES ................................................................................ 189
TABLE 5‐9, SERVO MONITOR PROCESSOR FAULTS (DURING PFT) ............................................................................................ 191
TABLE 5‐10, SERVO MONITOR PROCESSOR FAULTS (DURING NORMAL OPERATION) ................................................................... 192
TABLE 5‐11, SERVO CONTROL PROCESSOR FAULTS (DURING PFT) ........................................................................................... 192
TABLE 5‐12, SERVO CONTROL PROCESSOR FAULTS (DURING NORMAL OPERATION) .................................................................... 194
TABLE 5‐13, AFCS ANNUNCIATION TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................................................ 195
TABLE 5‐14, AFCS CAS MESSAGES .................................................................................................................................. 196
TABLE 5‐15, AFCS GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................................ 198
TABLE 5‐16, AFCS CONFIGURATION GTC SYSTEM MESSAGES ............................................................................................... 199
TABLE 5‐17, GMC 7200 BASELINE SOFTWARE AND CONFIGURATION FILES ............................................................................. 201

190-02313-01 Revision 2
TABLE 5‐18, GMA 36B BASELINE SOFTWARE AND CONFIGURATION FILES .............................................................................. 205
TABLE 5‐19, GTC 575 BASELINE SOFTWARE AND CONFIGURATION FILES ................................................................................ 214
TABLE 5‐20 GTC ALERTS ................................................................................................................................................ 215
TABLE 5‐21, GCU 275 BASELINE SOFTWARE AND CONFIGURATION FILES ................................................................................ 218
TABLE 5‐22 GCU ALERTS ............................................................................................................................................... 219
TABLE 5‐23, GEA 7100 SOFTWARE / CONFIGURATION / OPTIONS FILES ................................................................................. 223
TABLE 5‐24, GEA 1 DISCRETE INPUTS ............................................................................................................................... 225
TABLE 5‐25, GEA 2 DISCRETE INPUTS ............................................................................................................................... 228
TABLE 5‐26, GSD 41 SOFTWARE / CONFIGURATION / OPTIONS FILES ..................................................................................... 234
TABLE 5‐27, GSD 1 DISCRETE INPUTS ............................................................................................................................... 236
TABLE 5‐28, GSD 2 DISCRETE INPUTS ............................................................................................................................... 237
TABLE 5‐29, GDL 69A BASELINE SOFTWARE AND CONFIGURATION FILES ................................................................................ 245
TABLE 5‐30, GDL 69A BASELINE SOFTWARE AND CONFIGURATION FILES ................................................................................ 257
TABLE 5‐31, ALTITUDE/AIRSPEED VALIDATION .................................................................................................................... 258
TABLE 5‐32, CALIBRATED ALTITUDE INDICATIONS (SSEC CORRECTED) ..................................................................................... 259
TABLE 5‐33, VERTICAL SPEED ........................................................................................................................................... 260
TABLE 5‐34, GWX PROCESSOR BASELINE SOFTWARE AND CONFIGURATION FILES ................................................................. 269
TABLE 6‐1, POWER AND GROUND SPECIFICATIONS (NORMAL POWER) ..................................................................................... 307
TABLE 6‐2, EMER BUS POWER CHECK (AVIONICS POWER ON) ............................................................................................. 311
TABLE 6‐3, STBY BATT POWER CHECK ............................................................................................................................. 313
TABLE 6‐4, GROUND DISPATCH POWER CHECK .................................................................................................................... 314
TABLE 6‐5, G5000 HSDB DATA PATHS ............................................................................................................................. 323
TABLE 6‐6, G5000 GROUND POINTS ................................................................................................................................. 326
TABLE 6‐7, FUEL WEIGHT CONVERSION .............................................................................................................................. 334
TABLE 6–8 – ‘SYNC’ ICON LOGIC VERIFICATION (XLS) ......................................................................................................... 361
TABLE 6‐9, FUEL FLOW INDICATION TEST EQUIPMENT .......................................................................................................... 361
TABLE 6‐10, LH/RH FUEL FLOW DIGITAL READOUT TEST POINTS (XLS) .................................................................................. 362
TABLE 6‐11, FUEL TEMPERATURE TEST EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................. 362
TABLE 6‐12, FUEL TEMPERATURE TEST POINTS .................................................................................................................... 363
TABLE 6‐13, OIL PRESSURE TEST POINTS ............................................................................................................................ 363
TABLE 6‐14, OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATION TEST EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................... 364
TABLE 6‐15, OIL TEMPERATURE TEST POINTS ...................................................................................................................... 364
TABLE 6‐16, ITT INDICATION TEST EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................... 365
TABLE 6‐17, ITT TEST POINTS .......................................................................................................................................... 365
TABLE 6‐18, N1 INDICATION TEST EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................... 366
TABLE 6‐19, N1 TEST POINTS .......................................................................................................................................... 366
TABLE 6‐20, N2 INDICATION TEST EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................... 366
TABLE 6‐21, N2 TEST POINTS .......................................................................................................................................... 367
TABLE 6‐22, MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM TIMES ...................................................................................................................... 376

190-02313-01 Revision 2
1. Introduction
1.1 Content, Scope, Purpose
This document provides maintenance practices/procedures and Instructions for Continued Airworthiness
(ICA) to satisfy the requirements defined in FAA 14 CFR Part 25.1529 for the installation of the Garmin
G5000 system equipment in the Textron Model 560XL (Excel and XLS) aircraft under STC ST01918WI.
1.2 Applicability
This document is applicable for all Textron Aviation Inc. Model 560XL (Excel and XLS) aircraft equipped
with the Garmin G5000 system.
The information provided in this document shall be included in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual and Aircraft
Scheduled Maintenance Program.
Aircraft modified by this STC qualify for operation in Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum (RVSM)
airspace as a group aircraft in accordance with Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) Part
91, Appendix G, “Operations in Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum (RVSM) Airspace”, and Federal
Aviation Administration (FAA) document AC 91-85B, “Authorization of Aircraft and Operators for Flight in
Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum (RVSM) Airspace”, dated 1/29/19. This qualification is based on
analysis of the configuration and performance of the air data, automatic altitude control, altitude alerting,
and altitude reporting systems. These systems must be maintained in accordance with the inspections and
tests specified in this document and the Aircraft Maintenance Manual to guarantee continued compliance
to RVSM specifications.
1.3 Definitions/Abbreviations
ACARS Aircraft Communications and Reporting System
ADF: Automatic Direction Finder
ADTS: Air Data Test Set
AFCS: Automatic Flight Control System
AFMS: Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
AHRS: Attitude Heading Reference System
CDU: Control Display Unit
CES: Cabin Entertainment System
CFR: Code of Federal Regulations
CPDLC Controller Pilot Data Link Communications
DFDP Display Format and Dimming Panel
DME: Distance Measuring Equipment
EAU: Engine/Airframe Unit
EEC Electronic Engine Controller
FANS Future Air Navigation System
GPS: Global Positioning System
GPWS: Ground Proximity Warning System
HSDB: High-Speed Data Bus (Ethernet)
IAU: Integrated Avionics Unit
ICS: Inter-Communications System
IPA Isopropyl alcohol
ISA International Standard Atmosphere
IFD Integrated Flight Deck
ITT: Interstage Turbine Temperature
LRU: Line Replaceable Unit

190-02313-01 Revision 2
LWD: Left Wing Down
MFD: Multi-Function Display
MFW: Multi-Function Window
MPK Methyl N-Propyl Ketone
OAT: Outside Air Temperature
PFD: Primary Flight Display
PFT Pre-Flight Test
RAT: Ram Air Temperature
RVSM: Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum
RWD: Right Wing Down
SAT: Static Air Temperature
STBY: Standby
STC: Supplemental Type Certificate
SWC Stall Warning Computer
TAWS: Terrain Awareness & Warning System
VDL VHF Datalink
VDR VHF Digital Radio
VHF: Very High Frequency
WAAS: Wide Area Augmentation System

190-02313-01 Revision 2
1.4 Units of Measure
Unless otherwise stated, all units of measure are English units.
1.5 Reference Publications

All documents listed in Table 1-1, Table 1-2, and Table 1-3 are available for download through the Dealer
Resource Center section of the Garmin web site. Refer to Section 1.6 for details.
The documents listed in Table 1-1, Table 1-2, and Table 1-3 are required to perform the maintenance
addressed in this document. It is the responsibility of the owner/operator to ensure that the latest versions
of these documents are used during operation, servicing or maintenance of the airplane. Installation
manuals are also available through the Dealer Resource Center for each individual Garmin LRU if desired.
Table 1-1 – Required Documents – Excel and XLS
Document Title Document Number
Master Drawing List, G5000, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-00
General Arrangement, G5000, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-02
Antenna Install, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-03
Wire Harness Routing/Inst, Nose, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-04
Wire Harness Routing/Inst, Cabin, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-05
Wire Harness Routing/Inst, Tail, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-06
Nose Bay Avionics Install, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-07
Main Instrument Panel Install, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-08
Circuit Breaker Panels Modification, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-09
Lighting Panel Modification, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-0N
Aft J-Box Mod, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-0P
Roll Servo Installation, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-11
Pitch Servo Installation, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-12
Yaw Servo Installation, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-13
Pitch Trim Installation, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-14
Radar Install, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-15
Pedestal Install, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-16
Pitot-Static Installation, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-17
Fuel Suppression Installation, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-19
Assy Drawing, 981-Module, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-1C
PA Amp Install, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-1G
Control Wheel Modification, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-43
DFD Panel Assembly 005-01202-44

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Electrical Load Analysis, G5000 Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-77
GDL 69 Series SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Activation instructions 190-00355-04
GDL 69 Series TSO Installation Manual 190-00355-07
GSR 56 Satellite Radio Installation Manual 190-00836-00
Garmin Pilot for iOS User’s Guide 190-01501-00
Garmin Pilot for Android User’s Guide 190-01532-00
User's Guide, Garmin Pilot for Android (Phone) 190-01532-01
Post Installation Checkout Procedure, G5000 Integrated Flight Deck, Textron Aviation
190-02313-00
INC. Model 560XL
FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual Supplement, G5000 in Textron Model 560XL 190-02313-03
Flight Data Recorder Output Specification, G5000 Integrated Flight Deck, Textron Model 190-02313-04
560XL
G5000 Integrated Avionics System Pilot’s Guide, Citation Excel/XLS (Textron Model 190-02537-00
560XL)
G5000 Integrated Avionics System Cockpit Reference Guide Citation Excel/XLS (Textron 190-02538-00
Model 560XL)
Textron Aviation Model 560XL Maintenance Manual C56MM
Textron Aviation Model 560XL Structural Repair Manual 50/56SR
Table 1-2 – Required Documents – Excel
Existing Equipment Removals, Textron Model 560XL (Excel) 005-01202-1D
Wire Harness Routing/Inst, Nose, Textron Model 560XL (Excel) 005-01202-0Z
Wire Harness Routing/Inst, Cabin, Textron Model 560XL (Excel) 005-01202-1A
Wire Harness Routing/Inst, Tail, Textron Model 560XL (Excel) 005-01202-1B
Circuit Breaker Panels Modification, Textron Model 560XL (Excel) 005-01202-1J
Wiring Diagram, Autoflight/Flt Ctrl, Textron Model 560XL (Excel) 005-W0035-07
Wiring Diagram, Communication, Textron Model 560XL (Excel) 005-W0035-08
Wiring Diagram, Fuel, Textron Model 560XL (Excel) 005-W0035-09
Wiring Diagram, Engine, Textron Model 560XL (Excel) 005-W0035-10
Wiring Diagram, Indicating, Textron Model 560XL (Excel) 005-W0035-11
Electrical Parts List and Electrical Assembly Drawing, Textron Model 560XL (Excel) 005-W0035-12
Wiring Diagram, Navigation, Textron Model 560XL (Excel) 005-W0035-13

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Table 1-3 – Required Documents – XLS
S/N 560-5641 Antenna Install, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-10
Existing Equipment Removals, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-42
Wiring Diagram, Autoflight/Flt Ctrl, Textron Model 560XL 005-W0035-00
Wiring Diagram, Communication, Textron Model 560XL 005-W0035-01
Wiring Diagram, Fuel, Textron Model 560XL 005-W0035-02
Wiring Diagram, Navigation, Textron Model 560XL 005-W0035-03
Wiring Diagram, Engine, Textron Model 560XL 005-W0035-04
Wiring Diagram, Indicating, Textron Model 560XL 005-W0035-05
Electrical Parts List and Electrical Assembly Drawing, Textron Model 560XL 005-W0035-06
Table 1-4 – Other Reference Documents
Document Number Title

AC 43.13-1B FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices
– Aircraft Inspection and Repair
AC 43.13-2B FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices

– Aircraft Alterations
SAE ARP1870 Aerospace Systems Electrical Bonding and Grounding for Electromagnetic
Compatibility and Safety
SAE AS4461 Assembly and Soldering Criteria for High Quality/High Reliability Soldered Wire and
Cable Termination in Aerospace Vehicles
SAE AS50881 Wiring, Aerospace Vehicle
ASTM F 2490-05 Standard Guide for Aircraft Electrical Load and Power Source Capacity Analysis

190-02313-01 Revision 2
1.6 Revision and Distribution
This document is required for maintaining the continued airworthiness of the Textron Aviation Inc. Model
560XL (Excel and XLS) aircraft equipped with the Garmin G5000 system. When this document is revised,
every page will be updated to indicate the current revision level. Garmin Dealers may obtain the latest
revision of this document on the Garmin Dealer Resource Center website.
Owner/operators may obtain the latest revision of this document from the following resources:
 Visit https://fly.garmin.com/support
 Contact a Garmin dealer
 Contact Garmin Product Support at 913-397-8200, toll free 866-739-5687, or use around the world
contact information on https://fly.garmin.com/
A Garmin Service Bulletin describing the revision to this document will be sent to Garmin dealers if the
revision is determined to be significant.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
2. Description
This STC upgrades the Textron Aviation Inc. Model 560XL (Excel and XLS) transport category aircraft with
the Garmin G5000 System equipment for the following serial number ranges:
 Excel – S/Ns 560-5001 through 560-5500
 XLS – S/Ns 560-5501 through 560-6000
The G5000 system is a Garmin Integrated Flight Deck (GIFD) with the primary functions distributed
throughout various Line Replaceable Units (LRUs) that provide flight instrumentation, navigation,
communication, surveillance, weather avoidance, engine instrumentation, crew alerting, automatic flight
control, and supplemental flight information to the crew for situational awareness through large-format
display units. The main categories of G5000 GIFD include:
 Flight & Engine Displays
 Crew Controllers
 Primary Flight Sensors
 Audio, communication, navigation, transponder
 Flight Management System (FMS)
 Hazard avoidance
 Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)
 Additional Features
 Database Management
 Airframe Systems
In the Model 560XL (Excel and XLS) cockpit, the previously installed display units, Autopilot Controller, AP
switches. AP indicators, TAWS/GPWS annunciators and HDG, ATT & ADC reversionary switches have all
been removed from the instrument panel and the functions are now integrated into the G5000 GIFD with
the installation of three Garmin 14-inch wide-format GDU 1450W Display Units and two GCU 275 Display
Unit Controllers, installed above each pilot and copilot Display Unit.. The Electronic Standby Instrument
System (ESIS) is retained but relocated on the instrument panel to accommodate the larger Garmin GDU
1450W Display Units. The Crew Warning Panel has been removed from the fire-tray, which is located above
the instrument panel, and all annunciations previously displayed on the crew warning panel are now
integrated into the G5000 EICAS. The thrust reverser and engine fire warning indications remain installed
on the fire-tray. The existing instrument panel cooling system, cabin pressurization gauge and controller,
cabin/cockpit temperature controller and FWD EVAP module are also retained in addition to other
miscellaneous indicators that include the electrical system and battery temperature indications. The
previously installed FMS CDUs and other equipment have been removed from the pedestal and replaced
with two Garmin GTC 575 Touch-screen Controllers and a Display Format & Dimming (DFD) Panel. The
existing rotary test switch, that is used to test various aircraft systems, remains mounted in the switch
pedestal panel assembly and has not been modified.
The components that make up the Garmin G5000 System that are installed for this STC include the
following:
Communication, Navigation, & Surveillance:
 GIA 64E Integrated Avionics Units (QTY 2)
 GMA 36B Audio Panels (QTY 2)
 GTX 3000 Mode S Transponders (QTY 2)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
 GSD 41 Data Concentrators (QTY 2)
 GDU 1450W Display Units (QTY 3)
 GTC 575 Touch-screen Controllers (QTY 2)
 GCU 275 Display Unit Controllers (QTY 2)
 GWX Processor Weather Radar (QTY 1)
 GDL 69A Data Link (QTY 1)
 GSR 56 Satellite Transceiver (optional) (QTY 1)
 GDL 59 Wi-Fi / POTS Interface (optional) (QTY 1)
 GDR 66 Digital Datalink Radio (optional) (QTY 1)
 GDC 7400 Air Data Computers (QTY 2)
 GEA 7100 Engine/Airframe Units (QTY 2)
The following third-party systems will interface with the Garmin G5000 system:
 LITEF LCR-93 or LCR-100 Attitude & Heading Reference Systems (QTY 2)
 Allied-Signal / Honeywell Solid State Flight Data Recorder (SSFDR)
 L3 / Fairchild A200S Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) (provisional) (Applicable to Excels through S/N
-5204.)
 L3 FA2100 Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) (Applicable to Excels S/N -5205 and on, and all XLS.)
 SafeFlight Stall Warning Computer
 Single or dual ADF 4000 (Rockwell Collins)
 Single or dual DME 4000 (Rockwell Collins)
 Traffic
o Honeywell TPU-67A or TPU-67B
o ACSS TCAS 2000
 Radar Altimeter (optional)
o Rockwell Collins ALT-55B
o Honeywell RT-300
Autopilot:
 GMC 7200 AFCS Mode Controller with Back course (QTY 1)
 GSA 9000 Servos (pitch, pitch trim, roll, and yaw) (QTY 4)
 GSM 9100 Servo Gearbox (pitch, pitch trim, roll, and yaw) (QTY 4)
Figure 2-1 shows an overview of the G5000 architecture and

Figure 2-2 shows the interface between G5000 GIFD and the third-party systems that are retained for this
STC.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
HSDB
2 2 GDR 66
HSDB over (Digital Radio) Analog
GEA 7100 [1] 485 RS-422 Audio TO GMA2
Data
GEA 7100 [2] 485
429 ELT Data
GSR 56 [2] Iridium

GSD 41 [1] GSD 41 [2] Xcvr
(Data (Data (Connext Voice/
GWX Processor Concentrator)
HSDB 4Concentrator) Data)
(Weather Radar)
232
Audio
to GPS / XM GDL 59 POTS

3 Antenna 3 HSDB
(Datalink) (Provisional)
1 4 1
GDL 69A SXM
Analog
TO GMA2 Audio (XM/Weather
Datalink) HSDB HSDB
Analog
Audio TO GMA1
HSDB
GMC 7200
HSDB 232 232
(AFCS Mode Controller)
GCU 275 [1] GCU 275 [2]

232 232 232 232
(Display Controller) (Display Controller)
HSDB
Disp lay Disp lay

Reversion Reversion
6 4 1 3 4 1 4 6
GDU 1450W [1] 5 HSDB 6 GDU 1450W [2] 5 HSDB 5 GDU 1450W [3]
(Primary Flight (Multifunction (Primary Flight
Display) 2 HSDB
1 Display) 2 Display)
HSDB 2
GTC 575 [1] HSDB HSDB GTC 575 [2]
7 3 8 1 (Touchscreen 2 7 8 2 (Touchscreen 1 3 7 8
Controller) Controller)
3 3
HSDB HSDB
HSDB HSDB
Digital
HSDB Bus HSDB
232
MKR
BCN
GMA 36B GMA 36B

[1] [2]
1 3 (Audio (Audio 3 1
GSR 56 [1]
232 Processor) Processor)
Iridium Xcvr Status HSDB
(ACARS/FANS HSDB
RMT PWR Over 232
Over 232
OR Audio Inhibit
Connext Voice/Wx)
ADF 1 ADF 2
DME 1 DME 2
GDL 59 GDL 69A SXM
HF1 GDR 66 / COM3
TO CVR
COM & NAV

GIA 64E [1] AUDIO
COM & NAV
AUDIO GIA 64E [2]
2 HSDB 2
COM, 485 GSA 9000 [1] (Pitch) 485 COM,
STANDBY
ADC GH3000 GPS, GPS,
STANDBY VOR/LOC, GSA 9000 [2] (Roll) VOR/LOC,
429
STANDBY S/N -5357 and on G/S, G/S,
MAG GSA 9000 [3] (Yaw)
Flight Flight
Director GSA 9000 [4] (Pitch Trim) Director
COM
COM
GTX 3000 [1] 232
(Transponder) G/S GTX 3000 [2]
232
(Transponder)
GPS GPS / XM
to TCAS 429
429 NAV From to TCAS
Processor 429
GDL 69A SXM 429 Processor
coupler
Engine & Aircraft System

Interfaces
485 GEA 7100 [1]

To GSD [2] 485 (Engine & Airframe I/F)
GEA 7100 [2] 485
(Engine & Airframe I/F) 485 To GSD [2]
HSDB HSDB over Ethernet Engine & Aircraft System

HSDB Over 232 Interfaces
HSDB over RS-232
HSDB Over 422
HSDB over RS-422
Garmin Equipment Garmin Equipment Non-Garmin Equipment Non-Garmin Equipment Non-Garmin Equipment
429 ARINC 429
Standard Optional Standard Alternate Optional
485 RS-485
232 RS-232 Confidential Proprietary Information – Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries
Figure 2-1, G5000 in Textron Model 560XL Architecture (Summary)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Figure 2-2, Textron Model 560XL G5000 Third Party/OEM Interface

190-02313-01 Revision 2
2.1 (ATA 22) Auto Flight
2.1.1 General
The Garmin G5000 AFCS is designed as a three-axis fail passive digital flight control system. The following
functions are provided by the G5000 in this installation:
 Flight Director
 Autopilot
 Yaw Damper
 Auto Pitch Trim
 Manual Electric Pitch Trim
 Emergency Descent Mode
 Underspeed Protection
2.1.2 G5000 AFCS Description and Operation

The AFCS is used to control the trajectory (or path) of the airplane in the pitch, roll, and yaw axis without
constant 'hands-on' control by a crew member.
The elevator, ailerons, and rudder provide the primary pitch, roll, and yaw control for the aircraft. The Garmin
G5000 AFCS consists of numerous units that are integrated within the G5000 system and communicate
digitally to provide the flight crew with the desired AFCS functionality.
This STC does not interface with the pneumatic rudder bias, flaps, speed brakes, rudder trim or manual roll
trim systems. The horizontal stabilizer is a two-position horizontal stabilizer. It is automatically driven to a
+1° or -2° angle depending upon flap position.
The existing elevator trim tab system is comprised of a trim tab on the trailing edge of each elevator and an
elevator trim servo mounted in the baggage bay. Mechanical actuation of the elevator trim control system
is accomplished by rotating the elevator trim control wheel on the center pedestal. Moving the trim control
wheel repositions both elevator trim tabs using control cables that transmit the control wheel movement to
the elevator trim tab actuators. Electrical actuation of the manual elevator trim control system is
accomplished by a Garmin elevator trim servo. The Garmin elevator trim servo is actuated by the pilot or
copilot control wheel trim switches or autopilot input. Manual electric trim is speed scheduled based on
TAS.
2.1.2.1 Flight Director

The flight directors compute and display the proper pitch and bank angles required for the aircraft to follow
a selected path. The FD can be used to command the autopilot to put the aircraft in the attitude necessary
to follow a trajectory or the crew can manually fly the aircraft to the displayed flight director commands
without autopilot engagement.
Either Garmin GIA 64E can perform the flight director function, but only one flight director is active at a
given time. The GMC 7200 AFCS mode controller has two FD buttons to activate the flight director and a
transfer (CPL) on the GMC 7200 is used to select the active flight director. The GMC 7200 AFCS mode
controller also has dedicated keys (e.g. HDG, ALT, VS, NAV, APPR) that are used to request
activation/deactivation of a specific flight director mode.
The flight director mode and status are indicated on the AFCS mode controller and in the lateral and vertical
flight director mode windows of the AFCS mode status window of both PFDs. If the information required to

190-02313-01 Revision 2
compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight director reverts to the default roll
hold and pitch hold modes.
Navigational and spatial sensors are used to generate flight director commands. The HSI can display two
sources of Navigation: FMS (GPS) or NAV (VOR, LOC, GS). The NAV source is chosen by selecting the
active NAV soft-key located on the PFD. This selects NAV1 (VOR1/LOC1), NAV2 (VOR2/LOC2) or FMS.
Spatial sensors include the AHRSs and ADCs. The ADC/AHRS flight director sensor data is routed via
displays to the selected side GIA FD function.
Depending on the selected NAV source, the active GIA flight director receives FMS Lateral and Vertical
deviation, FMS Roll Steering command, Localizer and Glideslope deviation, and VOR deviation data
packets from the PFD coupled to the active FD. The FD uses these inputs along with air data and AHRS
parameters in the computation of a FD command. FD mode transition and capture are calculated within the
active GIA.
2.1.2.2 Autopilot
The autopilot operates with two Garmin (GSA) 9000 servos to provide primary pitch and roll control. Flight
director command data from the GIA 64E is processed within the servos and converted into aircraft primary
and secondary flight control surface commands. The autopilot cannot operate unless the flight director is
engaged. The autopilot provides servo monitoring and automatic flight control in response to flight director
steering commands, utilizing AHRS and ADC sensor information.
2.1.2.3 Yaw Damper

The GSA 9000 yaw servo is self-monitoring and provides Dutch-roll damping and turn coordination in
response to yaw rate, roll angle, lateral acceleration, and airspeed. The yaw damper can be engaged
without the autopilot; however, the yaw damper must be engaged during autopilot operation. The yaw servo
differs from the pitch and roll servos in that it doesn’t use a command from the flight director. The yaw servo
yaw damper function uses the error between the yaw rate reference and the sensed yaw rate from the
AHRS to calculate a yaw command to the servo. For wings-level flight, the yaw rate reference is zero. For
turning flight, the yaw rate reference is the sum of two signals: the turn coordination reference and the
adverse yaw compensation component. The turn coordination reference is calculated using roll attitude and
true airspeed. The adverse yaw compensation component is calculated using pitch and roll attitude and
rate data.
2.1.2.4 Automatic Pitch Trim

The aircraft is equipped with pitch auto-trim functionality to keep the airplane in trim when the autopilot is
engaged. The auto-trim function must be valid for the autopilot to engage. Pitch auto-trim failures are
indicated to the crew with the display of the amber AP PITCH TRIM FAIL CAS message if a failure occurs
while the autopilot is engaged. In accordance with the AFMS, the crew will disconnect the autopilot when
this message is present. If excessive torque is being held by a primary axis servo, each GIA can initiate
either an amber or red PFD mis-trim annunciation that is displayed above the speed tape adjacent to the
AFCS mode status bar (Figure 2-3 & Figure 2-4). Each PFD reads data from the HSDB bus and displays
the mis-trim annunciations independently from the off-side PFD. The mis-trim annunciation data from GIA1
is given the highest priority by both PFDs. When GIA1 is inactive or invalid and GIA2 is active, data is
obtained from GIA2. The loss of a single GIA will cause an abnormal AP disconnect (white over red AP
mode annunciation on PFD AFCS status bar and a continuous aural “Autopilot” alert).

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Figure 2-3, Red ‘ELE’ Mis-Trim Annunciation
Figure 2-4, Yellow ‘ELE’ Mis-Trim Annunciation
2.1.2.5 Manual Electric Pitch Trim

When the autopilot is not engaged, a GSA 9000 servo provides manual electric pitch trim functionality using
the two-position PITCH TRIM switch located on the pilot and copilot control wheels for pitch trim adjustment.
2.1.2.6 Underspeed Protection

Each GIA provides the computations and commands for the Underspeed Protection System (USP) which
is provided as an option to prevent the autopilot from driving into an aerodynamic stall while the autopilot is
engaged.
USP will activate when the following conditions are true:
 Autopilot engaged.
 Aircraft is in-air (Signal provided by the LH and RH MLG squat switches).
 LH or RH stick shaker active (signal provided by the LH or RH stall computers)
When USP is active the following visual annunciations and aural alerts will be present:
 Yellow ‘MINSPD’ annunciation displayed in the target box above the airspeed tape.
 Red ‘UNDERSPEED PROTECT ACTIVE’ CAS warning message illuminates.
 Continuous “AIRSPEED” aural alert. (Present when either shaker is active).
 Current active FD modes in AFCS Mode status window will turn white and the FD command bars
will move to a wings level roll attitude and 0° pitch attitude.
To determine USP activation, the G5000 system uses discrete inputs from the stall system and the Go-
Around switch, located on the thrust lever. If the USP option is enabled, and the autopilot is engaged,
activation of the stick shaker will cause USP to activate and the autopilot and yaw damper to remain
engaged. Another condition, where the autopilot will remain engaged when the USP option is enabled, is
when the Go-Around switch on the LH thrust lever is pressed. This provides coupled Go-Around
capabilities. When the USP option is not enabled, the autopilot will disconnect when the stick shaker
activates or when the Go-Around button is pressed.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
When USP is active, the coupled GIA will capture the airspeed when USP was activated and generate a
pitch attitude command to maintain an airspeed increase rate of 1 knot/second to ensure a gradual airspeed
increase until both stick shakers are no longer active plus 2 knots. USP will deactivate when enough speed
is available to resume the flight director mode commands that were active prior to stick shaker activation.
2.1.2.7 Emergency Descent Mode

The AFCS system also employs an Emergency Descent Mode. If the airplane is above 30,000 feet MSL
and the autopilot is engaged, it will automatically enter Emergency Descent Mode (EDM) when cabin
altitude exceeds approximately 14,500 feet. The autopilot will initiate a pitch-down left-turn (90°) maneuver.
The autopilot will control the descent near the MMO/VMO limit and level off at 15,000 feet MSL. The
autopilot Emergency Descent Mode (EDM) is annunciated by EMER DESCENT message on the PFD. This
mode can be cancelled only by disengaging the autopilot. The flight crew must retard throttles to idle and
extend the speed brakes.
2.1.3 Components
The following section provides a description of the individual G5000 components that provide the AFCS
functionality.
2.1.3.1 GIA 64E Integrated Avionics Unit (Qty 2)

The GIA 64E is a microprocessor-based input/output Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) that functions as the
main communications hub, linking several LRUs with each on-side GDU. Each GIA communicates with the
GIFD equipment via HSDB, RS-232, RS-485, RS-422, and ARINC 429. The GIAs communicate directly
with each other via HSDB. Each GIA contains the following sub-assemblies:
 A main processor that interfaces with all LRUs in the G5000 sub-system and performs calculations for
the autopilot and yaw damper.
In addition to performing the required autopilot and yaw damper calculations and system monitoring, the
GIA 64E also performs the following non-AFCS function for the G5000 system.
 A twelve-channel parallel Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver that simultaneously tracks and
uses up to 12 satellites. It also includes a 15 channel Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS) certified
GPS receiver.
 A Very High Frequency (VHF) Communication (COM) transceiver that provides tuning from 118.00 to
136.992 MHz in 25 kHz or 8.33 kHz spacing from 760 or 2280 channel configuration respectively.
 A VHF Omni-directional Range (VOR)/Instrument Landing System (ILS) localizer receiver that provides
tuning from 108.00 to 117.95 MHz in 50 kHz increments.
 An ILS glideslope receiver that provides tuning from 328.6 to 335.4 MHz as paired with the frequency
tuned on the VOR/ILS localizer receiver.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Figure 2-5, GIA 64E Integrated Avionics Unit
2.1.3.2 Garmin Servo Actuator (GSA 9000) /Garmin Servo Gearbox (GSM 9100) (QTY 4)
Mounted in the tail cone (pitch and yaw servos), in the aft fuselage (pitch trim), and below the wing near
the aileron sector (roll servo), a GSA 9000 servo is combined with the GSM 9100 and installed as a
single unit. A servo is installed for each primary axis and an additional servo is also installed for manual
electric pitch trim and automatic pitch trim functionality. The autopilot, yaw damper, turn coordination,
and both manual electric and automatic pitch trim calculations are performed in each GSA 9000 servo.
The autopilot functions are provided by the pitch and roll servos, the yaw damper and turn coordination
functions are provided by the yaw servo, and the pitch trim functions are performed by the pitch trim
servo.
The GSM 9100 servo gearbox contains a capstan and engage-Solenoid that mates to the GSA 9000
servo to provide the coupling between the G5000 AFCS and the existing Textron Model 560XL flight
controls to perform the control laws for the inner-loop AFCS, yaw damper, automatic pitch trim and
manual electric pitch trim.
Figure 2-6, GSA 9000 Servo and GSM 9100 Servo Gearbox
2.1.3.3 Garmin Display Units (GDU 1450W) (QTY 2)

Mounted on the instrument panel, the autopilot and yaw damper engagement status and flight director
mode status information are displayed on each PFD in the AFCS Mode Status window. (Ref. Figure
2-11).

190-02313-01 Revision 2
2.1.3.4 Garmin Mode Controller (GMC 7200) (QTY 1)
Mounted on the fire-tray, the GMC Autopilot Mode Controller provides the user interface with the system
and allows the flight crew to select various flight director modes and provides
engagement/disengagement of the autopilot and yaw damper. The GMC interfaces with the G5000
through an RS-232 digital bus.
Figure 2-7, GMC 7200 Autopilot Mode Controller
GMC 7200 Mode Selection

Lateral Modes
HDG – Heading button & knob. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains the Selected Heading and is
selected when the HDG button is pressed. When selected, the Selected Heading is shown as a cyan bug
on the compass rose and cyan digital readout to the upper left of the HSI.
The HDG knob is a single knob that adjusts the Selected Heading bug in and digital readout in 1°
increments. It provides the aircraft heading reference for the FD when heading mode is selected. The HDG
knob also contains a center push-button that synchronizes the heading bug to the current heading of the
aircraft when pressed.
Selected Heading Heading Select Bug
Figure 2-8, Heading Select Indications
APPR – Approach button. The APPR button selects, deselects and arms Approach mode. Approach Mode
acquires and tracks the selected navigation source (FMS, VOR, or LOC), depending on the approach type
that is loaded in the Flight Plan. This mode uses the selected navigation receiver deviation and desired
course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APPR Key when the CDI is greater than one dot arms the
selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the active lateral mode). If the CDI is less than
one dot, the LOC is automatically captured.
NAV – Navigation button. The NAV button selects, deselects, or arms Navigation mode to acquire and track
the selected navigation source (FMS, VOR, LOC). The Flight Director follows FMS roll steering commands
when FMS is the selected navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the Flight Director

190-02313-01 Revision 2
creates roll steering commands from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used
to fly non-precision FMS and LOC approaches where glideslope/glidepath capture is not required.
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than ½ dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the selected
mode is armed. If the CDI is less than ½ dot, the active leg or course is automatically captured when the
NAV Key is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white below the active roll mode.
B/C – Back Course. Tracks the back course of the acquired ILS signal.
BANK – Bank button. Manually engages or disengages low bank mode, which limits the maximum
commanded roll angle for the AP. BANK mode will automatically engage at 33,800 ft. when climbing and
disengage at 33,600 ft. when descending below that altitude. BANK mode may also be selected or
deselected at any time by the pilot. When BANK is active, a green arc appears on the PFD at the top of the
bank scale to highlight low bank limits.
Figure 2-9, Bank Angle Scale

Vertical Modes
FLC – Flight Level Change Button. The FLC button selects or deselects the Flight Level Change mode.
The SPD knob is used to select the airspeed source (FMS or MAN) and adjust the reference airspeed.
When selected, FLC mode will acquire and maintain the airspeed Reference (in IAS or Mach) while climbing
or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) and the Flight Director will continuously
monitor the selected altitude, airspeed, Mach, and altitude. When Flight Level Change Mode is used in
conjunction with VNAV (V FLC), VNAV Target Altitude Capture is also enabled.
When MAN is selected as the airspeed reference, a cyan airspeed Reference Bug is displayed on the
airspeed tape with the reference airspeed digital readout displayed above the airspeed tape and next to the
FLC mode annunciation on the GMC 7200.
When FMS is selected as the airspeed reference, the airspeed reference will be set to the value
programmed in the FMS and the indications will be displayed in the same locations as MAN mode, but the
airspeed reference bug and digital readout will be magenta in color on the airspeed tape.
SPD FMS/MAN SELECTOR – Used to select FMS speed control mode or manual speed control as the
source for the desired airspeed reference. A cyan (MAN Speed Mode) or magenta (FMS Speed Mode)
speed bug is displayed on the airspeed indicator.
SPD – Speed Knob. Adjusts the manual airspeed reference and bug in 1 kt or 0.01 M increments. Pushing
the SPD knob switches the AFCS airspeed reference between IAS and Mach.
ALT – Altitude button. The ALT button selects or deselects Altitude Hold mode. When selected the Flight
Director maintains the current aircraft altitude (to the nearest foot). When the mode is active an ‘ALT’
annunciation is displayed in the AFCS Mode Status Window. This mode is automatically armed when the
Flight Director is in either Selected Altitude Capture or VNAV Target Altitude Capture modes. The active
mode annunciation ‘ALT’ appears if the transition was made from VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode.
While VNAV is active, V ALT indicates that VNAV Target Altitude sequencing is enabled. If a climb will be

190-02313-01 Revision 2
resumed at the next Bottom of Climb (BOC) point, FLC or VS must be manually activated after the BOC
has been reached. If a descent will be resumed at the next Top of Descent (TOD) point, PATH will be
shown as the armed mode.
ALT SEL – Altitude Select knob. The ALT knob controls the Selected Altitude reference, which is used as
the reference for the altitude alerter and the altitude capture function. The selected altitude reference is
displayed as a target box above the altitude tape and as a target bug on the altitude tape. The knob on the
GMC 7200 contains a center push-button (PUSH CANCEL) that cancels the aural and visual altitude alerts
when pressed. When the knob is rotated without pressing the altitude selection changes in 1000-foot
increments. When the knob is pressed in and rotated the altitude selection changes in 100-foot increments.
Reference
Selected Selected
Airspeed
Altitude Bug Altitude
Airspeed Bug
Vertical Speed
(FMS)
Reference
Vertical Speed
Bug
Figure 2-10, FD Mode Indications

VS – Vertical Speed button. The VS button selects or deselects Vertical Speed mode. When VS is the pitch
coupled mode, the VS reference is displayed in the target box above or below the vertical speed tape.
Positive references are displayed in a target box above the tape and negative references are displayed in
a target box below the tape. The VS reference is also displayed as a target bug on the vertical speed tape
VNAV – VNAV button. The VNAV button selects, deselects, or arms the Vertical Navigation mode. The
selected altitude target is displayed as a target box inside the altitude tape
UP/DN – Nose Up/Down Wheel. The nose UP/DN wheel on the GMC is used to change the FD pitch mode
reference. Each click of the wheel results in a FD command bar increase or decrease of 0.5 degrees when
the FD is in the pitch hold (PIT) or vertical speed (VS) modes. The GA, GS, GP, VPTH, and FLC FD pitch
modes cannot be controlled using UP/DN wheel; however, using the UP/DN wheel while in GA mode will
cause automatic reversion to PIT mode.
Other GMC 7200 Button Selections
FD – Flight Director buttons. Generally, the FD button toggles the flight director on or off. If the flight director
is not on, pressing an FD button will display the flight director in default pitch and roll modes. Pressing an
FD button again with command bars in view will remove the command bars from the display, unless the
autopilot is engaged. If the autopilot is engaged, the FD button on the coupled side (CPL arrow) is
deactivated.
CRS (L or R)– Course knobs. There are the two Course Selection Knobs, one for PFD1 and one for PFD2,
which control the LH and RH course information/data selection. If the navigation source is VOR or localizer,
or if OBS Mode has been enabled when using FMS, the Selected Course is controlled using the CRS Knob

190-02313-01 Revision 2
corresponding to the selected Flight Director (L CRS for the pilot side, R CRS for the copilot side). When
both Flight Directors are using the same navigation source (both on VOR1/VOR2 or both on LOC1/ LOC2),
adjusting the L CRS Knob or R CRS Knob will affect the Course Pointer on PFD1 and PFD2. When each
Flight Director is using a different navigation source (e.g., pilot side on VOR1/LOC1 and copilot side on
VOR2/LOC2), each CRS Knob affects only the respective side. Each switch also contains
CPL – Couple button. The PFD providing data to the Flight Directors may be switched by pressing the CPL
button. Both PFDs display the selected Flight Director, indicated by an arrow pointing toward either the pilot
or copilot side in the center of the AFCS Status Window. The annunciator light arrow for the selected Flight
Director is also illuminated beside the CPL button on the GMC 7200. When the Flight Directors are switched
using the CPL button, the vertical and lateral modes remain engaged.
Couple Arrow
Figure 2-11, AFCS Mode Status Window

AP – Autopilot button. The AP button engages or disengages the autopilot. When the AP Key is pressed,
the autopilot, yaw damper, and Flight Director (if not already active) are activated. The Flight Director
remains in the previously selected modes or engages in Pitch and Roll Hold Modes if no modes are
selected.
YD – Yaw Damper Button. The YD turns the yaw damper on or off. When the YD button is pressed, the
system engages the yaw damper independently of the autopilot.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
2.2 (ATA 23) Communication System
2.2.1 General
The G5000 communication system is an integrated system with its primary functions distributed amongst
various LRUs. The primary VHF communication transceiver module is contained within each GIA, the GMA
36B performs the audio processing, and the GDUs, GTCs and GCUs provide the crew interface. In addition
to VHF communications the G5000 system will also provide the following voice and data communication
functionality that will be described below:
 Ground/Dispatch/Clearance
 Emergency Communications (121.5 MHz)
 Iridium - Connext Weather (Requires GSR 56)
 Iridium - POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service) in the cabin (Requires GSR 56 and GDL 59)
 3rd VHF COM radio (Requires GDR 66)
 CPLDC / FAA Datacom / Link 2000+ (Requires GDR 66)
 HF Communications (No HF mode control/tuning provisions are included)
2.2.2 Description and Operation
2.2.2.1 VHF Communications

Each GIA 64E VHF radio module interfaces digitally with its internal Main board and both GMA 36B audio
panel/processors. Each GIA 64E VHF radio module also has an analog output that interfaces with its on-
side GMA for fail-safe operation. Each Garmin GMA is a remote-mount audio processor that collects,
processes, and distributes audio signals between avionics, crew, and passengers. Each GMA is connected
to a dedicated crew headset, microphone, and speaker. The GMA also provides the mixing of audio inputs
from multiple sources at a given time and the #1 GMA 36B, controls the audio processing for the pilot, and
the #2 GMA controls the processing for the copilot.
The primary user interface is the GTC 575 touchscreen controller (Qty 2). The GTC 575 provides the
primary point of data entry for the Garmin G5000 SYSTEM. The top section of the GTC is the Radio Bar
and is always accessible to provide immediate access to COM tuning. The GTCs provide manual tuning of
the active and standby frequencies, the ability to transfer the standby frequencies to active frequencies and
volume/squelch control. An Audio & Radios button is in the upper LH corner of the GTC and provides
additional access to COM tuning functions when pressed.
The GCU 275 Display Controller provides another interface and is usually used as an alternate means for
the crew to select COM frequencies and make other radio selections.
Each PFD displays the on-side COM window that shows the active COM transceiver’s sensor title (e.g.
COM1), the frequency identification, and an indication if the MIC/MON is active (i.e. TX/RX).
2.2.2.2 Ground Dispatch/Clearance

This STC also incorporates a ground dispatch/clearance functionality to allow the flight crew to perform a
subset of flight preparation tasks including VHF COM1 TX/RX and CPLDC/FAA Datacom/Link 2000+
capabilities if the GDR 66 transceiver is installed and using battery power only, prior to starting engines in
order to conserve fuel.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
During Ground Dispatch Power operation, COM1 communication, GMA1 & GMA2 audio headset and
speaker functionality, GTC1 functionality & the MFD are powered for communicating with ATC and
performing other flight planning activities.
2.2.2.3 Emergency Communications

An additional feature of this STC is the addition of an emergency communication feature that is designed
to provide COM1 radio communication if all other tuning methods are not possible. The ‘EMER FREQ |
121.5’ push button switch on the center pedestal will revert the No 1 GIA COM transceiver frequency to the
emergency frequency of 121.50 MHz When pressed the push button nomenclature “EMER FREQ | 121.5”
illuminates and 121.50 EMER is displayed for COM 1 in the top right-hand corner of the PFD displaying
COM1.
The ‘EMER COM’ switch is wired to the No 1 GIA COM module and when the COM1 module detects the
switch is being pressed, it automatically tunes to 121.5 MHz and the COM1 module ignores tuning
commands received over its serial port provided from the No 1 GIA main processor that were initially
received from the GCUs or GTCs. When this switch is pressed again, the COM1 module will transition back
to normal mode. In normal mode, the COM1 transceiver will stay on the emergency channel until another
channel is tuned (i.e. another tuning command is received over the serial port).
The ‘EMER FREQ | 121.5’ switch is also wired to the No 1 GMA “failsafe discrete input”. When the failsafe
discrete is activated the GMA enters “failsafe mode”. The pilot’s left ear/mic/key is tied directly to the No 1
GIA COM radio. In the pilot’s right ear, normal GMA functions are retained.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
HSDB
GCU1 GCU2
232 FMS Control 232 232 FMS Control 232
Data Entry (A)
Data Entry (A)
PFD1 PFD2
MFD
COM/NAV GTC1 GTC2 HSDB COM/NAV
tuning (C)/(B)
HSDB COM/NAV tuning (C)/(B)
HSDB FPGA (A) tuning (C)/(B) HSDB FPGA (A)
COM/NAV COM/NAV
tuning (B) tuning (B)
HSDB HSDB
EMER 232
HSDB
COMM HSDB
Switch (A)
GMA1 GMA2
Audio Processor (C) Audio Processor (C)
Discrete
Analog Analog
(Fail-Safe) (Fail-Safe)
COM1 Audio COM2 Audio
GIA1 GIA2
COM1 Digital COM2 Digital
MAIN2 Mic Audio Mic Audio MAIN2
Discrete I/O Discrete I/O
Power Supply (A) Power Supply (A)
MAIN1 FPGA 429/485/232 MAIN1 FPGA 429/485/232

Ethernet Discrete Input Power Ethernet Discrete Input Power
Supply CODEC (A) Supply CODEC (A)
COM Module COM Module

(A) ANT ANT (A)
Figure 2-12, Textron Model 560XL VHF Communications Architecture
2.2.2.4 Connext Iridium Telephone

A stand-alone GSR 56 installation is provided as an option and provides the capability to support the Garmin
Connext functionality, which includes International Datalink Weather, Short Message Service (SMS), and
Iridium Telephone/Voice services. The stand-alone GSR 56 option will allow the flight crew to make
telephone calls and send/receive SMS text messages from the cockpit over the Iridium satellite network.
Both the pilot and co-pilot have the capability to use the telephone by selecting TEL on their respective
GTC Audio & Radios page. When an incoming call is being received from the Iridium network, an aural
alert “Incoming Call” will sound in the headsets and over the cockpit speakers and a flashing TEL icon will
display on both PFDs. The stand-alone GSR 56 option to provide Connext services installs the GSR 56 in
the nose avionics bay.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
An additional option that provides plain old telephone service (POTS) in the cabin is also available when a
GDL 59 is integrated into the system. The Iridium Telephone and SMS services are subscription based and
a subscriber account must be established that is offered through Garmin Connext and Iridium Satellite LLC.
For additional information on the GSR 56 and how to subscribe reference the Garmin GSR 56 Installation
manual 190-00836-00.
Since the incoming Iridium visual and aural alerts are considered ‘non-critical alerts’ mute logic has been
incorporated to ensure the Iridium visual and aural alerts are inhibited during certain critical flight conditions.
Knowing the mute logic will also assist ground maintenance technicians when troubleshooting the absence
of an expected incoming Iridium aural or visual alert not being received.
Aural and visual incoming call and SMS text annunciations are inhibited when any of the following
conditions are true:
1. Aircraft below 10,000 FT. (Terminal area)
2. Aircraft above 10,000 FT but less than 5,000 FT AGL, at or above 40 KTS. (Terminal area, high
altitude airport)
3. Aircraft on the ground, thrust set greater than 70% N1. (Takeoff roll)
4. Aircraft above 40 KTS but below 135 KIAS.
5. Display reversion is active.
6. Pitch attitude higher than 30° nose up.
7. Pitch attitude lower than 20° nose down.
8. Roll attitude over 45°.
9. Stick shaker activated.
10. TCAS aural alert is active.
11. Landing gear warning is active.
Aural incoming call annunciations are inhibited (GTC and PFD annunciations still given if not inhibited by
any of the above) when:
1. Overspeed warning is active.
2. G5000 system generated aural warnings are active, i.e. AP disconnect.
2.2.2.5 Reserved
2.2.2.6 VHF Datalink / COM 3 Voice Communications

An option that installs a GDR 66 VHF Transceiver that provides COM 3 VHF voice communications along
with Link 2000+ and FAA Datacomm using VDL mode 2. This stand-alone option installs a GSR 56 behind
PFD1 in the instrument panel and the unit will interface directly with GIA1. If this option is being installed
along with the GSR 56 option to provide Connext services mentioned above, the installation of the GDL 59
is also mandatory.
2.2.2.7 HF Communications
An audio interface from the G5000 System is being provided for the previously installed Honeywell HF-950
and HF 1050 radio installations to allow HF radio transmit and receive capability. The G5000 audio interface
for these systems will be supported by the #2 GMA 36B audio processor. No HF mode control/tuning
provisions are included for this STC and the existing HF radio control head, or other means of radio tuning,
must be used. Reference Garmin Wiring Diagram 005-W0035-01 for additional electrical interface
information.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
2.2.3 Components
The following section provides a description of the individual components that provide the G5000
communication system functionality.

Refer to section 2.1.3.1 for a description of the GIA 64E.
2.2.3.2 GMA 36B Audio Processor (Qty 2)

The Garmin Audio Processor (GMA) 36B is a remote-mount audio processor and marker beacon system
that collects, processes, and distributes audio signals between avionics, crew, and passengers. The GMA
36B is connected to the on-side GTC using an HSDB interface, the on-side GIA using a digital audio
connection, and the cross-side GIA using a digital audio connection. The GMAs are connected to each
other using a digital audio connection as the primary data path and an RS-232 connection as a backup
path. Each GMA 36B is also connected to the Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) using a summed audio analog
connection.
The GMA 36B is a high-fidelity digital audio processor. At the GMA’s core is a Digital Signal Processor
(DSP) that cleans up audio using advanced filtering techniques and provides Voice Activated (VOX) control
for microphone inputs. On the outputs, the GMA 36B features high-quality digital-to-analog converters and
headset amplifier circuits that are used to minimize noise and distortion.
Each GMA 36B provides a speaker output that is used for the on-side cockpit speaker. In addition to the
GMA 36B, the existing tone generator used for landing gear alerting is retained.
2.2.3.3 GTC 575 Touchscreen Controller (Qty 2)

The Garmin Touchscreen Controller (GTC) 575 provides access to a wide variety of system capabilities.
The GTC is the primary point of data entry for the GIFD. Each Touchscreen Controller communicates with
the on-side GDU in addition to the GDU that represents the MFD (GDU #2) using an HSDB connection.
The primary functions of the GTC 575 are:
 Radio tuning, control, and status display for multiple radios
 Remote audio panel control and status display
 Intercom control
 MFD page selection and control
 Touch screen keyboard for data entry
 Flight plan entry and editing
The GTC 575 is a 5.7” diagonal infrared touchscreen controller with an 8-position joystick (also provides
rotary knob and push capabilities) in the lower left of the bezel, a dual-concentric knob with push capability
in the lower right of the bezel, and a small knob with push capability in the lower center of the bezel.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Figure 2-13, GTC 575 Touchscreen Controller
2.2.3.4 GCU 275 Display Control Unit (Qty 2)

The Garmin Control Unit (GCU) 275 is a panel-mounted user interface which enables the flight crew to
control the on-side PFD map range and baro correction. It can also be utilized for backup flight planning
and COM/NAV tuning in the event of GTC failure, each crew member in the cockpit is provided with a GCU
which controls the on-side GDU. Control of the MFD in reversionary mode by a GCU 275 is provided by
the pilot’s GCU. In the event of a PFD1 or PFD2 failure, the failed side GCU controls the MFD in
reversionary mode. Each unit is connected to the on-side GDU and to the MFD via an RS-232 connection.
Figure 2-14, GCU 275 Display Controller
2.2.3.5 GSR 56 Satellite Transceiver (Optional)

The GSR 56 provides airborne low speed data link and voice communication capability to the GIFD. The
GSR 56 contains a transceiver that operates on the Iridium Satellite network. The GSR 56 Satellite
Transceiver options are as follows:
 A stand-alone unit with an RS-232 interface to GIA #1 and an analog audio interface to GMA #1
for the Garmin Connext option.
 A stand-alone unit in combination with a GDL 59 Wi-Fi / POTS to provide Garmin Connext with
telephone (POTS).

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Figure 2-15, GSR 56 Satellite Radio
2.2.3.6 GDL 59 Wi-Fi / POTS Interface (Optional)

The optional GDL 59, when installed with the GSR 56, provides POTS (plain old telephone service) to the
cabin for an optional cabin phone installation. For the Textron Model 560XL installation the GDL 59 Wi-Fi
is not being utilized.
Figure 2-16, GDL 59 Datalink Transceiver
2.2.3.7 GDR 66 Voice/ Datalink Transceiver (Optional)

The optional GDR 66 VHF Voice/ Datalink Transceiver is a remote mounted digital communication
transceiver that operates in the 118.000 to 137.000 MHz VHF aviation communication band to provide
CPDLC functionality, which includes Link 2000+ and FAA Data Comm, when within range of a VHF signal
(i.e. requires VHF coverage (i.e. will not work in oceanic and remote airspace). The GDR 66 installation
also provides a means to record datalink messages to the CVR and can be used as a COM 3 radio VHF
radio when not operating as a Datalink radio. For this installation, the radio is labeled COM3. Access and
control of the COM3 radio is accomplished via the GTC 575 Audio & Radios page. The flight crew must
disable the Datalink function to use the COM3 VHF voice function.
Figure 2-17, GDR 66 VHF Voice/Datalink Transceiver
2.3 (ATA 28) Fuel System

2.3.1 General
The Garmin G5000 System interfaces with the existing 560XL fuel system to provide fuel quantity, fuel flow
and various fuel system CAS indications. No modifications to the fuel system were made for this STC.
Electrical wiring has been added to various fuel components to provide proper functionality and indications
with the G5000 system. For a complete description of the fuel system, reference the aircraft maintenance
manual.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
The G5000 system interfaces with the fuel cross-feed and firewall shut-off valves to provide CAS messages
that are replacing the annunciations previously installed on the crew warning panel. The following fuel sub-
systems are impacted. See section 2.5 for a CAS logic description that are displayed.
2.3.2.1 Fuel Cross-feed

The G5000 system interfaces with the fuel cross-feed functionality to provide an annunciation to the CAS
cross-feed valve position to replace the previous annunciation that was on the crew warning panel When
the Fuel Cross-feed switch (SI004) is selected to the L TANK or R TANK position, the selected tank’s boost
pump will activate and increase fuel pressure inside the selected fuel tank. The cross-feed valve (VL007)
will then energize and open, and 3 seconds later, the motive flow valve will close on the engine receiving
the cross-feed fuel.
When the fuel cross-feed is not selected to the L TANK or R TANK position, a ground is provided to G5000
System from the fuel cross-feed switch in the cockpit and when selected, an open signal is provided. If the
cross-feed valve is fully open or fully closed, one of two limit switches, within the cross-feed valve, will
provide a 28V signal and the other will provide an open signal to the G5000 System to identify valve position.
If the valve is not fully open or fully closed, an open signal is provided on both signal lines to the G5000
system.
2.3.2.2 Firewall Shut-off Valve Operation

A fuel and hydraulic firewall shutoff valve is installed for each engine. Both fuel and hydraulic shutoff valves
are controlled by the Engine Fire switches and the valves will close when the Fire switches are pressed.
The red ENGINE FIRE and white FIRE BOTTLE ARM annunciator switches in the firetray for each engine.
The ENGINE FIRE annunciator indicates the fire detection system has detected an engine fire for the
respective engine. Pressing the ENGINE FIRE annunciator closes the hydraulic and fuel firewall shutoffs
and illuminates the FIRE BOTTLE ARM annunciator switch when pressed.
When both fuel and hydraulic shutoff valves on one side become closed, the amber CAS message for that
side will be displayed.
When the firewall shutoffs are closed, a switch in the valve sends a 28 Vdc signal to the G5000 System.
When the valve is not closed, the switch provides an open signal to the G5000 System.
The actual signals for the F/W SHUTOFF CAS messages that are used by the G5000 are provided from
the Hydraulic Cutoff Relays for each engine [LH HYD (VT035), LH Fuel (VY007), RH HYD (VT032), and
RH Fuel (VY006)].
2.3.2.3 Fuel Boost Pumps

The left and right fuel boost pumps operate independently in either of two modes, ON or NORM (switches
located on pilot’s lower outside instrument panel) and are used to supply fuel to a single or both engines.
When the switches are in the ON position, the boost pumps will operate regardless of other switch settings
or sensor inputs. In the NORM position, the selected boost pump normally does not operate, but will
automatically operate during the following conditions:
 During engine start when the throttle is above idle cutoff, until N2 reaches starter cutout speed.
 During APU start or while the APU is operating while the right engine is not operating.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
 When low fuel pressure is detected by the fuel pressure switch and the throttle is above the cutoff
position. (The boost pump will continue to operate until the boost pump switch is cycled to OFF and
then back to NORM.)
 During cross feed, the boost pump operates for the fuel tank selected as the feed tank.
2.4 (ATA 30) Ice and Rain Protection

2.4.1 General
The Garmin G5000 System interfaces with the existing 560XL anti-ice system to provide visual CAS
indications of its system status. The anti-ice system prevents or dislodges ice formations on various exterior
areas of the airplane that include, the inboard/outboard wing leading edges, engine air intake nacelles,
pitot/static ports, AOA vane, total air temperature probe and overboard water drain lines. These areas have
anti-ice systems which either heat the area with hot engine bleed air or electrical heating elements. No
modifications to the functionality of the anti-ice system were made for this STC except for the electrical
wiring that is added to various components to provide proper functionality and indications with the G5000
system. For a complete description of the anti-ice system refer to the aircraft maintenance manual.

The G5000 system interfaces with the anti-ice system to provide CAS messages that replace the
annunciations previously installed on the crew warning panel. The following anti-ice sub-systems are
impacted. See section 2.5 for a CAS logic description of the messages that are displayed.
2.4.2.1 Horizontal Stabilizer Anti-Ice

The Model 560XL aircraft uses a pneumatic rubber boot to de-ice the tail horizontal stabilizer surfaces. The
LH and RH stabilizer de-icing boots are inflated and deflated using regulated (23 PSI) service air to break
away any accumulated ice on the surface. The TAIL de-icing system may be operated in the AUTO or
MANUAL mode. The AUTO mode cycles pressure to the LH and RH boots to inflate and deflate in a
staggered manner (i.e. the LH boot inflates and deflates (1 cycle = 12 seconds) and then the RH Boot
inflates and deflates (1 cycle = 12 seconds), These 2 cycles will repeat approx. every 3 minutes).
The MANUAL mode maintains constant pressure in both de-icing boots while the TAIL de-ice switch is
manually held in the MANUAL position by the flight crew. The boots will inflate and deflate simultaneously
during Manual mode of operation.
2.4.2.2 Windshield Heat

The windshield is electrically heated by two windshield anti-ice controllers (one for each windshield)
(UT027) and (UT028 that are powered from the LH and RH engine driven AC Generators. The windshield
anti-ice system is powered when the aircraft battery switch is turned on and a CAS message is displayed
on the G5000 CAS when a fault or overheat condition with the system is detected.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
2.5 (ATA 31) Indicating and Recording System
2.5.1 General
The G5000 indicating and recording system incorporates the engine indications (EIS), including fuel and
temperature information, that replace the engine instruments previously installed in the 560XL center
instrument panel. The G5000 system also replicates and incorporates all warning and caution
annunciations that were previously displayed on the 560XL Annunciator Panel. The CAS messages will be
displayed using the same logic, inhibits, and prioritization scheme as was previously displayed.
This section will also provide a description of the G5000 system interface to the existing Fairchild/L3 F1000
FDR, Honeywell SSFDR, Fairchild/L3 A200S CVR and FA2100 CVR systems
2.5.2.1 Engine Indicating and Crew Alerting System (EICAS)

The EICAS is split into 2 functional areas (Engine Indicating System (EIS) and Crew Alerting System (CAS))
that is displayed full-time on the MFD.
2.5.2.2 Engine Indicating System (EIS)

The EIS window contains the engine instruments and fuel system information as a full-time display on the
MFD while in the normal or reversionary display modes. The EIS window can also be displayed in a
compressed format on each PFD while in reversionary mode. In normal display mode, the top portion of
the EIS window displays the basic engine operating parameters and the temperature and fuel parameters
are displayed in the middle of the EIS window. In the compressed display mode, the basic engine operating
parameters are displayed on the LH side and the temperature and fuel parameters are displayed in the
upper RH portion of the EIS window.
The basic engine operating parameters are displayed in both digital and analog formats. The N1 and ITT
indications contain analog circular arcs with a green, amber and red band. The green band represents the
normal operating range, while the amber band represents transient limits (operation only acceptable for a
specified time) and the red band indicates unsafe operating conditions that require immediate attention.
The N1 and ITT pointers provide the analog display of the actual N1 and ITT values by pointing to their
representative actual value on the arc. The pointer color is white for normal operation (while in the green
band) and is displayed as amber and red when the parameter value is within those color bands. In addition,
the pointer will flash anytime its color changes to yellow or red. The digital readout for each engine
parameter is green while the indications are within their normal ranges. All other basic engine operating
indication in the EIS window are displayed as digital readouts and contain the same color philosophies as
previously discussed for N1 and ITT (i.e. Green for normal, amber for transient and red for unsafe). If the
sensor data for any engine parameter becomes invalid or unavailable the digital readout for that parameter
will be replaced with four amber dashes. In addition, if the N1 or ITT sensor data is invalid or unavailable,
the pointers will also be removed from the analog arc.
The EIS window also displays a ‘Start’ icon for each engine that is located on the outboard side of each ITT
analog circular arc. The ‘START’ icon will be displayed as green or amber and is based on on-side and off-
side engine start contactor position, N2% and if the APU is in a start sequence. The engine “START”
indication will be green with an N2 equal to or less than 45%. The “START” indication will turn amber if the
starter remains active with N2 above 45%
The EIS window also displays a ‘IGN’ icon for each engine that is located on the outboard side of each N2
digital readout. The ‘IGN’ icon will be displayed as green anytime the engine ignitors are being commanded.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
The EIS window also displays a ‘Sync’ icon for N1 Fan Sync and/or N2 Turbine Sync is active. The N1 Fan
sync icon is displayed between the N1 digital readout and the N2 Turbine Sync icon is displayed above the
N2% header. Both ‘SYNC’ icons will be displayed as green or amber and are based on signals received
from the EEC and landing gear position (N1 Fan ‘Sync). ”SYNC” will be green with the engines running
and Sync selected on and both main landing gear are up and locked. “SYNC” will be amber if either main
landing gear is not up and locked.
The EIS window also displays a red ‘Fire’ icon for each engine that is located within the ITT circular arc
when an engine fire or fire self-test is active. The red ‘Fire’ icons are provided to complement the existing
engine fire annunciators in the fire-tray and are only active when the existing engine fire annunciators are
active.
The middle portion of the EIS window contains temperature (RAT, SAT, ∆ISA) and fuel quantity and
temperature information. The RAT indication displayed in the EIS window, uses ARINC Label 130 from the
RH EEC. The SAT indication uses the existing heated dual-element Rosemount Total Air Temperature
(TAT) probe mounted on the lower right side of the aircraft nose fuselage. Both GDC 7400 air data
computers interface to the TAT probe and compute and transmit the TAT (A429 Label 211) and SAT (A429
Label 213). The ∆ISA temperature indication is defined as the temperature difference between SAT and
ISA and calculated internally within the G5000 system.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
EICAS Window (Normal) EICAS (Reversionary Mode)
2.5.2.2.1 Crew Alerting System (CAS)

All CAS messages implemented for this G5000 installation are being replicated based upon the original
crew warning panel annunciations. The same logic, visualization methods, inhibits, and prioritization
schemes, previously used to illuminate the various annunciations, are being duplicated for the G5000
system. Additional messages, that are applicable to the G5000 System operation, are also incorporated to
provide increased situational awareness for the flight crew. The new messages being added use the same
inhibit and prioritization characteristics as the previously installed system. Other characteristics with the
display of the various G5000 CAS messages include the following:
 Invalid data does not cause messages to be displayed.
 If a message is triggered, but invalid data causes the color to be uncertain, the lowest color is
displayed.
 Debounce – The G5000 debounce is processed and applied in 3 levels: 1) CAS alert logic, 2) CAS
alert triggers, 3) and LRU Inputs. Debounce for G5000 is specified in terms of active and not active
debounce. Alert debounce is the amount of time the logic condition must be true (or false), with all
relevant triggers satisfied, before a CAS message can be displayed (or removed). CAS trigger

190-02313-01 Revision 2
debounce may be applied to individual inputs (triggers) to the alert logic. Finally, depending on
input type, debounce may be applied directly within the LRU responsible for receiving and
processing the input (this method is not common).
 Update Rate – All CAS alerts default to a 1s update rate, unless otherwise specified.
 ON / OFF Delays – Slightly different than debounce, ON and OFF delays are also incorporated to
the CAS logic processing to match the legacy annunciator panel design. Unlike active debounce
which determines when the message posts, these delays affect when Master Caution or Master
Warning conditions are set or cleared, after a given message has been posted. For example, if a
20 second ON delay is configured, an amber message will post immediately as an ‘advisory’ in
steady state, and no Master Caution is illuminated. If message remains posted for greater than 20
seconds, the alert level is changed to a caution (the message begins to flash, and the Master
Caution is illuminated). Similarly, if an 8 second OFF delay is configured, after the alert trigger
clears, the CAS message and Master Caution will remain illuminated another 8 seconds before
automatically extinguishing (unless acknowledged before this period by the flight crew).
 Approximately 50% of the legacy CAS messages are from dual systems (typically Left/Right or Sys
1/Sys 2). Multi-system messages will be combined into 1 line, i.e., one CAS display line will show
System L, or System R, or System L-R. The exception to this is when the messages are in different
alert states. As an example, if System X L is posted in the Advisory state, and System X R is posted
in the Caution state, they will be on different lines.
Table 2-1 below provides a list of the CAS messages that were previously installed on the Crew
Warning Panel but are now displayed within the G5000 CAS with a brief description of the logic and
various inputs that are used for their display. Reference the Garmin wiring diagrams listed in Table 1-1
for a better depiction of the actual interfaces.
Table 2-1 – Legacy Crew Warning Panel Annunciations
Message Name Description

Indicates the LH (UD017) and/or RH (UE018) AC Generator bearings have worn out and the AC Generator
should be repaired or replaced as soon as practical (< 20 hrs.). There are sensors built into the bearings at
each end of the generator. The sensors are wired in parallel. When the bearing is worn out, a ground is
provided to the G5000. To display message.
AC BEARING L-R
GEA pins
1P71002-81: LH Bearing Fail = (GND)
2P71002-81: RH Bearing Fail = (GND)
Displayed when either nose access door is not properly latched. One switch for each latch and 2 latches per
door and 2 doors on airplane, one on the left and one on the right. The 4 discretes are connected in parallel
ACC DOOR UNLOCKED and provide a single input to the G5000 system. When a latch is unlatched, the respective switch will present
NOSE a ground to the G5000 system to display the message.
GEA pin
1P71002-36: LH Door Aft SW or FWD SW or RH Door Aft SW or FWD SW = (GND)
Displayed when the Aft Baggage Door, Tailcone Door or Battery Door are not closed. When a door is not
ACC DOOR UNLOCKED closed, the respective switch will present a ground to the G5000 system to display the message.
TAIL GSD pins
2P4111-18: AFT BAG DR (FWD or Aft SW) or Tailcone DR SW or Battery DR SW = (GND)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Displayed when the ACM has overheated (>420°F) a ground signal is sent to the G50000 system to display
the message.
The activation of the ACM Overheat message may also cause activation of the EMER PRESS CAS caution
ACM O'HEAT
message.
GEA pin
2P71003-47: ACM Overheat (GND)
Displayed when one of the four circuit breakers for the LH and RH start cards has tripped. A ground signal is
provided to the G5000 system to illuminate the message.
AFT J-BOX CB
GEA pin
1P71003-126: Aft J-Box CB Open (GND)
Displayed when either of the two 225 Amp cross-feed bus current limiters in the LH and RH Junction-Boxes
have opened. Each current limiter has a 5-amp sense circuit breaker connected in parallel. When either of
these current limiters open, current starts flowing through the respective circuit breaker, which then trips and
AFT J-BOX LMT provides a ground signal to G5000 System.
GEA pins
1P71003-109: Aft J-Box Limiter Open (GND)
Indicates that normal DC power has been lost on the respective LCR-93 Attitude Heading Reference System
(AHRS) and power has been transferred to the AHRS Auxiliary battery.
AHRS AUX PWR 1 2 GEA pins
1P71003-114: AHRS 1 AUX PWR RLY (GND)
2P71003-114: AHRS 2 AUX PWR RLY (GND)
Displayed when the supply air in the cabin air duct is too hot (> 300° F.). The Cabin Air Duct Overheat switch
AIR DUCT O'HEAT (SC013) in the supply duct provides a ground signal to the G5000 System to display the message.
CAB GSD pins
1P411-61: Cabin Duct Overheat (GND)
Displayed when the supply air in the cockpit air duct is too hot (> 300° F.). The Cockpit Air Duct Overheat
AIR DUCT O'HEAT switch (SF034) in the supply duct provides a ground signal to the G5000 System to display the message.
CKPT GSD pins
2P411-61: Cockpit Duct Overheat (GND)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Displayed when the Anti-Skid system is inoperative, turned off, in test mode or any time the LO BRK PRESS
CAS message is illuminated.
When on-ground, the Anti-Skid Controller (BN002) will send a ground signal to the G5000 System if a condition
to illuminate the message is present and the message will illuminate in a flashing state.
When in-air, the message is initially posted in steady state, and after a 20 second ON delay, the message
changes to flashing.
ANTI SKID INOP
When the ANTI SKID switch on the landing Gear control panel is set to ON and the rotary test switch is set to
the ANTI SKID position the flashing amber ANTI SKID CAS message will annunciate for 3 seconds and then
extinguish.
GSD pins
2P412-32: Anti-Skid Fail (Gnd)
1P411-52: LO BRK PRESS (Gnd)
The SafeFlight stall warning computer provides a 28 VDC signal to the G5000 during normal operation when
the system is valid. The loss of the 28VDC signal from the Stall Warning Computer causes the G5000 to
determine all stall warning and AOA inputs are invalid.
NOTE – This CAS message does not replace an existing annunciator panel light but instead provides an
AOA FAIL alternate indication to the Honeywell Primus system’s AOA flag shown on both legacy DUs during the same
condition.
GIA pins
1P605-3: AOA Fail (Loss of 28V)
2P605-3: AOA Fail (Loss of 28V)
A ground signal is provided from the AOA computer to the G5000 system to display the message
The message is displayed steady when on the ground and the PITOT & STATIC ANTI-ICE switch (SI024) is
selected on and no current is flowing through the AOA heating element or when the PITOT & STATIC ANTI-
ICE switch is selected off or the AOA HEATER C/B is open.
AOA HTR FAIL A flashing message will be displayed when in air and the PITOT & STATIC ANTI-ICE switch is selected on
and no current is flowing through the AOA heating element or when the PITOT & STATIC ANTI-ICE Switch is
selected off or the AOA HEATER C/B is open.
GIA pins
1P604-7: AOA Heater Fail (GND)
Only applicable to Citation Excel aircraft configured to the U.K. build standard (reference Cessna Configuration
Code S57-AA), and optionally equipped XLS aircraft.
Displayed when the APU fuel valve has not achieved the commanded position. The NZ025 APU CTRL PCB
APU FUEL VLV FAIL monitors the position of the fuel valve and provides a 28 Vdc signal to the G5000 when the valve is not in the
commanded position to display the message.
GEA pin
2P71002-85: APU FUEL VLV FAIL (28Vdc)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Displayed when the APU is ON and the APU Generator is OFF. A 28VDC signal is provided from the APU
Control PCB (NZ025) when the APU Master Switch (SF016) is ON and the APU Generator is OFF. When the
APU Generator is ON, the 28 VDC is removed from the signal line and the message is removed. When the
APU is On and the APU Generator is on-line, momentarily pressing the APU Push to Test switch (SF014) will
APU GEN OFF provide 28 VDC and enable the APU GEN OFF CAS message. The message will be removed when the Push
to Test switch is released.
GSD pin
2P412-41: APU Generator Off (28VDC)
The Baggage Smoke Detector was an optional system available for all Model 560XL aircraft, intended to be
used for back up fire detection purposes. The smoke detector itself (P/N 72-111211-102) is located on the
ceiling panel of the aft baggage compartment and receives its power through a separate circuit breaker
BAGGAGE SMOKE (HC086) located on the left-hand side circuit breaker panel in the cockpit. When the smoke detector detects
smoke, it outputs a ground signal to the G5000 system.
GEA pin
2P71003-100: Baggage Smoke Detected (GND)
Displayed when the battery temperature sensor measures greater than 145ºF.
BATT O'TEMP
See BATT O’TEMP > 160 logic.
Displayed when the battery temperature sensor measures greater than 160ºF. The analog battery temperature
is recorded by a temperature sensor and temperature module. The analog temperature is from the module is
sent to the G5000 system to set the message when greater than 160ºF. The analog temperature from the
module is also used as the Battery Temperature readout being displayed on the Battery Temperature Indicator.
BATT O'TEMP >160 When the rotary test switch is set to the BATT TEMP position the BATT O’TEMP >160 CAS message will
illuminate.
GEA pins
1P71001-38/39: Battery Temperature (Analog)
1P71003-92: Batt Temp Test Active (GND)
Upon aircraft power-up, the heating system PCB in the aft J-box conducts a test of the two bias heater blanket
thermostats. If either blanket fails the test, the Rudder Bias Heater PCB (NZ029) outputs a pulsed ground at
~1 – 3 Hz to the G5000 system to display the message. Also, upon aircraft power-up and after the system self-
test, the rudder bias heating system heats the cylinder, if required, to 16°C. During this heating process, the
message will be displayed in a steady state. GEA2 receives 2 discrete ground inputs to accommodate both
conditions to display the message.
BIAS HEATER FAIL
When the rotary test switch is set to the ANNU position, the steady amber BIAS HEATER FAIL CAS message
will illuminate.
GEA pins
2P71003-74: Rudder Bias Heater Fail (GND)
2P71003-69: Rudder Bias Heater Fail (Pulsed GND)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Displayed when the bleed air from the engine is too hot (>550° F). The Wing Anti-Ice Bleed Air overtemperature
switches (LH, ST017) and (RH, ST014) are in their respective (LH/RH) bleed air manifolds (connected to the
Bleed Air Precoolers) within the tailcone section (FS 450) and provide a 28VDC signal to the G5000 System
to display the message. The left and right Bleed Air overtemperature output signals are controlled by 20 second
BLD AIR O'HEAT time delay relays, KZ065 & KX064.
GEA pins
1P71002-110: Bleed Air Overheat LH (28VDC)
2P71002-110: Bleed Air Overheat RH (28VDC)
Displayed when the cabin pressure altitude is too high, as determined by the Pressurization Logic Module
Assembly (NZ002) for the following conditions:
 When the cabin pressure altitude is above 10,000 ft during operations at low altitude airports ( 8,000 ft.
MSL), and anytime the airplane altitude is > 24,000 ft.
 When the cabin pressure altitude is above 14,500 ft during operations at high altitude airports ( 8,000
CAB ALT
ft. MSL), with an aircraft altitude <24,500 ft.
The Pressurization Logic Module Assembly provides a 28V signal to the G5000 system when cabin pressure
is too high.
GIA pins
1P604-15: Cabin Altitude High (28VDC)
Displayed when the cabin door is open. When the door is open, the PC board sends a ground to the G5000
system to display the message.
CABIN DOOR GEA pins
1P71002-38: Cabin Door Monitor PCB = (GND)
2P71002-38: Cabin Door Monitor PCB = (GND)
Displayed when the cabin door is open and cabin door seal pressure is less than 5 PSI. A pressure switch
(SC028) connected to the cabin door seal provides a ground signal to the G5000 System to display the
DOOR SEAL message when seal pressure is below 5 PSI.
GEA pin
1P71003-74: Cabin Seal Press Switch (GND)
Displayed when the left or right EEC is operating in Manual mode. A ground signal is provided to the G5000
system from the EEC Transfer Relays within the LH (NZ021) and RH (NZ020) EEC Interface PCBs when the
LH (SI034) and RH (SI035) EEC Reversion switches are selected to the MANUAL position, or when either
EEC system detects an internal fault while the EEC Reversion switches are selected to the AUTO position.
EEC MANUAL L-R
GEA pin
1P71002-22: EEC Manual LH (GND)
2P71002-22: EEC Manual RH (GND)
Displayed when the emergency exit is open, and a proximity switch detects the door pin is not in place provides
a ground to the G5000 system to display the message.
EMER EXIT
GSD pin
2P411-63: Emer Exit Prox Switch (GND)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Displayed when emergency pressurization has been activated. Pressurization Logic Module Assembly
(NZ002) provides 28VDC to the emergency pressurization valve to provide additional inflow into the cabin.
This 28VDC signal is also sent to the G5000 System to display the message when emergency pressurization
is activated.
EMER PRESS
The ACM Overheat CAS message may also illuminate for those aircraft not incorporating SB560XL-21-19.
(Eff. -5002 to -5372 and -5502 to -5602
GEA pin
1P71002-85: Emergency Pressurization (28VDC)
Displayed in two states, steady and flashing: The message is displayed in a steady state when the
 Engine Anti-Ice or the Wing/Engine Anti-Ice switches are on while the aircraft is on-ground and the engine
temperature sensor input has not changed from a cold (< 65°F, active GND) state to hot (> 65°F, inactive
open) state.
 Engine Anti-Ice or the Wing/Engine Anti-Ice switches are on while the aircraft is in-air and the engine
temperature input remains cold (< 65°F) for less than 285 seconds. If this condition is present for greater
than 285 seconds the message will begin to flash.
The message will illuminate in a flashing state when the:
 The Engine Anti-Ice On input and the Wing/Engine Anti-Ice On inputs are inactive (Anti-Ice switches are
in the OFF position) and the Fan Stator Anti-Ice (FSAI) Valve Clsd input is inactive (open) or if either
Engine Anti-Ice On input or the Wing/Engine Anti-Ice On inputs are active (Anti-Ice switches are in the
ENG ANTI-ICE L-R ON position) and the Fan Stator Anti-Ice (FSAI) Valve Clsd input is active (closed).
GEA pins
1P71003-47: LH Engine Anti-Ice Cold (GND)
1P71002-23: LH Engine Anti-Ice On (GND)
1P71002-4: LH Fan Stator Anti-Ice Valve Clsd (GND)
1P71003-37: LH Wing/Engine Anti-Ice On (Loss GND)
2P71003-126: RH Engine Anti-Ice Cold (GND)
2P71002-23: RH Engine Anti-Ice On (GND)
2P71002-4: RH Fan Stator Anti-Ice Valve Clsd (GND)
2P71002-97: RH Wing/Engine Anti-Ice On (Loss GND)
Displayed when the engine vibration exceeds the specified limit. Each engine has an accelerometer, which is
wired to a monitoring unit. The vibration monitoring unit sends a ground signal to the G5000 System when the
engine vibration level is exceeded (determined by the Vibe monitor).
ENG VIB L-R
GEA pin
1P71002-35: LH Engine Vibration (GND)
2P71002-35: RH Engine Vibration (GND)
Displayed when the Avionics master switch is selected ON and the FDR (if installed) sets the fail discrete
ground output. If the FDR is not powered or if a failure is detected within the unit, the FDR will provide a ground
FDR FAIL signal to G5000 System to display the CAS message.
GEA pin
2P71003-72: FDR FAIL (GND)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Displayed when an engine fire bottle is low on pressure, as measured by a pressure switch on the bottles.
When either fire bottle is low on pressure (< 500 lbs./In2), a ground signal is provided to the G5000 System.,
FIRE EXT BOTL LOW which displays the CAS message.
GEA pin
1P71002-46: Fire Ext Bottle Low (GND)
Displayed when a system fault has been detected via the LH (UT021) and/or RH (UT020) engine Fire Detection
Control units. When a failure is detected, the fire detection controller sends a ground to the G5000 System,
FIRE DET SYS L-R GEA pins
1P71002-34: Fire Detect Fail LH (GND)
2P71002-34: Fire Detect Fail RH (GND)
When both fuel and hydraulic shutoff valves on one side become closed, the message for the respective side
will be displayed. When both firewall shutoff valves are closed, a switch in each valve sends a 28 Vdc signal
to the G5000 System.
The signals to the G5000 system are provided from the LH Hydraulic Cutoff Relay (VT035), LH Fuel Cutoff
Relay (VY007). RH Hydraulic Cutoff Relay (VT032) and the RH Fuel Cutoff Relay (VY006).
F/W SHUTOFF L-R GEA pins
1P71002-119: LH F/W S/O (Fuel) Closed (28V)
1P71002-105: LH F/W S/O (Hyd) Closed (28V)
2P71002-119: RH F/W S/O (Fuel) Closed (28V)
2P71002-105: RH F/W S/O (Hyd) Closed (28V)
Displayed in two states: flashing and steady.
Displayed in a steady state when the left or right Boost PUMP on input is active (28VDC) and the aircraft is on
the ground.
Displayed in a flashing state when the left and/or right boost PUMP on discrete input is active (28VDC), the
FUEL BOOST L-R LO FUEL PRESS discrete input is active (GND), the aircraft is in-air, Throttle/Fuel CUTOFF input is active
(OPEN).
GSD pins
1P412-43: Fuel Boost Pump On LH (28VDC)
2P412-43: Fuel Boost Pump On RH (28VDC)
Displayed in two states: Steady and flashing.
Displayed is a steady state when the fuel crossfeed switch is selected to the Left or Right fuel tank and the
crossfeed valve is open.
Displayed in a flashing state when the fuel crossfeed switch is selected to the OFF position and the crossfeed
valve is not closed
FUEL XFEED The G5000 System interface for the input signals is from the R Fuel PCB (NZ014) (XFeed Valve Open), the
Fuel Crossfeed Switch (SI004) , and the L Fuel PCB (NZ015) (Valve Closed)
GEA pins
1P71002-97: XFeed Valve Closed (28V)
1P71002-99: XFeed Valve Open (28V)
1P71002-14: Xfeed Switch Not Selected (SW Off) = (Gnd),

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Displayed when an engine fuel filter is being bypassed or is in an impending bypass state. When the pressure
exceeds the max allowable pressure differential across the fuel filter, the bypass switch provides a ground
signal to the G5000 System via the Left and Right EEC’s respectively.
FUEL FLTR BP L-R
GEA pins
1P17002-58: LH Fuel Filter Bypass (GND)
2P17002-58: RH Fuel Filter Bypass (GND)
Displayed when a fault within the fuel quantity indicating system is detected, as determined by the fuel quantity
signal conditioner (UC016). When the signal conditioner detects a failure, it provides a ground signal to the
G5000 System.
FUEL GAUGE L-R
GIA pins
1P604-14: LH Fuel Gauge Fault (GND)
2P604-14: RH Fuel Gauge Fault (GND)
Displayed when the left (KZ003) and right (KZ004) generator contactors are open simultaneously. 28 Volts to
the G5000 system indicates the respective contactor is closed and the message is extinguished.
GEN OFF L-R GIA pin
1P604-4: LH Gen Contactor Closed (28VDC)
2P604-4: RH Gen Contactor Closed (28VDC
Displayed when one or both engines are operating in Ground Idle mode (N2 ≤ 46% with EEC’s in AUTO mode
and the aircraft on the ground). In air the message will if N2 ≤ 46% and the EEC’s are in AUTO mode. A ground
signal from both EEC Ground Idle input signals will display the message. During takeoff with EECs in AUTO
mode, the GND IDLE CAS message will remain displayed until the aircraft is in the air.
GND IDLE GEA pin
2P71002-13: LH/RH Ground Idle (GND)
GIA pin
1/2P605-46 LH/RH Squat Switch on ground (GND)
Displayed when the hydraulic system is pressurized during landing gear actuation, flap actuation, speed brake
actuation, or thrust reverser operation.
The hydraulic pressure switch (SY032) closes and provides a ground signal to the G5000 system when the
HYD PRESS hydraulic pressure increases above 185 PSI to display the message. When the hydraulic system pressure
drops below 155 PSI +/- 5 PSI, the switch opens and extinguishes the message.
GEA pin
1P71002-12: Hydraulic Pressure (GND)
The message indicates either of the two aft divider pocket doors, that separate the lavatory from the cabin,
are not latched open for takeoff or landing. When the lavatory door is closed, and the aircraft is on the ground
(gear down and locked) or in the air and flaps are not in the 0 degree position a mechanical switch on each
LAV DOOR pocket door will present a ground to the G5000 system to display the message. When the door is latched
open, the switch presents an open to the G5000 system, which removes the message.
GSD pin
2P412-34: Lavatory Door Switch (GND)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
The optional Lavatory Smoke Detector system is available for the Model 560XL ‘Excel’ aircraft on S/N -5216,
and S/N -5230 and on, and all XLS aircraft and is intended to be used for back up fire detection purposes. Two
different message nomenclature were used based on aircraft effectivities SMOKE DETECT (applicable to S/Ns
-5216, -5230 and on, and -5501 thru -5634) and LAV SMOKE DETECT (applicable to S/Ns -5635 and on).
LAV SMOKE DETECT
The smoke detector itself (P/N 72-111211-102) is located on the ceiling panel of the lavatory of the Model
-or-
560XL and receives power through a separate circuit breaker (HC086) located on the left-hand side circuit
SMOKE DETECT breaker panel in the cockpit. The lavatory smoke detector, when detecting smoke, outputs a ground signal to
the G5000 system to display the message.
GEA pin
2P71003-83: Lavatory Smoke Detected (GND)
Displayed when the brake pressure is below 900 PSI and the right main gear is down and locked. A ground
signal is provided to the G5000 system from a series combination of the Brake System Low Pressure Switch
(SY009) and the RH Gear Down Lock Switch (SR008) to display the message. A 30 second delay that inhibits
the message during the initial G5000 System power up is incorporated (approx. 30 secs.), when the landing
gear is down and locked. This delay allows the brake accumulator pressure to build up to the proper level
(1500 PSI +/- 50 PSI). After the initial system power up, if low brake pressure exists or occurs anytime
thereafter, the message will illuminate and flash. When the brake pressure becomes greater than 1100 PSI,
the pressure switch will provide an open to the G5000 system to remove the message.
Once the logic is true when the aircraft is on the ground, the message will continue to flash, and the Master
LO BRK PRESS Caution annunciators will continue to illuminate steady, regardless if the Master Caution or Master Warning
reset switches are pressed. The flashing CAS message and the steady Master Caution annunciator output
shall continue to function this way, until the brake pressure returns to normal (> 1100 PSI).
In air, if the logic is satisfied, the message will initially post in a steady state, and will begin flashing after a 20
second ON delay.
The ANTI-SKID INOP amber CAS message will also illuminate in conjunction with the illumination of this
message.
GSD pins
1P411-52: LO BRK PRESS (GND)
Displayed when the fuel level in the respective fuel tank is low as determined by LOW FUEL FLOAT
SWITCHES (LH, SL007) (RH, SR020). When the fuel level is less than approximately 360 lbs. (+/- 20lbs.), the
appropriate Lo Fuel Float Switch sends a ground signal to the G5000 System to display the message. Note -
The message has a 34 second delay prior to activation to allow for stabilization of the fuel tank levels after
LO FUEL LEVEL L-R maneuvering.
GIA pins
1P605-59 Fuel Level Low LH (GND)
2P605-59 Fuel Level Low RH (GND)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Displayed when the left or right engine fuel pressure has fallen below 5.3 to 5.8 PSI, while the engine is
running. Engine running begins when the start contactor opens and ends when the throttle is put into cutoff.
When the fuel pressure is low, a pressure switch provides a ground signal to the G5000 System to display the
message.
The message is displayed in two states: steady and flashing, the message illuminates steady if the fuel system
has low pressure prior to engine starts while the aircraft is on the ground. The message will flash if the fuel
system has low pressure after both engines are started with aircraft on the ground or in flight and the throttle
is out of cutoff.
GIA pins
LO FUEL PRESS L-R 1P604-17: LH Low Fuel Pressure (GND)
1P605-49: LH Fuel Cutoff (GND)
GSD pins
2P411-62: RH Low Fuel Pressure (GND)
2P412-31: RH Fuel Cutoff (GND)
GEA pins
1P71003-31: LH Engine Start Cycle (28VDC)
2P71003-31: RH Engine Start Cycle (28VDC)
Displayed when the hydraulic fluid flow rate is low (below  0.35 to 0.55 GPM) from either engine driven
hydraulic pump. The left and right hydraulic pump low flow rate switches (SY001 and SY002) provide ground
signals to the G5000 System when the respective hydraulic fluid flow-rate is too low.
LO HYD FLOW L-R
GEA pins
1P71002-15: LH Low Hyd Flow (GND)
2P71002-15: RH Low Hyd Flow (GND)
Displayed when the hydraulic fluid level in the reservoir is low (approx. 74 cubic inches). The Hydraulic Low-
Level Switch (ST001) is a mechanical switch on the reservoir that provides a ground signal to the G5000
LO HYD LEVEL System when the fluid level is low.
GEA pins
1P71002-13: Low Hyd Fluid Level (GND)
Displayed when the respective engine oil pressure is low. When the oil pressure switch senses oil pressure
below 20 psi, the respective engine’s pressure switch provides a ground signal to the G5000 System. Note –
The annunciation will extinguish when/if the pressure switch increases above 25 psi (aircraft effectivities, -
5001 to- 5096) or 35 psi (aircraft effectivities, -5097 to -6000).
LO OIL PRESS L-R
GEA pins
1P17002-74: L. Engine Oil Pressure Low (GND)
2P17002-74: R. Engine Oil Pressure Low (GND

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Displayed when on the ground and one or more of the following conditions exist:
 Flaps not within takeoff position (<7° or >15°)
 Pitch Trim not in takeoff position
 Horizontal Stabilizer not in takeoff position (-2°)
 Speed Brakes extended
 Parking Brake Set
Additionally, the message will change to a flashing state and cause the Master Caution light to illuminate when
NO TAKEOFF both throttles are advanced to the Takeoff position (approx. 85% N2) along with the No Takeoff aural alert
(500 Hz tone with .5 sec. duty cycle) that is generated by the Nose Takeoff PCB. Depressing the Master
Caution Reset switches will cause to the CAS caution message to become steady state and extinguish the
Master Caution annunciators. The aural alert tone will continue until the conditions listed above have been
corrected, the takeoff has been aborted, or the aircraft becomes airborne.
GIA pins
2P604-21: No Takeoff (GND)
1P604-24: No Takeoff (GND)
2P605-43: NTO PCB M/C Trigger (GND)
1P605-37: NTO PCB M/C Trigger (GND)
Displayed when an engine oil filter is impending bypass (oil pressure exceeds the max allowable pressure
differential across the oil filter). The oil filter differential pressure switch provides an open signal to the G5000
System to display the message.
OIL FLTR BP L-R
GEA pins
1P17003-19: LH Oil Filter Bypass (Open)
2P17003-19: RH Oil Filter Bypass (Open)
The LH and RH Pitot/Static Heaters use current sensors (UC006/UC025) & (UC007/UC024) to monitor their
respective set of heater elements (one Pitot & two Static per system). The current sensors are wired in series
with each of their respective Left and Right Pitot/Static heater elements. When current is not flowing through
one or more of the system’s sensors, a ground is provided to G5000 System.
The message is displayed in a steady state while on the ground when the PITOT & STATIC ANTI-ICE switch
(SI024) is selected on and no current is flowing through one or more of the Left and/or Right heating elements
or when the PITOT & STATIC ANTI-ICE switch is selected off or the respective L/R PITOT STATIC C/B is
P/S HTR L-R open.
The message is displayed in a flashing state while in the air when the PITOT & STATIC ANTI-ICE switch is
selected on and no current is flowing through one or more of the Left and/or Right heating elements or when
the PITOT & STATIC ANTI-ICE Switch is selected off or the respective C/B is open.
GEA pin
1P71003-108 LH Pitot-Static Heat Fail (GND)
2P71003-108 RH Pitot-Static Heat Fail (GND)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Displayed if the radome cooling fan speed is detected below 3000 RPM while the aircraft is on the ground.
The radome fan does not operate while airborne. The Cabin Door Monitor PCB (NZ007) will provide a ground
to the G5000 system if a fan failure is sensed.
RADOME FAN
When the rotary test switch is set to the AVN position, the amber RADOME FAN CAS message will illuminate.
GEA pin
2P71002-14: Radome Fan Fail (GND)
Upon aircraft power-up, the heating system PCB in the aft J-box conducts a test of the two bias heater blanket
thermostats. If either blanket fails the test, the Rudder Bias Heater PCB (NZ029) outputs a pulsed ground at
~1 – 3 Hz and illuminates the legacy Rudder Bias annunciator, that is still installed to flash. When this condition
is active, a flashing amber Rudder Bias CAS message will also be displayed.
NOTE – Reference 56XMM Section 27-20-05 Rudder Bias System Troubleshooting, Paragraph 4 Rudder Bias
Heater Test for complete description of the NZ029’s operating behavior.
RUDDER BIAS
NOTE – Upon aircraft power-up and after self-test, the rudder bias heating system heats the cylinder, if
required, to 16°C. During this heating process, the steady (amber) BIAS HEATER FAIL CAS message is
posted.
GEA pin
2P71003-74: Rudder Bias Heater Fail (GND)
2P71003-69: Rudder Bias Heater Fail (Pulsed GND)
Displayed when either speed brake panel is extended. A mechanical switch on each speed brake panel sends
a 28VDC signal to the G5000 to display the message and when the speed brakes are not extended the 28VDC
signal to the G5000 system is removed. While the speed brakes are extending or retracting, the HYD PRESS
annunciation will also be displayed.
The 28VDC signals are provided from the Left Speed Brake Switch (SL003) and Right Speed Brake Switch
(SR002). There are two configurations based on FDR installation:
For aircraft equipped with the Honeywell JAA SSFDR, separate Left Speed Brake Switch (SL003) and Right
Speed Brake Switch (SR002) inputs are provided to the G5000 system
SPD BRK EXTEND
GSD pins
1P412-44: L Spd Brake Extended (28VDC)
2P412-44: R Spd Brake Extended (28VDC)
For aircraft NOT equipped with the Honeywell JAA SSFDR, the Left Speed Brake Switch (SL003) and Right
Speed Brake Switch (SR002) are connected in series for a single input to the G5000 system
GSD pin
1P412-44: Spd Brake Extended (28VDC)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
See section 27-40-00 of the C56XMM Maintenance Manual for a description of the Horizontal Stabilizer
operation. The logic that is sent to the G5000 system for this message resides in the resides in the Two-
Position Tail PCB (NZ017), which also works in conjunction with the logic from the Hydraulic Control PCB
(NZ016) and the No Takeoff PCB (NZ008), as well as the Flap position control switches discrete outputs. The
G5000 System receives two discrete inputs from the Two-Position Tail PCB. The Stab Position Master Caution
Trip discrete output indicates that the Two-Position Tail is not in the correct position for the aircraft configuration
and will trigger message. The Stab Position Output discrete indicates that the inputs to the Two Position Tail
PCB are contradictory or invalid and the correct stab position cannot be determined and will illuminate the
message in a steady state when on the ground or in a flashing state when in-air.
The Two-Position Tail PCB receives inputs from the flap handle control switches (SC050 and SC051), the
Two-Position Tail position switches (UF030 and UF031), and the airspeed >215 Kts. discrete output from the
Airspeed Switch (SF022).
The Two-Position Tail PCB will set the Master Caution Trip discrete for the following conditions:
 If the stabilizer position does not reach the up position within 32 ± 3 secs. after flaps retracted, or
within 42 ± 3 secs. of landing gear operation.
STAB MIS COMP  If the stabilizer is moving while at airspeeds greater than 215 kts. ± 10kts
The Two-Position Tail PCB will set the Stab Position Fail discrete for the following conditions:
 If the flap handle switches indicate flaps up and flaps down simultaneously.
 If the stabilizer position does not reach the up position within 32 ± 3 secs. after flaps retracted, or
within 42 ± 3 secs. of landing gear operation.
 If the stabilizer is moving while at airspeeds greater than 215 kts. ± 10kts
 If the stabilizer position does not reach the down position within 32 ± 3 secs. after flaps are moved
out of the 0˚ position or within 42 ± 3 secs. of landing gear operation.
GEA pins
P71002-12: Stab Position Fail (GND)
1P71003-100: Stab Position Fail (GND)
1P71002-111: 2PT PCB M/C Trip (GND)
2P71002-99: 2PT PCB M/C Trip (GND)
The Standby Pitot/Static heater system uses current sensors (UC004) & (UC005) to monitor the respective
heater elements (one Pitot & two Static). The sensors are wired in series with each respective Standby
Pitot/Static heater element. When current is flowing through a heater element, it also flows through the
respective current sensor. When current is not flowing through one or more of the sensors, a ground is provided
to G5000 System to display the message.
The message is displayed in a steady state while on the ground and when the PITOT & STATIC ANTI-ICE
STBY P/S HTR switch (SI024) is selected on and no current is flowing through one or more of the standby heating elements
or when the PITOT & STATIC ANTI-ICE switch is selected off or the STBY P/S HTR C/B is open.
The message is displayed in a flashing state while in the air and when the PITOT & STATIC ANTI-ICE switch
is selected on and no current is flowing through one or more of the standby heating elements or when the
PITOT & STATIC ANTI-ICE Switch is selected off or the STBY P/S HTR C/B is open.
GIA pin
2P605-38: Standby Pitot-Static Heater Failed (GND)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Displayed when a failure or fault is detected in the tail de-icing system. The Tail De-Ice PCB provides a ground
signal to the G5000 System to display the message.
TL DEICE FAIL L-R GEA pin
1P71002-26: Tail De-Ice Fail LH (GND)
2P71002-26: Tail De-Ice Fail RH (GND)
Displayed when there is air pressure (>15 PSI) in the pneumatic rubber boots on the tail horizontal stabilizer.
Two pressure switches (SV005, LH) and (SV004, RH) located in the service air supply system for each
respective de-icing boot send a ground signal to the G5000 System when boot air pressure is greater than 16
+/- 1 PSIG.
TL DEICE PRESS L-R Note: When operating in the AUTO mode, the message will cycle between the Left Side and Right Side during
the 6 sec. it takes for the boots to inflate, causing the message to flash while the boots are inflating.
GEA pin
1P71003-98: Tail De-Ice Pressure >15 PSI (GND)
2P71003-98: Tail De-Ice Pressure >15 PSI (GND)
Displayed in two states, steady and flashing: The message is displayed in a steady state when the
 Wing/Engine Anti-Ice On or the Wing XFlow switches are on while the aircraft is on-ground and the
wing temperature input to the G5000 has not changed from a cold (< 220°F, active GND) state to
hot (> 220°F, inactive open) state.
 Wing/Engine Anti-Ice On or the Wing XFlow switches are on while the aircraft is in-air and the wing
temperature input to the G5000 remains cold (< 220° F) for less than 285 seconds. If this condition
is present for greater than 285 seconds the message will begin to flash.
The message will illuminate in a flashing state when the:
 Wing/Engine Anti-Ice On or the Wing XFlow switches on while on ground or in-air and the wing
WING ANTI-ICE L-R temperature changes from hot (> 220° F) to cold (< 220° F).
The Engine Anti-Ice Cold (Low Temp) inputs are provided by the Left and Right Anti-Ice PCBs, NZ019 and
NZ018.
GEA pin
1P71002-89 Wing X-Flow Switch On (L.GND)
1P71003-83 LH Wing Anti-Ice Low Temp (GND)
1P71003-37 LH Wing/Eng Anti-Ice On (L.GND)
2P71003-109 RH Wing Anti-Ice Low Temp (GND)
2P71002-97 RH Wing/Eng Anti-Ice On (L.GND)
Over Temp switches are located on each wing behind the heat shield on the forward wing spar and inside the
fuselage at each wing root to monitor wing temperature. When the temperature is over 160° F at either forward
wing spar switch, the switch provides a ground signal to the G5000 System to display the message, or over
220° F at either wing root a ground signal is sent to the G5000 system to display the message.
WING O'HEAT L-R
GEA pins
1P71003-39: LH Wing Anti-Ice Overheated (GND)
2P71003-41: RH Wing Anti-Ice Overheated (GND)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Displayed when the respective anti-ice controller has detected a windshield heat failure. Windshield heating is
controlled by 2 windshield anti-ice controllers (UT027) and (UT028). The windshield anti-ice system is powered
when the aircraft battery switch is turned on. When a failure is detected, the respective controller sends a
ground signal to the G5000 System.
W/S FAULT L-R When the Anti Ice/De Ice panel WINDSHIELD L & R switches are set to ON and the rotary test switch is set
to W/S TEMP, the amber W/S FAULT L R CAS message will illuminate.
GSD pins
1P411-51: LH Windshield Heat Fail (GND)
2P411-51: RH Windshield Heat Fail (GND)
Displayed when either of the two windshield anti-ice controllers has detected an overheat situation. When the
anti-ice controllers detect an overheat condition, they will provide a ground signal to the G5000 System.
When the Anti Ice/De Ice panel WINDSHIELD L & R switches are set to ON and the rotary test switch is set
to the W/S TEMP position, the amber W/S O’HEAT L R CAS message will annunciate for 3 seconds and then
W/S O'HEAT L-R extinguish.
GSD pins
1P411-44: LH Windshield Overheat (GND)
2P411-44: RH Windshield Overheat (GND)
2.5.2.3 Electronic Checklist

The Electronic Checklists (ECL) function allows the user to view and interact with aircraft checklists. The
Checklist contents are displayed on the GDUs and the checklist controls are provided on the checklist page
of the GTC 575. The Garmin Checkset tool is provided by Garmin, at no charge to the aircraft operator, to
generate and edit the custom checklist files, which are saved as chklist.gcl. The Checkset tool can be
downloaded from the Fly.Garmin/support website under the Tools tab (https://fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/)
on the Support page and contains a User’s Guide that provides additional instructions for the formatting
and creation of the checklist files. The checklist is created or edited end-user without involvement from
Garmin.
Once the end-user creates the electronic checklist using the Checkset Tool, it is then downloaded onto an
SD card and inserted into the top or bottom MFD card slot. Upon power-up, the G5000 system will check
the MFD SD cards for any checklist files and will then transfer the electronic checklist to the GDU internal
memory. Once the Checklist is transferred to the GDU, the SD card containing the checklist files can be
removed and is no longer required.
Please note that operational usage of the checklist file may require regulatory approval. The OEM/End user
is expected to obtain the required approval.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
2.5.3 Components
2.5.3.1 GEA 7100 Engine/Airframe Unit (Qty 2)

The Garmin Engine and Airframe (GEA) 7100 interfaces with various sensors on the aircraft and transmits
the received airframe and engine data to the GIAs and GSD2 via a RS-485 digital interface. The GEA
provides information for the engine instrumentation presented on the MFD and system messages presented
on the GTC. Engine/airframe instrumentation is also presented on the PFD and/or MFD while the system
is in reversionary mode. The GEA to GIA data path is the primary data path while the GEA to GSD2 data
path is the secondary data path for engine information transmittal to the respective displays. All
configuration settings are contained within the G5000 system software. The GEA has a configuration
module with a K-Type thermocouple for ITT cold junction compensation installed in the connector backshell
strain-relief of P2131 (GEA1) and P2141 (GEA2). The thermocouple is used in conjunction with the
configuration module temperature sensor to compensate for temperature probe errors resulting from the
dissimilar metals at the pin contacts.
Figure 2-18, GEA 7100 Engine and Airframe Unit
2.5.3.2 GSD 41 Data Concentrator (Qty 2)

The GSD 41 expands the Input and Output (I/O) capabilities of the GIFD. The GSD interfaces to various
airframe discrete outputs to support third party systems. The GSDs interface via ARINC 429 with third party
equipment such as Distance Measuring Equipment (DME), Cabin Entertainment System (CES), and
Automatic Direction Finder (ADF). The GSDs interface with Garmin LRUs such as the GWX Processor via
HSDB. The #2 GSD provides the secondary data path (via RS-485) for display of the LH and RH primary
engine parameters.
Figure 2-19, GSD 41 Data Concentrator

190-02313-01 Revision 2
2.5.3.3 Flight Data Recorder
2.5.3.4 Fairchild / L3 F1000 Flight Data Recorder (Optional Interface)

This STC supports an interface between the G5000 avionics and Model 560XL aircraft equipped with the
provisional Fairchild L3 F1000 Flight Data Recorder (P/N S603-1000-00).
NOTE
Installers are responsible to obtain an airworthiness approval to enable this
interface.
The following outputs from the Garmin G5000 System are provided.
 Autopilot engaged status discrete output
 Discrete output indicating transmission on COM 1, COM 2, COM3 (if equipped with GDR 66 VHF Voice/
Datalink Transceiver) and HF radio (if equipped with HF)
 ARINC 429 Label 203 Pressure Altitude, Label 206 Calibrated Airspeed, and Label 211 Total Air
Temperature to the Patriot Systems Data Converter
 LH and RH Engine N1 output signals (0-5Vdc)
2.5.3.5 Honeywell SSFDR (JAA)

Allied-Signal / Honeywell Solid State Flight Data Recorder (SSFDR) (P/N 980-4700-025).
This recorder was included for JAA and other foreign-registered and some U.S.-based Citation Excel and
XLS aircraft. This recorder previously utilized an ARINC 717 input from a Teledyne FDAU and recorded at
a rate of 64 words-per-second. For this STC, the Teledyne FDAU is removed and replaced by a G5000
avionics ARINC 717 output directly to the SSFDR. The existing AMETEK 3-axis accelerometer is retained.
A separate FDR sub-frame and parameter word map specification for this STC is available to installers and
maintainers (reference Garmin document 190-02313-04).
2.5.3.6 Cockpit Voice Recorder

This STC supports an interface between the G5000 avionics and those Model 560XL aircraft equipped with
the existing CVRs.
2.5.3.7 Fairchild / L3 A200S Cockpit Voice Recorder (P/N S200-0012-00)
NOTE
The L3 A200S CVR is not capable of receiving GMT 429 input. For Citation Excel
installations that pair an A200S CVR with an L3 F1000 FDR, the FDR provides the
Time Synch tone directly to the A200S CVR’s 3rd crew member audio channel
(reference Cessna Avionics Wiring Diagram 8622116). This interface remains
unaffected by the installation of G5000.
NOTE
The G5000 avionics does not provide a replacement FSK time code output. As a
result, the combination of Honeywell SSFDR paired with an L3 A200S CVR is not

190-02313-01 Revision 2
supported in this STC. For affected Citation Excel S/Ns, installers must upgrade
the CVR installation to an L3 FA2100 capable of receiving a GMT 429 input.
This recorder was factory-installed in Excel aircraft beginning at S/N -5001 through -5204.
The G5000 System provides uninterrupted pilot and copilot audio to the CVR from the respective GMA 36B
audio panel’s summed audio output.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
2.5.3.8 L3 FA2100 Cockpit Voice Recorder (P/N 2100-1020-02)
NOTE
For aircraft equipped with the Honeywell SSFDR P/N 980-4700-025 only, the
G5000 avionics replaces the existing FSK time code input provided from the
Teledyne FDAU with ARINC 429 GMT time provided from GSD1.
This recorder was factory-installed in Excel aircraft beginning at S/N -5205 and subsequent, and all XLS
aircraft.
The G5000 avionics provides uninterrupted pilot and copilot audio to the CVR from the respective GMA
36B audio panel’s summed audio output.
2.5.3.9 Cabin Entertainment System (CES)

This STC supports a provisional ARINC 429 GAMA General Purpose output via GSD #2 for installed cabin
entertainment systems. Refer to wiring diagram listed in Table 1-1, for further interface information. Refer
to the General Arrangement drawing for additional information.
NOTE
 Installers are responsible to obtain an airworthiness approval to enable this
interface.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
2.6 (ATA 34) Navigation & EFIS
2.6.1 General
The G5000 navigation system is an integrated system with the primary functions distributed throughout
various Line Replaceable Units (LRUs) within the G5000 system with the GIAs providing the VHF ground
based (VOR, LOC, Glideslope) and satellite based (GPS WAAS) navigation functions. Various other G5000
LRUs provide navigation functionality, which include the GTX 3000 Transponder, GDC 7400 air data
computer others described in 2.6.3.
2.6.2.1 VHF Navigation

Lateral (VOR/LOC) guidance is displayed on the PFD Course Deviation Indicator (CDI). The glideslope
indicator appears to the left of the altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is tuned in the active NAV field.
Failure of the GS/LOC/VOR is annunciated to the crew by an being amber X over-laid on the HSI CDI and
vertical deviation fields.
2.6.2.2 Satellite Navigation
FMS lateral guidance is displayed on the PFD Course Deviation Indicator (CDI). The FMS glidepath
indicator is analogous to the glideslope indicator. When a GPS approach supporting WAAS vertical
guidance (LPV) is loaded into the FMS flight plan and the FMS is the selected navigation source, the
glidepath indicator appears left of the altimeter.
The FMS Navigation functions include direct to, and flight planning. The direct to function allows the crew
to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the selected destination. The flight plan
uses GPS to determine the aircraft position and a navigational database to provide the elements (e.g.
waypoints, VORs) from which a flight plan is constructed. Given the position and flight plan the FMS then
calculates the course to follow.
The G5000 system allows FMS flight plans to be created, edited, and activated by the crew from either a
GTC unit or an AFD window on the PFD. The flight plan window on the touch screen controller can be
accessed by touching the FPL icon on a touch screen controller desktop. The PFD flight plan AFD window
is enabled and disabled by pressing the FPL key of the applicable display controller. FMS Flight planning
consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding waypoints along airways, and
inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed.
FMS calculations are performed by the GDUs. Each PFD and MFD always performs its own FMS
calculations. The pilot’s side PFD/FMS will normally use GPS1 and the co-pilot’s side PFD/FMS will
normally use GPS2. If both GPS sensors are not equally available, both sides can use the same sensor.
When this occurs, there is an amber PFD annunciation (e.g. BOTH ON GPS 1/2).
2.6.2.3 Global Positioning System (GPS)

Each GIA contains a WAAS augmented GPS receiver. The power supply for this GPS receiver is located
on the Main 1 PCB. The GPS power supply receives power from Main 2 PCB. The Main 1 PCB connects
to the GPS receiver through board to board connectors. Each GIA interfaces to its own dedicated GPS
antenna. Each GIA is connected via HSDB (Ethernet) directly to its onside PFD.
When both GPS/SBAS receivers are inoperative there is a loss of GPS Position. This will affect GPS
Navigation. The FMS Navigation will enter one of two modes: Dead Reckoning mode (DR) or a No Solution
Mode.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
In Dead Reckoning mode, aircraft position will be based upon the last valid GPS position and estimated by
Dead Reckoning methods. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction affect the estimated position
substantially. Dead Reckoning is only available in Enroute and Oceanic phase of flight. DR mode will
become active when over 30 NM from the destination or departure airport.
In Dead Reckoning mode, the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP will continue to be displayed. Topographic data
is removed. On the map the own-ship airplane symbol is overwritten with an amber ‘DR’. On the HSI an
amber DR is displayed within the compass card. Course deviation information is displayed by an amber
CDI. The autopilot and/or flight director may be coupled to the FMS during Dead Reckoning mode.
Terminal and Approach modes (i.e. within 30 nm of both departure and destination airport) do not support
DR. A no GPS solution is indicated to the crew by an amber NO FMS POSITION displayed over the
Navigation MAP. The airplane symbol is removed from all maps. The navigation map will remain centered
at the last known position. On the HSI the CDI bar is removed, but the TO or FROM indicator remains.
Lastly when there is a loss of GPS position or GPS integrity monitoring is lost the amber GPS LOI is
displayed adjacent to the HSI. The amber GPS LOI can post without loss of GPS position. When it does, it
indicates to the crew that GPS integrity monitoring has been lost. In order for a GPS receiver to perform
fault detection (integrity monitoring) it must be within an SBAS coverage area and be receiving an SBAS
satellite or it must be receiving at least five visible satellites with satisfactory geometry.
With SBAS, there is a ground network that continuously monitors the signals from all satellites in view over
the SBAS coverage area. The integrity status of the satellite network is uplinked to the SBAS satellite and
in turn downlinked to each receiver that is receiving the SBAS satellite signal.
If the airplane is not within an SBAS coverage area or if the necessary SBAS satellite is not received, then
integrity is provided using RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring). RAIM is the technique that
requires at least 5 satellites. RAIM detects errors by cross-comparing satellites whenever more than the
minimum required for calculating a position (4 satellites) are being received.
Note: WAAS is the name of the US SBAS system; in Europe, they have EGNOS; in Japan, they have MSAS
and in India, they have GAGAN.
2.6.3 Components
2.6.3.1 GDU 1450W PFD (QTY 2) & MFD (QTY 1)

PFD Description
The Garmin Display Unit (GDU) 1450W is a 14” wide aspect ratio with twelve softkeys along the bottom
bezel that provides the central display and various user interface functions for the Garmin G5000 system.
The GDU 1450W contains a Light Emitting Diode (LED) backlight with a wide aspect ratio display format
and Wide Extended Graphics Array (WXGA) resolution (1920 x 1200). The GDU 1450W on the Textron
Model 560XL is configured for a dual PFD and single MFD operation.
The PFD formats include (1) a full-screen view that can also display an inset map or HSI map, (2) a 40/60
format with a MFW or (3) a reversionary mode that displays a MFW with the EICAS window. The PFDs are
controlled by the GTC 575, GCU 275 or the GDU softkeys.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Full PFD w/ Inset Map Full PFD w/ HSI Map
Normal 40/60 PFD w/MFW Reversionary PFD
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on each PFD:
Flight & Navigation Instrument Functions
 Airspeed Indicator that shows – Indicated airspeed – Airspeed awareness ranges – Vspeed
reference bugs – True airspeed – Mach number – Trend vector
 Groundspeed
 Attitude Indicator with Slip/skid indication
 Altimeter that shows – Trend vector – Altitude preselect – Barometric setting – Barometric setting
preview window – Selected Altitude
 Vertical Deviation that shows Glideslope, and Glidepath Indicators
 Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
 Vertical Navigation (VNAV) indications
 Time/Wind/Temperature (delta ISA & RAT)
 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) that shows – HSI Map – Turn Rate Indicator – Bearing pointers
and information windows – Navigation source – Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) – DME
Information
 Radar Altimeter (RA)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Supplemental Interface Functions
 Interfacing with the GIA 64E Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) and other GDUs
 Control and display of dual communications transceivers operating in the 118.00 to 136.975 MHz
range in 8.33 kHz or 25 kHz frequency spacing
 Control and display of dual VOR/ILS receivers tuning from 108.00 to 117.95 MHz in 50 kHz
increments
 Display of autopilot modes, Garmin GWX Processor, etc.
MFD Description
The center GDU is designated as the Multi-Function Display (MFD) and displays engine indications and
CAS messages on the LH side of the display and single or dual MFWs on the RH side that contain various
data and map displays to enhance flight crew situational awareness. The selection of a single full MFW or
dual MFWs on the MFD is made using the GTC 575 Touchscreen Controllers.
PFD & MFD Reversionary Mode

In the event of a GDU failure, the G5000 supports a display reversionary mode that can be manually
selected from the Display Format and Dimming (DFD) panel. The DFD panel is also used to change the
dimming level of each of the GDUs and GTCs and is shown below:
Figure 2-20, Display Format and Dimming Panel (DFD Panel)

Refer to section 2.1.3.1 for a general description of the GIA 64E.
2.6.3.3 GTX 3000 Transponder (QTY 2)

The Garmin Transponder (GTX) 3000 is a remote mounted Mode S and Automatic Dependent Surveillance-
Broadcast (ADS-B) compliant transponder. The GTX 3000 provides Mode A, C, and S capabilities for Air
Traffic Control (ATC), and Traffic Information System (TIS) surveillance requirements. The GTX 3000
provides ADS-B Out real-time position information to ATC and those aircraft equipped with ADS-B In. The
GTX 3000 communicates with the on-side GIA 64E through an RS-232 digital interface. This STC
installation allows for installation of two GTX 3000 diversity transponders. Additionally, for Traffic Collision

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Avoidance System (TCAS) II operations, the GTX 3000 transponder communicates with the existing TCAS
Processor through ARINC 429 digital interfaces (transmit and receive).
For Excel aircraft not equipped with factory Mode S Diversity transponders, this STC installs two DMNI50-
2 L-band antennas in the same fuselage locations as the factory-approved diversity antennas.
Otherwise, existing antennas are used to support the transponder functions.
Figure 2-21, GTX 3000 Transponder
2.6.3.4 GDC 7400 Digital Air Data Computer (QTY 2)

The Garmin Air Data Computer (GDC) 7400 is a remote mounted device that provides air data for flight
instrumentation, autopilot and yaw damper. The system measures aircraft static and impact pressure
information from the pressure transducers and raw air temperature from the existing externally mounted
dual element Rosemount TAT probe. Using the raw data from the appropriate sensors, the unit computes
pressure altitude, vertical speed, airspeed values, air temperature information and density altitude. Aircraft
specific configuration parameters are stored internally.
The system provides pitot-static and temperature derived air data to the GIAs, AHRS, and displays via
ARINC 429. In addition to ARINC 429, the GDC interfaces with the on-side GIA via RS-232. The RS-232
connection is used to perform software uploads, request test and configuration mode operation, and request
software product information which supports the GIFD system-wide software manifest capability.
The GDC 7400 provides the following information:
 Air Temperature (total air temperature, outside/static air temperature)
 Baro Corrected Static Pressure
 Density Altitude
 Impact Pressure Uncorrected
 Indicated Airspeed
 Mach Number
 Pressure Altitude
 Total Pressure
 True Pressure
 Vertical Speed

190-02313-01 Revision 2
In addition, each GDC contains the Model 560XL Static Source Error Correction (SSEC) equations to
correct for static source error changes in measured air pressure.
Figure 2-22, GDC 7400 Air Data Computer
2.6.3.5 GDL 69A SXM Receiver (QTY 1)

The GDL 69A provides XM Satellite Receiver data link receiver. The GDL 69A receives broadcast weather
data and XM satellite Receiver. The GDL 69A sends the weather data through the HSDB bus to the MFD,
where the data link interface is controlled. Analog audio from the GDL 69A is sent to GMA2.
Figure 2-23, GDL 69A SXM Radio/WXR Receiver
2.6.3.6 GWX PROCESSOR Weather Radar (QTY 1)

The GWX Processor outputs weather radar data to the MFD. Data received from the GWX Processor is
routed through GSD #1 to the MFD via HSDB. The GWX Processor is a solid-state unit and does not utilize
a magnetron. The GWX Processor provides ground clutter suppression and turbulence detection via a
software enablement card.
Figure 2-24, GWX Processor Weather Radar

190-02313-01 Revision 2
2.6.3.7 Flight Stream (FS 510) Multi-Media Card (Optional) (QTY 1)
The optional Flight Stream 510 is an SD card equipped with Bluetooth and Wi-Fi functionality. The FS510
is installed in the lower SD slot of the MFD and acts as a wireless hotspot or Bluetooth device to transmit
databases and other aircraft related items to the G5000 system using the Garmin Pilot App.
Figure 2-25, Flight Stream (FS 510) Multi-Media Card
2.6.3.8 LiteF LCR-93, LCR-100 Attitude and Heading Reference System (Qty 2)
The existing LCR-93 or LCR-100 Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) is an all attitude inertial
sensor system which provides aircraft attitude, heading and flight dynamics information to display, flight
control, weather radar antenna platform and other aircraft systems and instruments. The LCR-93 is
mechanized as a strapdown inertial measurement system using fiber optic rate gyros (FOGs) and
micromechanical accelerometers which are “strapped down” to the principal aircraft axes. A digital
computer mathematically integrates the rate data to obtain heading, pitch, and roll.
A Magnetic Sensor Unit (MSU) provides the long-term heading reference. True Air Speed (TAS) input from
the Garmin GDC 7400 Air Data Computers is used to improve the attitude performance.
Figure 2-26, LiteF LCR-93 / LCR-100 AHRS
2.6.3.9 Meggitt Secondary Flight Display

This STC retains the existing standby instrument indicating system. For all Model 560XL ‘Excel’ aircraft,
the following standbys are supported in this STC:
• Meggitt Secondary Flight Display (SFD) Mark II P/N 38102-00-01
o Production standby for S/Ns -5116 through -5356
o Available as an upgrade per SB560XL-34-54 R1 for S/Ns -5115 and prior
• Meggitt SFD P/N 40010-00-00
o Available as an upgrade per SB560XL-34-54 R2
The Meggitt SFD is re-located on the instrument panel, positioned below the G5000 MFD. The existing
Meggitt SFD air data computer and emergency battery pack are retained.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
2.6.3.10 Goodrich GH3000 Electronic Standby Instrument System
This STC retains the existing standby instrument indicating system. For all Model 560XL ‘XLS’ aircraft, the
Goodrich GH3000 (P/N 501-1741-2103) standby instrument is supported.
The standby indicator is re-located on the instrument panel, positioned below the G5000 MFD. The existing
GH3000 magnetometer, air data computer, and emergency battery pack are retained. An ARINC 429
interface to the G5000 is provided; however, the GH3000 is not configured to enable the ARINC 429
interface. The GH3000 configuration parameters are contained within a separate detachable configuration
module (DCM-3000) and are not field modifiable. This interface is provisioned to support third party
installers who wish to partner with L3 to obtain an updated Citation XLS configuration module with the
ARINC 429 interface enabled to provide VOR/ILS data to the GH3000.
2.6.3.11 Traffic Systems

following Traffic Systems:
 Honeywell CAS-67A (TPU-67A P/N 066-01146-1111 or 066-01146-1211)
 Honeywell CAS-67B (TPU-67B P/N 066-01146-2121 or TPU-67B P/N 066-01146-2221
NOTE
For aircraft equipped with the TPU-67A TCAS units (i.e. P/N 066-01146-0101),
Service Bulletin SB560XL-34-11 (to obtain Change 7.0) or SB560XL-34-75 (to
obtain Change 7.1) is a pre-requisite for this STC.
 ACSS TCAS 2000

o RT-951 P/N 7517900-55012
o RT-951 P/N 7517900-55020
NOTE
For aircraft equipped with any other TCAS 2000 units, not identified above,
SB560XL-34-71-R01 or SB560XL-34-72-R01 is a pre-requisite for this STC
2.6.3.12 Existing Navigation System Interfaces
Radio Altimeter System

This STC supports an interface between the G5000 avionics and Model 560XL aircraft equipped
with the following Radio Altimeter Systems:
 Honeywell AA-300 (P/N 7001840-936)
 Collins ALT-55B (P/N 622-2855-011)
NOTE
The Rockwell Collins RAC-870 in not required with the installation of the ALT-55B
Radio Altimeter for this STC

190-02313-01 Revision 2
WX-500 / WX-1000 Lightning Detection
This STC supports a provisional RS-232 or ARINC 429 interface via GIA #2 for Lightning Detection.
Refer to wiring diagram listed in Table 1-1 for further interface information.
NOTE
 Installers are responsible to obtain an airworthiness approval to enable this
interface.
2.6.3.13 Third-party Navigation System Interfaces
ADF-4000 System
with a single or dual Collins ADF-4000 system.
DME-4000 System
with a single or dual Collins DME-4000 system.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
2.6.3.14 Antennas
Several antennas are installed to provide optimal G5000 system performance. The antennas installed are
the following:
 Garmin GA 36 (GPS/WAAS) and GA 37 (GPS/WAAS/XM), both with an ARINC 743 footprint. GIA
#1 is connected to the GA 36 while GIA #2 and the optional GDL 69 are connected to the GA 37.
 Sensor Systems S65-8280-42 datalink blade antenna (for optional GDR 66 VHF Voice/ Datalink
Transceiver)
 Sensor Systems S67-1575-165 antenna (for optional GSR 56 Iridium transceivers)
 Collins ANT-462A antenna(s) existing if one or more optional Collins ADF-4000 receivers are
installed. If the Honeywell AT-860 antenna was previously installed, it will be replaced with an ANT-
462A.
 (For Excel aircraft not equipped with factory Mode S Diversity transponders): Two DMNI50-2-2 L-
band antennas installed in the same fuselage locations as the factory-approved diversity antennas.
Figure 2-27, Antenna Locations

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3. G5000 Software & Configuration
This section contains the maintenance practices, which include equipment installation and removal
instructions, inspections and return to service functional tests, that are required to maintain proper
functionality of the G5000 System equipment and their interfaces.
NOTE
Once an LRU is replaced, software loading and verification testing is required. See
section 3.2.3 for the software loading and testing procedures.
CAUTION
Always ensure aircraft power is off, or the appropriate LRU circuit breaker is
Opened, when removing and/or replacing an LRU.
3.1 Configuration Mode Overview

Throughout this document, references are made to the GDUs and GTCs being in configuration mode. The
configuration mode exists to provide the avionics technician with a means of configuring, checking, and
calibrating various G5000 sub-systems. Troubleshooting and diagnostic information can also be viewed in
this mode.
3.1.1 Placing the G5000 System into Configuration Mode

To place the GDUs and GTCs into configuration mode, follow these steps:
1. Open the MFD PRIM, MFD SEC, PFD 1 PRIM, PFD 1 SEC, PFD 2, TOUCH CTRL 1 (PRIM),
TOUCH CTRL 1 (SEC) and TOUCH CTRL 2 circuit breakers on the forward circuit breaker panel.
2. Apply external power to the G5000 system per the power on procedures defined in Aircraft
Maintenance Manual (AMM) 128-590001-9, Chapter 24-40-00-201.
3. Press and hold the right Bezel key on PFD 2 (co-pilot) and close the PFD 2 circuit breaker.
4. Release the right Bezel key after ‘INITIALIZING SYSTEM’ appears in the upper left corner of PFD2.
5. Press and hold the lower right GTC2 frequency push button and close the TOUCH CTRL 2 circuit
breaker.
6. Release the GTC 2 frequency push button after ‘INITIALIZING SYSTEM’ appears in the upper left
corner of GTC 2.
7. Press and hold the lower right GTC1 frequency push button and close the TOUCH CTRL 1 (PRIM)
and TOUCH CTRL 1 (SEC) circuit breakers.
8. Release the GTC 1 frequency push button after ‘INITIALIZING SYSTEM’ appears in the upper left
corner of GTC 1.
9. Press and hold the far-right Bezel key on the MFD and close the MFD PRIM and MFD SEC circuit
breakers.
10. Release the Bezel key after ‘INITIALIZING SYSTEM’ appears in the upper left corner of the MFD.
11. Press and hold the right Bezel key on PFD1 (pilot) and close the PFD 1 PRIM and PFD 1 SEC
circuit breakers.
12. Release the right Bezel key after ‘INITIALIZING SYSTEM’ appears in the upper left corner of PFD1.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
NOTE
The Configuration Mode contains certain pages and settings that are
critical to aircraft operation and safety. These pages are protected and
cannot be modified. However, most protected pages are viewable to
allow system awareness for troubleshooting.
3.1.2 Navigating Through Configuration Mode Pages
3.1.2.1 Using the GCU 275

The PFD knob on the GCU 275 is one method that can be used to cycle through and control different
configuration screens.
To cycle through different configuration screens:
o To change page groups: Rotate the large PFD knob.
o To change pages in a group: Rotate the inner PFD knob.
o To activate the cursor for a page: Press the inner PFD knob directly in, as one would push
a regular button.
o To cycle the cursor through different data fields: Rotate the large PFD knob.
o To change the contents of a highlighted data field: Rotate the inner PFD knob. This action
either brings up an options menu for the field, or in some cases allows the operator to enter
data for the field.
o To confirm a selection: Press the ENTER key.
o To cancel a selection: Press the small FMS knob in again, deactivating the cursor. The CLR
key may also be used to cancel a selection or deactivate the cursor.
3.1.2.2 Using the GTC 575

The GTC 575 in configuration Mode is another method which can be used to cycle through and control
different configuration screens of the GDUs.
To cycle through different configuration screens:
o To change page groups: Rotate the large COM frequency knob.
o To change pages in a group: Rotate the small COM frequency knob.
o To activate the cursor for a page: Press the small COM frequency knob directly in, as one
would push a regular button.
o To cycle the cursor through different data fields: Rotate the large COM frequency knob.
o To change the contents of a highlighted data field: Rotate the small COM frequency knob.
This action either brings up an options menu for the field, or in some cases allows the operator
to enter data for the field.
o To confirm a selection: Press the ENTER key.
o To cancel a selection: Press the small COM frequency knob in again, deactivating the cursor.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3.2 Obtaining LRU Part Number, Software Version & System Status
Before performing maintenance, verify the LRU software part number and version number match the part
number and version number listed in the Garmin General Arrangement drawing 005-01202-02 for this STC.
Part number and serial number information can be obtained using the following methods:
3.2.1 Using the GTC Avionics Page

1. While in normal display mode access the ‘LRU Info’ Tab of the GTC Avionics Status screen
(Home > Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status).
2. Scroll down the list as needed and touch the desired LRU button to display a pop-up window
with additional information for the selected LRU.
3. When finished, touch the pop-up window (if displayed), or touch Back or Home.
Figure 3-1, GTC Avionics Status Page
3.2.2 Creating an Aircraft Report

A report file can be generated manually from the System Status page of a GDU while in configuration mode.
To generate an Aircraft Report, insert an SD card into the top SD card slot of PFD1 and cycle power to the
PFD and start it in configuration mode (Ref. section 3.1). Use the instructions below to create the report.
Once completed, a .csv file will be downloaded to the SD card that is inserted in the top slot of the PFD that
contains all required G5000 system component information.
NOTE
If the specific procedure requires an SD card to be in the top slot of the PFD/MFD,
this card must be inserted prior to applying power to the PFD/MFD. Any time a
card is inserted, the power to the PFD/MFD must be cycled.
NOTE
The Aircraft Report is created based on live data reported from the G5000 LRUs
that are active at the time the ACFT RPT softkey is pressed.
1. With an SD card inserted into the PFD1 top card slot, and the PFD in configuration mode (reference
Section 3.1), access the System Status page (Figure 3-2).

190-02313-01 Revision 2
2. Press the ACFT RPT softkey (Softkey #6) and a REPORT GENERATION TRIGGERED ON ALL
GDUs pop-up message will be displayed.
3. Acknowledge the pop-up message by selecting the OK button.
4. Remove the SD card from the top slot of the PFD and insert into a personal computer.
5. The SD card will have a human readable .csv file and a .zip file loaded onto it. The .csv file can be
opened by the installer, while the .zip file requires an encryption key that is a tamper proof means
of manually sending the file to Garmin (via email/web portal upload) if necessary. The .zip file will
rarely need to be accessed and can be ignored unless requested by Garmin.
Figure 3-2, Configuration Mode (System Status Page)
NOTE
Individual LRU information may also be obtained from the System Status page
while in Configuration Mode.
3.2.3 System Status Indicators

Several configuration screens utilize an indicator light system to show discrete (ON/OFF) data and/or
hardware component status. Unless otherwise noted, the following in Table 3-1 applies to all such status
indicators.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Table 3-1, Data Indicator Symbols
INDICATION DESCRIPTION
The LRU is online and reports the item located next to the
indicator box is communicating.
The LRU is online, and reports the item located next to the
indicator box is not communicating.
The LRU is online, and reports the item located next to the
indicator box is not communicating. This LRU Status
indicator is displayed on the GTC Avionics Status page.
The LRU is not reporting a status for the item located next
to the indicator box. This may be because the data is not
available, not applicable, or not expected.
The LRU is not reporting status for the item located next to
the indicator box. This may be due to the fact the data is not
available or is not expected.
“True” condition; i.e., necessary conditions have met in

order to activate the item.
“False” condition; i.e., necessary conditions have not been

met in order to activate the item.
“High” condition; i.e., the system expects a high voltage or

a high resistance input to trigger the item (fan operation,
etc.).
“Low” condition; i.e., the system expects a low voltage or a

low resistance input to trigger the item (fan operation, etc.).
Figure 3-3, System Status Indicators

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3.3 Software Loading Overview
The following sections provide a detailed description of how to obtain and load the software and
configuration files that are necessary to ensure proper G5000 system functionality. This section provides
an overview for the software loading of the complete G5000 system. It is also possible to load software and
configuration files to individual G5000 units and not the entire G5000 system. The part number of the
software image used to create the loader card is directly associated with the combination of software file
part numbers and version levels that are defined on the General Arrangement drawing 005-01202-02.
Should software part numbers or versions change, a new software image part number is issued.
NOTE
All software and configuration files are certified by Garmin and are considered part
of FAA-approved Type Design data. Approved software and hardware definitions
for this STC Configuration are defined in the Garmin General Arrangement
drawing 005-01202-02 for this STC. Installers may obtain this software image on
a loader card by ordering directly from Garmin
NOTE
Only SanDisk brand 16 GB SD cards or smaller are recommended for use with
the G5000 system.
IMPORTANT
To satisfy the STC requirements for this installation, it is critical that the correct
software image part number is installed for proper system operation.
CAUTION
Be cautious when using software loader cards during maintenance. The G5000
system immediately initializes the card upon power-up. On-screen prompts must
be given careful attention in order to avoid potential loss of data.
3.3.1 Obtaining and Downloading the Software Image

The software image is obtained from the Garmin Dealer Resource website and is an executable self-
extracting file that builds the correct file structure onto an SD card to load the G5000 system software and
configuration files. To obtain the required software image, follow the procedures outlined below.
NOTE
To create the software image onto a loader card, the individual/facility completing
these procedures, must be an authorized Garmin Dealer.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
1. Go to www.garmin.com and click on the Dealer Resource Center link in the lower portion of the
home page. Enter username and password.
2. Select Support then select Software Downloads.

3. In the Keyword(s) filter, enter ‘560XL’ and click on the Go button.
4. A screen similar to the one shown below will appear. The numbers shown are for example only.
(example figure)
5. Select on the Select Action button then the Download button for the appropriate software version
part number based upon the information provided in Garmin General Arrangement drawing 005-
01202-02 for this STC. Save the .exe file to the local hard drive of a personal computer.
6. Double-click on the .exe file that was downloaded and press the ‘Yes’ button to acknowledge the
pop-up window message and start the extraction of the software image.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
NOTE
When the extraction of the software begins, the program automatically deletes all
current files on the SD card and copies the selected files to it, regardless of the file
format on the SD card. Ensure files are not necessary or card is empty before
proceeding.
7. When the extraction is complete, a window like below will pop-up on the screen. Verify the Airframe
and Version of software is correct, insert the SD card, then click Next.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
8. Acknowledge the Garmin Software License Agreement and click Next.
9. Select the card and correct drive letter from the drop-down list then click next.
Select drive

190-02313-01 Revision 2
10. A warning window like below will pop-up on the screen to warn that the SD card contents will be
erased. Click Next.
11. A window will pop-up on the screen indicating the contents of SD card are being erased.
12. A window will pop-up on the screen to indicating file progress.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
13. Once successfully completed, a pop-up message will be displayed. Click Finish to finalize SD card.
14. Remove the SD card from the personal computer.
NOTE

If necessary, ‘eject’ or un‐mount the SD card prior to removal.
3.3.2 G5000 Hardware/Software Compatibility Check

Before installing the software/configuration files to the G5000 equipment installed on the aircraft using the
software image, the hardware part numbers of the equipment installed on the aircraft must be verified to
ensure they are compatible with the G5000 Citation 560XL software image that is being used. The G5000
General Arrangement (GA) drawing 005-01202-02 for this STC shows all available combinations of
hardware and software images. Use the GA drawing to verify all hardware part numbers are compatible
with the loader card being used. The GA drawing allows the technician to correlate each LRU hardware
part number to a compatible software image.
IMPORTANT
After verifying hardware/loader card compatibility, record the software image part
number and all LRU hardware part numbers in the appropriate aircraft records
before proceeding.
NOTE
Throughout the next section of this document, screen shots and examples are
used to illustrate the software and configuration loading process. These screen
shots are provided as reference only. Always refer to the General Arrangement
drawing 005-01202-02 for the correct software file names, versions and part
numbers.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3.3.3 Loading Baseline Software and Configuration
This section details the software loading procedures for the base Textron Aviation Inc. Model 560XL
configuration. The installer must select the appropriate airframe variant to load, either Excel or XLS.
Figure 3-4, Software/Configuration Overview
3.3.3.1 Power-Up
This section details the loading procedures required to install the baseline software and configuration files
to the various G5000 LRUs.
1. Connect and re-install all equipment.
2. Apply external electrical power to the airplane. Place the BATTERY and AVIONICS POWER switches
to ON.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
CAUTION
DO NOT RELY ON THE AIRCRAFT BATTERY TO LOAD SOFTWARE. DO NOT USE A

BATTERY CHARGER AS AN EXTERNAL POWER SOURCE. Power loss during a
software upgrade may cause an LRU to become corrupted and unresponsive
requiring replacement. Remove power only when told to do so in the procedure.
3. Allow all systems to complete power-up sequences.
3.3.3.2 Loading the PFD1 Baseline Software

1. With the G5000 system powered, disengage the PFD 1 (PRIM), PFD 1 (SEC), PFD 2, MFD (PRIM),
MFD (SEC), TOUCH CTRL 1 (PRIM), TOUCH CTRL 1 (SEC) and TOUCH CTRL 2 circuit breakers.
2. Insert the software loader card into PFD1’s top card slot.
3. Start PFD2, the MFD, GTC1, GTC2, and PFD1 in configuration mode (Reference Section 3.1).
4. On GTC1 select the ‘GDU Controls’ button.
5. Push the right-most softkey on PFD1 to acknowledge the following prompt:
NOTE: A softkey labeled ‘YES’ is presented in the lower right corner of PFD1 and may be used in lieu
of the ENT key.
6. Once the GDU software is loaded to PFD1, the following prompt is presented.
7. Push any softkey on PFD1 or Enter button on GTC1.

8. If prompted to update the custom graphic files press YES.
DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE THE CUSTOM GRAPHIC FILES (EG, SPLASH SCREEN)?
NO WILL BE ASSUMED IN 30 SECONDS.
9. Once the custom graphic files are loaded, the following prompt is presented.
UPDATED 1 FILE SUCCESSFULLY!

PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.
CONTINUING IN 10 SECONDS.
10. When complete, PFD1 shuts down and repowers in configuration mode. Do not remove power.
11. When complete, all three displays should be in configuration mode.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3.3.3.3 560XL Base Configuration
IMPORTANT
Do not allow power to be removed from the system when loading

software. Remove power only when instructed by the following

procedure. As a rule, all displays should be in the same mode
(configuration or normal) unless instructed otherwise.
Follow the order of software and configuration loading, do not skip or
rearrange steps.
For the rest of the software/configuration procedure, do not operate or
turn off the MFD or PFD 2 while loading software or configuration files
unless specifically instructed to do so. A failed or cancelled load may
result.
If an incorrect configuration file is loaded at any time during this
procedure, STOP and start the configuration load over at Step 3.
NOTE
If the modified aircraft has incorporated any modifications beyond
factory configuration that effect engine or airspeed limitations, the
configuration may not be supported at this time. It is the responsibility of
the installer to ensure compatibility with existing modifications.
Figure 3-5, Configuration Mode (System Upload Page)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
1. Ensure the loader card is inserted into top card slot of PFD1. Ensure all GDUs and GTCs are in
configuration mode (reference Section 3.1). For instructions about how to navigate through the
configuration pages while in configuration mode, reference section 3.1.2. The GCU1, GTC1 or PFD1
softkeys can be used for all required selections.
2. On GTC1, select the ‘GDU Controls’ button then the PFD1 button.
3. On PFD1, select the “System Upload” page using the inner PFD1 (lower right) knob on GTC1.
4. Activate the cursor and use the inner PFD1 knob on GTC1 to highlight the CARD field.
5. Use the inner PFD1 knob on GTC1 as required to scroll through the CARD list and highlight ‘SD
CARD’. Push the Enter button on GTC1.
6. Use the outer PFD1 knob on GTC1 as required to highlight the GROUP field.
7. Use the inner PFD1 knob on GTC1 as required to scroll through the GROUP list and highlight ‘XL
Base’ or ‘XLS Base’, as applicable to the installation.
8. Push the Enter button on GTC1 to select either the ‘XL Base’ or ‘XLS Base’ GROUP.
9. Once the GROUP is selected, the cursor moves to the ITEM window. Rotate the inner PFD1 knob on
GTC1 to activate the drop-down menu.
10. Use the inner PFD1 knob on GTC1 as required to scroll through the ITEM list and highlight the desired
‘XL Base’ or ‘XLS Base’ configuration.
11. Push the Enter button on GTC1 to select the desired ITEM.
NOTE
The PRODUCT window presents information regarding each G5000

LRU. The LRU column depicts the reported software version of the
LRU, whereas the CARD VERS column shows the LRU software
version stored on the Loader Card. The SOFTWARE and
CONFIGURATION columns default to having all required boxes
checked. Each checked file is automatically loaded to the correct
G5000 LRU.
16. On PFD1, press the CHK ALL softkey (#1) and ensure all SOFTWARE and CONFIGURATION boxes
in the PRODUCT field are checked.
17. On PFD1, press the LOAD softkey (#6) to start the download.
NOTE
Power will automatically be cycled to all G5000 LRUs during the
software/configuration loading process. It is not necessary to press
any softkeys during the loading process.
18. Observe the software loading progress and verify software and/or configuration load completes without
errors as indicated by the following:
a. Green “PASS” or white “N/A” in SOFTWARE and CONFIGURATION columns adjacent to each
product.
b. “Upload and Crossfill Complete” pop-up window.
19. Push the Enter button on GTC1 to acknowledge the “Upload and Crossfill Complete” pop-up window.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
20. Push the Enter button on GTC1 to deactivate the cursor.
21. Power down the G5000 for a minimum of 30 seconds.
3.3.4 Loading Garmin Optional Equipment and Features
The Garmin G5000 System has options and features available that require the configuration of the aircraft
to be updated based on what is currently installed. The G5000 System does this by having the user select
and load the items from the ‘System Upload’ page on the Loader Card (Figure 3-6). This section details the
software and configuration loading procedures to enable functionality of the various Garmin options and
aircraft specific features that are available for the Textron Model 560XL.
Figure 3-6, System Upload Page Options & Features Selection (Ref.)
Since the procedures to load the software and configuration files for these options and features are the
same a single set of loading instructions is provided below in section 3.3.4.1 and Table 3-2 contains a list
of the options and features with proper nomenclature. It is up to the maintenance facility to select and load
the correct options from the SD card that are required for each individual aircraft.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3.3.4.1 Garmin Optional Equipment Software and Configuration Loading Instructions
1. Ensure the aircraft is powered and the loader card is inserted into the top card slot of PFD1 with the
system in configuration mode (reference Section 3.1).
2. For instructions about how to navigate through the configuration pages while in configuration mode,
reference section 3.1.2. The GCU1, GTC1 or PFD1 softkeys can be used for all required selections.
3. On the PFD1 ‘System Upload’ page highlight the GROUP field.
4. Activate the GROUP field drop down menu and Scroll to ‘Options’ and select using the ENT key.
5. Once the ENT key is pressed, the cursor moves to the ITEM field.
6. Activate the ITEM field drop-down menu and scroll to the option that is being loaded (Table 3-2) and
select using the ENT key.
7. A list of LRUs and various other configuration items will now be shown in the Product field of the System
Upload page.
8. On PFD1, press the CHK ALL softkey and ensure all SOFTWARE and CONFIGURATION boxes in the
PRODUCT field are checked.
9. On PFD1, press the LOAD softkey to start the download.
10. Observe the progress of the software and configuration loading and verify all software and configuration
load without errors as indicated by the following indications:
product.
b. “Upload and Crossfill Complete” pop-up message.
11. Acknowledge the “Upload and Crossfill Complete” pop-up message when prompted.
12. Deactivate the cursor.
13. Continue loading all required options and features using this procedure.
14. When all options and features are loaded, and if no additional options need loaded, complete the steps
in section 3.5 (Configuration Confirmation) to update the G5000 system configuration for the aircraft.
Table 3-2, Garmin Optional Equipment and Features
Garmin Option/Feature Loader Card ‘Item’ 560XL Model Variant Description

Nomenclature Applicability
Reference XLS AFM

‘Enable Baggage Smoke Supplement 27 dated 2004,
Baggage Smoke CAS Message Excel & XLS variants
CAS’ effective S/Ns 560-5501 and
on.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Applicable only to Model

560XL that have the optional
Lavatory Smoke Detector
system installed.
Two unique legacy
annunciators are offered to
provide Lavatory smoke
detect alerting to the crew
SMOKE DETECT (applicable
Excel & XLS variants to S/Ns -5216, -5230 and on,
‘Enable LAV Smoke Detect
LAV Smoke Detect CAS Message (See description for and -5501 thru -5634)
CAS’
applicability)
LAV SMOKE DETECT
(applicable to S/Ns -5635 and
on)
The technician must select
the proper configuration
option based on the
nomenclature of the
previously installed
annunciator and AFM
supplement for the aircraft.
Follow this procedure to

enable the optional GSR 56
satellite transceiver when
GSR 56 Iridium Receiver Stand- ‘Enable GSR 56 Standalone installed as a stand-alone
Excel & XLS variants
Alone (Connext) Configuration (Connext)’’ option providing Garmin
Connext capability (Weather,
Voice, and SMS
Communication

enable the optional GSR 56
satellite transceiver, when
installed as a stand-alone
GSR 56 Iridium Receiver (Connext) ‘Enable GDL 59 / GSR 56 option providing support for
with GDL 59 (POTS) Configuration (Connext)’. Garmin Connext capability
(Weather, Voice, and SMS
Communication) and adds
cabin POTS telephone
support.

enable the optional GDL 69A
GDL 69A SXM Configuration ‘Enable GDL 69A SXM’ Excel & XLS variants SXM which provides support
for SiriusXM weather and
music capability.

190-02313-01 Revision 2

enable the optional GDR 66
GDR 66 VHF Voice/ Datalink ‘Enable GDR 66 VHF VHF Voice/ Datalink
Transceiver Configuration Datalink / COM3’ Transceiver, which provides
support for Link 2000+ and
FAA Datacomm applications.

enable the optional Flight
Flight Stream 510 Configuration ‘Enable FS510’ Excel & XLS variants Stream 510, which provides
support for the Connext
application

enable the optional Link
Link 2000+ Configuration ‘Enable Link 2000+ CPDLC’ Excel & XLS variants
2000+, which provides
support for the VHF Datalink.

‘FAA Datacomm – No
FAA Data Comm Configuration Excel & XLS variants enable the optional FAA Data
ACARS Enabled’
Comm.
The options shown below are aircraft-specific systems and interfaces found in the Citation Excel and XLS fleet. The technician
should first confirm the subject aircraft has the appropriate Options and configuration installed before loading any of the following
items.

406 MHz ELT Interface and Cabin ‘Enable ELT/Cabin enable the ELT and Cabin
Entertainment GAMA 429 Output Entertainment 429 Output’ Entertainment GAMA 429
output option.
Citation Excel aircraft that

‘Excel- Increased Gross have complied with
200LB Gross Weight Increase Excel variant
Weight per SB560XL-32-38’ SB560XL-32-28 must enable
this configuration option.
Load this option for those

aircraft equipped with the
ADF #1 Configuration ‘Enable #1 ADF-4000’ Excel & XLS variants
Rockwell Collins single and
dual ADF-4000

ADF #2 Configuration ‘Enable #2 ADF-4000’ Excel & XLS variants
Rockwell Collins dual ADF-
4000

190-02313-01 Revision 2

DME #1Configuration ‘Enable #1 DME-4000’ Excel & XLS variants
Rockwell Collins single or
dual DME-4000

DME #2 Configuration ‘Enable #2 DME-4000’ Excel & XLS variants
Rockwell Collins dual DME-
4000

Excel (S/N 560-5318 and
Honeywell RT-300 Rad Alt ‘Enable Honeywell RT-300 aircraft equipped with the
later) and all XLS
Configuration Rad Alt’ Honeywell RT-300 radio
variants
altimeter

Collins ALT-55B Rad Alt ‘Enable Collins ALT-55B Rad Excel variant (S/N 560- aircraft equipped with the
Configuration Alt’ 5317 and prior) Rockwell Collins ALT-55B
radio altimeter

ACSS TCAS 2000 or
Honeywell TPU-67A/B TCAS
ACSS TCAS 2000 or Honeywell ‘Enable TCAS 2000 or II traffic systems
TPU-67A/B TCAS II Configuration TPU67’ Reference Garmin General
Arrangement drawing 005-
01202-02 for the list of
supported ACSS TCAS-2000
traffic systems.

L3 FA2100 Cockpit Voice Recorder ‘Enable L3 FA2100 CVR aircraft equipped with the L3
Configuration GMT 429 Output’ FA2100 Cockpit Voice
Recorder

L3 F1000 Flight Data Recorder
‘Enable L3 F1000 FDR’ Excel & XLS variants aircraft equipped with the L3
Configuration
F1000 Flight Data Recorder

Honeywell JAA Solid-State Flight aircraft equipped with the
‘Enable Honeywell SSFDR’ Excel & XLS variants
Data Recorder Configuration Honeywell JAA Solid-State
Flight Data Recorder

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Load Default GEA SSFDR Flap

Input Rigging
IF the aircraft is equipped
CAUTION with the Honeywell JAA Solid-
Only load this item during the ‘Load Default GEA Rigging. State Flight Data Recorder,
INITIAL software load or if replacing All Sensors (Erases Current Excel & XLS variants load this option only for the
a GEA configuration module. If this Rigging Values)’ INITIAL software load or
item is selected and loaded for any when replacing a GEA
other condition, the flap sensor configuration module
correction data will be overwritten in
the GEA configuration.

Honeywell HF950/HF1050 Radio aircraft equipped with the
‘Enable #1 HF Radio’ Excel & XLS variants
Configuration Honeywell HF950 or HF1050
radio

‘Enable L3 WX-500
Enable L3 WX-500 Stormscope Excel & XLS variants aircraft equipped with the L3
Stormscope’
WX-500 Stormscope

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3.3.5 Loading Enablement Card Options
This section provides procedures to activate optional features in the 560XL G5000 installation that require
enablement cards.
NOTE
The G5000 has various features that require the use of unlock/enable cards to

activate the feature. Throughout this document these cards are generically
referred to as ‘enable cards’. In some cases, the actual label on the physical card
may say ‘unlock’. If uncertain, the technician should verify the card part number
with the General Arrangement drawing listed in Section 1.5 prior to use.
Table 3-3, Enablement Card Part Numbers`
Enablement Card Part Number Notes

Description
010-00330-50 The required ChartView databases are subscription-

based and are to be procured by the installing agency
directly from Jeppesen.
Jeppesen Chartview The G5000 Next Generation system can be

configured for both FliteCharts (automatically
installed when the baseline software and
configuration is installed at no cost) or ChartView
(Requires a Jeppesen account and is cost-based)
N/A Loading of the baseline configuration for the specific

airframe is all that is required for enabling FliteChart
FliteChart functions
functions. No specific enable card or software
installation is required
Enhanced AFCS 010-00330-5A

(Underspeed
PROT/Coupled GA)
Synthetic Vision 010-00330-55
Surface Watch 010-00330-5E
GWX Ground Clutter 010-00330-J1

Suppression
GWX Turbulence Detection 010-00330-J2
FAA DATACOMM 010-00330-LL
LINK 2000+ 010-00330-FB

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3.3.5.1 Garmin Enablement Card Loading Instructions
1. Ensure the aircraft is powered and the required enablement card is inserted into the top card slot of
PFD1 with the system in configuration mode (reference Section 3.1).
4. Activate the GROUP field drop down menu and Scroll to the required feature that is being enabled and
select using the ENT key.
6. Activate the ITEM field drop-down menu and scroll to the required feature that is being enabled (Table
3-2) and select using the ENT key.
7. A list of LRUs and various other configuration items will now be shown in the Product field of the
System Upload page.
15. On PFD1, press the CHK ALL softkey (#1) and ensure all SOFTWARE and CONFIGURATION boxes
in the PRODUCT field are checked.
16. On PFD1, press the LOAD softkey (#6) to start the download.
17. Observe the progress of the software and configuration loading and verify all software and
configuration load without errors as indicated by the following indications:
product.
b. “Upload and Crossfill Complete” pop-up message.
18. Acknowledge the “Upload and Crossfill Complete” pop-up message when prompted.
8. Deactivate the cursor.
9. Continue loading all other enablement card features, if applicable, using this procedure.
10. When all enablement card features are loaded, and if no additional options need loaded, complete the
steps in section 3.5 (Configuration Confirmation) to update the G5000 system configuration for the
aircraft. If additional options are to be loaded, proceed to section 3.3.4.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3.4 Aircraft Registration Number Entry
The manual entry of the aircraft registration information on the aircraft configuration page is stored in the
PFD1 configuration module. This step is required the first time the G5000 is installed and any time thereafter
if the PFD1 CONFIG module is replaced. The boxes in the LRU Configuration status field will show red X’s
or yellow checkmarks if the aircraft registration information is not correct and will not accept the GTX1 or
GTX2 configuration until the correct information is entered.
Figure 3-7, Aircraft Registration (Aircraft Configuration Page)

1. Ensure the aircraft is powered and the G5000 system is in configuration mode (reference Section 3.1).
3. Select the “AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION” page on PFD1.
4. Highlight the “AIRCRAFT REGISTRATION” line-item in the Aircraft Configuration field.
5. Enter the aircraft tail number and press the ENT key on GCU1.
6. Ensure the aircraft ICAO address field auto-fills with the correct ICAO address following entry of the
aircraft tail number and press the ENT key on GCU1 to accept.
7. Highlight the ICAO Region line-item.
8. Enter the correct ICAO Region where the aircraft is registered and press the ENT key on GCU1.
9. If a Domain Identifier is needed, highlight the Domain Identifier line-item
10. Enter the correct Domain Identifier and press the ENT key on GCU1.
11. Highlight the ‘VFR CODE’ line-item.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
12. Enter ‘1200’ for the VFR code and press the ENT key on GCU1.
13. If any changes were made to the aircraft registration configuration the GTX1 and GTX2 boxes in the
LRU CONFIGURATION STATUS field will show a red X or yellow checkmark. Perform the following
steps to acknowledge the changes to the GTX registration information.
a. Press the “SET GTX1” softkey on PFD1 and acknowledge the prompt by pushing the ENT key
on GCU1. Press the ENT key on GCU1 to acknowledge the COMPLETE prompt.
b. Press the “SET GTX2” softkey on PFD1 and acknowledge the prompt by pushing the ENT key
on GCU1. Press the ENT key on GCU1 to acknowledge the COMPLETE prompt.
3.5 Configuration Confirmation
Figure 3-8, Configuration Mode (Configuration Manager Page)

Any change to the configuration of the G5000 system requires a configuration confirmation to be performed
using the following steps:
1. Ensure the aircraft is powered and the G5000 system is in configuration mode (reference Section 3.1).
2. For instructions about how to navigate through the configuration pages, while in configuration mode,
3. Press the CNFM CFG softkey (#4) on the ‘Configuration Manager’ page of the System tab and
acknowledge the “Confirm configuration as expected configuration?” pop-up message by pressing
‘OK’.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3.6 Software/Configuration Troubleshooting
Table 3-4, Software/Configuration Troubleshooting
Problem Solutions
 Ensure PFD and MFD circuit breakers are closed.

MFD or PFD displays do not power up:  Ensure power is present at display connector.
 Replace display.
 Ensure that LRU is reporting data on System Status page

Software file load fails: (LRU is ‘ONLINE’). Check data path wiring as needed.
 Retry software file load or try using a different card.
Ensure the PFD1 is not touched during the loading
process.
 Ensure that LRU part number is compatible with software
version and Card Loader. Refer to the General
Arrangement drawing 005-01202-02.
 Replace LRU.
 Ensure that LRU is reporting data on System Status page

(LRU is ‘ONLINE’). Check data path wiring as needed.
Configuration file load fails:
 Retry configuration file load or try using a different card.
Ensure the PFD1 is not touched during the loading
process.
 Ensure that LRU part number is compatible with Card
Loader. Refer to the General Arrangement drawing 005-
01202-02.
 Replace LRU.
GIA1 and/or GIA2 to ‘LRU’ data path not  Ensure GIA1 and GIA2 are configured correctly.
working  Check wiring, connectors & pins as needed.
 Ensure that proper software file part number and version

were loaded to LRU. Refer to the General Arrangement
drawing 005-01202-02
A manifest error is displayed on the GTC
 Check and ensure that correct Card Loader was used
System Message page.
during load process. Refer to the General Arrangement
drawing 005-01202-02.
 Reload software to LRU.
“Synthetic Terrain” softkey does not  Verify the PFD and MFD software versions are correct by
appear on PFD softkey tier. checking the GTC Avionics Status page.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Problem Solutions
 If correct software is installed in the MFD and PFD, follow

the steps in Section 3.3.4 to reactivate the SVS feature.
 Verify the G5000 AHRS, and heading data are valid on

the PFDs. Verify a valid GPS 3D position solution is being
received.
3D terrain presentation does not appear  If a terrain database update has just been performed,
on PFD. allow the system time to initialize and verify the data.
When the databases have been verified, the current
database cycle and version are reported on the GTC
Avionics Status page.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3.7 G5000 Aviation Databases
The G5000 aviation databases listed in Table 3-5 are managed through the FLYGARMIN website
(https://fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/) and are subscription based. They are downloaded onto an SD card from
the Fly Garmin website and then loaded into the G5000 system using the top card slot of the MFD.
Table 3-5 – G5000 Databases
Description
Navigation Data (XXYY)
Safe Taxi United States (XXYY)
IFR/VFR Charts United States (XXYY)
Obstacle US/Canada/Europe (XXYY)
Airport Directory United States (XXYY)
Flite Charts North America (XXYY)
Terrain Worldwide (4.9 Arc Second) (XXYY)
Basemap Worldwide (XXYY)
Jeppesen Worldwide Electronic Charts (Chartview)
(XX = Last 2 digits of the Year, YY = cycle)
3.7.1 Aviation Database Loading
3.7.1.1 Using SD Card

1. Ensure the aircraft is powered and the SD card, with the correct aviation databases installed, is
inserted into the top card slot of the MFD.
2. Ensure the squat switches are in the ‘on-ground’ position.
3. On the GTC1 ‘Home’ page select ‘Utilities’ > ‘Setup’ > ‘Database Status’ the status of each individual
database being loaded shall be shown (i.e. Verifying, Missing, Syncing, Sync Complete) and the
overall progress of the entire load is displayed at the top of the page with the overall ‘status (i.e. Sync
in Progress),‘% complete’ and ‘time remaining’.
4. Allow all databases to continue loading. This step can take 3 hours or more due to what database/s
are being loaded and database size.
5. Once all databases are loaded, on the GTC1 ‘Database Status’ page scroll down and select the
‘Database Options’ button and verify the ‘Restart Displays’ and ‘Delete Databases’ buttons are
selectable on the ‘Database Options’ page.
6. On GTC1, select the ‘Restart Displays’ button and press ‘OK’ to acknowledge the pop-up message
and initiate a restart of the displays and GTCs.
7. On GTC1, return to the ‘Database Status’ page and verify the ‘Database Initializing’ status followed by
a ‘Databases Ready’ status is shown once initialized.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3.7.1.2 Using the FS510 and Garmin Pilot APP
Bluetooth Pairing
1. Ensure the aircraft is powered.
2. Ensure the squat switches are in the ‘on-ground’ position.
3. Download the required aviation databases using the Garmin Pilot APP database concierge. Reference
the Garmin Pilot User Guides listed in Table 1-1 for additional information.
4. Ensure the FS510 is inserted fully into the bottom card slot of the MFD.
5. On GTC1 & GTC2, touch the following sequence: ‘Home’ → ‘Utilities’ → ‘Setup’ → ‘Connext Setup’
and touch the ‘Paired Devices’ tab.
6. Access the Apple IOS or Android devices Bluetooth phone settings and pair the device to the ‘Flight
Stream 510-XXXX’ which should be shown as a pairable device (Note – If the FS510 does not show
up as a pairable device, cycle power to the MFD and re-attempt).
7. Verify a ‘Bluetooth Pairing Request’ pop-up message is displayed on the Apple IOS or Android device
and on each GTC with a pass-key verification request.
8. On either GTC and the Android or Apple device, acknowledge the ‘Pass-Key’ pop-up message.
9. On either GTC, touch the following sequence: ‘Home’ → ‘Utilities’ → ‘Setup’ → ‘Connext Setup’ and
touch the ‘Paired Devices’ tab.
10. On the Garmin Pilot App select the Drop-down Menu icon in the upper LH corner of the main page and
access the ‘Connext → Flight Stream 510’ page and select the ‘CONNECT’ button.
11. On the Garmin Pilot App verify the Bluetooth status at the top of the page changes to ‘Connected’.
12. On either GTC ‘Connext Setup’ → ‘Paired Devices’ tab, verify the Android or Apple IOS device is now
displayed with a status of ‘Connected’ on the ‘Paired Devices’ tab.
3.8 Flight Stream 510 Firmware Review

If the optional Flight Stream 510 is installed, a technician must review the reported Flight Stream firmware
version and compare it to the version approved by the STC.
Reference the STC General Arrangement drawing to find the approved firmware release (See Section
1.5).
NOTE
This STC approves a major release of Flight Stream 510 and allows for periodic minor
software updates to account for low-level driver and Bluetooth interface updates.
Example – If the STC data specifies version 2.41 or higher to version 2.49 as the
approved version.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
At the time of installation, minor firmware updates may be available. Technician may check for updates to
the firmware by following this procedure.
CAUTION
The technician must review the Flight Stream 510 version approved by this STC and
ensure a newer major release is not utilized. Otherwise, incompatibility with the GDU
display software may result.
NOTE
Note that the Flight Stream firmware update requires a device running iOS 8.1
or later -
 iPhone 5 and newer
 iPad 3 and newer
 iPad Air and newer
 iPad Mini with Retina and newer
It also requires the above device to be running Garmin Pilot App v7.1 or higher.
The firmware update is not supported via Android devices at the time of writing
this document.
1. Download Garmin Pilot on the iOS device

2. Create an account in the Garmin Pilot App. If an account exists already, log in to the account.
3. Contact Garmin Aviation Product Support - https://fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/support/ - identify
yourself as a Garmin Dealer, and request access to update Flight Stream Firmware.
4. After Support grants access, refresh Subscription page in Garmin Pilot (swipe down across
page to refresh)
5. Garmin Pilot will show a "Dealer Mode" subscription.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (ICA)
This document provides the Instructions for Continued Airworthiness in accordance with 14 CFR 25.1529
Appendix H for use by the owner/operator of the airplane to maintain the G5000 system equipment installed
in the Textron Aviation Inc. Model 560XL (Excel and XLS) per STC ST01918WI. The ICA contains the
safety-related tasks and limitations required as part of the certification substantiation for this STC, which
include Certification Check Requirements (CCR - recurring flight crew or ground checks to limit the
exposure time of various latent failures), ground crew routine maintenance checks (CMR - scheduled
maintenance tasks established as operating limitations), and flight crew procedures to limit the safety
effects of various failure conditions identified for this STC.
4.1 Airworthiness Limitations

The Airworthiness Limitations section is FAA approved and specifies maintenance required under §§ 43.16
and 91.403 of the Federal Aviation Regulations unless an alternative program has been FAA approved for
the G5000 system installed for this STC to be considered airworthy in the Textron Aviation Inc. Model
560XL.
The mandatory time intervals defined in section 4.3 show the number of hours allowed between the required
maintenance or inspection activity and shall begin following the G5000 installation and completion of
Garmin Post Installation Checkout Procedures (PICP) document 190-02313-00.
The maintenance task or inspection may be completed within +/- 25 flight hours (for tasks based on flight
hours) or 1 calendar month (for tasks based on time) from when the maintenance task or inspection is due.
Maintenance tasks or inspections completed outside of the allowable task tolerances defined above require
a new schedule. Reference the Textron Model 560XL Maintenance Manual, Chapters 4 and 5, for further
information regarding the Textron Model 560XL Inspection Program and allowable task tolerances.
4.1.1 G5000 Autopilot Ground Crew Maintenance Checks

1. Every 600 flight hours perform a functional test of the G5000 autopilot interface to the Stall Warning
system. Verify that the autopilot disconnects when the Stick Shaker activates as defined in section
6.14.3.
2. Every 600 flight hours perform a functional test of the Underspeed Protection System (USP) if equipped.
Verify the Autopilot remains engaged during Stick Shaker activation as defined in section 6.14.3.
3. Every 600 flight hours perform a functional check of the amber AOA FAIL CAS message by verifying
the message is present when the AOA and AOA HEATER circuit breakers on the left circuit breaker
panel are disengaged and the message is extinguished when the circuit breakers are engaged.
4. Every 1,200 flight hours perform a functional check to verify the pitch and roll mistrim annunciations are
displayed on PFD1 by GIA1 and on PFD2 by GIA2 as defined in section 6.14.6.
5. At 20 years, and then every 2 years thereafter, perform a check of the GSM 9100 drive shaft seal
inspection tabs as defined in section 5.3.3.4 (GSM 9100 Drive Shaft Seal Inspection).
6. Every 20,000 flight hours verify the two capstan screws on each GSM 9100 servo mount are tightly
secured as defined in section 5.3.3.3. If any screws are missing or loose, remove the GSM 9100 servo
mount and send to a properly rated FAA Approved Repair Station qualified by Garmin for servicing of
this unit.
7. Every 20,000 flight hours verify the six drive shaft seal screws on each GSM 9100 servo mount are
tightly secured as defined in section 5.3.3.3. If any screws are missing or loose, remove the GSM 9100
servo mount and send to a properly rated FAA Approved Repair Station qualified by Garmin for
servicing of this unit.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4.1.2 Required Maintenance Checks
1. Every 600 flight hours verify proper dimming and brightness adjustment functionality of both PFDs and
the MFD as defined in Section 6.9.
2. Every 600 flight hours perform a check of the PFD1, PFD2 & MFD reversionary mode operation as
defined in Section 5.1.6.1.
3. Every 600 flight hours perform a check of the primary and secondary power inputs for PFD1, GTC1
and the MFD as defined in Section 6.2.5.2.
4. Every 600 flight hours perform a check of the primary and secondary power inputs for GIA1 and GIA2
as defined in Section 6.2.5.3.
5. Every 600 flight hours perform a check of the primary and secondary power inputs for GIA1 Com as
6. Every 600 flight hours perform a check of the primary and secondary power inputs for GEA1 and GEA2
as defined in Section 6.2.5.5.
7. Every 600 flight hours perform a check of the primary and secondary power inputs for GSD2 as defined
in Section 6.2.5.6.
8. Every 1,200 flight hours perform a check of the primary and secondary power inputs for GDC1 as
9. Every 1,200 flight hours perform a check of the Fuel Low Level 981 module resistors and transient
voltage suppressors to verify proper operation as defined in Section 6.6.7.
10. Every 2,400 flight hours perform a check of the Fuel Temperature 981 module resistors and transient
voltage suppressors to verify proper operation as defined in Section 6.6.6.
11. Every 1,200 flight hours perform a check of both Fuel Quantity Signal Conditioners, BIT Fault Out 981
jumper plug transient voltage suppressors to verify proper operation as defined in Section 6.6.8
12. Every 1,200 flight hours perform an electrical bonding check of the G5000 equipment per Section 5.19.
13. Every 2400 hours verify GIA1 connector P1024 Pin 14 (LH FUEL GAUGE FAULT) and GIA 2 connector
P1044 Pin 14 (RH FUEL GAUGE FAULT) are not shorted to 28V.
14. Every 2400 flight hours perform a functional test of the GIA’s to verify they can trigger the NO TAKEOFF
CAS message as defined in Section 6.8.2.
15. Every 2400 flight hours perform a functional test of the GEA’s to verify they can trigger the “CABIN
DOOR” CAS message using the test defined in Section 6.12.5.
16. Every 2400 flight hours perform a check of the primary and secondary power inputs for AHRS1 and
AHRS2 (AUX Battery) as defined in Section 6.2.5.7.
17. Every 2,400 flight hours perform a check of the primary and secondary power inputs for GMA1 as
18. Every 2,400 flight hours perform a check of the EMER COM frequency switch as defined in Section
5.5.5.5.
19. Every 20,000 flight hours perform a check of the ground paths for PFD1, PFD2, MFD, GTC1, GTC2,
GIA1, GIA2, GEA 1, GEA 2, GSD 2, GMA1, GDC1 and GDC2 as defined in Section 6.2.5.14.
20. Every 20,000 flight hours perform a check of the failsafe mode for GMA1 and GMA2 per Section 5.5.5.4.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4.2 Servicing Information
The Garmin G5000 maintenance is ‘on condition’ only. No component-level overhaul is required for this
G5000 installation. ‘On Condition’ replacement and/or servicing should occur when an item exhibits
conditions, symptoms, and/or abnormalities. The replacement and/or servicing should be made only after
the technician troubleshoots the system to the extent determined necessary by using the guidance in this
manual along with common avionics maintenance practices.
IMPORTANT
It is impossible to provide guidance for every conceivable failure scenario within
the scope of this manual. Every effort has been made to provide comprehensive
guidance for possible failures. The information in this document should always be
combined with sound aviation maintenance practices and a thorough knowledge
of the system. Use sound avionics maintenance practices when working around
or on G5000 equipment.
IMPORTANT
All structural repairs associated with this installation are to be addressed
in accordance with the Textron Structural Inspection and Repair Manual
listed in Table 1-1.
NOTE
After replacing or servicing electrical components near the AHRS magnetometers,
the Magnetometer Interference Test (reference Section 5) and Magnetometer
Calibration Procedure (reference Section 7) must be performed.
IMPORTANT
To remain compliant with FAA regulations, the LH & RH Nose (320-01214-00 &
320-01214-01), Cabin (PN 320-01214-05) and Tail (P/N 320-01214-06) Fuel
System Harnesses must not be altered, modified or re-routed without additional
analysis and design approval from Garmin. .
4.2.1 Required Tools

The following tools are needed to perform maintenance tasks on G5000 equipment:
 Calibrated Milliohm meter or equivalent
 Agilent 34410A Ammeter or equivalent
 Fluke 187 Multimeter or equivalent
 Variable DC Power Supply capable of providing 1 amp, 0-10VDC
 Decade Resistance Box capable of 0Ω – 1kΩ (resolution of 0.01 Ω)
 Signal Generator capable of 0-10VDC, 0-1kHz
 Fluke 725 Multifunction Process Calibrator or equivalent
 #2 Non-Magnetic Phillips Screwdriver
 3/32”, 7/64” 3/16”, Hex drive tools
 Calibrated VHF NAV/COM/ILS ramp tester or equivalent
 Calibrated transponder ramp tester or equivalent
 Calibrated pitot/static ramp tester
 Outdoor line-of-site to GPS satellite signals or GPS indoor repeater

190-02313-01 Revision 2
 Headset/microphone
 Ground Power Unit (Capable of supplying 28 VDC)
 Calibrated torque wrench capable of measuring 0 – 70 in/lbs
 Standard sockets & wrenches
 Calibrated digital thermometer suitable for measuring ambient temperature
 M22885/108T8234 extraction tool

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4.3 G5000 Equipment Airworthiness Inspection Time Limits
Table 4-1 shows the G5000 systems and components installed by this STC which must undergo tests
and/or checks at specific time limits/intervals. The table also provides the inspection interval for when the
inspection is required and where the inspection criteria can be found.
Table 4-1, G5000 Equipment Inspections
Item Description Section Interval
G5000 System Perform an electrical bonding check of Section 5.19 1,200 flight
Bonding Inspection the G5000 equipment hours
Complete a visual inspection of the

Garmin G5000 equipment in the nose 1,200 flight
Section 4.4.2
Radome, including the Garmin GWX and hours
Wiring.
Complete a visual inspection of the Section 4.4.3 1,200 flight

Garmin G5000 equipment and wiring hours
located in Nose Avionics Compartment

located on and behind Instrument Panel

located in the Pilot’s Side Panel

G5000 System
located in the Copilot’s Side Panel
Visual Inspections

located under the cockpit and cabin floor.

located on and inside the Pedestal

G5000 electrical wiring located on the aft hours
pressure bulkhead.

Garmin G5000 Equipment and Wiring hours
under the tail compartment floor

Garmin G5000 Roll servo and installation hours

190-02313-01 Revision 2

Garmin G5000 Equipment and Wiring in hours
the tail compartment.
Complete a visual inspection of the 1,200 flight

Section 4.4.14
antennas. hours
23,000 flight
Complete a visual inspection of the hours initial;
exterior fuselage skin around the Section 4.4.14 11,000 flight
antennas. hours repeat*
Complete AFCS Pre-Flight Test Section 6.14.1
Complete AFCS Switch Check Section 6.14.2
Complete Autopilot Functional Check Section 6.14.5
Perform a functional test of the stall 600 flight

warning system interface to the AFCS hours*
test. Verify that when the AOA
computer is valid and USP is not
Section 6.4.
installed the autopilot will disconnect
when the stick shaker is activated and
will remain connected when USP is
installed.
AFCS Checks Perform a functional check to verify

the pitch and roll mistrim 1,200 flight
Section 6.14.6.
annunciations are displayed on PFD1 hours*
by GIA1 and on PFD2 by GIA2.
Anytime the GSA 9000 servo and the

GSM 9100 servo Gearbox are removed
or separated, perform an inspection the Section 5.3.3.1
O’ Ring on the GSM 9100. for nicks, cuts
or damage.
On Condition
If conducting maintenance or inspections
in any flight compartment containing a
GSA 9000 Servo, perform a visual Section 5.3.3.3.
inspection of the GSM 9100 hardware
and components.
Removal & Replacement Section 5.1.1 & 5.1.2 On Condition
GDU 1450W
600 flight
Check Display Format Operation Section 5.1.6.1
hours*

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Verify proper dimming and brightness

600 flight
adjustment functionality of both PFDs Section 6.9.
hours*
and the MFD.
Verify redundant ground returns for 20,000 flight

Section 6.2.5.14
PFD1, PFD2 and the MFD hours*
Verify secondary power to PFD1, PFD2 2,400 flight

Section 6.2.5.2.
and the MFD hours
Verify PFD1, PFD2 and the MFD 600 flight

Section 5.1.6.1
reversionary mode functionality hours*
Removal & Replacement Sections 5.6.1 & 5.6.2 On Condition
GTC 575 Verify primary and secondary power to 2,400 flight

Section 6.2.5.2.
GTC1. hours
(Qty 2)
Section 6.2.5.14
GTC1 and GTC2 hours*
Verify primary and secondary power 2,400 flight

Section 6.2.5.8
to GMA1. hours*
GMA 36B
(Qty 2) Verify redundant ground returns for 20,000 flight

Section 6.2.5.14
GMA1 hours*
Verify operation of failsafe mode for 20,000 flight

Section 5.5.5.4
GMA1 and GMA2. hours*

Section 6.2.5.14
GIA1 and GIA2 hours*
GIA 64E Verify primary and secondary power to 2,400 flight

Section 6.2.5.3
(Qty 2) GIA1 and GIA2 hours
Return GIA1 and GIA2 to Garmin

International, Inc to have required 20,000 flight
N/A
ATP check performed for the low fuel hours*
level indications
GEA 7100 (Qty 2)

Verify primary and secondary power 600 flight
Section 6.2.5.5
to GEA1 and GEA2 hours*

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Return GEA1 and GEA2 to Garmin

International, Inc to have required 20,000 flight
N/A
ATP checks performed for fuel hours*
temperature indication.

Section 6.2.5.14
GEA1 and GEA2 hours*

Section 6.2.5.14
GSD2 hours*
GSD 41 Data
Concentrator (Qty Verify primary and secondary power 600 flight
Section 6.2.5.6
2) to GSD2 hours*

GTX 3000
Transponder (Qty 2) Special Inspection – Perform GTX 3000
Part 43 Appendix E 24 Months
test.
Removal & Replacement Section 5.16.1 & 5.16.2 On Condition
On condition
and anytime a
component of
the air data
GDC 7400 Functional Test Section 5.16.4 system or
pitot/static line
is removed,
replaced or
GDC 7400 (Qty 2)
disconnected.
Verify primary and secondary power to 2,400 flight

Section 6.2.5.1
ADC1 hours

Section 6.2.5.14.
ADC1 hours*
Special Inspection – Perform GDC Air

Part 43 Appendix E 24 Months
Data Validation

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Special inspection – for RVSM compliant

aircraft only: Complete as defined in the As defined in
following Textron Aviation 14 CFR 91.411
NOTE:
documents: and 91.413
These checks required for initial RVSM every 24
compliance.  Model 560XL Structural
Months or
RVSM Inspection Repair Manual section 51-
These checks also required for the whenever a
00-03
following: static port is
 Model 560XL Maintenance removed and
 If a static port is removed/installed
Manual sections 34-90-10- re-installed for
 If the RVSM critical region is repaired 7200 as applicable. any reason
or painted
GDL 69A Sections 5.11.1.1 & 5.11.2.1
GWX PROCESSOR Sections 5.20.1 & 5.20.2
GMC 7200 Sections 5.4.1 & 5.4.2
GCU 275 (Qty 2) Sections 5.7.1 & 5.7.2

Removal & Replacement On Condition
GSR 56 Satellite
Sections 5.10.1 & 5.10.2
Transceiver
GDL 59 Datalink Sections 5.12.1 & 5.12.2
GDR 66
Sections 5.13.1.1 & 5.13.2.1
Transceiver
GSA 9000 Removal & Replacement. Section 5.3.1 and 5.3.2 On Condition
Check of GSM 9100 servo mount O-ring

Section 5.3.3.1 On Condition
seal.
Removal & Replacement. Section 5.3.1 and 5.3.2 On Condition
Verify security of capstan and drive

shaft seal fasteners installed on GSM 20,000 flight
GSM 9100 Servo Section 5.3.3.3.
9100 pitch, roll, yaw, and pitch trim hours*
Mount
servo mounts.
20 years
Check the GSM 9100 pitch, roll, yaw, initially and
and pitch trim servo mount drive shaft Section 5.3.3.4. then every 2
seals. years
thereafter*

190-02313-01 Revision 2
1. Check the resistors and transient

voltage suppressors to verify
proper operation per Section
6.6.7.
2. Verify Electrical bond of P3061 and
P3081 connectors (harness side)
per Section 5.18.
3. Perform a visual inspection of the fuel
wiring in the wheel well area:
LH & RH Fuel
a) All electrical connectors, 1,200 flight
Temperature 981 Section 6.6.6
backshells and strain-reliefs are hours*
modules
properly secured.
b) Wire terminal lugs and shields
are properly secured to
connector backshells and
ground studs.
c) Evidence of overheating is not
present at any of the
connections.
d) Physical damage to ground
studs or terminal blocks is not
evident.
1. Check the resistors to verify

proper operation per Section
6.6.8.
2. Verify Electrical bond of P3071 and
P3091 connectors (harness side)
per Section 5.18.
a) All electrical connectors,
LH & RH Fuel Low 1,200 flight
backshells and strain-reliefs are Section 6.6.7
Level 981 modules hours*
properly secured.
ground studs.
connections.
evident.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
1. Check the transient voltage

suppressors to verify proper
operation per Section 6.6.9.
2. Verify Electrical bond of PC034 and
PC061 connectors (harness side)
per Section 5.18.
a) All electrical connectors,
backshells and strain-reliefs are
LH & RH FQS Fault 1,200 flight
properly secured. Section 6.6.9
Out 981 Protection hours*
ground studs.
connections.
evident.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
 Remove and replace the

Fuel Temperature and
Fuel Low Level -981
Modules as defined in
Garmin drawing 005-
If the aircraft is flown through an
01202-19.
electrically charged area of the
atmosphere, where electrical release is  Remove and replace the
Actual or Suspected transferred from cloud-to-cloud and from Jumper plug assemblies
Lightning Strike to cloud-to-earth, the airplane can become for the Fuel Quantity Bit
any of the following: a part of this flow. During a lightning Fault out 981 Modules,
strike, the current goes into the aircraft at GU228 and GU229, as
 Antennas
one point and goes out at another, defined in Garmin
 LH & RH Fuel usually at opposite sides of the airplane. drawing 005-W0035-09.
Temperature 981 It is in these areas, wing tips, and nose
 Reference Garmin
modules and tail sections, where damage is most
Antenna Install drawing
possible to occur. Burns and/or erosion
 LH & RH Fuel 005-01202-03 for location
of small surface areas of the skin and On Condition
Low Level 981 of installed Garmin
structure can be found during an
modules antennas. Complete the
inspection. Usually the damage is easily
following inspections:
seen, but damage that is hard to see,
 LH & RH Fuel
can occur. The function of this lightning o Perform a visual
Quantity BIT
strike inspection is to find any damage inspection of the
Fault out 981
that may have occurred to the G5000 fuselage as defined
jumper
system, before the aircraft is returned to in Section 4.4.14
assemblies
service. The Garmin units installed for below.
this STC, most likely to be impacted by a
o Perform the lightning
lightning strike, are the antennas and the
Strike unscheduled
GWX Processor located in the nose
maintenance
radome.
procedure defined in
section 5-50-00 of
the Textron Model
560XL Maintenance
Manual
*Denotes Airworthiness Limitation Maintenance Requirement (See Section 4.1 )
4.4 Visual Inspection

A visual examination of the G5000 equipment installed in the interior or exterior areas defined in this section
shall be accomplished using the criteria defined in section 4.4.1 to detect any damage, failure, or irregularity.
The inspection shall be made under normal lighting conditions, such as daylight, hangar lighting, or using
a flashlight or drop-light/s. The removal and/or opening of various access panels and doors and the
temporary removal of other aircraft equipment will be necessary to facilitate the visual inspection of the
Garmin G5000 equipment defined in this section.
Refer to the Textron Model 560XL Maintenance Manual for information pertaining to the removal,
installation and return-to-service of the non-Garmin equipment requiring removal. For aircraft zonal and
access panel removal information refer to chapter 6-20-01 and 6-20-02 of the Textron Model 560XL
Maintenance Manual. Reference FAA Advisory circular AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 11, Section 8, Paragraph
11-96; and chapter 20-21-03 of the Textron Model 560XL Maintenance Manual for a complete list of
inspection criteria for all electrical components.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4.4.1 Visual Inspection Criteria
Table 4-2, Visual Inspection Criteria
Inspection Criteria
Use the following criteria while performing the visual inspection of the Garmin G5000 electrical wiring, cables,
hardware and equipment listed in Sec 4.4.2 through 4.4.14.
a) Electrical wires and cables are adequately supported to prevent excessive movement
b) Electrical wires and cables are routed properly and protected to prevent chafing or damage against the airframe
structure or other components.
c) Check the G5000 equipment, racks, and electrical connectors for corrosion, security, or other defects.
d) On electrical connectors, no bent or broken electrical pins or evidence of arcing are present.
e) Equipment mounting racks and trays are properly secured to the aircraft structure.
f) All electrical connectors, backshells and strain-reliefs are properly secured.
g) Wire terminal lugs and shields are properly secured to connector backshells and ground studs.
h) Evidence of overheating is not present on terminal block connections.
i) Physical damage to ground studs or terminal blocks is not evident.
j) On terminal junctions with snap-in pin contacts, check pin contacts for being pulled from the terminal junction,
pin contacts for being loose, and pin contacts that easily pull free of the terminal junction.
k) Proper protection is provided on electrical wires, harnesses, and cables to prevent chaffing, abrasion, or
exposure to fluid.
l) Stand-offs, clamps, grommets, cable ties, and tie mounts that are used to secure wires and harnesses are in
good condition and are properly securing electrical harnesses and wiring.
m) Phenolic blocks, plastic liners, or rubber grommets are installed properly to provide protection, and are in good
condition to maintain wire separation between electrical harnesses and bulkheads, floors, or other structural
members.
n) The minimum radius of bend for wire or cable is ten times the outside diameter of the wire or cable, except that
at the terminal strips where the wire is suitably supported, the radius may be three times the diameter of the
wire or cable. Where it is impractical to install wiring or cables within the radius requirements, the bend shall be
enclosed in insulating tubing.
o) Coaxial cables are not bent at a radius of less than six times the outside diameter of the cable.
p) Insulating tubing and anti-chafe tape is installed, secured and in good condition to properly protect electrical
wires and harnesses.
q) Electrical wires and cables are routed above fluid lines with a minimum of 6 inches of separation from any
flammable liquid, fuel, or oxygen line, fuel tank wall, or other low voltage wiring that enters a fuel tank and
requires electrical isolation to prevent an ignition hazard. If 6 inches is not possible, a minimum of 2 inches is
mandatory.
r) Inspect for evidence of water damage due to poor compartment door seals or door fastener leakage if applicable.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4.4.2 Nose Radome Compartment Visual Inspection
Reference Garmin Nose Wire Harness Routing/INST drawing 005-01202-04, and Nose Bay Avionics
Installation drawing 005-01202-07 for additional equipment location and identification information
Table 4-3, Nose Radome Compartment Visual Inspection Procedure
Item Description/Procedure (Nose Radome Compartment Visual) Init
1. Remove the Nose Radome as defined in chapter 53-10-10 of the Model 560XL Maintenance Manual.
2. Perform a visual inspection of the Nose Radome compartment electrical wiring and components listed
below using the inspection criteria shown in Table 4-2.
3. When complete re-install the Nose Radome as defined in chapter 53-10-10 of the Model 560XL
Maintenance Manual if desired.
a) Inspect the GWX PROCESSOR Radar Antenna, R/T, Base, and electrical
connector P1101.
b) Inspect the close out plate where the GWX Processor base attaches to the FWS
Pressure Bulkhead for corrosion around the mounting hardware.
GWX
c) Inspect all electrical cables, harnesses, connectors and hardware between the
PROCESSOR &
FWD Pressure Bulkhead and the Glideslope Coupler connectors PN626, PN627,
Glideslope
PN628.
Antenna Coupler
d) Inspect all electrical cables, harnesses, connectors and hardware between the
FWD Pressure Bulkhead and the GWX Processor connector P1101
e) Inspect for evidence of water damage due to poor radome seals or radome
fastener leakage.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4.4.3 Nose Avionics Compartment Visual Inspection
Reference Garmin Nose Wire Harness Routing/INST drawing 005-01202-04, and Nose Bay Avionics
Installation drawing 005-01202-07 for additional equipment location and identification information.
NOTE
A visual inspection is a general visual examination of the Garmin G5000 equipment in the compartment. In
addition to the inspection criteria defined in section 4.4.1 that must be satisfied, also check for evidence of
degradation, such as corrosion, cracks, chafing of tubing, loose duct support, wiring damage, cable and
pulley wear, fluid leaks, inadequate drainage and for other conditions which could lead to
corrosion/damage. It may be necessary to remove and/or open access panels or doors to conduct the
inspection of the compartment. Refer to chapter 6-20-02 and of the Model 560XL Maintenance Manual for
a complete list of access panels and their locations.
Table 4-4, Nose Avionics Compartment Visual Inspection Procedure
Item Description/Procedure (Nose Compartment Visual) Init
1. Open the LH and RH Nose Compartment doors to gain access to the Garmin G5000 equipment shown below.
2. Remove electrical power from the aircraft or open the circuit breaker/s of the unit/s being inspected.
3. Remove the unit/s requiring inspection.
4. Perform a visual inspection of the units requiring inspection and the electrical wiring and hardware using the
inspection criteria shown in Table 4-2.
5. Re-install the unit/s after inspection and complete the appropriate return to service procedure/s.
6. When complete, close the LH and RH Nose Compartment doors if desired.
a) Inspect both GIA 64E units, racks and electrical/COAX connectors.

GIA 64E (Qty 2) b) Inspect the electrical wiring and harnesses that are terminated to each
GIA up to where they combine with the main harness.
a) Inspect both GDC 7400 units, mount, and electrical connector.

b) Inspect the electrical wiring and harnesses that are terminated to each
GDC 7400 Air Data GDC 7400 up to where they combine with the main harness.
Computer (Qty 2) c) Inspect the pitot/static plumbing lines and ensure they are secure and in
good condition and routed to provide positive moisture drainage.
(Reference Garmin Pitot Static Installation drawing 005-01202-17)
a) Inspect both GMA 36B units, racks and electrical connectors.

GMA 36B (Qty 2) b) Inspect the electrical wiring and harnesses that are terminated to each
GMA 36B up to where they combine with the main harness.
a) Inspect both GTX 3000 units, racks and electrical/COAX connectors

GTX 3000 (Qty 2) b) Inspect the electrical wiring and harnesses that are terminated to each
GTX 3000 up to where they combine with the main harness.
a) Inspect the GSD 41 racks and electrical connectors.

b) Verify the AHRS electrical harnesses, that are routed on the GSD
GSD 41 (Qty 2) shelves, are properly secured with cable tie mounts and cable ties that
are installed for this STC (Additional details provided in Garmin Nose
Wire Harness Routing/INST drawing 005-01202-04)
a) Inspect the RT-300 unit (if installed) and electrical/COAX connectors.

RT-300 Radar Altimeter (Qty
1) b) Inspect the electrical wiring and harnesses that are terminated to each
RT-300 up to where they combine with the main harness.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
a) Inspect the TCAS unit, racks and electrical/COAX connectors.

TCAS 2000 or TCAS II TPU-
67 Processor (Qty 1) b) Inspect the electrical wiring and harnesses that are terminated to the
TCAS up to where they combine with the main harness.
a) Inspect the GDR 66 unit (if installed) and electrical/COAX connectors.

GDR 66 Transceiver (Qty 1) b) Inspect the electrical wiring and harnesses that are terminated to the
GDR-66 up to where they combine with the main harness.
a) Inspect the GDL-59 unit (if installed) and electrical connector.

GDL 59 Datalink (Qty 1) b) Inspect the electrical wiring and harness terminated to the GDL-59 up
to where it combines with the main harness.
a) Inspect the GDL-69 unit and electrical/COAX connectors.

GDL 69 XM Datalink (Qty 1) b) Inspect the electrical wiring and harness terminated to the GDL-69 up
to where it combines with the main harness.
a) Inspect the GSR 56 (if installed) and electrical/COAX connectors.

GSR 56 Iridium (Qty 1) b) Inspect the electrical wiring and harnesses that are terminated to the
GSR 56 up to where they combine with the main harness.
ADF-4000 a) Inspect the ADF-4000, the dual ADF/DME mounting tray and
electrical/COAX connectors.
(If Installed)
(Qty 2) electrical connector up to where they combine with the main harness.
a) Inspect the DME-4000, the dual ADF/DME mounting tray and

DME-4000
electrical/COAX connectors.
(If Installed)
(QTY 2)
electrical connector up to where they combine with the main harness
a) Remove the AOA/Stall computer as defined in chapter 34-14-01 of the

Model 560XL Maintenance Manual.
b) Inspect the AOA computer, mounting tray and electrical connector.
AOA/Stall Computer
(existing, QTY 1) c) Inspect the electrical wiring and harness terminated to the electrical
connector up to where it combines with the main harness.
d) Reinstall and perform the Return to service as defined in chapter 34-14-
01 of the Model 560XL Maintenance Manual.
a) Remove the LITEF unit/s as defined in chapter 34-21-0X of the Model

560XL Maintenance Manual.
b) Inspect the AHRS unit, mounting tray and electrical connectors.
LCR-93 or LCR-100 AHRS
(existing, QTY 2) c) Inspect the electrical wiring and harness terminated to the electrical
connector up to where it combines with the main harness.
d) Reinstall and perform the Return to Service as defined in chapter 34-
21-01 of the Model 560XL Maintenance Manual.
a) Remove the AHRS Auxiliary battery as defined in chapter 34-21-01 of

the Model 560XL Maintenance Manual.
AHRS Auxiliary (Standby) b) Inspect the AHRS Auxiliary battery, mounting tray and electrical
Battery (existing, QTY 1) connector.
c) Reinstall and perform the Return to Service as defined in chapter 34-
21-01 of the Model 560XL Maintenance Manual.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
a) Inspect remote cooling fans and hoses for dirt accumulation and other
damage. Remove excess dirt.
Nose Cooling Fan (Qty 2)
b) Inspect the fans and connectors for corrosion or other defects. Check
the integrity of the harness connector assembly and their attachments.
a) Inspect the Junction Box and electrical connectors.
Avionics Junction Box b) Inspect the electrical wiring and harnesses that are terminated to each
electrical connector on the junction box up to where they combine with
the main harness.
a) Inspect FWD bulkhead electrical and COAX connectors for security of

attachment, corrosion or other defects.
Forward Pressure Bulkhead b) Inspect the electrical wiring, COAX cables and harnesses that are
Connectors & Hardware terminated to each electrical connector on the FWD Pressure BLKHD.
c) Inspect Ground blocks and studs for security of attachment, corrosion
or other defects.
a) Inspect the LH and RH electrical wiring and harnesses that are routed
LH and RH Nose Harnesses fore and aft down the center of the Nose compartment behind the
equipment mounted on the LH and RH Avionics Shelves.
a) Inspect the LH (320-01214-00) and RH (320-01214-01) Fuel System

Harnesses, using the inspection criteria defined in section 4.4.1. Also,
Nose Fuel System
verify the Nose fuel harnesses are routed and installed as defined in the
Harnesses
Garmin Routing drawings shown in Table 1-1 and wrapped in olive drab
with pink, violet, or ivory stripe colored protective sleeving.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4.4.4 Instrument Panel Visual Inspection
Reference Model 560XL Cabin Wire Harness Routing/INST drawing 005-01202-05 for additional
equipment location and identification information
Table 4-5, Instrument Panel Visual Inspection Procedure
Item Description/Procedure (Instrument Panel Visual) Init
2. Gain access behind the instrument panel by removing the PFDs and MFD as described in section 5.1.1
inspection criteria shown in Table 4-2.
5. Re-install the unit/s after all inspections are complete and perform the appropriate return to service
procedure/s.
a) Inspect the PFDs and MFD for any visual damage to the display screens or
bezels including buttons and control knobs.
GDU 1450W (Qty 3) b) Inspect the PFDs and MFD electrical connectors.
c) Inspect the electrical wiring and harness terminated to the PFDs and MFD up
to where they combine with the main cabin harness.
a) Inspect the GEAs, mounting tray and electrical connectors.

GEA 7100 Engine/
Airframe Unit (Qty 2) b) Inspect the electrical wiring and harnesses terminated to each GEA up to
where they combine with the main cabin harness.
a) Remove GEA1 to gain access to the GSR 56.

b) Inspect the GSR 56 (if installed), mounting tray and electrical/COAX
GSR 56 Iridium (if
connectors.
installed, Qty 1)
c) Inspect the electrical wiring and harnesses that are terminated to the GSR 56
up to where they combine with the main cabin harness.
a) Inspect the GCU and electrical connector.

GCU 275 (QTY 2) b) Inspect the electrical wiring and harness terminated to the GCU down to
where it combines with the main cabin harness.
a) Inspect the GMC and electrical connector.

GMC 7200 (QTY 1) b) Inspect the electrical wiring and harness terminated to the GMC down to
where it combines with the main cabin harness.
a) Inspect all electrical wiring and harnesses located behind the instrument
panel.
Electrical Harnesses b) In addition to meeting the inspection criteria defined in section 4.4.1, also
verify the Garmin wiring and harnesses installed for this STC maintain a 2-
inch separation away from all oxygen and fluid lines in the compartment.
a) Inspect the Cabin Fuel System Harness 320-01214-05, using the inspection
criteria defined in section 4.4.1. Also, verify the cabin fuel harness is routed
Cabin Fuel System
and installed as defined in the Garmin Routing drawings shown in Table 1-1
Harness
and wrapped in olive drab with pink, violet, or ivory stripe colored protective
sleeving. (Reference Garmin Cabin Harness ASSY drawing 005-01202-05).
GMC Glareshield a) Inspect the GMC Glareshield Mount Assembly and electrical connectors.
Mount Assembly (Qty b) Inspect the electrical wiring and harnesses that terminate to the GMC
1) Glareshield Mount Assembly.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Item Description/Procedure (Instrument Panel Visual) Init
a) Inspect FWD bulkhead electrical and COAX connectors for security of

attachment, corrosion or other defects.
Forward Pressure
b) Inspect the electrical wiring, COAX cables and harnesses that are terminated
Bulkhead Connectors
to each electrical connector on the FWD Pressure BLKHD.
& Hardware
c) Inspect Ground blocks and studs for security of attachment, corrosion or
other defects.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4.4.5 Pilot Side Panel Visual Inspection
Reference Model 560XL Cabin Wire Harness Routing/INST drawing 005-01202-05 for additional
electrical cable routing and location information.
Table 4-6, Pilot Side Panel Visual Inspection Procedure
Item Description/Procedure (Pilot Side Panel Visual) Init
1. Remove electrical power from the aircraft.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector (PY010) from the battery. Install the warning tags/signs.
3. Open the AHRS 1 AUX and AHRS 2 AUX circuit breakers from the right circuit breaker panel.
4. Gain access behind the pilot side panel by removing the pilot side access panels (Ref. chapter 6-20-02 of the
Model 560XL Maintenance Manual).
inspection criteria shown in section 4.4.1.
procedure/s.
8. Re-install the pilots side panel.
a) Inspect the Fuel Quantity Signal Conditioner and electrical connector.

Fuel Quantity Signal
Conditioner (QTY 1) b) Inspect the Fuel Quantity Signal Conditioner electrical wiring installed in the
pilot side panel.
Cabin Fuel System
Harness
sleeving. (Reference Garmin Cabin Harness ASSY drawing 005-01202-05)
a) Loosen the quick release screws along the top and bottom of circuit breaker
panel and tilt the top portion of the circuit breaker panel inward
b) Check bus bars for security and evidence of any arcing or burned areas.
c) Check terminal and screw tightness on each circuit breaker and feeder
Circuit Breaker Panel terminal.
Disconnect/Panel
d) Check feeder, main bus wires, and interconnect wiring terminals. Ensure the
terminals are tight and show no signs of arcing.
e) Check all attaching hardware on the outboard side of the panel for security
f) Check all circuit breakers for security and signs of damage.
a) Inspect the Pitot/Static Heater Sensor Disconnect (PC019) and Heater

Sensor wiring.
Pitot/Static Heater
Sensors b) In addition to meeting the inspection criteria defined in section 4.4.1, verify
the Garmin wiring and harnesses installed for this STC maintain a 2-inch
separation away from all oxygen and fluid lines in the compartment.
a) Inspect all wire harnesses located inside the copilot’s side panel.
Electrical Harnesses b) In addition to meeting the inspection criteria defined in section 4.4.1, verify
the Garmin wiring and harnesses located in the compartment maintain a 2-

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4.4.6 Copilot Side Panel Visual Inspection
Reference Model 560XL Cabin Wire Harness Routing/INST drawing 005-01202-05 for additional electrical
cable routing and location information.
Table 4-7, Copilot Side Panel Visual Inspection Procedure
Item Description/Procedure (Copilot Side Panel Visual) Init

2. Gain access to the copilot’s side panel by removing the required access panels (Ref. chapter 6-20-02 of the
Model 560XL Maintenance Manual).
3. Perform a visual inspection of the units requiring inspection and the electrical wiring and hardware in the
compartment using the inspection criteria shown in section 4.4.1.
4. Re-install the copilots side panel.
Cabin Fuel System
Harness
a) Loosen the quick release screws along the top and bottom of circuit breaker
panel and tilt the top portion of the circuit breaker panel inward
b) Check bus bars for security and evidence of any arcing or burned areas.
c) Check terminal and screw tightness on each circuit breaker and feeder
Circuit Breaker Panel terminal.
Disconnect/Panel
d) Check feeder, main bus wires, and interconnect wiring terminals. Ensure the
terminals are tight and show no signs of arcing.
e) Check all attaching hardware on the outboard side of the panel for security
f) Check all circuit breakers for security and signs of damage.
a) Inspect all wire harnesses located inside the copilot’s side panel.
Electrical Harnesses b) In addition to meeting the inspection criteria defined in section 4.4.1, verify
the Garmin wiring and harnesses located in the compartment maintain a 2-

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4.4.7 Cockpit & Cabin Under-Floor Visual Inspection
Table 4-8, Cockpit & Cabin Under-Floor Visual Inspection Procedure
Item Description/Procedure (Cockpit & Cabin Under-Floor Visual) Init

2. Gain access under the cockpit and cabin floor by removing the access floor panels. (Ref. chapter 6-20-02 of
the Model 560XL Maintenance Manual).
3. Perform a visual inspection of the electrical wiring, COAX cables and harnesses that are routed under the LH
and RH cockpit and cabin floor using the inspection criteria shown in section 4.4.1.
4. In addition to meeting the inspection criteria defined in section 4.4.1, verify the Garmin wiring and harnesses
installed for this STC maintain a 2-inch separation from all air ducting, flight control cables, oxygen and fluid
lines.
5. Inspect the Cabin Fuel System Harness 320-01214-05, using the inspection criteria defined in section 4.4.1.
Also, verify the cabin fuel harness is routed and installed as defined in the Garmin Routing drawings shown in
Table 1-1 and wrapped in olive drab with pink, violet, or ivory stripe colored protective sleeving. (Reference
Garmin Cabin Harness ASSY drawing 005-01202-05).
6. Re-install the cockpit and cabin floor panels that were removed as shown in chapter 6-20-02 of the Model
560XL Maintenance Manual.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4.4.8 Pedestal Visual Inspection
Table 4-9, Pedestal Visual Inspection Procedure
Item Description/Procedure (Pedestal Visual Inspection) Init
2. Gain access to view inside the pedestal by removing the GTCs and Display Format/Dimming Panel or by
removing the pedestal side panels (Ref. chapter 6-20-02 of the Model 560XL Maintenance Manual).
5. Re-install the unit/s that were removed after all inspections are complete and perform the appropriate return
to service procedure/s.
a) Inspect both GTC 575 units and electrical connectors.

b) Inspect the electrical harness that is terminated to each GTC
GTC 575 (Qty 2) c) In addition to meeting the inspection criteria defined in section 4.4.1, verify the
GTC electrical harnesses are properly secured in cable tie-mounts located in the
aft pedestal and on the pedestal floor to maintain separation.
a) Inspect the DFD Panel and electrical connector.

Display b) Inspect the electrical harness that is terminated to the DFD.
Format/Dimming c) In addition to meeting the inspection criteria defined in section 4.4.1, verify the
Panel GTC electrical harnesses are properly secured in cable tie-mounts located in the
aft pedestal and on the pedestal floor to maintain separation.
a) Inspect the Rotary Test switch and electrical connector. (Note – The electrical
connector for the switch is located at the Cabin/Pedestal Disconnect (not directly
Rotary Test switch on the panel). Ensure the electrical harness for the switch does not show any
signs of chaffing against the Pitch Trim wheel and ensure the electrical harness is
properly secured to prevent chaffing).
a) Inspect all wire harnesses located inside the pedestal.
Pedestal Wiring b) In addition to meeting the inspection criteria defined in section 4.4.1, verify the
Garmin wiring and harnesses located in the compartment maintain a 2-inch
separation away from all oxygen and fluid lines in the compartment.
EMER Freq & a) Inspect annunciators and electrical wires connected to annunciators.
GND Dispatch b) Verify the annunciators illuminate when pressed.
Push Button
Annunciators

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4.4.9 Cabin Aft Pressure Bulkhead Visual Inspection
Table 4-10, Aft Pressure Bulkhead Visual Inspection Procedure
Item Description/Procedure (Cabin Aft Pressure BLKHD Inspection) Initials
2. Gain access to the Aft Pressure BLKHD. (Ref. chapter 6-20-02 of the Model 560XL Maintenance Manual).
procedure/s.
Aft Pressure a) Inspect Aft Pressure bulkhead electrical and COAX connectors for security
Bulkhead of attachment, corrosion or other defects.
Connectors & b) Inspect the electrical wiring, COAX cables and harnesses that are
Hardware terminated to each electrical connector on the Aft Pressure BLKHD.
Aft Pressure a) Inspect all exposed wire harnesses and coax cables that terminate to or that
BLKHD wiring feed-thru the Aft Pressure BLKHD.
Cabin Fuel
System Harness
a) Inspect the PA Amp and electrical connector.

b) Inspect the PA Chime/Tone Generator and electrical connector.
PA Amp & Chime
c) Inspect the GGS103 ground stud.
/ PA Generator
d) Inspect the wire harnesses that terminate to the PA Amp and PA
Chime/Tone Generator.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4.4.10 Tail-cone Under-Floor Visual Inspection
Table 4-11, Tail-cone Under-Floor Visual Inspection Procedure
Item Description/Procedure (Tail-cone Under-Floor Visual) Init

2. Gain access to the tail-cone compartment through the Baggage Bay door and then gain access to under the
baggage bay floor in the tail-cone by removing the access floor panels. (Ref. chapter 6-20-02 of the Model
560XL Maintenance Manual).
lines.
5. Re-install the tail-cone access panels that were removed. (Ref. chapter 6-20-02 of the Model 560XL
Maintenance Manual).
Aft Pressure a) Inspect the Aft Pressure bulkhead electrical and COAX connectors located
Bulkhead under the tail-cone floor.
Connectors &
Hardware
a) Inspect the fuel sensors and electrical connectors.

b) Inspect the fuel sensor electrical harnesses that are terminated to each
Fuel Temp & Fuel sensor and the ground studs associated with the sensors.
Level Sensors c) In addition to meeting the inspection criteria defined in section 4.4.1, verify
the associated fuel system wiring is wrapped in olive drab with pink, violet, or
ivory stripe colored protective sleeving.
a) Inspect the GDR 66 COM 3 antenna (if installed) and COAX connector.
GDR 66 COM 3
Antenna (Qty 1) b) Inspect the GDR 66 COAX cable between the aft pressure bulkhead and the
GDR 66 antenna.
a) Inspect all electrical wiring, harnesses and COAX cables located in the tail-
Tail-cone
cone under the baggage bay. (Reference Garmin Tail Harness ASSY
Electrical Harness
drawing 005-01202-06)
a) Inspect the Tail Fuel System Harness 320-01214-06, using the inspection
criteria defined in section 4.4.1. Also, verify the Tail fuel harness is routed
Tail Fuel System
Harness
sleeving. (Reference Garmin Tail Harness ASSY drawing 005-01202-06)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4.4.11 Roll Servo Visual Inspection
Table 4-12, Roll Servo Visual Inspection Procedure
Item Description/Procedure (Roll Servo Visual) Init

2. Gain access to Panel 313AR under the wing center section. (Ref. chapter 6-20-02 of the Model 560XL
Maintenance Manual)
3. Perform a visual inspection of the roll servo and the electrical wiring and hardware using the inspection
criteria shown in section 4.4.1.
lines.
5. Re-install the 313AR access panel that was removed. (Ref. chapter 6-20-02 of the Model 560XL
Note: The Roll Servo is accessed from underneath the aircraft in Panel 313AR. See View A below.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Electrical Inspection
a) Inspect the GSA 9000 roll servo electrical connector (P3011).
b) Inspect the electrical harness that is terminated to the servo. Ensure the
electrical harness is clear of all fluid lines and flight control cables as defined
in section 4.4.1.
c) Inspect the servo, servo mount, attaching hardware, connector, support
structures, and control cables to ensure no corrosion, chaffing, cracks, or
other defects exist.
GSA 9000/GSM 9100 Inspection
(If any of the inspection items below are missing or loose, remove the applicable
GSM 9100 servo mount and send to a properly rated FAA Approved Repair
Station qualified for servicing of this unit).
a) For the GSM 9100 servo mount, verify the two capstan retaining screws and
six drive shaft seal screws are tightly secured. Reference Figure 2-6 for
location of capstan retaining screws.
b) For the GSM 9100 servo mount, inspect the oleophobic vents (4 EA) and
remove any obstructions, if present. Reference Figure 2-6 for location of
oleophobic vents.
c) For the GSM 9100 servo mount, inspect the Teflon drive shaft seal for
damage. If damage is found, remove the GSM 9100 servo mount and send
to a FAA Approved Repair Station. Reference Figure 2-6 for location of
Teflon drive shaft seal on the GSM 9100 servo mounts.
d) For the GSM 9100 servo mount, if the Teflon drive shaft seal does NOT
have inspection tab features as shown in Figure 2-6, then remove the GSM
GSA 9000 Roll 9100 servo mount and send to Garmin for inspection and repair.
Servo (QTY 1)
e) For the GSM 9100 servo mount, if the Teflon drive shaft seal has the
inspection tab features as shown in Figure 2-6, the driveshaft seal on the
GSM 9100 servo mount must be inspected per the following procedure:
 Using a small flat blade screwdriver, press one side of a tab until it
bends over. The tab shall bend over 90° without breaking; this
indicates the seal is still pliable and so able to effectively seal the unit
from moisture. If the tab breaks, send the GSM 9100 servo mount to a
properly rated FAA Approved Repair Station qualified for servicing of
this unit.
f) For the GSM 9100 servo mount, verify the mounting fasteners (GSA 9000 to
GSM 9100 and GSM 9100 to airframe) are tightly secured. If any of the
fasteners are missing or loose, then replace or tighten in accordance with
the GSA 9000/GSM 9100 Installation Manual (190-00303-85).
g) For the GSM 9100 servo mount, verify the bridle cable ball is retained and
secured by the servo capstan spring. Verify the servo capstan spring is
tightly secured. If the spring is missing or loose, remove the applicable GSM
9100 servo mount and send to a FAA Approved Repair Station. Reference
Figure 2-6 for location of servo capstan spring on the GSM 9100 servo
mounts.
Flight Control Cable Inspection
a) Examine cable runs for incorrect routing, fraying and twisting. Look for
interference with adjacent structure, equipment, wiring, plumbing and other
controls.
b) Have an assistant manually move the control wheel from stop to stop in the
roll axis and visually observe the corresponding servo and control cabling.
Check cable movement for binding and full travel. Observe cables for slack

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Item Description/Procedure (Roll Servo Visual) Init
when moving the corresponding controls. Ensure there is no binding in the
control cabling, and the capstan rotates freely.
c) Perform a servo control cable inspection in accordance with AC 43.13-1B,
Chapter 7, Section 8, Paragraph 7-149 to ensure no fraying, corrosion, or
other damage exists. If the condition of the cable is questionable, replace it
with a new one.
d) Check the tension on the servo control cables. (Ref. Textron Model 560XL
Maintenance Manual chapter 27 and Garmin Servo installation drawings
005-1202-11).
e) Perform any additional flight control cable inspections defined in Task 20-10-
04-1210 of the Model 560XL Maintenance Manual of chapter 20-10-04-2 not
completed in the steps above.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4.4.12 Tail Compartment Visual Inspection
Reference Model 560XL Tail Wire Harness Routing/INST drawing 005-01202-06 for additional electrical
Table 4-13, Tail Compartment Visual Inspection Procedure
Item Description/Procedure (Tail Compartment Visual Inspection) Initials

2. Gain access to the tail-cone compartment through the Baggage Bay door (Ref. chapter 6-20-02 of the Model
560XL Maintenance Manual).
lines.
a) Inspect the FDR and CVR mounting trays, electrical rack connectors and
ground studs (TG303, TG304).
FDR/CVR
b) Inspect the electrical wiring and harnesses that are terminated to the FDR
and CVR electrical connectors.
a) Inspect all electrical wiring and harnesses located in the tailcone above the
Electrical baggage bay floor.
Harnesses b) Verify all Garmin wiring and harnesses, installed for this STC, maintains a 2-
criteria defined in section 4.4.1. Also, verify the tail fuel harness is routed
Tail Fuel System
Harness
sleeving. (Reference Garmin Tail Harness ASSY drawing 005-01202-06)
a) Inspect the Fuel system electrical harnesses located under the tail-cone
Fuel Temp & Low- floor.
Level Sensors & b) In addition to meeting the inspection criteria defined in section 4.4.1, verify
981 Module the associated fuel system wiring, routed in the Tail compartment, is
sensors wrapped in olive drab with pink, violet, or ivory stripe colored protective
sleeving.
a) Inspect the GDR 66 COM 3 antenna (if installed) and COAX connector.
GDR 66 COM 3
b) Inspect the GDR 66 COAX cable between the aft pressure bulkhead and the
Antenna (Qty 1)
GDR 66 antenna.
Electrical Inspection
a) Inspect the GSA 9000 servo electrical connectors.
GSA 9000 Pitch, b) Inspect the electrical harnesses that are terminated to the servos. Ensure the
Pitch Trim and electrical harnesses are clear of all fluid lines and flight control cables as
Yaw Servos defined in section 4.4.1.
c) Inspect the servos, servo mounts, attaching hardware, connectors, support
structures, and control cables to ensure no corrosion, chaffing, cracks, or
other defects exist.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
GSA 9000/GSM 9100 Inspection

(If any of the inspection items below are missing or loose, remove the applicable
GSM 9100 servo mount and send to a properly rated FAA Approved Repair
Station qualified for servicing of this unit).
a) For each GSM 9100 servo mounts, verify the two capstan retaining screws
and six drive shaft seal screws are tightly secured. Reference Figure 2-6 for
location of capstan retaining screws.
b) For each GSM 9100 servo mount, inspect the oleophobic vents (4 EA) and
remove any obstructions, if present. Reference Figure 2-6 for location of
oleophobic vents.
c) For each GSM 9100 servo mount, inspect the Teflon drive shaft seal for
damage. If damage is found, remove the GSM 9100 servo mount and send
to a FAA Approved Repair Station. Reference Figure 2-6 for location of
Teflon drive shaft seal on the GSM 9100 servo mounts.
d) For each GSM 9100 servo mount, if the Teflon drive shaft seal does NOT
have inspection tab features as shown in Figure 2-6, then remove the GSM
9100 servo mount and send to Garmin for inspection and repair.
e) For each GSM 9100 servo mount, if the Teflon drive shaft seal has the
inspection tab features as shown in Figure 2-6, the driveshaft seal on the
 Using a small flat blade screwdriver, press one side of a tab until it
bends over. The tab shall bend over 90° without breaking; this indicates
the seal is still pliable and so able to effectively seal the unit from
moisture. If the tab breaks, send the GSM 9100 servo mount to a
properly rated FAA Approved Repair Station qualified for servicing of
this unit.
f) For each GSM 9100 servo mount, verify the mounting fasteners (GSA 9000
to GSM 9100 and GSM 9100 to airframe) are tightly secured. If any of the
fasteners are missing or loose, then replace or tighten in accordance with the
GSA 9000/GSM 9100 Installation Manual (190-00303-85).
g) For each GSM 9100 servo mount, verify the bridle cable ball is retained and
secured by the servo capstan spring. Verify the servo capstan spring is
tightly secured. If the spring is missing or loose, remove the applicable GSM
9100 servo mount and send to a FAA Approved Repair Station. Reference
Figure 2-6 for location of servo capstan spring on the GSM 9100 servo
mounts.
Flight Control Cable Inspection
a) Examine cable runs for incorrect routing, fraying and twisting. Look for
interference with adjacent structure, equipment, wiring, plumbing and other
controls.
b) Have an assistant manually move the control surfaces from stop to stop and
visually observe the corresponding servo and control cabling. Check cable
movement for binding and full travel. Observe cables for slack when moving
the corresponding controls. Ensure there is no binding in the control cabling,
and the capstan rotates freely.
c) Perform a servo control cable inspection in accordance with AC 43.13-1B,
Chapter 7, Section 8, Paragraph 7-149 to ensure no fraying, corrosion, or

190-02313-01 Revision 2
other damage exists. If the condition of the cable is questionable, replace it

with a new one.
d) Check the tension on the servo control cables. (Ref. Textron Model 560XL
Maintenance Manual chapter 27 and Garmin Servo installation drawings
005-1202-12, -13, and -14).
e) Perform any additional flight control cable inspections defined in Task 20-10-
04-1210 of the Model 560XL Maintenance Manual of chapter 20-10-04-2 not
completed in the steps above.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4.4.13 Landing Gear Wheel Well Visual Inspection
Reference Model 560XL Tail Wire Harness Routing/INST drawing 005-01202-06 for additional electrical
Table 4-14, Landing Gear Wheel Well Visual Inspection Procedure
Item Description/Procedure (Landing Gear Wheel Well Visual Inspection) Initials

2. Gain access to the wing through the Baggage Bay door (Ref. chapter 6-20-02 of the Model 560XL Maintenance
Manual).
lines.
Fuel Temperature criteria defined in section 4.4.1. Also, verify the fuel harness is wrapped in
Harness olive drab with pink, violet, or ivory stripe colored protective sleeving.
(Reference Garmin Tail/Ext Fuel Sys Harness Assy drawing 320-01214-06)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4.4.14 Antenna and Exterior Fuselage Skin Visual Inspection
Reference Model 560XL Antenna Install drawing 005-01202-03 for antenna locations.
Table 4-15, Antenna and Exterior Fuselage Skin Inspection Procedure
Item Description/Procedure Initials
a) Inspect all external antennas for leading edge erosion and condition of base
seals.
b) Verify there are no cracks in the antenna, no deformation in the mounting
structure, and that all sealing fillets around the antennas are in good
condition.
Antennas
c) If the antenna is broken, cracked, dented, etc. then it must be replaced.
d) If the attachment is not secure, re-work the installation and complete
electrical bonding test based on installation requirements.
e) In the event the antenna seal shows sign of damage or decomposition, re-
seal and complete the Electrical bonding test to installation requirements.
a) Perform a detailed visual inspection of the exterior fuselage skin around the
antennas (reference Model 560XL Maintenance Manual, Task 53-30-01-
2100.)
b) Check for cracks, loose/missing fasteners, or any other damage.
Exterior Fuselage c) The antennas do not need to be removed to perform this inspection.
Skin d) Should damage be detected in any structural component during this
inspection, all adjacent structures must be carefully investigated for
indications of related damage. All damage must be repaired using data
obtained from the Structural Repair Manual (SRM), Textron Aviation, or
other approved sources.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4.4.15 Post Lightning Strike Maintenance Action
If the aircraft is flown through an electrically charged area of the atmosphere, where electrical release is transferred from
cloud-to-cloud and from cloud-to-earth, the airplane can become a part of this flow. During a lightning strike, the entry and
exit points have the largest current conducted into the aircraft extremities. Aircraft areas between the entry exit points can
also see some smaller amplitudes strikes. The aircraft extremities are where the largest damage can occur. Other areas
may also see lesser damage. Burns and/or erosion of small surface areas on the skin, structure or externally mounted
equipment can be found during an inspection. Usually the damage is easily seen, but damage that is hard to see, can
occur also. The function of this lightning strike inspection is to find any damage that may have occurred to the G5000
system, before the aircraft is returned to service. The Garmin units installed for this STC, most likely to be impacted by a
lightning strike, are the antennas and the GWX Processor located in the nose radome.
Reference Model 560XL Antenna Install drawings in Section 1.5 for antenna location.
Table 4-16, Lightning Strike Inspection Procedure
Item Description/Procedure
1. Remove and replace the Fuel Temperature and Fuel Low Level -981 Modules (GU307, GU309,
GU306 & GU308) as defined in Garmin drawing 005-01202-19.
2. Perform a visual inspection of the fuel wiring in the wheel well area:
LH & RH Fuel
Temperature a) All electrical connectors, backshells and strain-reliefs are properly secured.
and fuel level b) Wire terminal lugs and shields are properly secured to connector backshells and ground
981 modules studs.
c) Evidence of overheating is not present at any of the connections.
d) Physical damage to ground studs or terminal blocks is not evident.
1. Remove and replace LMD jumper plug assembly GU229 and GU228 as defined in Garmin
drawing 005-W0035-09.
LH & RH FQS 2. Perform a visual inspection of the wiring around the Fuel Quantity Signal Conditioner installation:
BIT Fault a) All electrical connectors, backshells and strain-reliefs are properly secured.
protection b) Wire terminal lugs and shields are properly secured to connector backshells and ground
studs.
1. Perform visual inspection of the wiring around the antennas and systems listed below:
a) All electrical connectors, backshells and strain-reliefs are properly secured.
b) Wire terminal lugs and shields are properly secured to connector backshells and ground
studs.
Antennas e) Inspect all external antennas for leading edge erosion and condition of base seals.
f) Verify there are no cracks in the antenna, no deformation in the mounting structure, and
that all sealing fillets around the antennas are in good condition.
g) If the antenna is broken, cracked, dented, etc. then it must be replaced.
h) If the attachment is not secure, re-work the installation and complete electrical bonding test
based on installation requirements.
i) In the event the antenna seal shows sign of damage or decomposition, re-seal and
complete the Electrical bonding test to installation requirements.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5. Maintenance Practices (G5000 GIFD Equipment)
WARNING
Limit ground operation of all Pitot, Static and AOA heaters to 2 minutes and ensure
all heater covers are removed prior to proceeding with tests to preclude damage.
5.1 GDU 1450W Display Unit

5.1.1 GDU 1450W Removal
1. Open the applicable circuit breaker/s for the GDU 1450 Display Unit being removed.
2. Using a 3/32” hex tool, rotate all four pawl latch fasteners counter-clockwise until they reach their
stops.
3. Carefully remove the display from the panel.
4. While supporting the display, disconnect the connector and remove the unit from instrument panel.
5.1.2 GDU 1450W Installation
1. Inspect the connector and pins for signs of damage. Repair any damage. While supporting the
display, connect the connector to the rear of the unit.
2. Ensure the four fasteners are fully retracted and in the horizontal position and carefully insert the
display into the panel cutout until it is flush with the main instrument panel and all fasteners align with
the corresponding holes. Do not use excessive force while inserting the display.
3. Using a 3/32” hex tool, rotate each pawl latch fastener clockwise (20 +/-2 IN-LBS) to lock the display
to the main instrument panel.
4. Perform an electrical bond check of the re-installed unit per Section 5.19.3. The reading should be no
more than double the installation requirement of 2.5 milli-volts (2.5 mΩ) or 5 milli-volts (5 mΩ). If the
bonding checks fails, i.e. the resistance is higher than 5 milli-volts (5 mΩ), then clean and rebond as
necessary. Re-attach equipment racks and complete electrical bonding test based on the original
installation requirements. Refer to the applicable installation drawing for how to prepare electrical
bonding surfaces. After bonding checks are complete, ensure all electrical connectors are
reconnected.
5. Close the display circuit breaker/s
6. If the MFD and/or PFD were replaced, configure and functionally test the MFD and/or PFD as defined
in Sections 5.1.4 and 1.1.1.
7. If the MFD and/or PFD were temporarily removed for ease of maintenance, functionally test as
defined in Section 1.1.1.
5.1.3 PFD1 Configuration Module Removal & Replacement

Configuration module 011-00979-20 is installed on PFD1 connector P2011. Reference GDU 1450W
Installation manual 190-00303-9C or section 5.1.3.2 for configuration module mounting instructions.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Figure 5-1, GDU1450W (PFD1) Configuration Module Installation
1. Start the G5000 system in configuration mode (reference Section 3.1).
2. Go to the Configuration Upload Page on PFD 1.
3. Press the UPDT CFG softkey and press ENT.
Table 5-1, Configuration Module Kit, Part Number 011-00979-20
Item Description Qty Needed Garmin Part

Number
Configuration Module Sub-Assy, Potted w/EEPROM, 1

1 011-02179-00
Jackscrew
3 Cable, 4-Conductor Harness 1 325-00122-00
4 Pins, #22 AWG (HD) 4 336-00021-00
10 Pan Head Screw 1 211-60232-07
5.1.3.1 PFD1 Configuration Module Removal

1. Remove PFD1 from instrument panel as defined in section 5.1.1
2. Disconnect connector P2011 from PFD1.
3. Remove 2 screws from cover on backshell and remove cover.
4. Inspect configuration module connector and ensure it is properly seated and not partially seated.
5. Unplug connector from configuration module.
6. Unscrew screw securing the configuration module to the backshell.
7. Remove configuration module.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.1.3.2 PFD1 Configuration Module Installation
1. Place configuration module into position and secure with screw.
2. Insert connector into configuration module and ensure it is fully seated.
3. Reassemble backshell cover and secure with screws.
4. Inspect PFD1 connector P2011 for damaged pins.
5. Install PFD1 as defined in section 5.1.2.
6. Reload the following items:
a. Reload PFD1 software and all configuration as defined in 3.3.3.
b. Reload all applicable options as defined in 3.3.4.
c. Reload all enablement card features as defined in section 3.3.5.1.
d. Reload aircraft registration information as defined in section 3.4.
e. When complete, confirm configuration as defined 3.5
7. Power the aircraft and start PFD1 in configuration mode.
8. Re-enter the aircraft registration information as defined in section 3.4.
9. Update the GTX 1 and GTX2 registration information as defined in section 5.17.8.
10. Confirm the aircraft configuration as defined in section 3.5.
11. On the PFD1 System Upload page, press the ‘UPDT CFG’ softkey (#11) to update the new
configuration module with the existing G5000 system information.
12. Cycle power to PFD1 and restart in normal mode.
13. Perform PFD functional test as defined in section 1.1.1.
5.1.4 GDU 1450W Software & Configuration Loading

1. Obtain the correct G5000 Textron Model 560XL System Software Loader card for the software version
installed in the system (reference Section 3.3.1).
2. Gather the existing system information and currently installed options, etc. using the following methods.
This information will be required following installation of the replacement:
a. To gather a list of the currently installed optional equipment and enablement card features,
aircraft weight configuration, configuration items, 3rd party installations interfaced to the G5000
system, software LRU part numbers, SYS ID, and most other required items, the best way is
to generate an aircraft report as defined in section 3.2.2.
b. The System ID and software version of the system may also be obtained using the system
status page (reference Section 3.2).
3. After obtaining the required system information, power down the aircraft.
4. Install the replacement display in the panel and defined in section 5.1.2. Note that a new PFD1 must
be installed in the PFD2 position for initial software loading to prevent overwriting PFD1 config module
data.
5. Put the G5000 system loader card in the top slot of PFD1. Start the G5000 system in configuration
mode (reference Section 3.1.1).

190-02313-01 Revision 2
7. If PFD1 was replaced perform the steps in section 3.3.3.2 and continue to Step 9 below when complete.
8. If the MFD or PFD2 is being replaced, perform the following steps:
a. On PFD1, when the “DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES?” prompt appears,
press the NO softkey (#11).
b. If prompted to update the custom graphic files during this sequence, press the YES soft-
key. The message may or may not be posted based on if the custom graphic files are
already installed on the PFD.
DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE THE CUSTOM GRAPHIC FILES (EG, SPLASH SCREEN)?
NO WILL BE ASSUMED IN 30 SECONDS.
c. If the custom graphic files were loaded, the following message will be displayed. Press any
soft-key to continue as instructed.
UPDATED 1 FILE SUCCESSFULLY!

PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.
CONTINUING IN 10 SECONDS.
d. At this point PFD1 will continue initializing and open to the system upload page.
e. On PFD1, activate the cursor and highlight the GROUP field (Reference section 3.1.2).
f. Highlight and select either ‘XL Base’ or ‘XLS Base’’ from the ‘Group’ list as applicable to
the aircraft type.
g. Once the ‘XL Base’ or ‘XLS Base’ GROUP is selected, the cursor moves to the ITEM
window.
h. Highlight and select ‘XL Base’ or ‘XLS Base’’ from the ‘ITEM’ list based on the aircraft type.
i. A list of LRUs and various other configuration items will now be shown in the Product field
of the System Upload page (Reference Figure 3-7). All configuration boxes will be
automatically checked and the ‘MFD, PFD 2 software box will also be checked.
j. On PFD1, press the LOAD softkey (#6) to start the download of the MFD or PFD2 software
and all configuration.
k. Observe the progress of the software and configuration loading and verify all software and
configuration load without errors as indicated by the following indications:
i. Green “PASS” or white “N/A” in SOFTWARE and CONFIGURATION columns
adjacent to each product.
ii. “Upload and Crossfill Complete” pop-up message.
l. Acknowledge the “Upload and Crossfill Complete” pop-up message when prompted.
m. Deactivate the cursor.
n. Continue loading all required Garmin and non-Garmin options and enablement features.
(Reference section 3.3.4)
o. Re-enter the Aircraft Registration number. (Reference section 3.4)
190-02313-01 Revision 2
p. When all options and features are loaded, complete the steps in section 3.5 (Configuration
Confirmation) to update the G5000 system configuration for the aircraft.
q. Continue to Step 9.
9. Load all required databases, E-Docs and checklists.
10. When complete, cycle power to the aircraft and perform the GDU display functional test as defined in
section 1.1.1.
5.1.5 GDU 1450W Troubleshooting
5.1.5.1 GDU 1450W Symptoms
Symptom Recommended Action
 Cycle power.
Display is blank
 If GDU recovers, observe display for yellow text containing error information at the top
of the screen. If message indicates software need to be re-loaded, then re-load
software. Otherwise, replace the GDU.
 Use a bright light to verify LCD is active.
 Adjust avionics dimmer control full clockwise.
 Manually turn up backlight on the PFD and load configuration files to the GDU.
 Ensure slide lock is fully engaged with the locking tabs on the back of the unit.
Display resets  If slide lock is not fully engaged, remove connector and verify the locking tabs on the
GDU are perpendicular to the connector. If necessary, straighten them before reseating
connector.
 Ensure GDU is receiving power and ground. If a circuit breaker is tripped, determine source
of short before closing the breaker.
 Ensure circuit breakers have not failed and power wire connections are secure.
 Swap PFD1 and PFD2.
 If problem follows unit, replace the display. Please note the position it failed in
(PFD1/2).
Display flickers
 If problem does not follow unit, troubleshoot aircraft wiring for fault.
 DO NOT insert a screwdriver of any length into the card slot.

 DO NOT pry against the overlay.
 DO NOT force the SD Card out.
 Use a small screwdriver in the groove on the side of the exposed end of the card to help
pull out the card.
SD card is stuck  Push the card in further to release the card locking mechanism.
in GDU  Check SD Card for having more than one label. Two or more labels on the card will cause
sticking.
 Remove all but one label.
 Ensure the SD card is from SanDisk. Use of other SD Cards is not recommended.
 If card was inserted with the label facing to the right, do not attempt to remove. Return the
unit to Garmin for repair.
 Go to the GDU TEST page in configuration mode and verify button, knob, or joystick
A button, knob or operates correctly by observing a change in color from red to green in the
button/knob/joystick icon when the button/knob/joystick is pressed. If a button is stuck, the
joystick is not
button icon will be green without pressing the button as soon as the GDU TEST page is
functioning accessed.
 If problem is verified, replace GDU.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
No display of
 Ensure Terrain, Obstacle and Safe Taxi databases have been loaded and are not expired.
Terrain, Obstacle
or Safe Taxi  Allow the G5000 system and GPS to initialize and no ensure no GPS related failure
messages are present.
information
 On the Light Panel ensure the Panel Light Switch is set to the “ON” position.
Display will not
 Reload GDU configuration files.
track dimmer bus
 If display is a PFD, swap PFD1 and PFD2 to see if problem remains with display.
 Replace display if condition remains with the same unit.
 If condition remains in original position after swapping displays, check GDU dimmer
Keyboard will not input to verify voltage is present.
track dimmer bus  If display is the MFD, check dimmer input to verify voltage is present.
 Replace MFD if dimmer voltage is present.
5.1.5.2 GDU 1450W GTC System Messages
Failure Message Cause Solution

The system has found the PFDs
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
and/or MFD software versions do
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
not match.
MANIFEST – PFD 1 software
mismatch. Communication Halted. The system has detected an  Load/reload GDU software and
incorrect software version loaded configuration. See Section 3.3.3 for
MANIFEST – PFD 2 software in the specified PFD. Loading procedure.
mismatch. Communication Halted.
The system has detected an
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
incorrect software version loaded
in MFD.
DOC VIEWER MISMATCH – See The installed documents found on

 Inspect files in the ‘EDOC’ directory
Document Viewer Page for the bottom card of each GDU do on the bottom SD cards in each
detailed info. not match. Ensure each card has GDU.
the appropriate documents.
PFD1 CARD1 ERR – PFD1 card
1 is invalid.
PFD2 CARD1 ERR – PFD2 card  The top SD card for the specified
The SD card in the top card slot for GDU needs reinserted, reloaded or
1 is invalid. the specified GDU is invalid. replaced.
MFD CARD1 ERR – MFD card 1
is invalid.
PFD1 CARD2 ERR – PFD1 card
2 is invalid.
PFD2 CARD2 ERR – PFD2 card The SD card in the bottom card  The bottom SD card for the
slot for the specified GDU is specified GDU needs reinserted,
2 is invalid.
invalid. reloaded or replaced.
MFD CARD2 ERR – MFD card 2
is invalid.
PFD1 CARD1 REM – PFD1 card
1 was removed. Reinsert card.
PFD2 CARD1 REM – PFD2 card The SD card in the top card slot
 The top SD card for the specified
1 was removed. Reinsert card. for the specified GDU not GDU needs reinserted or replaced.
installed.
MFD CARD1 REM – MFD card 1
was removed. Reinsert card.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
PFD1 CARD2 REM – PFD1 card
2 was removed. Reinsert card.
PFD2 CARD2 REM – PFD2 card The SD card in the bottom card  The bottom SD card for the
slot for the specified GDU is not specified GDU needs reinserted or
2was removed. Reinsert card.
installed. replaced.
MFD CARD2 REM – MFD card 2
was removed. Reinsert card.
PFD1 TERRAIN DSP
PFD2 TERRAIN DSP The terrain or obstacle databases
 Reload databases as specified in
required for TAWS is missing, section 3.7.1
MFD TERRAIN DSP invalid or out of date.
SYSTEM CONFIG – SYSTEM A mismatch in LRU software  Reload all configuration as specified
config error. Config Service req’d versions in Section 3.3.3.
PFD1 BKLT CAL INV – PFD1 bklt
cal lost or mismatch. Return for
repair.
PFD2 BKLT CAL INV – PFD2 bklt The specified GDU’s backlight  Reload affected GDU config
cal lost or mismatch. Return for calibration cannot be found or is
 Replace GDU if reloading config
repair. invalid. The system should be does not correct.
serviced.
MFD BKLT CAL INV – MFD bklt
cal lost or mismatch. Return for
repair.
Specified LRU has been replaced

LRU REPLACEMENT – xxx  Load specified LRU software and
and software or config still needs configuration.
loaded.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
 Check master configuration module

connector and wiring for damage
inside the GDU connector
backshell.
 Replace master configuration
CNFG MODULE – PFD 1
The PFD master configuration module wiring and pins.
configuration module is
module has failed.  If problem persists, replace
inoperative. master configuration module.
 Verify configuration module
connector is properly seated in the
configuration module.
 Reload GDU configuration

 Reload system configuration files
by pressing the UPDT CFG
softkey on the Configuration
Upload Page in the PFD1 System
Page Group to load configuration
PFD 1 CONFIG – PFD 1 A configuration mismatch has files into the configuration module.
configuration error. Config service occurred between the display and  If message persists, check
req’d. the Master Configuration Module. PFD1 config module wiring for
faults and replace if necessary.
 If issue continues, replace
PFD1 master configuration
module.
 If problem persists, replace the
display.
5.1.5.3 Surfacewatch Alerts

SURFACEWATCH INHIBITED – The crew has inhibited  If desired re-enable SurfaceWatch
SurfaceWatch Inhibited SurfaceWatch on the GTC Avionics Settings page.
SURFACEWATCH FAIL – Invalid The GIA audio database doesn’t

 Reload the GIA audio database per
audio configuration include all necessary Section 5.2.3.
SurfaceWatch aural alerts.
 Reload GDU configuration files per
SURFACEWATCH FAIL – Invalid The SurfaceWatch configuration is Section 5.1.4.
configurable alerts invalid.  Reload the SurfaceWatch enable
card feature per Section 3.3.4
GPS position invalid or doesn’t

SURFACEWATCH FAIL – One or have enough position integrity.  Check GPS, heading, groundspeed
more inputs invalid Heading, groundspeed or altitude and altitude status.
input is invalid.
NO RUNWAY POSITION DATA – The Navigation database doesn’t

Inhibit SurfaceWatch. No runway have all the available runway  Inhibit SurfaceWatch on the GTC.
position data. information for SurfaceWatch.
The aircraft is positioned north of N
87° latitude.
SURFACEWATCH DISABLED –
The aircraft is positioned south of  Aircraft must be at a lower latitude
Too far north/south. position.
S 87° latitude.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.1.5.4 Database Alerts

MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 aviation
database error exists. The MFD or specified PFD has
 Reload databases into the display.
PFD 1 DB ERR – PFD 1 aviation encountered an error in the
database error exists. Flitecharts or Chartview  Contact Garmin Product Support
for further assistance if needed.
PFD 2 DB ERR – PFD 2 aviation databases.
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain The MFD has encountered an

database error exists. error in the terrain database.  Confirm supplemental data card is
inserted fully.
 Reload the database or replace the
supplemental data card.
PFD 1 DB ERR – PFD 1 terrain  Contact Garmin Product Support
database error exists. The specified PFD has
encountered an error in the terrain
PFD 2 DB ERR – PFD 2 terrain database.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle The MFD has encountered an

database error exists. error in the obstacle database.  Confirm supplemental data card is
inserted fully.
PFD 1 DB ERR – PFD 1 obstacle supplemental data card.
database error exists. The specified PFD has
encountered an error in the  Contact Garmin Product Support
PFD 2 DB ERR – PFD 2 obstacle obstacle database.
The MFD has encountered an

MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport
error in the airport terrain
terrain database error exists.  Confirm supplemental data card is
database. inserted fully.
PFD 1 DB ERR – PFD 1 airport
The specified PFD has supplemental data card.
terrain database error exists.
encountered an error in the airport  Contact Garmin Product Support
terrain database. for further assistance if needed.
PFD 2 DB ERR – PFD 2 airport
terrain database error exists.
GTC1 DB ERR – GTC1 database  Confirm supplemental data card is

error exists inserted fully.
The GTC detected a failure in one  Reload the database or replace the
or more databases. supplemental data card.
GTC2 DB ERR – GTC2 database  Contact Garmin Product Support
error exists for further assistance if needed.
The system has found the

navigation database types in the  Reload databases
DB MISMATCH – Navigation
PFDs and/or MFD do not match If problem persists, contact Garmin
database mismatch. Xtalk is off.
(i.e., different regions: Americas, Product Support for further assistance
International, Atlantic, etc.)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
DB MISMATCH – Standby The PFDs and/or MFD have

navigation database version different standby navigation
mismatch. Xtalk is off. database versions installed.
The PFDs and/or MFD have

DB MISMATCH – Terrain
different terrain database versions
database mismatch.
installed.
The PFDs and/or MFD have
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle
different obstacle database
database mismatch.
versions installed.
TAWS is disabled because a

TERRAIN DISABLED – Terrain terrain database of enough
Awareness DB resolution too low. resolution (9 arc-second or better)
is not currently installed.
System has updated the active
NAV DB UPDATED – Active
navigation database from the
navigation database updated.
standby navigation database.
5.1.5.5 Cooling Alerts

 Check instrument panel cooling
MFD1 COOLING – has poor MFD1 has exceeded its operating fans and wiring for proper
operation.
cooling. Reducing power usage. temperature range.
MFD.
PFD 1 COOLING – has poor PFD 1 has exceeded its operating fans and wiring for proper
operation.
PFD1.
PFD 2 COOLING – has poor PFD 2 has exceeded its operating fans and wiring for proper
operation.
PFD2.
5.1.5.6 Key Alerts

The SYSTEM has
MFD1 “key” KEYSTK – key is
determined a key is stuck
stuck.  Go to the GDU TEST page in configuration
on MFD1.
mode and verify key is stuck (if key is stuck
The system has the corresponding indicator will be green).
PFD 1 “key” KEYSTK – key is
determined a key is stuck  Exercise suspected stuck key and reset
stuck.
on the PFD 1. GDU TEST page to see if indicator remains
green without pressing the key.
The system has
PFD 2 “key” KEYSTK – key is  If problem persists, replace the display.
determined a key is stuck
stuck.
on the PFD 2.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.1.5.7 Miscellaneous Alerts

 Ensure a database error has not occurred
(identified in the ALERTS window on the
PFD).
 If a database error has occurred,
correct error before proceeding.
A communication error has  Check display Ethernet interconnect
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
occurred between the MFD wiring.
cross talk error has occurred.
and/or PFDs.  Replace PFD1 with a known good unit, to
verify location of problem:
 If problem persists, reinstall original
PFD1 and replace PFD2.
 If problem persists, reinstall PFD2 and
replace MFD.
 If the CLR key was held during a power
cycle, disregard message.
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data Pilot stored data has been  Cycle power to PFD1:
lost. Recheck settings. lost.  Ensure CLR key is not stuck on the
GDU TEST page.
 If problem persists, replace PFD1.
 Ensure the MFD1 connector is fully seated
The system has
MFD1 SERVICE – needs service. and locked.
determined MFD1 needs
Return unit for repair.  Reload GDU software and configuration
service.
 Replace the MFD
PFD 1 SERVICE – needs service.  Ensure the PFD connector is fully seated
Return unit for repair. The system has
and locked.
determined the specified
PFD 2 SERVICE – needs service.  Reload GDU software and configuration
PFD needs service.
Return unit for repair.  Replace the PFD.
PFD 1 VOLTAGE – PFD 1 has

low voltage. Reducing power
usage. The specified PFD supply  Check input voltage to PFD.
PFD 2 VOLTAGE – PFD 2 has voltage is low.  If input voltage is ok, replace PFD.
low voltage. Reducing power
usage.
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MDF1 has low The MFD supply voltage is  Check input voltage to MFD.
voltage. Reducing power usage. low.  If input voltage is ok, replace MFD.
The PFD1 backlight
PFD1 BKLT CAL INV – PFD1 bklt  Reload GDU software.
cal lost or mismatch. calibration cannot be found  Replace PFD1.
or is invalid.
The PFD2 backlight
PFD2 BKLT CAL INV – PFD2 bklt  Reload GDU software.
cal lost or mismatch. calibration cannot be found  Replace PFD2.
or is invalid.
The MFD1 backlight
MFD1 BKLT CAL INV – MFD1  Reload GDU software.
bklt cal lost or mismatch. calibration cannot be found  Replace MFD1.
or is invalid.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.1.6 GDU 1450W Functional Test
The G5000 system is tested while operating in the normal mode unless otherwise specified. If the system
is in configuration mode, restart the displays by cycling the PFD1, PFD2 and MFD circuit breakers to start
the display in the normal mode.
1. Apply external electrical power to the airplane.
CAUTION
DO NOT RELY ON THE AIRCRAFT BATTERY TO LOAD SOFTWARE. DO NOT
USE A BATTERY CHARGER AS AN EXTERNAL POWER SOURCE. Power loss
during a software upgrade may cause an LRU to become corrupted and
unresponsive requiring replacement. Remove power only when told to do so in the
procedure.
2. Allow all systems to initialize.

3. Observe the MFD power-up screen (reference the examples below).
4. Ensure all applicable databases are up to date as shown in white text. An out-of-date database is
displayed in amber text.
Figure 5-2, MFD Power Up Page – Citation Excel Baseline (Reference Only)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Figure 5-3, MFD Power Up Page – Citation XLS Baseline (Reference Only)
Figure 5-4, MFD Power Up Page – Citation Excel with Underspeed Protection (Reference Only)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Figure 5-5, MFD Power Up Page – Citation XLS with Underspeed Protection (Reference Only)
NOTE
When the optional Underspeed Protection System is enabled the ‘With
Underspeed Protection Enabled’’ message will be displayed under the ‘Citation
Excel or Citation XLS’ text on the splash screen.
5. Observe the System Software Version on the MFD power-up screen. The ‘System’ number reflected
in the upper right-hand corner is the System Software Version which correlates to the G5000 software
loader image used to load the software to the system.
6. Verify the System Software Version is correct per the General Arrangement drawing listed in Section
1.5.
7. Push the rightmost softkey on the MFD to acknowledge the MFD power-up screen.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Figure 5-6, PFD Invalid Data Reference
8. In the normal operating mode, data fields that are invalid have large red and amber X’s through them
(reference Figure 5-6). A valid field does not display a red or amber X (reference Figure 5-7). Allow
the displays to initialize for approximately one minute.
Figure 5-7, PFD Normal Operation (SVS Enabled)
NOTE
Outputs from the AHRS are not valid until the units (AHRS and GMU) have been
calibrated as described later in this chapter.
9. In the normal operating mode, data fields that are invalid have large red and amber X’s through them
(reference Figure 5-6). A valid field does not display a red or amber X (reference Figure 5-7). Allow
the displays to initialize for approximately one minute.
10. Verify the COM field is valid in the upper right corners of PFD1 and PFD2 and the radio bars on GTC1
and GTC2.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
11. Verify altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, TAS, and GS fields are valid on PFD1 and PFD2.
12. With both PFDs in Full Mode, push the ‘Sensors’ then ‘ADC Settings’ softkeys on each PFD and switch
between ADC1 and ADC2. Verify that data from both GDCs are valid on both displays. Return PFD1
to report data from ADC1 and PFD2 to report data from ADC2.
13. Push the ‘Sensors’ then ‘ATT/HDG Settings’ softkey on each PFD and switch between ATT/HDG1
and ATT/HDG2. Verify that data from both AHRS are valid on both displays. Return PFD1 to report
data from ATT/HDG1 and PFD2 to report data from ATT/HDG2.
14. Verify engine instrument fields are valid on the MFD with no amber dashes displayed and all pointers
present on the instrument dials.
15. Verify no MANIFEST related GTC ‘System messages are displayed.
5.1.6.1 Reversionary Mode Check

2. Set the PFD1 and PFD2 reversion switches on the DISPLAY FORMAT / DIM panel to the FULL
position and the ‘MFD’ reversion switch is in the NORM position. Verify both PFDs show a full PFD
format and the MFD is not displaying a PFD format.
Figure 5-8, GDU Reversionary Mode

3. Set the PFD1 reversion switch on the DISPLAY FORMAT / DIM panel to the SPLIT position and verify
PFD1 shows a 40 / 60 format with MFW and PFD format.
4. Set the PFD1 reversion switch on the DISPLAY FORMAT / DIM panel to the REV position and verify
PFD1 shows a 40 / 60 format with a reduced MFW, an EIS display with the same engine information
and CAS messages that are displayed on the MFD and a PFD format similar to that shown in Figure
5-8.
5. Set the MFD reversion switch on the DISPLAY FORMAT / DIM panel in the REV position and verify
the MFD shows a 40 / 60 format with a reduced MFW, an EIS display with the same engine information
and CAS messages that are displayed on PFD1 and a PFD format similar to that shown in Figure 5-8.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
6. Set the PFD2 reversion switch on the DISPLAY FORMAT / DIM panel to the SPLIT position and verify
PFD2 shows a 40 / 60 format with MFW and PFD format.
7. Set the PFD2 reversion switch on the DISPLAY FORMAT / DIM panel to the REV position and verify
PFD2 shows a 40 / 60 format with a reduced MFW, an EIS display with the same engine information
and CAS messages that are displayed on the MFD and a PFD format similar to that shown in Figure
5-8.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.2 GIA 64E Integrated Processor and GPS Antennas
5.2.1 GIA 64E Removal
1. Open the LH and/or RH nose compartment access door/s. (Reference Textron Model 560XL
Maintenance Manual chapter 52-00-00).
2. Open the GIA 1 and GIA2 circuit breakers.
3. Unlock the GIA 64E handle by loosening the Phillips screw on the handle.
4. Pull the handle upward to unlock the GIA 64E and gently remove the unit from the rack.
5.2.2 GIA 64E Installation

1. Inspect the GIA 64E unit and rack connectors to ensure there are no bent or damaged pins. Repair any
damage if necessary.
2. Gently insert the GIA 64E into its rack. The handle should close the dogleg track.
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when inserting the GIA into the rack. This may cause
damage to the connectors, unit and/or unit rack. If excessive resistance is felt
during installation, stop! Remove the GIA and identify the source of resistance.
The rear plates are designed to float in the unit rack. Check to ensure the rear
plates are not bound by the connectors or spring clip.
NOTE
The install screw is designed with a ratcheting socket that resists turning
counterclockwise, unless pushed in. This ensures the engagement screw cannot
become loose during vibration.
3. Press down on the GIA 64E handle to lock the unit into the rack.
4. Lock the handle to the GIA 64E body using the Philips screw.
reconnected.
6. Close the GIA1 and GIA2 circuit breakers.
7. Close the LH and/or RH nose compartment access door/s. (Reference Textron Model 560XL
8. Based on the reason for the GIA 64E removal & installation status, as defined in Table 5-2, complete
the required installation procedures to verify proper functionality of the unit prior to placing back in
service.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Table 5-2, GIA 64 Installation & Return-to-Service Criteria
Reason for Required Installation Procedures

Removal/Installation
Reinstallation of Original a. Reinstall the unit as defined in Section 5.2.2

GIA 64E(s)
b. Perform the GIA 64 Return to Service procedures defined in section 5.2.5
If reinstalling the original
GIA64 back into the same
position, no software or
configuration loading is
required. If the unit was only
removed from its rack to
facilitate troubleshooting or
for other purposes.
Original GIA 64Es Swapped a. Reinstall the units as defined in Section 5.2.2.
for Troubleshooting
b. Perform the GIA 64 Return to Service procedures defined in section 5.2.5
If swapping GIA64 #1 and
GIA #2 on the same aircraft,
for troubleshooting or any
other reason, no software
loading is required,
Complete these steps.
New, Repaired, or a. Reinstall the unit as defined in Section 5.2.2

Exchanged GIA 64E(s)
b. Reload the software, configuration, options and enablement card features as
Installed
listed in Table 5-3 and section 5.2.3.
If a new, repaired, or
c. CNFM CFG as defined in Section 3.5
exchanged GIA 64E is
being installed, the correct d. Perform the GIA 64 Return to Service procedures defined in section 5.2.5
software and configuration
files must be loaded to the
unit. Complete these steps:
5.2.3 GIA 64E Software & Configuration Loading

system in configuration mode (reference Section 3.1.1).
4. Activate the GROUP field drop down menu and Scroll to ‘XL Base’ or ‘XLS Base’, as applicable to the
installation, and select using the ENT key.
6. Activate the ITEM field drop-down menu and scroll to ‘XL Base’ or ‘XLS Base’, as applicable to the

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Upload page.
8. Press the CLR ALL (#4) softkey.
9. Press the CHK CFG (#3) softkey.
10. Select the following software and configuration items shown below in Table 5-3 from the Product field.
Table 5-3, GIA 64E Baseline Software and Configuration Files
Product Software Configuration
CLEAR GIA 1 CONFIG N/A √
CLEAR GIA 2 CONFIG N/A √
Manifest N/A √
System N/A √
GIA64 Main 1 Key √ N/A
GIA64 Main 1 SYS SW √ √
(XLS Only) N/A √

GIA64 Main 1 CONFIG
GIA64 Main 2 Key √ N/A
GIA64 Main 2 SYS SW √ √
GIA64 COM 1 SYS SW √ √
GIA64 COM 2 SYS SW √ √
GIA64 NAV 1 SYS SW √ N/A
GIA64 NAV 2 SYS SW √ N/A
GIA64 1 GPS/WAAS √ N/A
GIA64 2 GPS/WAAS √ N/A
GIA64 1 Gains √ N/A
GIA64 2 Gains √ N/A
GIA AUDIO 1 √ N/A
GIA AUDIO 2 √ √
11. After the files are selected, press the LOAD (#6) softkey.
12. Observe the software loading progress and verify software load completes without errors as indicated
by the following:

190-02313-01 Revision 2
a. Green “PASS” or white “N/A’ in the SOFTWARE and CONFIGURATION columns adjacent
to each product.
b. “Upload and Crossfill Complete” summary window.
13. Press the ENT key on GTC1 to acknowledge the “Upload and Crossfill Complete” summary window
when the software and configuration loading is complete.
14. Reload all options applicable to the aircraft as defined in Table 3-2 using the instructions provided in
section 3.3.4.1.
15. Reload all enablement card features that are applicable to the aircraft as defined in Table 3-2 using the
instructions provided in section 3.3.5.1.
16. Confirm the configuration per Section 3.5.
17. Power down the G5000 system.
18. Remove the Software Loader card from the top SD card slot of PFD1.
19. Power up the G5000 system in normal mode.
20. Complete GIA64E Functional Tests as define section 5.2.5.
5.2.4 GIA 64E Troubleshooting
5.2.4.1 COM Symptoms
Weak COM transmit  Switch GIA1 and GIA2, to verify location of problem:
power
 If problem follows unit, replace GIA.
Weak COM receiver If problem does not follow unit, check COM antenna and cabling for faults.
 Switch GIA1 and GIA2, to verify location of problem:

No COM sidetone
 If problem persists, replace GMA1 with a known good unit.
If problem persists, reinstall original GMA1 and replace GMA2.
5.2.4.2 NAV Symptoms
 Set up a NAV/COM Ramp Test Set to radiate a test signal.

Weak NAV receiver
If problem does not follow unit, check NAV antenna, coupler, and cabling for faults.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.2.4.3 Glideslope Receiver Symptoms
 Set up an IFR 4000 (or equivalent) NAV/COM Ramp Test Set to

generate a test signal.
Weak G/S receiver
If problem does not follow unit, check NAV antenna, coupler, and cabling
for faults.
5.2.4.4 GPS Symptoms
 Using the GPS Status page, verify the signal strength bars are not
erratic. If so, this indicates outside interference is affecting the GPS
receivers. Find and remove the source of interference
 Ensure the aircraft is located outside away from any obstructions. If
checking the GPS signal reception inside a hangar using a GPS
Repeater, ensure the GPS repeater is functional and GPS satellites
are being received from other aircraft inside the same hangar.
 Check GPS antenna connection and cables.
 Check date and time on Date/Time Setup Page.
 If date and time are incorrect, enter the correct date and time.
 If problem follows unit, clear the GPS almanac by performing the
Will Not Acquire Satellites following steps –
(See Figure 5-9) o Using the PFD in config mode, go to the GIA RS-232/ARNIC
429 Config Page.
o At the top of the screen, select the GIA that cannot acquire
satellites (GIA1 or GIA2) and press the ENT key.
o Press the “CLR NV” softkey at the bottom of the screen.
o Select “OK” in the “Clear GIA nonvolatile memory?” pop-up
window.
o Next reload GIA Audio and Config files from a loader card, see
Section 5.2.3 and on for instructions. Be sure to reload the
config files for any optional equipment installed on the aircraft
that require the GIA config to be updated.
 With the aircraft outside clear of obstructions cycle aircraft power and
allow 15-30 minutes for the GPS to acquire a position and download
a new almanac.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
 If clearing nonvolatile memory is unsuccessful and the GPS still
cannot acquire a position, replace the GIA.
5.2.4.5 GPS Satellite Acquisition

The GIA 64E units will normally acquire a GPS navigation solution within 5 to 10 minutes of startup, provided
the aircraft is receiving valid GPS satellite signals. To view GPS1 and GPS2 system status on the MFD,
access the GPS Status Page on either GTC (Home – Utilities – GPS Status). The user can toggle between
GPS 1 and GPS 2 from the GPS Status page on the GTC. Verify that both receivers show 3D DIFF NAV
on the MFD following initialization.
NOTE
It may be necessary to temporarily disable or move out of range of any GPS
repeaters while testing Receiving both GPS Repeater signals and normal GPS
satellite signals simultaneously will degrade the GPS signal being received by the
aircraft.
Figure 5-9, GPS Status Page
5.2.4.6 GIA System Messages
COM System Messages
System Message Possible Cause Possible Solution
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs The 98system has determined

service. Return unit for repair. COM1 needs service. Remove & Replace GIA as defined in
Sections 5.2.1/5.2.2 and load GIA
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs The system has determined software and configuration per 5.2.3.
service. Return unit for repair. COM2 needs service.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
 Press the push-to-talk switch(s) again

to cycle its operation.
 Check push-to-talk switch(s) and

wiring.
 Check GIA1/GMA1 interconnect.
The COM1 external push-to-talk  Switch GIA1 and GIA2, to identify

COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk whether the unit or connectors/wiring
(PTT) switch is stuck in the
key is stuck. is at fault (Both GIAs must be
enabled (or “pressed”) state.
configured when swapped, see
Section 5.2.3):
√ If problem follows the unit,
replace GIA1.
√ If problem persists, replace
defective GMA1.
 Press the push-to-talk switch(s) again

to cycle its operation.
 Check push-to-talk switch(s) and

wiring.
 Check GIA2/GMA2 interconnect.
The COM2 external push-to-talk  Switch GIA1 and GIA2, to identify

COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk whether the unit or connectors/wiring
(PTT) switch is stuck in the
key is stuck. is at fault (Both GIAs must be
enabled (or “pressed”) state.
configured when swapped, see
Section 5.2.3):
replace GIA2.
√ If problem persists, replace
defective GMA2.
COM1 CONFIG – COM1 config  Reload the GIA software and

Configuration error for COM1
error. Config Service req’d. configuration per section 5.2.3.
If problem persists,
COM2 CONFIG – COM2 config  Remove & Replace GIA as defined in

Configuration error for COM1
error. Config Service req’d. Sections 5.2.1/5.2.2 and load GIA
software and configuration per 5.2.3.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.  Check fan, wiring and air tubing for
Reducing transmitter power. proper operation (if applicable).
The specified COM transceiver
is reporting a high temperature  Replace cooling fan if unable to
condition and is reducing determine if operating correctly.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp. transmit power to prevent
 Remove & Replace GIA as defined in
Reducing transmitter power. damage.
software and configuration per 5.2.3.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
MANIFEST – COM1 software

mismatch. Communication
mismatch. Communication halted.
halted.
Reload the GIA software and
configuration per section 5.2.3.
mismatch. Communication
halted.
NAV System Messages
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs The system has detected a failure

service. Return unit for repair. in NAV1 receiver. Remove & Replace GIA as defined in
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs The system has detected a failure software and configuration per 5.2.3.
service. Return unit for repair. in NAV2 receiver.

MANIFEST – NAV1 software
in NAV1.
MANIFEST – NAV2 software
in NAV2.
Glideslope System Messages
Remove & Replace GIA as defined

G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs The system has detected a in Sections 5.2.1/5.2.2 and load GIA
service. Return unit for repair. failure in G/S1 receiver. software and configuration per
5.2.3..
Remove & Replace GIA as defined

G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs The system has detected a in Sections 5.2.1/5.2.2 and load GIA
service. Return unit for repair. failure in G/S2 receiver. software and configuration per
5.2.3..
 Switch GIA1 and GIA2 to verify

G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is The system has detected a location of problem:
inoperative. failure in G/S1 receiver. √ If problem follows the unit,
replace GIA.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
√ If problem does not follow
unit, check G/S1 antenna
and cabling.
 Switch GIA1 and GIA2 to verify

location of problem:
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is The system has detected a
replace GIA.
inoperative. failure in G/S2 receiver.
√ If problem does not follow
unit, check G/S2 antenna
and cabling.
GPS System Messages

MANIFEST – GPS1 software
incorrect software version
loaded in GIA1.
MANIFEST – GPS2 software
loaded in GIA2.
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs The system has detected a

service. Return unit for repair. failure in GPS1 receiver. Remove & Replace GIA as defined in
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs The system has detected a software and configuration per 5.2.3..
service. Return unit for repair. failure in GPS2 receiver.
The system has detected a Switch GIA1 and GIA2, to verify location
GPS1 FAIL – GPS1 is inoperative. of problem:
failure in GPS1 receiver.
replace GIA.
The system has detected a √ If problem does not follow the
GPS2 FAIL – GPS2 is inoperative.
failure in GPS2 receiver. unit, check GPS antenna and
cabling.
If the primary receiver is a

 Verify the area the aircraft was
LOI – GPS integrity lost. WAAS sensor, the alert
traveling through did not have loss of
Crosscheck with other NAVS. indicates that GPS position
GPS coverage. FAA NOTAMs may
data has timed out.
be issued for periods of outages, or
the US website
There is no GPS position fix,
LOSS OF GPS NAVIGATION–Poor http://www.gps.gov/support/user/ will
due insufficient satellite
satellite coverage. have notices posted.
reception.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
 Using the GPS Status page, verify

The system has detected an the signal strength bars are not
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
internal position warning has erratic. If so, this indicates outside
navigation. Position error.
occurred. interference is affecting the GPS
receivers. Find and remove the
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS The system has detected a source of interference (i.e. GPS
navigation. GPS fail. GPS engine failure. Repeater, cell phones, etc.).
 If GPS receivers cannot acquire a

GPS1 CHECK POSITION – position lock, troubleshoot per the
Position difference. Check position “Will not acquire satellites” section.
sensors. The system has detected a
miscompare between GPS1
GPS2 CHECK POSITION – and GPS2.
Position difference. Check position
sensors.
Approach downgraded.
Normally from LPV to
APR DWNGRADE
VNAV/LNAV or LNAV due to
loss of GPS navigation
Approach downgraded due to a

ABORT APR
loss of GPS navigation
GIA Temperature System Messages
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1

temperature too low.
GIA operating temperature is too
Allow unit to warm up.
low.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2
temperature too low.
 Check Nose fan, wiring and air

GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over tubing for proper operation (if
temperature. applicable).
 Replace nose cooling fan if

unable to determine if operating
correctly.
GIA has exceeded its operating
temperature range.  Remove & Replace GIA as
defined in Sections 5.2.1/5.2.2
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over and load GIA software and
temperature. configuration per 5.2.3..
 If problem persists, contact

Garmin Aviation Product Support
for assistance.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
GIA Configuration System Messages

MANIFEST – GIA1 software
in GIA1.
MANIFEST – GIA2 software
in GIA2.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio

config error. Config service req’d.
The GIA’s audio configuration files Reload the GIA software and
are incorrect or missing. configuration per section 5.2.3.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio
config error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1

configuration error. Config service The system has detected a GIA
req’d. configuration mismatch. If GIAs
are not properly configured after
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 being swapped/replaced, this
configuration error. Config service message appears.
req’d.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware

mismatch, GIA1 communication
halted. Remove & Replace GIA as defined in
The system has detected a non-
WAAS GIA 64.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware software and configuration per 5.2.3..
mismatch, GIA2 communication
halted.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs

service. Return unit for repair. Remove & Replace GIA as defined in
The system has detected a failure
in the specified GIA.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs software and configuration per 5.2.3..
service. Return unit for repair.
GIA Terrain Audio System Messages
TAWS is disabled because an

TRN AUD FAIL – Trn Awareness Reload the GIA software and
aural alert audio source is
audio source unavailable. configuration per section 5.2.3.
unavailable.
TERRAIN AUD CFG – Trn TAWS is disabled because the

Awareness audio cnfg error. audio configuration is invalid. The
Service req’d. system should be serviced.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.2.4.7 Downloading GIA Maintenance Logs
If additional assistance is needed troubleshooting autopilot faults, the Maintenance logs can be downloaded
to an SD card as a text file (.txt) and emailed to Garmin Aviation Product Support. Please call Garmin
Aviation Product Support before sending a Maintenance Log to notify them of its arrival. A download of
multiple GIA Maintenance Logs to the same file is acceptable, however in the email to Garmin the order in
which the files were downloaded (i.e. GIA1, then GIA2, etc.) must be provided. Ensure LG2CRD is not
selected the second time until finished downloading all desired logs if choosing to download multiple
maintenance logs. If the SD card is removed containing an existing maintenance log file, the log file will be
overwritten upon downloading new logs. Complete the following steps to download the
1. Insert a FAT 32 formatted SD card into the top slot of PFD1 before turning on the displays.
2. Power up PFD1/2, GTC1/2, and MFD in the configuration mode.
3. On the PFD1 in the System page group, use the inner DCK on GTC1 to scroll to the DIAGNOSTICS
TERMINAL page.
4. Use GCU1 to select either GIA1 or GIA2 in the LRU field.
5. Press the LG2CRD softkey at the bottom of the PFD1 to enable logging the screen display to the SD
card. Verify the softkey text grays out. This indicates the recording function is active and all text that is
displayed in the OUTPUT window will be saved to the card.
6. Use GCU1 to move the cursor to the COMMAND field.
7. To collect GIA fault logs, use GCU1 or GTC1 and enter F G in the COMMAND field and press the ENT
key on GCU1 or the Enter key on GTC1.
8. To collect GIA assert logs, use GCU1 or GTC1 and enter A in the COMMAND field and press the ENT
key on GCU1 or the Enter key on GTC1.
9. Press the LG2CRD softkey to turn off logging the screen display to the SD card.
10. Power down the G5000 System and remove the SD card.
11. Insert the SD card in the card reader of a laptop or desktop computer and open the “diag_buf_log.txt”
file from the SD card using the WordPad program.
12. Insert the fault log as an attachment to an email and include the LRU order how the data was
downloaded and send to Garmin Aviation Product Support at avionics@Garmin.com.
5.2.5 GIA 64E Functional Check

2. Place the DC POWER BATT switch to the BATT position
3. Place the AVIONIC POWER switch to the ON position.
4. On GTC 1, select COM1 for MIC and MON.
5. On GTC 2, select COM2 for MIC and MON.
6. Ensure AHRS1 and ADC1 are the primary sources for PFD1 and AHRS2 and ADC2 are the primary
sources for PFD2.
7. Ensure all G5000 systems, including GPS1 and GPS2, are initialized.
8. Verify the following:
a. COM1 and COM2 windows in upper RH corner of PFD1 and PFD2 displays valid COM frequencies.
b. The NAV and COM tuning fields on the GTC1 and GTC2 Audio & Radios page are valid.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
c. L & R engine data is valid.
d. XPDR1 and XPDR2 are operative.
e. The autopilot and Yaw Damper can be engaged.
9. Open the GIA 1 (PRIM) circuit breaker and verify no change to GIA1 functionality is observed.
10. Open the GIA 1 (SEC) circuit breaker and verify the following:
a. COM1 tuning field in upper RH corner of PFD1 displays an amber X.
b. The NAV1 and COM1 tuning fields on the GTC1 and GTC2 Audio & Radios page display an
amber X.
c. XPDR1 is failed
d. The autopilot and Yaw Damper disengage and cannot be re-engaged, and the AP-YD Fail CAS
message is displayed.
e. An amber BOTH ON GPS2 annunciation is displayed on PFD1 and PFD2.
f. L & R engine data remains valid.
g. AHRS and ADC data remain valid on PFD1 and PFD2.
11. Open the GIA 2 (PRIM) circuit breakers and verify no change to GIA2 functionality is observed.
12. Open the GIA 2 (SEC) circuit breaker and verify the following:
a. All GIA1 failure indications from the previous step remain displayed.
b. COM2 tuning field in the upper RH corner of PFD2 displays an amber X.
c. All VHF COM and NAV tuning fields on the GTC1 and GTC2 Radio Bar and Audio & Radios
page are invalid (yellow X).
d. XPDR1 and XPDR2 are failed and the amber TRANSPONDER FAIL 1-2 CAS message is
displayed.
e. An amber GPS LOI annunciation is displayed on PFD1 and PFD2.
f. L & R engine data remains valid.
g. TAWS NOT AVAILABLE visual and aural alerts annunciate.
h. ‘GPS NAV Lost’ or equivalent GTC system message/s displayed.
13. Open the DATA CONC 2 (PRIM), DATA CONC 2 (SEC) and DATA CONC 2 (MFD) circuit breakers
and verify all engine #1 and #2 indications on the EIS become invalid.
14. Close the GIA 1 (PRIM) circuit breaker and allow the GPS to initialize.
15. Verify the following.
a. COM1 tuning field in upper RH corner of PFD1 is valid.
b. The NAV1 and COM1 tuning fields on the GTC1 and GTC2 Audio & Radios page are valid
c. XPDR1 is valid
d. The autopilot and Yaw Damper cannot be engaged, and the AP-YD Fail CAS message remains
displayed.
e. An amber BOTH ON GPS1 annunciation is displayed on PFD1 and PFD2 after GPS1
initializes.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
f. Engine #1 EIS indications are valid
g. TAWS NOT AVAILABLE annunciation extinguishes.
h. An amber BOTH ON GPS1 is displayed on PFD 1 and PFD 2.
i. AHRS and ADC data remain valid on PFD 1 and PFD 2.
16. Close the GIA 1 (SEC) circuit breaker.
17. Close the GIA 2 (PRIM) circuit breaker and allow GPS2 to initialize.
a. COM2 tuning field in upper RH corner of PFD2 is valid.
b. All NAV and COM tuning fields on the GTC1 and GTC2 Radio Bar and Audio & Radios page
are valid
c. XPDR1 and XPDR2 are valid
d. The autopilot and Yaw Damper can be engaged, and the AP-YD Fail CAS message
extinguishes.
e. The amber BOTH ON GPS1 annunciation extinguishes on PFD1 and PFD2 following GPS2
initialization and no GPS related failure annunciations are displayed.
f. All Engine #1 and #2 EIS indications are valid.
g. AHRS and ADC data remain valid on PFD 1 and PFD 2.
19. Close the DATA CONC 2 (PRIM), DATA CONC 2 (SEC) and DATA CONC 2 (MFD) circuit breakers.
5.2.5.1 VHF Communication Functional Test

1. Use GTC1 to tune the COM1 radio to a test frequency for the active frequency.
2. Transmit from both pilot and copilot locations on COM1 and verify clear communication can be
established with the test station.
3. Use GTC2 to tune the COM1 radio to a test frequency for the active frequency.
4. Transmit from both pilot and copilot locations on COM2 and verify clear communication can be
established with the test station.
5.2.5.2 VHF Navigation VOR/LOC/GS Functional Check

Perform the following test using ramp test equipment. Operate the equipment according to the equipment
manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Ensure the FD is coupled to PFD1 as indicated by a left pointing arrow next to the AFCS mode controller
XFR button.
2. Simulate a VOR signal on a radial equivalent to the aircraft heading.
3. Tune the NAV 1 and NAV 2 receivers to the simulation frequency.
4. Set the CDI on PFD1 to VOR1 by pressing the Active NAV soft key until VOR1 is selected.
5. Set the CDI on PFD2 to VOR2 by pressing the Active NAV soft key until VOR2 is selected.
6. Rotate CRS1 and CRS2 knobs to set VOR1 and VOR2 course pointers to aircraft heading.
7. Verify full scale deflection of the VOR1 and VOR2 CDI by rotating the CRS1 and CRS2 knobs on the
AFCS mode controller to the left and right.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
8. Reset course pointers to aircraft heading by pressing the CRS1 and CRS2 knobs.
9. Engage the autopilot and press the NAV key on the AFCS mode controller.
10. On the navigation test set, simulate a Localizer/Glideslope signal.
11. Tune NAV 1 and NAV 2 receiver.
12. Set the PFD1 CDI to LOC1 and PFD2 CDI to LOC2 by pressing Active NAV soft key until LOC1 and
LOC2 is selected.
13. Use the test equipment to center the deviation bars (localizer and glideslope) on PFD1 and PFD2.
14. Engage the autopilot and press the APPR key on the AFCS mode controller. Verify the LOC and PIT
annunciations are green, and ALTS and GS are white on PFD1 and PFD2.
15. Apply right/left and up/down localizer/glideslope signals using the test equipment.
a. Verify the flight director command bars appear on PFD1 and PFD2, synchronized to the current
LOC and GS deviation.
b. Verify the flight controls move in the direction of the flight director command bars.
16. Couple FD to PFD1 by pressing the XFR button on the AFCS mode controller.
17. Verify FD is coupled to PFD1 as indicated by a left pointing arrow on the AFCS mode controller next
to the XFR button.
18. Repeat Steps 20-21 using while coupled to PFD1.
5.2.5.3 GPS Data Path Check (Data to AHRS/ Single GIA)
NOTE
The GIA 64E units should normally acquire a GPS navigation solution within 5
minutes of startup, provided the aircraft is outside (or indoors with a GPS repeater).
1. Apply external electrical power to the airplane. (Textron Model 560XL Maintenance Manual). Ensure
the AHRS1 and ADC1 are the primary source for PFD1 and AHRS2 and ADC2 are the primary source
for PFD2.
2. Ensure the AHRS1 and ADC1 are the primary source for PFD1 and AHRS2 and ADC2 are the
primary source for PFD2.
3. Open the GIA1 PRIM and GIA1 SEC circuit breakers on the forward circuit breaker panel.
a. Verify only the following:
 An amber BOTH ON GPS2 is displayed on PFD 1 and PFD 2.
 AHRS and ADC data remain valid on PFD 1 and PFD 2.
4. Close the GIA1 (PRI) and GIA1 (SEC) circuit breakers. Allow system to re-acquire satellites and
return to normal display modes.
5. Open GIA 2 CB.
a. Verify only the following:
 An amber BOTH ON GPS1 is displayed on PFD 1 and PFD 2.
 AHRS and ADC data remain valid on PFD 1 and PFD 2.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6. Close GIA 2 CB. Allow system to re-acquire satellites and return to normal display modes. Ensure
the GTC is set to “Half” mode for the MFD and a NAVIGATION MAP is displayed on left MFW of the
MFD.
7. Open GIA 1 PRIM and GIA 1 SEC circuit breakers on the forward circuit breaker panel.
8. Open the GIA 2 circuit breaker on the forward circuit breaker panel.
a. Verify the FMS CDI flags LOI on both PFDs.
b. Verify an amber “FMS NO POSITION” is posted on the center of the left MFW on the
NAVIGATION MAP of the MFD.
9. Close GIA 1 PRIM and GIA 1 SEC circuit breakers on the forward circuit breaker panel.
10. Close the GIA 2 circuit breaker on the forward circuit breaker panel.
11. Remove external electrical power to the airplane.
5.2.5.4 GIA I/O Troubleshooting Aid

The section is only provided as a troubleshooting aid if an issue is suspected with the GIA inputs. No
mandatory checks are required for this section if not desired.
2. Set both engine thrust levers to the CUT OFF position.
3. Ensure the guarded SPEED BRAKE switch on the center pedestal is in the RETRACT position.
4. Place PFD1 in configuration mode and leave PFD2 and the MFD in normal mode.
5. Select the “GIA” tab on PFD1 and the “GIA I/O CONFIGURATION” page on PFD1. (Ensure GIA1 is
the selected in the SELECT GIA UNIT window.
Figure 5-10, GIA I/O Configuration Page

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6. If desired, perform the instructions in the Action column of Table 5-4 for each parameter while
monitoring the DATA TYPE/DATA field and verify the letter F (to denote false) or T (to denote true)
changes state when the Action is performed. The suggested actions in Table 5-4 are provided as an
aid to troubleshooting the various GIA I/O that interface with the system.
GIA 1 Discrete Input Check

Table 5-4, GIA 1 Discrete Inputs
GIA 1 Starting
Channel Data Type State Suggested Action required to change state
DISCRETE IN
Set the Pitot & Static switch to ON. Ensure AOA circuit
Generic 0 breaker is closed. Open the AOA Heater CB on the
IN 1 False
AOA Heater Fail pilot’s circuit breaker panel to observe a data state
change from False to True.
Press the pilot’s Master Warning switch to observe a

IN 2 MW Acknowledge 1 False
data state change from False to True.
Press the pilot’s Master Caution switch to observe a data

IN 3 MC Acknowledge 1 False
state change from False to True.
Press the Go Around switch on the throttle to observe a

IN 4 AFCS Go Around False
Press the CWS switch on the pilot’s control wheel to

IN 5 PLT CTRL WHL False
observe a data state change from False to True.
Generic 1 Accomplish Fuel Quantity Gauge Fault Functional Test in

IN 6 False Section 6.6.3 to observe data state change from False to
L Fuel Gauge Fault True.
Set the Left Boost Pump switch to ON to observe a data

IN 7 LH Fuel Pressure Lo True
state change from True to False.
Press the pitch trim ARM switch on the copilot’s control

IN 8 CPLT PIT TRM ARM False wheel in both directions to observe data state change
from False to True.
Press the pitch trim ARM switch on the pilot’s control

IN 9 PLT PIT TRM ARM False wheel in both directions to observe data state change
from False to True.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
GIA 1 Starting
1. Push the Pilot Control Wheel AP DISC switch to

observe data state change from False to True.
IN 10 AFCS Disconnect In False
2. Push the Copilot Control Wheel AP DISC switch to
1. Verify IN 11 indicates a green T (true).

2. Open the DATALINK IRIDIUM circuit breaker and
verify IN 11 state changes from green T (true) to a
IN 11 MN CFG DSCRT True
gray F (false).
NOTE: Applicable only to Stand Alone Connext
configuration only.
On the ground when one or more of the following

conditions exist to observe data state change from False
to True:
Generic 3 1. Flaps not within takeoff position (<7° or >15°)
IN 12 False 2. Pitch Trim not in takeoff position
No Take Off
3. Horizontal Stabilizer not in takeoff position (-2°)
4. Speed brakes extended
5. Parking Brake Set
Perform an LH engine run and verify the GEN OFF L

amber posts when the left generator is set to OFF and
IN 13 LH Gen Off True
the CAS extinguishes when the left generator selected
back to ON.
Apply 28V+ to pin B of connector PC031 (LH Cabin

IN 14 Cab Alt 1 GT 14 5 K False
Electrical DISC).
This is validated by completing the previous step, “IN

IN 16 Cabin Altitude Hi False
14”.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
GIA 1 Starting
1. Set the Horizontal Stabilizer to the Takeoff position.

2. Ensure the Pitch Trim Tab indicator is positioned
within the TO (TAKEOFF) band.
3. Ensure the parking brake is not set.
4. Ensure the Speed Brakes are retracted and verify the
NO TAKEOFF message is not displayed.
Generic 6 4. Set Flaps to 0 degrees and verify the NO TAKEOFF
IN 1A False amber CAS message posts.
No Takeoff External M/C
5. Set Flaps to 7 degrees and verify the NO TAKEOFF
amber CAS message extinguishes.
amber CAS message posts while the flaps are in
transition and extinguish when 15 degrees is achieved.
amber CAS message posts.
1. (Can be done in conjunction with GIA #2 IN 11A –

See GIA #2 IN 11A in Table 3-14 for instructions)
TCAS TA Aural Mute
IN 2A False 2. Verify IN 2A is F (false).
Caution In
3. Verify IN 2A changes state from F (False) to T
(True).
Drive trim upward with pilot’s control wheel pitch trim

IN 3A PLT PIT TRM Up False
switch to observe data state change from False to True.
Drive trim downward with pilot’s control wheel pitch trim

IN 4A PLT PIT TRM DWN False
Drive trim upward with copilot’s control wheel pitch trim

IN 5A CPLT PIT TRM Up False
Drive trim downward with copilot’s control wheel pitch

IN 6A CPLT PIT TRM DWN False trim switch to observe data state change from False to
True.
Generic 8
Utilize “T/REV” position on pedestal mounted rotary test
IN 7A Thrust Reverser External False
switch to activate indication.
M/W
Connect weight-on-wheels test set and cycle between

IN 10A LH Gear on Ground True on-ground and in-air to observe data state change from
True to False.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
GIA 1 Starting
Generic 9 Move left thrust lever from cutoff position to idle position
IN 11A True
LH Fuel Cutoff to observe data state change from True to False.
While on-ground, use the rotary test switch in the

IN 12A Impending Stall False pedestal and select the Stick Shaker test function to
Generic 10 Move left thrust lever to the TO position to observe data

IN 13A False
Left TO Detent state change from False to True.
Generic 11 Move left throttle lever to CLB position to observe data

IN 14A False
Left CLB Detent state change from False to True.
Generic 12 Move left throttle lever to CRU position to observe data

IN 15A False
Left CRU Detent state change from False to True.
Accomplish Low Fuel Quantity Functional Test as

IN 16A Low Fuel L False
defined in section 6.6.2.
Move copilot’s control wheel steering switch to on

IN 17A CPLT CTRL WHL False
position to observe data state change from False to True.
Open the AOA circuit breaker to observe data state

IN 18A AOA Valid True
change from True to False.
7. If desired, activate the cursor on GCU 1 and navigate to the SELECT INPUT/OUTPUT window.
Highlight the DISCRETE OUT field and press the ENT button.
changes state when the Action is performed.
GIA 1 Discrete Output Check

Table 5-5, GIA 1 Discrete Outputs
GIA 1 Channel Data Type Starting State Suggested Actions required to change state
DISCRETE OUT
Select XM audio to the crew headphones or cockpit

speakers, then initiate landing gear test from the
ANNUN* 2 XM Inhibit False
rotary test panel to observe data state change from
False to True when the aural sounds.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
GIA 1 Channel Data Type Starting State Suggested Actions required to change state
Initiate landing gear test from the rotary test panel

GSR 56 to observe data state change from False to True
ANNUN* 5 (Connext) Audio False when the aural sounds.
Inhibit NOTE: Applicable only to Stand Alone Connext
configuration only.
Open the GIA 1 PRIM and GIA 1 SEC circuit

GSR 56 breakers to observe data state change from True to
ANNUN* 22 (Connext) Audio True False.
Inhibit NOTE: Applicable only to Stand Alone Connext
configuration only.
Initiate the annunciator test from the rotary test

ANNUN* 1A MW On False panel to observe data state change from False to
True.

ANNUN* 2A MC On False panel to observe data state change from False to
True.
Accomplish Landing Gear Warning Functional Test

OUT*2A Gear EXT False in Section 6.8 to observe data state change form
False to True.
(Can be done in conjunction with GIA #1 IN 2A and

Out* 4A and also GIA #2 IN 11A)
1. Verify OUT* 4A is F (false).
TCAS TA Aural 2. Gain Access to right nose Avionics
OUT* 4A False compartment, remove connector from PN384
Alert Inhibit
and insert a grounded jumper to pin 44.
3. Verify OUT* 4A changes state from F (False) to
T (True).
Remove jumper and reconnect PN384.
Engage the autopilot to observe data state change

GFC AP from False to True.
OUT* 1B False
Engaged Note: Applicable only to L3 F1000 FDR
configurations.
Accomplish Ground Comm Switch Check in

Section 5.5.5.6 to observe data state change from
OUT* 2B Alert DSCRT 0 False False to True.
Note: Applicable only to L3 F1000 FDR
configurations.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
9. If desired, Activate the cursor on GCU 1 and navigate to the SELECT GIA UNIT window. Highlight the
GIA2 field and press the ENT button.
10. If desired, navigate to the SELECT INPUT/OUTPUT window. Highlight the DISCRETE IN field and
press the ENT button.
GIA 2 Discrete Input Check

Table 5-6, GIA 2 Discrete Inputs
GIA 2 Channel Data Type Starting State Action required to change state
DISCRETE IN
MW Acknowledge Press the copilot’s Master Warning switch to

IN 2 False
2 observe a data state change from False to True.
MC Acknowledge Press the copilot’s Master Caution switch to

IN 3 False
2 observe a data state change from False to True.
Press the Go Around switch on the throttle to

IN 4 AFCS Go Around False
observe a data state change from False to True.
PLT CTRL WHL Press the CWS switch on the pilot’s control wheel
IN 5 False
to observe a data state change from False to True.
Generic 16
Accomplish Fuel Quantity Gauge Fault Functional
IN 6 R Fuel Gauge False
Test in Section 6.6.3.
Fault
Generic 17
Main Landing Accomplish see Gear Down/Locked Operational
IN 7 True
Gear Test in Section 6.7.
Down/Locked
Press the pitch trim ARM switch on the copilot’s

CPLT PIT TRM
IN 8 False control wheel in both directions to observe data
ARM
Press the pitch trim ARM switch on the pilot’s

PLT PIT TRM
IN 9 False control wheel in both directions to observe data
ARM

190-02313-01 Revision 2
1. Push the Pilot Control Wheel AP DISC switch

to observe data state change from False to
AFCS Disconnect True.
IN 10 False
In 2. Push the Copilot Control Wheel AP DISC
switch to observe data state change from
False to True.
On the ground when one or more of the following

conditions exist to observe data state change from
False to True:
1. Flaps not within takeoff position (<7° or >15°)
Generic 23
IN 11 False 2. Pitch Trim not in takeoff position
No Take Off
3. Horizontal Stabilizer not in takeoff position (-2°)
4. Speed brakes extended
5. Parking Brake Set
Generic 18 Put Rotary Test Switch into Off position and put
IN 12 Engine Sync - False Engine Sync switch into Fan position to observe
FAN data state change from False to True.
IN 13 RH Gen Off True Open “RH START CTNL PCB” CB, (HT022)
Cab Alt 2 GT 14 5
IN 14 False Apply 28V+ to pin B at SC019.
K
Generic 19 Put Rotary Test Switch into Off position and put
IN 1A Engine Sync - False Engine Sync switch into Turbine position to
TURB observe a data state change from False to True.
Generic 7 Set the Pitot & Static switch to ON. Open the
P/S Heat Fail STBY P/S HTR CB on the pilot’s circuit breaker
IN 2A P/S Heat fail STBY = F panel to observe a data state change from False
STBY to True.
Drive trim upward with pilot’s control wheel pitch

IN 3A PLT PIT TRM Up False trim switch to observe data state change from
False to True.
Drive trim downward with pilot’s control wheel

PLT PIT TRM
IN 4A False pitch trim switch to observe data state change
DWN
from False to True.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Drive trim upward with copilot’s control wheel pitch

CPLT PIT TRM
IN 5A False trim switch to observe data state change from
Up
False to True.
Drive trim downward with copilot’s control wheel

CPLT PIT TRM
IN 6A False pitch trim switch to observe data state change
DWN
from False to True.
Generic 24
Accomplish GIA 1 “IN 1A” (above) of this
IN 7A No Takeoff False
document to validate this input.
External M/C
Connect weight-on-wheels test set and cycle

RH Gear on
IN 10A True between on-ground and in-air to observe data
Ground
(Can be done in conjunction with GIA #1 IN 2A)

1. Verify IN 11A is F (false).
2. Open TCAS circuit breaker.
3. Remove TCAS processor from tray.
4. Apply a jumper from aircraft ground to the
IN 11A Mute Caution In False
following:
 TPU67: PT808, Pin 90
 TCAS 2000: PN819, Pins 1K, 1F,2A
Verify IN 11A changes state from F (False) to T
(True).
While on-ground, use the rotary test switch in the

IN 12A Impending Stall False pedestal and select the Stick Shaker test function
to observe data state change from False to True.
Generic 20 Move right thrust lever to the TO position to

IN 13A False
RH TO Detent observe data state change from False to True.
Generic 21 Move right thrust lever to CLB position to observe

IN 14A False
RH CLB Detent data state change from False to True.
Generic 22 Move right thrust lever to CRU position to observe

IN 15A False
RH CRU Detent data state change from False to True.
Accomplish Low Fuel Quantity Functional Test in

IN 16A Low Fuel R False Section 6.6.2 to observe data state change from
False to True.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Move control wheel steering switch to on position

IN 17A CPLT CTRL WHL False
to observe data state change from False to True.
Open the AOA circuit breaker to observe data

IN 18A AOA Valid True
12. If desired, activate the cursor on GCU1 and navigate to the SELECT INPUT/OUTPUT window. Highlight
the DISCRETE OUT field and press the ENT button.
GIA 2 Discrete Output Check

Table 5-7, GIA 2 Discrete Outputs
DISCRETE OUT
From the GTC initiate a Radio Altimeter System

(Home -> Aircraft Systems -> System Tests ->
ANNUN* 16 RA Test False
Radio Altimeter) to observe data state change from
False to True.

ANNUN* 1A MW On False panel to observe data state change from False to
True.

ANNUN* 2A MC On False panel to observe data state change from False to
True.
(Can be done in conjunction with GIA #1 IN 2A

and Out* 4A and also GIA #2 IN 11A)
4. Verify OUT* 4A is F (false).
5. Gain Access to right nose Avionics
TCAS II TA Aural compartment, remove connector from
OUT* 4A False PN384 and insert a grounded jumper to
Alert Inhibit
pin 44.
6. Verify OUT* 4A changes state from F
(False) to T (True).
Remove jumper and reconnect PN384.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.3 GSA 9000 Servo Actuator / GSM 9100 Servo Gearbox
5.3.1 GSA 9000/GSM 9100 Removal
1. Open the AP SERVOS circuit breakers on the RH and LH circuit breaker panels or remove power from
the aircraft.
2. Gain access to the desired servo(s). The roll servo is in the belly and the trim servo is accessed through
the aft luggage compartment. The pitch and yaw servos are in the tail compartment. (Reference
Garmin Servo Installation Drawings, 005-01202-11, -12, -13, -14).
3. Disconnect the servo harness connector.
4. (To remove the GSA-9000 servo without removing the GSM 9100 servo Gearbox),
a. Use a socket or open-end wrench to loosen and remove the servo attachment bolts (QTY 4) that
secure the Servo to the Gearbox and carefully remove the GSA 9000 servo from the GSM 9100
b. Place a protective cover over the output gear on the GSM 9100.
Figure 5-11, GSA 9000 Servo /GSM 9100 Gearbox Separation

5. (To remove the GSA-9000 servo and the GSM 9100 servo Gearbox as a single assembly):
a. Remove the safety wire and screws securing the Cable Guards (QTY 4) to the GSM 9100 servo
Gearbox (Ref. Figure 5-12).
b. Remove the retaining clips and turn the turnbuckle to loosen the servo cables, then remove the
servo cables from the capstan (Ref. Figure 5-13).
c. Use a socket or open-wrench to remove the bolts (QTY 4) securing the GSM 9100 servo
Gearbox and remove the servo Gearbox from the servo bracket. (Ref. Figure 5-14).

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Figure 5-12, GSM 9100 Cable Guards (Ref)
Figure 5-13, GSM 9100 Servo Cable Turnbuckle (Ref)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Figure 5-14, GSM 9100 Servo Gearbox Bracket (Ref)
5.3.2 GSA 9000/GSM 9100 Installation

1. Inspect the GSM 9100 servo mount as defined in Sections 5.3.3.1, 5.3.3.2, 5.3.3.4.
2. Inspect the GSA 9000 electrical connectors to ensure there are no bent or damaged pins. Repair any
damage.
3. Install the GSA 9000 servo, GSM 9100 servo gearbox, servo cables, and cable guards using the
installation instructions defined in the appropriate Garmin Servo Installation drawing for the servo
assembly being installed. (Reference 005-01202-11, -12, -13, -14).
reconnected.
5. Configure and perform a functional test the GSA 9000 servo as defined in Sections 5.3.4 and 6.14.1.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.3.3 GSM 9100 Inspection
5.3.3.1 GSM 9100 Servo Mount O-Ring Inspection

1. Anytime the GSA 9000 servo and the GSM 9100 servo Gearbox are separated, perform an inspection
the GSM 9100 O-Ring for nicks, cuts or damage. If any of these defects are found, then return the GSM
9100 servo Gearbox to a FAA Approved Repair Station. See Figure 5-15.
Baseplate Screws
Figure 5-15, GSM 9100 O-Ring and Baseplate Screws
5.3.3.2 Servo Base Plate Screw Inspection

Anytime the GSA 9000 servo and the GSM 9100 servo Gearbox are separated, visually inspect condition
of servo base plate screws. See Figure 5-15.
5.3.3.3 Servo Mount Visual Inspections

When performing an existing periodic inspection in the area of the servo, visually inspect the items listed
below. On each GSM 9100 servo mount (QTY 4), visually inspect and ensure each item is installed, tightly
secured and shows no signs of visual damage. (Reference Figure 5-16) If any of these items are missing,
not properly secured, or damaged; contact a properly rated FAA Approved Repair Station qualified for
servicing the GSM 9100 servo mount and to obtain further guidance concerning replacing the part or the
entire GSM 9100 servo mount.
1. Capstan screws (QTY 2). When performing an existing periodic inspection in the area of the
servo, verify the two capstan screws are tightly secured. If any screws are missing or loose,
remove the GSM 9100 servo mount and send to a properly rated FAA Approved Repair Station
qualified by Garmin for servicing of this unit. (This check is also a scheduled maintenance
requirement that must be performed every 20,000 hours.)
2. Capstan spring (QTY 1). When performing an existing periodic inspection in the area of the servo
visually inspect that the bridle cable ball is retained by servo capstan spring.
3. Drive shaft seal screws (QTY 6). When performing an existing periodic inspection in the area of
the servo, verify the six drive shaft seal screws, are tightly secured. If any screws are missing or
loose, remove the GSM 9100 servo mount and send to a properly rated FAA Approved Repair
Station qualified by Garmin for servicing of this unit. (This check is also a scheduled maintenance
requirement that must be performed every 20,000 hours.)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4. Drive shaft seal (QTY 1). When performing an existing periodic inspection in the area of the servo,
visually inspect the general condition of the servo drive shaft seal. If seal is found to be damaged,
remove the GSM 9100 servo mount and send to a properly rated FAA Approved Repair Station
qualified by Garmin for servicing of this unit.
5. Oleophobic Vents (QTY 4). When performing an existing periodic inspection in the area of the
servo visually inspect the Oleophobic vents and remove any obstructions if present.
6. Mounting lugs (QTY 4). When performing an existing periodic inspection in the area of the servo
visually inspect the condition of the servo mounting lugs.
GSM 9100 Servo Mount,

Teflon Drive Shaft Seal
GSM 9100 Servo GSM 9100
Mount, Drive Shaft Servo
Seal Inspection Mount,
Tabs (6 ea.) Lugs (4
ea.)
Capstan Spring
GSM 9100 Servo

Mount, Capstan
Screw (2 ea.)
GSM 9100 Servo Mount, Drive

Shaft Seal Screws (6 ea.) GSM 9100 Servo Mount,
Oleophobic Vent (4 ea.)
Figure 5-16, GSM 9100 Servo Mount Inspection Items
5.3.3.4 GSM 9100 Drive Shaft Seal Inspection

Drive Shaft Seal Inspection for a GSM 9100 WITHOUT an inspection tab
If the Teflon drive shaft seal does not have inspection tab features as shown in Figure 5-16, then remove
the GSM 9100 servo mount and send to Garmin for inspection and repair.
Drive Shaft Seal Inspection for a GSM 9100 WITH an inspection tab
If the Teflon drive shaft seal has inspection tab features as shown in Figure 5-16, the driveshaft seal on the
Using a small flat blade screwdriver press one side of a tab until it bends over. The tab shall bend over 90°
without breaking; this indicates the seal is still pliable and so able to effectively seal the unit from moisture.
If the tab breaks, send the GSM 9100 servo mount to a properly rated FAA Approved Repair Station
qualified for servicing of this unit.
5.3.4 GSA 9000 Software and Configuration Loading

Original Servo(s) Reinstalled
No software loading is required if the removed servo(s) is re-installed. This does not include units that were
returned for repair as their software and configuration files are deleted during the repair testing process.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
New, Repaired, or Exchanged Servo(s) Installed
If a new, repaired, or exchange servo is installed, the correct software files and certification gains must be
loaded to the unit.
Obtain the correct G5000 Textron Model 560XL System Software Loader card for the software version
installed in the system (ref. section 3.3.1).
System Upload page.
9. Select the following software and configuration items shown below in Table 5-8 from the Product field:
Table 5-8, GSA 9000 Baseline Software and Configuration Files
System N/A √
GSA9XXX SYS SOFTWARE (PITCH, ROLL, YAW or PITCH TRIM for √ N/A
unit being replaced)
GSA9XXX GAINS (PITCH, ROLL, YAW or PITCH TRIM for unit being √ N/A
replaced)
by the following:
a. Green “PASS” or white “N/A’ in the SOFTWARE and CONFIGURATION columns adjacent to
each product.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
17. Complete the GSA 9000 Functional Checks as defined in 5.3.5.
5.3.5 GSA 9000 Troubleshooting

The ‘GFC Status’ page is presented in configuration mode and gives status information regarding the
autopilot servos and AP disconnect status.
Figure 5-17, GFC Status Page

The following section provides autopilot disconnect and GIA/GSA status for each field shown on the GFC
status page while in configuration mode.
GIA Status
AP DISCONNECT: Shows the condition of the AP DISC +28 VDC input to the GIAs and servos, which is
required for the Autopilot to operate. A valid data indicator shows the AP DISC switch is closed and the
GFC 700 is actively receiving 28. volts. An invalid indicator box indicates the GIAs and servos are no longer
receiving the +28 VDC AP DISC power or other fault).
Monitor/Control Board Status
Shows the condition of various monitor board components.
SERVO PROGRAM (1-4). Servo program discretes are used to determine the HW strapping for each GSA
to define the servo type and to verify proper servo grounding. The 560XL Servo Strapping is as follows:
Pitch Servo = 1
Roll Servo = 2
Pitch Trim Servo = 3
Yaw Servo = 4
AP DISCONNECT. Same as GIA Status.
PFT: Indicates whether the pre-flight test has passed or failed.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.3.5.1 GSA Servo Maintenance Logs
Whenever a servo fault occurs, a status message is logged to the corresponding servo control or monitor
maintenance log. This information is also accompanied by a time and date stamp. An “RTC DATE” entry is
made every time a servo is powered on, it is normally not useful for troubleshooting.
The following is a listing of possible faults that could be reported in a GSA fault log. Faults can occur in
either the monitor board processor or the control board processor, both of which are contained in the GSA
unit.
5.3.5.2 Monitor Processor Maintenance Log

The monitor processor contains the logs that are found in these processors -
2 – Pitch Servo
4 – Roll Servo
6 – Pitch Trim
8 - Yaw Servo
There are two main groupings of faults that can occur in the servo monitor processor:
The first grouping of faults can occur during the GSA unit pre-flight test (PFT). If there is a fault during PFT
the unit will not be able to transition to normal mode and the only way to clear this state would be to cycle
unit power.
The second grouping of faults can occur during normal mode. These faults generally cause a disconnect
of power to the GSA and report to the GIA that a fault has occurred.
The Notes column indicates any actions that can be taken to troubleshoot the problem in the aircraft by the
technician. Any faults that are not listed here indicate an internal problem requiring replacement of the
servo. If the items in the Notes column check out ok, replace the servo.
Table 5-9, Servo Monitor Processor Faults (during PFT)
MONITOR PFT STEP NOTES
This can sometimes be a result of a failure on the other internal servo board,
"INTERNAL COMM FAIL"
check faults on the other processor
"UNSW POWER INV" Check unit power
"MON SOL PWR ON FAIL" Check unit power and AP Disconnect power
"CTL SOL PWR ON FAIL" Check unit power and AP Disconnect power
"SOL PWR FAIL" Check unit power and AP Disconnect power
"CERT DATA UNINSTALLED" Upload the certification gain file to the Monitor board
"STRAP CODE MISMATCH" Check the connector strap inputs to the unit

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Table 5-10, Servo Monitor Processor Faults (during Normal Operation)
MONITOR FAULT NOTES
"GIA DIS FAULT" Check the AP Disconnect power into the unit
"HOST DATA DIF" Check the AHRS wiring to the system
"HOST DATA INV" Check the AHRS wiring to the system
"SVO PWR INV" Check unit power and AP Disconnect power
“STRP CODE CHNG” Check the connector strap inputs to the unit
“MET STUCK SWTCH” Check the MET switch inputs into the system
“MET STATUS DIF” Check the MET switch inputs into the system
5.3.5.3 Control Processor Maintenance Log

The control processor contains the logs that are found in these processors –
3 – Pitch Servo
5 – Roll Servo
7 – Pitch Trim
9 – Yaw Servo
There are two main groupings of faults that can occur in the control processor.
The first grouping of faults can occur during the GSA unit pre-flight test (PFT). If there is a fault during PFT
the unit will not be able to transition to normal mode and the only way to clear this state would be to cycle
unit power.
The second grouping of faults can occur during normal mode. These faults generally cause a disconnect
of power to the GSA and report to the GIA that a fault has occurred.
The Notes column indicates any actions that can be taken to troubleshoot the problem in the aircraft by the
technician. Any faults that are not listed here indicate an internal problem requiring replacement of the
servo. If the items in the Notes column check out ok, replace the servo.
Table 5-11, Servo Control Processor Faults (during PFT)
CONTROL PFT STEP NOTES
This can sometimes be a result of a failure on the other board, check faults
"INT COMM TEST FAIL"
on other processor
"CTL MOT PWR ON FAIL" Check unit power and AP Disconnect power
"MON MOT PWR ON FAIL" Check unit power and AP Disconnect power
"HALL 1 FAIL" Check unit power and AP Disconnect power

190-02313-01 Revision 2
"CURR OFFST FAIL" Check unit power and AP Disconnect power
"SVO TYPE FAIL" Check unit power and AP Disconnect power
"CERT DATA UNINSTALLED" Upload the certification gain file to the Control board
"STRAP CODE MISMATCH" Check the connector strap inputs to the unit

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Table 5-12, Servo Control Processor Faults (during Normal Operation)
CONTROL FAULT NOTES
"GIA DIS FAULT" Check the AP Disconnect power into the unit
"HOST DATA DIF" Check the AHRS wiring to the system
"HOST DATA INV" Check the AHRS wiring to the system
"SVO PWR INV" Check unit power and AP Disconnect power
“STRP CODE CHNG” Check the connector strap inputs to the unit
“MET STUCK SWTCH” Check the MET switch inputs into the system
“MET STATUS DIF” Check the MET switch inputs into the system
5.3.5.4 GIA and GSA Fault & Assert Log Downloading
5.3.5.5 Downloading GSA Fault or Assert Logs

1. Insert an SD card into the top slot of PFD1 before turning on the displays.
2. Power up PFD1/2, GTC1/2, and MFD in the configuration mode.
3. On the PFD1 in the System page group, use the inner DCK on GTC1 to scroll to the DIAGNOSTICS
TERMINAL page.
4. Use GCU1 to select either GIA1 or GIA2 in the LRU field.
5. Press the LG2CRD softkey at the bottom of the PFD1 to enable logging the screen display to the SD
card. Verify the softkey text grays out. This indicates the recording function is active and all text that
is displayed in the OUTPUT window will be saved to the card.
6. Use GCU1 to move the cursor to the COMMAND field.
7. To collect pitch servo faults, use GCU1 or GTC1 and perform the following:
a. Enter F 2 in the COMMAND field and press the ENT key on GCU1 or the Enter key on GTC1.
b. Enter F 3 in the COMMAND field and press the ENT key on GCU1 or the Enter key on GTC1.
8. To collect pitch servo assert logs, use GCU1 or GTC1 and perform the following:
a. Enter F A 2 in the COMMAND field and press the ENT key on GCU1 or the Enter key on GTC1.
b. Enter F A 3 in the COMMAND field and press the ENT key on GCU1 or the Enter key on GTC1.
9. To collect roll servo faults, use GCU1 or GTC1 and perform the following:
10. To collect roll servo assert logs, use GCU1 or GTC1 and perform the following:

190-02313-01 Revision 2
11. To collect pitch trim servo faults, use GCU1 or GTC1 and perform the following:
12. To collect pitch trim servo assert logs, use GCU1 or GTC1 and perform the following:
13. To collect yaw servo faults, use GCU1 or GTC1 and perform the following:
14. To collect yaw servo assert logs, use GCU1 or GTC1 and perform the following:
15. Press the LG2CRD softkey to turn off logging the screen display to the SD card.
16. Power down the G5000 system and remove the SD card.
17. Insert the SD card in the card reader of a laptop or desktop computer and open the “diag_buf_log.txt”
file from the SD card using the WordPad program.
18. Insert the fault log as an attachment to an email and include the LRU order how the data was
downloaded and send to Garmin Aviation Product Support at avionics@Garmin.com
5.3.6 AFCS Troubleshooting

This section provides general AFCS troubleshooting techniques if a problem or suspected problem is being
investigated. The technician should first evaluate the overall status and condition of the G5000 system on
the GTC 575 Avionics Status Page. Any alert messages, annunciations, or other abnormal behaviors
should be noted to pinpoint the fault.
5.3.6.1 AFCS Annunciations

The following annunciations may appear in the AFCS Annunciation field:
Table 5-13, AFCS Annunciation Troubleshooting
Annunciation Condition Resolution
If elevator mistrim annunciations persist, check the pitch and

pitch trim servos for proper operation. Verify the servo is
Elevator Mistrim
Or online on the Avionics Status page on the GTC.
Down
Check the servo wiring and connectors. Ensure the servo is
receiving power.
Check the aircraft pitch and pitch trim control rigging.
If mistrim condition still exists, remove and replace the
Or Elevator Mistrim Up
affected servo.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Annunciation Condition Resolution
Check for possible fuel imbalance.

Aileron Mistrim Check aileron control rigging.
Or
Right
If aileron mistrim annunciation persists, check the roll servo
for proper operation. Verify the servo is online on the Avionics
Status page on the GTC.
Check the servo wiring and connectors. Ensure the servo is
receiving power.
Or Aileron Mistrim Left
If mistrim condition still exists, remove and replace the roll
servo.
Check rudder control adjustments.

Rudder Mistrim If mistrim condition still exists remove and replace the yaw
Or Right servo.
Or Rudder Mistrim Left
Allow the system to complete pre-flight tests.

The preflight test should finish within 2 minutes. If it does not
Pre-Flight Test pass, the white AP FAIL or AP YD FAIL CAS messages will
remain illuminated in the CAS window following completion of
the PFT. In case of PFT failure, troubleshoot in the same
manner as the AFCS System failure.
5.3.6.2 AFCS Failure CAS Messages

Table 5-14, AFCS CAS Messages
Failure Message Cause Solutions
1. Ensure the G5000 system is in proper

working order. Check specifically for
proper operation of the:
AP FAIL AFCS System Failure 2. GIA 64 Integrated Avionics Units
(Advisory - White) (Non-Yaw Axis)
3. AHRS Units
4. Air Data Computers
5. GSA Servos (excluding Yaw Servo)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6. Check that no red X’s are present on the

MFD, PFDs and GTCs.
7. Check there are no related alert
messages present on the GTC
Notification page. Correct any software
or configuration errors noted.
8. Go to the Avionics Status Page on the
GTC and verify that all LRUs have a
‘green’ check.
9. In Configuration mode, review the GFC
700 equipment status, software, and
certification gains.
10. Reload software, configuration, and
certification gains to the GIAs and GSA
servos.
11. Check the GFC Status page for
additional AFCS system information.
12. Review the fault and assert logs for the
GIAs and servos (see Section 5.3.5.4)
13. Isolate the fault to an LRU. Replace this
LRU and confirm the resolution of the
annunciation.
AP-YD FAIL Yaw Axis Failure 1. Confirm both AP SERVOS circuit

breakers are closed.
(Advisory – White)
2. Check the Avionics Status page on the
GTC to see if the servo is online (green
check).
3. Check Servo input power and
wiring/connectors.
4. If failure condition still exists, remove
and replace the Servo.
AP PITCH TRIM FAIL Pitch Trim Axis Check the Avionics Status page on the GTC
Failure while the to see if the pitch trim servo is online (green
(Caution – Yellow)
autopilot is engaged. check).

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.3.6.3 AFCS General Troubleshooting
Table 5-15, AFCS General Troubleshooting
Condition Resolution
1. Check aircraft controls for proper adjustment (Ref. Textron

Model 560XL Maintenance Manual chapter 27 and Garmin
Poor AP Performance Servo installation drawings 005-1202-11, -12, -13 and -14).
(Limited AP Authority) 2. Check aircraft control cables for proper tension (Ref. Textron
Model 560XL Maintenance Manual chapter 27 and Garmin
Servo installation drawings 005-1202-11, -12, -13 and -14)
1. For intermittent nuisance disconnects with no AFCS failure

alert, check A/P disconnect switch and wiring for intermittent
faults.
2. If an AFCS failure alert is displayed at the time of the
disconnect, troubleshoot per Section 5.3.6.2.
AP DISC Problems 3. Check the GIA AFCS Fault Logs according to Section
5.3.5.4. If a Mon Prmtr Invalid message is received, check
for valid true airspeed. A faulty OAT probe may cause TAS
to become invalid, which will flag the Mon Prmtr Invalid
message.
4. Contact Garmin Product Support for further assistance.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.3.6.4 AFCS System Status Messages
Table 5-16, AFCS Configuration GTC System Messages

loaded in the GSA 9000 1. Load the correct software. See
servos or GIAs, or the system Section 5.3.4 for the Software
has not been able to detect a Loading procedure.
serial number for the GSA
2. If a GSA 9000 servo is not
9000 servo(s).
showing on the SYSTEM
UPLOAD page after loading
NOTE
MANIFEST – GFC software completes, check the monitor
mismatch. Communication The software version board entry (ex: GSA ROLL
Halted. loaded to the servo is MON, GSA PTCH TRM M) and
determined by the motor-control board entry (ex:
serial number of the GSA ROLL CTL, GSA PTCH
GSA 9000 unit. When TRM C) on the SYSTEM
the serial number is STATUS page. If the unit is not
not reported by either reporting serial number for either
the monitor or motor- or both boards, replace the
control circuit board, servo.
this failure message
will be present.
USP is enabled without Verify both USP enablement and

UNDERSPEED PROTECT corresponding splash screen splash screen loading selection
CONFIG – USP config error, also enabled or USP splash correctly match aircraft configuration.
Config service req’d. screen is enabled and USP is See Section 3.3.3.2 for Loading
not enabled. procedure.
This detects a stuck clutch or

AUTOPILOT STUCK CLUTCH ring gear in the Pitch or Roll Service Servo
Servo.
YAW DAMPER STUCK This detects a stuck clutch or

Service Servo
CLUTCH ring gear in the Yaw servo.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.4 GMC 7200 Autopilot Mode Controller
5.4.1 GMC 7200 Removal
1. Access the GMC 7200 AFCS Mode Controller located on the glareshield mount assembly.
2. Open the AFCS Control circuit breaker on the LH circuit breaker panel.
3. Using a 3/32” hex tool, rotate all four ¼-turn fasteners counter-clockwise until they reach their stops.
4. Carefully remove the GMC 7200 from the glareshield mount assembly.
5. While supporting the GMC 7200, disconnect the connector.
5.4.2 GMC 7200 Installation

1. Inspect the connector and pins for signs of damage. Repair any damage.
2. While supporting the GMC 7200, connect the connector to the rear of the unit.
3. Carefully insert the GMC 7200 into the cutout until it is flush with the glareshield mount assembly. Do
not use excessive force while inserting the display.
4. Using a 3/32" hex drive tool, turn each of the four captive screws clockwise until tightened to 20 +/- 2
in-lbs.
reconnected.
6. Close the AFCS Control circuit breaker on the LH circuit breaker panel.
7. Configure and perform a functional test of the GMC 7200 as defined in Sections 5.4.3 and 5.4.5
5.4.3 GMC 7200 Software and Configuration Loading

Original GMC 7200 Reinstalled
No software or configuration loading is required if the removed GMC 7200 is re-installed. This does not
include units that were returned for repair as their software and configuration files are deleted during the
repair testing process.
New, Repaired or Exchanged GMC 7200 Installed
If a New Repaired or Exchanged GMC 7200 is installed, the correct software and configuration files must
be loaded to the unit.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Upload page.
9. Select the following software and configuration items shown below in Table 5-17 from the Product field.:
Table 5-17, GMC 7200 Baseline Software and Configuration Files
Manifest N/A √
System N/A √
GMC 1 SYS SW √ √
11. Observe software loading progress and verify software load completes without errors as indicated by
the following:
a. Green “PASS” or white “N/A’ in the SOFTWARE and CONFIGURATION columns adjacent to each
product.
12. Press the ENT key on GTC1 to acknowledge the “Upload and Crossfill Complete” summary window.
17. Complete the GMC 7200 Functional Checks as defined in 5.4.5.
5.4.4 GMC 7200 Troubleshooting
5.4.4.1 GMC System Messages
GMC1 KEYSTK – GMC1 key is stuck  Attempt to free the stuck key by
A key is stuck on the GMC bezel. pressing it several times.
 Replace the applicable GMC.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
GMC1 CONFIG – GMC1 config error. The system has detected a GMC  Load GMC configuration files,
Config service req’d. configuration mismatch.  Replace GMC.
 Check data path connection

The system has detected a failure between the GMC and PFDs for
GMC1 FAIL – GMC1 is inoperative. faults.
in the GMC.
 Replace the GMC.
GMC1 MANIFEST – GMC1 software The system has detected an  Load correct software version.
mismatch, communication halted. incorrect software version loaded in See Section 5.4.3 for the
the GMC. Software Load Procedure.
5.4.5 GMC 7200 Functional Check

Perform a basic operational check on the GMC 7250. The following knob, wheel and key presses and
rotations are to be performed on the GMC.
1. Ensure the G5000 is operating in normal mode and the autopilot is operational.
2. Press both FD buttons and verify the Flight Director command bars toggle on and off on both PFDs.
Leave the flight director command bars displayed.
3. Press the CPL button on the GMC and verify the following:
a. On the GMC, a green flight director indicator arrowhead points in the opposite direction.
b. The green flight director indicator arrow annunciator is displayed in the PFD1 and PFD2 AFCS
Mode Status Window and points in the same direction as the GMC arrowhead.
4. On the GMC, rotate the ALT knob and verify the altitude bug on the PFD altitude tape moves with ALT
knob rotation.
5. On the GMC, press the ALT button and verify the following:
a. A green annunciator illuminates above the ALT button on the GMC.
b. A green ALT annunciator illuminates in both PFD AFCS Mode Status Windows.
6. Rotate the UP/DN wheel and verify the following:
a. The flight director command bars move in a pitch up or pitch down attitude when using the GMC
UP/DN wheel.
7. On the GMC, press the HDG button and verify the following:
a. A green annunciator illuminates above the HDG button on the GMC.
b. A green HDG annunciator illuminates in both PFD AFCS Mode Status Windows.
8. Rotate the HDG knob and verify the following:
a. The heading bug displayed on the PFD compass rose and moves in the corresponding direction
and the flight director command bars rotate in the corresponding RWD or LWD orientation.
9. On the GMC, press the HDG knob and verify the heading bug synchs to the current aircraft heading.
10. On the GMC, press the HDG button and verify the following:
a. A green annunciator extinguishes above the HDG button on the GMC.
b. A green HDG annunciator extinguishes in the PFD AFCS Mode Status Window.
11. Press the AP button and verify the following:
a. A green annunciator illuminates above the AP and YD buttons on the GMC.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
b. The green AP and YD annunciators illuminate in the PFD AFCS Mode Status Window.
12. Press the AP button and verify the following:
a. The green AP annunciator in both PFD AFCS Mode Status Window changes to a flashing amber
AP annunciation and then extinguishes.
b. The green YD annunciator remains illuminated.
13. Press the YD button and verify the following:
a. A green YD annunciator extinguishes on the GMC.
b. The green YD annunciator in both PFD AFCS Mode Status Window changes to a flashing
amber YD annunciation and then extinguishes.
14. Press the VS button and verify the following:
a. A green annunciator illuminates above the VS button on the GMC.
b. A green VS annunciator illuminates in both PFD AFCS Mode Status Windows.
15. Press the VS button and verify the following:
a. A green annunciator extinguishes above the VS button.
b. A green VS annunciator extinguishes in both PFD AFCS Mode Status Windows.
16. Press the FLC button and verify the following:
a. A green annunciator illuminates above the FLC button on the GMC.
b. A green FLC annunciator illuminates in both PFD AFCS Mode Status Windows.
17. Press the FLC button and verify the following:
a. A green annunciator extinguishes above the FLC button.
b. A green FLC annunciator extinguishes in both PFD AFCS Mode Status Windows.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.5 GMA 36B Audio Processor
5.5.1 GMA 36B Removal
1. Open the LH and/or RH nose electronic compartment door/s. (Reference Textron Model 560XL
Maintenance Manual chapter 52-00-00)
2. Open the Audio 1 or Audio 2 circuit breaker/s.
3. Unlock the GMA 36B handle by loosening the Phillips screw on the handle.
CAUTION
Pull straight out when removing the GMA from the rack. A sideways or an up-and-
down motion can cause damage to the Connector pins.
4. Pull the handle upward to unlock the GMA 36B and gently remove the unit from the rack.
5.5.2 GMA 36B Installation

1. Inspect the connectors to ensure there are no bent or damaged pins. Repair any damage.
2. Gently insert the GMA 36B into the mounting rack. The handle should close the dogleg track.
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when inserting the GMA 36B into the rack. This may
cause damage to the connectors, unit and/or unit rack. If excessive resistance is
felt during installation, stop! Remove the GMA 36B and identify the source of
resistance. The rear plates are designed to float in the unit rack. Check to ensure
the rear plates are not bound by the connectors or spring clip.
3. Press down on the GMA 36B handle to lock the unit into the rack.
4. Lock the handle to the GMA 36B body using the Philips screw.
CAUTION
Start the captive screw into the hole carefully to avoid cross-threading. The
application of torque exceeding 14 in-lbs. to this screw may result in damage to
the LRU case and/or retaining hardware.
reconnected.
6. Close the Audio 1 or Audio 2 circuit breaker/s.
7. Close the LH and/or RH nose electronic compartment door/s. (Reference Textron Model 560XL
8. Configure and test the GMA 36B as defined in Sections 5.5.3 and 5.5.5.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.5.3 GMA 36B Software and Configuration Loading
Original GMA 36B Reinstalled
No software/configuration loading or testing is required if the removed GMA 36B is re-installed. This does
not include units that were returned for repair as their software and configuration files are deleted during
the repair testing process.
Original GMA 36B Installed in Opposite Locations for Troubleshooting

If the original GMA #1 and GMA #2 are installed in opposite locations, configuration loading is required.
New, Repaired, or Exchange GMA 36B Installed

If a new, repaired, or exchanged GMA 36B is installed, the correct software and configuration files must be
loaded to the unit.
System Upload page.
9. Select the following software and configuration items shown below in Table 5-18 from the Product
field:
Table 5-18, GMA 36B Baseline Software and Configuration Files
System N/A √
Airframe N/A √
Manifest N/A √
GM36X DSP 1 Key √ N/A
GM36X DSP 1 SYS SW √ N/A

190-02313-01 Revision 2
GM36X DSP 1 AUDIO CONFIG DATA √ √
GM36X ARM 1 Key √ N/A
GM36X ARM 1 SYS SW √ N/A
GM36X DSP 2 Key √ N/A
GM36X DSP 2 SYS SW √ N/A
GM36X DSP 2 AUDIO CONFIG DATA √ √
GM36X ARM 2 Key √ N/A
GM36X ARM 2 SYS SW √ N/A
the following:
each product.
12. Press the ENT key on GTC1 to acknowledge the “Upload and Crossfill Complete” summary window.
17. Complete the GMA 36B Functional Checks as defined in section 5.5.5.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.5.4 GMA 36B & Communication System Troubleshooting
5.5.4.1 GMA 36B Symptoms
Symptom/Failure Recommended Action

Message
 Most often the cause of the noise is external to the GMA. Try the
following to locate the source of the noise before replacing the GMA:
 Try a different pair of headsets. Noise cancelling headsets may pick up
and/or generate more noise than standard headsets from their own
circuitry.
 Turn various systems on and off and monitor the COM to see if noise
is reduced or silenced.
 Check for noise with the engine turned off.
 If the noise is present only when the engine is running, check the
generator and/or ignition system as possible sources of noise (see
Noisy Audio applicable airframe specific maintenance manual).
 Check for noise as all electrical equipment is power cycled (strobes,
other radios, etc.).
 If the noise is identified from one electrical system or component refer
to the applicable airframe specific maintenance manual.
 Ensure the NAV/COM squelch is not open.
 Ensure the ADF and DME audio is not active.
 Ensure the marker beacon audio is not active.
 Ensure the ICS squelch is not open.
 Replace unit only after all possible external sources of noise are
eliminated.
Mic Audio Heard in Reduce ICS Volume.
Speaker
5.5.4.2 GMA 36B System Messages

GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1  With PFD1 in CONFIG mode
needs service. Return unit for access the GMAx36X tab →
repair. GMA Status page and verify no
The system has determined boxes on the page are red X’d.
the specified GMA needs
GMA2 SERVICE – GMA2  Reload the correct unit software
service.
needs service. Return unit for and configuration files. See
repair. Section 5.5.3.
 Replace GMA.
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 in The system has detected a
 Ensure GMA is receiving power.
inoperative. failure in the specified GMA.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
 Ensure GDUs and GIAs are
receiving power.
 With PFD1 in CONFIG mode
GMA2 FAIL – GMA2 in
access the GMAx36X tab →
inoperative.
GMA Status page and verify no
boxes on the page are red X’d.
 Replace GMA.
GMA1 MANIFEST – GMA1
software mismatch.
Communication Halted. The system has detected an
Load the correct unit software. See
GMA2 MANIFEST – GMA2 Section 5.5.3.
loaded in the specified GMA.
software mismatch.
Communication Halted.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1
configuration error. Config
The system has detected a  Load GMA configuration files,
service req’d.
GMA configuration mismatch see Section 5.5.3.
GMA2 CONFIG – GMA2 for the specified unit.  Replace GMA.
configuration error. Config
service req’d.
DIG GMA1 MANIFEST –
Software mismatch.
Communication Halted. The system has detected an
Load the correct unit software. See
DIG GMA2 MANIFEST – Section 5.5.3.
loaded in the specified GMA.
Software mismatch.
Communication Halted.
Inspect the cross-side bus and RS-
GMA XTALK – GMA crosstalk Communication error between
232 wiring between GMAs.
error has occurred. GMA1 and GMA2.
MANIFEST – GMA1 AUX The system has detected an

software mismatch. incorrect software version
Communication halted. loaded in GMA1 AUX. Load the correct GMA AUX
MANIFEST – GMA2 AUX The system has detected an software. See Section 5.5.3.
software mismatch. incorrect software version
Communication halted. loaded in GMA2 AUX.
5.5.5 GMA 36B Functional Test
5.5.5.1 VHF Voice, Intercom and Passenger Address Check

1. Ensure the aircraft is powered and the G5000 is operating in normal mode.
2. Power the G5000 system in normal mode.
3. On the GTC1 radio bar set the pilot COM radio to COM1 using the MIC button.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5. Ensure the pilot’s and copilot’s Mic Select switch (located on the lower outboard instrument panel) is
set to the MIC HEAD SET position
6. Don headsets.
7. Use the PTT switch on each control wheel to establish two-way communication with a ground station
using COM 1 from the pilot’s station and COM 2 from the copilot’s station using the headset boom
MICs from both stations.
9. On the GTC2 radio bar set the copilot COM radio to COM1 using the MIC button.
10. Use the pilots and copilots hand MICs to establish two-way communication with a ground station
using COM 2 from the pilot’s station and COM 1 from the copilot’s station.
11. If installed, establish two-way communication with a ground station using COM3 (selection of MIC
and MON for COM3 are on the Audio & Radio’s page) from the pilots and copilots’ stations.
12. On the GTC1 and GTC2 Radio Bars select the ‘Intercom’ button.
13. Touch the ICS isolation arrow to activate and establish communication between the pilot and copilot
using ICS.
14. On both GTCs, touch the ‘Back’ button then the ‘Audio & Radios’ button.
15. On the GTC ‘Audio & Radios’ page, touch the ‘Speaker’ and ‘PA’ buttons to activate.
16. Initiate a passenger address using the pilot’s headset boom mic and verify clear PA audio can be
heard over cockpit and cabin speakers.
17. Repeat using the pilot hand mic.
18. Initiate a passenger address using the copilot’s headset boom mic and verify clear PA audio can be
heard over cockpit and cabin speakers.
19. Repeat using the copilot hand mic
5.5.5.2 Oxygen Mask MIC Check

2. Don the pilot and copilot oxygen masks.
3. Plug the oxygen mask MIC plugs into their respective OXY MIC jacks located on each side console.
4. Ensure the pilot’s and copilot’s Mic Select switch (located on the lower outboard instrument panel) are
set to the MIC OXY MASK position.
5. Verify intercom communications are established between the pilot and copilot using the oxygen masks.
6. Verify two-way voice communications can be established using COM1, COM2 and COM3 using the
oxygen masks from each station.
7. Place the pilot’s and copilot’s Mic Select switch back to the MIC HEAD SET position and stow the
oxygen masks.
5.5.5.3 VHF Navigation Audio Check

2. On the center pedestal, set the PILOT MIC and COPILOT MIC switches to the MIC HEAD SET
position.
3. Use the GTCs to select the audio source corresponding to each installed avionics unit (i.e. COM1,
COM2, NAV1, NAV2, ADF1, ADF2, DME1, and DME2) at each pilot station.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4. Perform a ramp test radio check at each pilot station with each radio by exercising the installed
transceivers, boom mic, hand mic, and audio over the headsets and cockpit speakers. For those
radios with a Morse code identifier (e.g. NAV1 and NAV2), ensure the Morse code identifier is also
heard.
5. For each audio source tested, verify communications are audible and PTT operation is correct at
each flight crew station.
5.5.5.4 Failsafe Operation Check

2. Use the GTCs to set the pilot COM radio to COM1 and the copilot COM radio to COM2.
3. Use the GTCs to select the same test frequencies for COM1 and COM2 and select the cockpit
speakers to on.
4. On both GTCs, push the volume control knob to ensure squelch is off (e.g. absence of a white ‘SQ’
annunciation in the COM frequency windows on the GTCs).
5. On the center pedestal, set the PILOT MIC and COPILOT MIC switches to the MIC HEAD SET
position.
6. On the forward circuit breaker panel, open the PLT AUDIO circuit breaker.
7. Check the failsafe operation of GMA1 by exercising COM1 boom mic, hand mic, microphone key
and audio over the headphones and both pilot positions.
8. Close the PLT AUDIO circuit breaker.
9. On the forward circuit breaker panel, open the COPLT AUD PRIM and COPLT AUD SEC circuit
breakers.
10. Check the failsafe operation of GMA2 by exercising COM2 boom mic, hand mic and audio over the
headphones and both pilot positions.
11. Close the COPLT AUD PRIM and COPLT AUD SEC circuit breakers.
5.5.5.5 Emergency COM Check

2. Use the GTC1 to set the pilot COM radio to COM1.
3. Use the GTC1 to select the test frequency for COM1.
4. On the Center Pedestal, push the EMERG FREQ switch.
a. Verify COM1 tunes to frequency 121.5 on PFD1 and GTC1.
b. The 121.5 annunciation of the EMERG FREQ switch is illuminated.
5. Push the EMERG FREQ switch. Verify the following:
a. COM1 can be tuned manually via either PFD1 or GTC1.
b. The 121.5 annunciation of the EMERG FREQ switch is extinguished.
c. The previously selected COM1 test frequency is displayed on PFD1 and GTC1.
5.5.5.6 Ground Dispatch Switch Check

1. Ensure all power is removed from the aircraft and the BATT switch on the instrument panel is set to
OFF.
2. On the aft power J-box ensure the GHT900 circuit breaker is closed.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3. On the ground dispatch CB enclosure ensure the PFD1/T-CTRL1/GIA1 (GHT072), COMM3/AUDIO2
(GHT074), MFD/DATA CONC2 (GHT076) and COMM1/AUDIO1/SWITCHING (GHT078) circuit
breakers are closed.
4. On the center pedestal, set the PFD1 DISPLAY FORMAT / DIM switch in the FULL mode.
5. On the DISPLAY FORMAT / DIM panel, Press the GROUND DISPATCH switch and verify the
following:
a. The Ground Dispatch ON annunciator illuminates on the GROUND DISPATCH switch.
b. PFD1 powers up.
c. GTC1 powers up.
d. MFD powers up with EIS window invalid engine data and MFW panes.
e. COM1 field on PFD1 is valid (no red X) with appropriate frequency.
6. Connect headsets to the pilot’s and copilot’s audio system.
7. Use GTC1 to set COM1 to a test frequency.
8. On the instrument, set the PILOT MIC and COPILOT MIC switches to the MIC HEADSET position.
9. Use the pilot’s boom and hand mics to initiate VHF communication on the appropriate test frequency.
a. Verify two-way communication is present with a local ground station at the pilot’s station.
10. Use the copilot’s boom and hand mics to initiate VHF communication on the appropriate test
frequency.
a. Verify two-way communication is present with a local ground station at the copilot’s station.
11. On the instrument panel, set the BATT switch to the ON position.
a. Verify the Ground Dispatch ON annunciator extinguishes.
12. Set the BATT switch to the OFF position.
a. Verify the Ground Dispatch ON annunciator illuminates.
13. On the DISPLAY FORMAT / DIM panel, Press the GROUND DISPATCH switch.
a. Verify the Ground Dispatch ON annunciator is extinguished.
5.5.5.7 Marker Beacon Check
Inner Marker Middle Marker Outer Marker

Figure 5-18, Marker Beacon Symbology
1. On the GTC1 & GTC2 ‘Audio & Radios’ page press the ‘Marker’ and ‘Speaker’ buttons to enable
Marker Beacon audio in the headsets and through the cockpit speakers. Ensure ‘High Sense’ in the
Marker Beacon field is NOT selected.
2. Verify the ‘Marker’ button is active (green status bar).
190-02313-01 Revision 2
3. On the Navigation Test set, generate a 400Hz (Outer Marker) output and verify the following:
a. A 400 Hz tone is heard through both headsets and cockpit speakers.
b. On PFD1 and PFD2 a flashing Outer Marker annunciation (‘O’) is displayed to the left of the
altitude tape in cyan.
c. On GTC1 and GTC2 a flashing marker beacon mute button in white text replaces the ‘Audio
& Radios’ button in the upper LH corner of the Radio Bar.
4. On the Navigation Test set slowly decrease the RF Level (increased dB) until the 400Hz (Outer
Marker) tone is no longer heard.
5. On the GTC1 & GTC2 ‘Audio & Radios’ page select the ‘High Sense’ button in the Marker Beacon
field. Verify the ‘High Sense’ button changes to active (green status bar) and 400 Hz audio tone can
now be heard.
6. Deselect ‘High Sense’ on GTC1 and GTC2 and increase the Navigation Tester RF Level to the
original level.
7. On the Navigation Test set select the 1300Hz (Middle Marker) output and verify the following:
b. On PFD1 and PFD2 a flashing Middle Marker annunciation (‘M’) is displayed to the left of the
altitude tape in amber.
c. On GTC1 and GTC2 a flashing marker beacon ‘Mute’ button in white text replaces the ‘Audio &
Radios’ button in the upper LH corner of the Radio Bar.
8. On the Navigation Test set select the 3000Hz (Inner Marker) output and verify the following:
b. On PFD1 and PFD2 a flashing Inner Marker annunciation (‘I’) is displayed to the left of the
altitude tape in white.
c. On GTC1 and GTC2 a flashing marker beacon ‘Mute’ button replaces the ‘Audio & Radios’ button
in the upper LH corner of the Radio Bar.
9. On GTC1 and GTC2 select the marker beacon ‘Mute’ button and verify the following:
a. The 3000 Hz tone is muted in both headsets and cockpit speakers.
b. The marker beacon ‘Mute’ button is replaced with the ‘Audio & Radios’ button.
10. On GTC1 and GTC2, select the ‘Marker’ button to change it to inactive (gray status bar).
5.5.5.8 Cockpit Voice Recorder Functional Check

1. Complete a functional check of the Cockpit Voice Recorder as defined in Textron Model 560XL

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.6 GTC 575 Touchscreen Controller
5.6.1 GTC 575 Removal
1. Open the TOUCH CTRL 1 (PRIM) and TOUCH CTRL (SEC) or TOUCH CTRL 2 circuit breaker/s.
2. Using a 3/32” hex tool, rotate each captive screw counterclockwise until GTC is loose from the center
pedestal panel.
3. Carefully pull the GTC out far enough to disconnect the electrical connector.
4. While supporting the GTC, disconnect the electrical connector from the GTC.
5.6.2 GTC 575 Installation

1. Inspect the electrical connector and pins for signs of damage. Repair any damage. While supporting
the GTC, connect the electrical connector to the rear of the unit.
2. Carefully insert the GTC into the center pedestal panel until it is flush and all fasteners align with the
corresponding holes. Do not use excessive force while inserting the GTC.
3. Using a 3/32” hex tool, rotate each captive screw clockwise until tight (20 +/-2 IN-LBS)) to lock the GTC
to the center pedestal panel.
reconnected.
5. Close the TOUCH CTRL 1 (PRIM) and TOUCH CTRL (SEC) or TOUCH CTRL 2 circuit breaker/s.
6. Configure and test the GTC as defined in the following section.
5.6.3 GTC 575 Software & Configuration Loading

Original GTC(s) Reinstalled
No software or configuration loading is required if the removed GTC is reinstalled in its original position
(GTC1 and GTC2 in their original racks). This does not include units that were returned for repair as their
software file is deleted during the repair testing process. Continue to Section 5.6.5.
Original GTC(s) Swapped for Troubleshooting
No software loading is required if the originally installed GTC units are re-installed in opposite positions
(GTC1 and GTC2 in opposite unit racks).
New, Repaired, or Exchange GTC(s) Installed
If a new, repaired, or exchange GTC is installed, the correct software file must be loaded to the unit.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
System Upload page.
field.
Table 5-19, GTC 575 Baseline Software and Configuration Files
GTC 1 √ N/A
GTC 2 √ N/A
System N/A √
Airframe N/A √
Manifest N/A √
GTC CONFIG N/A √
by the following:
each product.
17. Complete GTC 575 Functional Tests as defined section 5.6.5.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.6.4 GTC 575 Troubleshooting
Table 5-20 GTC Alerts
GTC1 SERVICE – GTC1 needs

The system has detected a
 Replace the applicable GTC.
failure in the applicable GTC.
GTC2 SERVICE – GTC2 needs
GTC1 COOLING – GTC1 has poor The GTC has insufficient  Check fan, wiring and air tubing
cooling. Reducing power usage. cooling. for proper operation (if
applicable).
GTC2 COOLING – GTC2 has poor
 Replace GTC.
cooling. Reducing power usage.
GTC1 FAN FAIL – GTC1 internal The system has detected a fan  Replace GTC.
fan failure. Return for repair. failure in the applicable GTC.
GTC2 FAN FAIL – GTC2 internal

fan failure. Return for repair.
GTC1 VOLTAGE – GTC1 has low The GTC is operating with  Check input voltage to GTC.
voltage. Reducing power usage. reduced power.
 If input voltage is ok, replace
GTC.
GTC2 VOLTAGE – GTC2 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage.
GTC KEYSTK – GTC1 key is A knob or joystick is stuck on  Attempt to free the stuck control
stuck. the GTC bezel. by pushing or turning it several
times.
GTC KEYSTK – GTC2 key is
stuck.
GTC1 MANIFEST – GTC1 SW The system has detected an  Load correct software version.
mismatch, communication halted. incorrect software version in the See Section 5.6.3 for the
GTC Software Load Procedure.
GTC2 MANIFEST – GTC2 SW
mismatch, communication halted.
GTC1 CONFIG – GTC1 config  Load GTC configuration files,

error. Config service req’d.
The system has detected a
GTC configuration mismatch.
GTC1 CONFIG – GTC1 config
error. Config service req’d.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.6.5 GTC 575 Functional Check
1. Ensure the aircraft is powered and start PFD1 in configuration mode (reference Section 3.1.1).
2. While in CONFIG mode verify on the System Status page (Figure 3-1) that GTC1 and GTC2 show
online.
3. Cycle power to PFD1 and repower in normal mode.
4. Configure both PFDs to display a 40/60 view format.
5. Configure the MFD to display two MFWs (split-screen mode)
6. Move the GTC Range/panning knob to the left and right and verify the MFW cyan (purple) page
border corresponds with the GTC Range/panning knob movement.
7. On the GTC Home screen select the ‘Map’ or ‘Map Settings’ button.
8. Rotate the range knob clockwise (CW) and counter-clockwise (CCW) and verify the range on the
MFW increases for CW rotation and decreases for CCW rotation.
9. From the GTC Home page, verify the various system buttons are displayed and selectable.
10. From the GTC Home page select the Flight Plan page and create a flight plan with an origin,
destination and an enroute waypoint.
11. On the GTC, enter in a STBY frequency for COM1 and COM2 and then verify the frequency can be
transferred to the active COM frequency.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.7 GCU 275 Display Controller
The GCU 275 uses captive screws and does not have alignment marks.
5.7.1 GCU 275 Removal

1. Open the PFD 1 CTRL or PFD 2 CTRL circuit breakers.
2. Using a 3/32” hex tool, rotate each captive screw counterclockwise to loosen the captive screws that
attach the GCU 275 to the main instrument panel.
3. Carefully pull the GCU 275 out far enough to disconnect the electrical connector.
4. While supporting the GCU 275, disconnect the electrical connector.
5.7.2 GCU 275 Installation

1. Inspect the electrical connector and pins for signs of damage. Repair any damage. While supporting
the GCU 275, connect the electrical connector to the rear of the unit.
2. Carefully insert the GCU 275 into the panel cutout until it is flush, and all fasteners align with the
corresponding holes. Do not use excessive force while inserting the GCU 275.
3. Using a 3/32” hex tool, rotate each captive screw clockwise until tight (20 +/-2 IN-LBS)) to lock the GCU
275 to the center pedestal.
reconnected.
5. Close the PFD 1 CTRL or PFD 2 CTRL circuit breakers.
6. Configure and test the GCU 275 as defined in Sections 5.7.3 and 5.7.5.
5.7.3 GCU 275 Software & Configuration Loading

Original GCU(s) Reinstalled
No software or configuration loading is required if the removed GCU is reinstalled in its original position.
This does not include units that were returned for repair as their software file is deleted during the repair
testing process. Continue to Section 5.7.5.
Original GCU(s) Swapped for Troubleshooting
No software loading is required if the originally installed GSD units are re-installed in opposite positions.
Continue to Section 5.7.5.
New, Repaired, or Exchange GCU(s) Installed
If a new, repaired, or exchange GCU is installed, the correct software file and configuration must be loaded
to the unit.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
System Upload page.
field.
Table 5-21, GCU 275 Baseline Software and Configuration Files
GCU 1 SYS SW √ √
GCU 2 SYS SW √ √
System N/A √
Airframe N/A √
Manifest N/A √
by the following:
each product.
17. Complete GCU 275 Functional Tests as defined section 5.7.5.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.7.4 GCU 275 Troubleshooting
Table 5-22 GCU Alerts
GCU1 CONFIG Configuration error. Config Reload GCU 1 or GCU2

service req'd. configuration files
GCU2 CONFIG
GCU1 FAIL GCU is inoperative.  Ensure GCU is receiving

power.
GCU2 FAIL  Replace GCU.
5.7.5 GCU 275 Functional Check
NOTE
The following procedure is to check the interface between GCU
1 and PFD 1 or GCU 2 and PFD 2. The GCU or PFD referenced
in the following procedure is representative of the GCU and PFD
combination that is being tested.
1. Ensure the aircraft is powered and start PFD1 in configuration mode (reference Section 3.1.1).
2. On the Display Format / Dimming panel place the PFD in Split Display format.
a. Verify the PFD now displays a 40/60 format with an MFW and PFD presentation.
3. Activate the MFW pane on the PFD, then select MAP key on the GTC to display the Navigation Map.
a. Verify the Navigation Map is displayed on the PFD MFW pane.
4. Rotate the GCU RANGE knob.
a. Verify the range displayed on the Navigation Map changes from a minimum of 250 ft. to a
maximum range of 1000 NM.
5. Set the range on the Navigation Map to 15NM.
6. Push the RANGE knob to activate pan mode, then move the RANGE knob to the left, right, up and
down.
a. Verify the pointer moves in the corresponding direction on the Navigation Map.
7. Press the RANGE knob to deactivate pan mode.
8. Press the key.
a. Verify the DIRECT TO pop up window is displayed on the MFW pane.
9. Enter KIXD in the Direct To field and select the ENT key twice.
a. Verify a direct to KIXD is displayed on the Navigation Map and PFD.
10. Select key on the GCU, then rotate the cursor to highlight CANCEL on the DIRECT TO pop up
window. Select the ENT key.
a. Verify the KIXD direct to is extinguished on the Navigation Map.
11. Select the COM NAV key on the GCU.
a. Verify the COM/NAV pop up window is displayed on MFW pane.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
12. Select the COM NAV key on the GCU.
a. Verify the COM/NAV pop up window is extinguished on the MFW pane
13. Select the FPL key on the GCU.
a. Verify the FLIGHT PLAN pop up window is displayed on the MFW pane.
14. Select the FPL key on the GCU.
a. Verify the FLIGHT PLAN pop up window is extinguished on the MFW pane.
15. Select the PROC key on the GCU.
a. Verify the PROCEDURES pop up window is displayed on the MFW pane.
16. Select the PROC key on the GCU.
a. Verify the PROCEDURES window is extinguished on the MFW pane.
17. Use the BARO knob to select 29.92 on the PFD.
a. Verify 29.92 is displayed on the PFD.
18. Press the BARO knob on the GCU.
a. Verify the 29.92 is extinguished and STD BARO is displayed on the PFD.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.8 GEA 7100 Engine and Airframe Unit
5.8.1 GEA 7100 Removal
1. Gain access to the GEA 7100 units located behind each PFD (GEA1 behind PFD1, GEA2 behind
PFD2).
2. Open the LH GEA or RH GEA PRIM and SEC circuit breakers.
3. Disconnect the three electrical connectors from the GEA unit.
4. Pull back on the lockdown mechanism knob(s) and simultaneously turn counterclockwise until free.
5. Open the lockdown mechanism collar from the GEA unit lockdown hook(s) and slide the GEA unit
forward to remove from mounting rack.
5.8.2 GEA 7100 Installation
1. Place the unit on the applicable GEA unit mounting rack.
2. Slide the GEA unit back until the feet are fully engaged with the mounting rack.
3. Lift the lockdown mechanism collar(s) and place on the GEA unit lockdown hook(s), then hand turn
lockdown mechanism knob(s) clockwise until the GEA unit is secure.
4. Inspect the three connectors to ensure there are no bent or damaged pins. Repair any damage.
5. Reconnect the three electrical connectors to the GEA unit.
NOTE
All three connectors are physically identical except for the keyway positions
which are different for each connector to prevent connecting the wrong cable to a
connector.
reconnected.
7. Close the LH GEA or RH GEA PRIM and SEC circuit breakers.
8. Configure and test the GEA 7100 according to defined in sections 5.8.4 and 5.8.6.
5.8.3 GEA 7100 Configuration Module (Part Number 011-02582-01)
The GEA 7100 has a configuration module with a K-Type thermocouple installed in the connector backshell
strain-relief of P2131 (GEA1) and P2141 (GEA2). This configuration module is a potted assembly with the
configuration module and thermocouple replaced on the connector as a unit. The thermocouple is used in
conjunction with the configuration module temperature sensor to compensate for temperature probe errors
resulting from the dissimilar metals at the pin contacts.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Figure 5-19, GEA7100 Configuration Module with Thermocouple Installation
5.8.3.1 GEA 7100 Configuration Module Removal

1. Ensure power is removed from the aircraft.
2. Remove PFD1 to access GEA1 connector P2131 or PFD2 to access GEA2 connector P2141 as
defined in section 5.1.1.
3. Disconnect the connector from the GEA.
4. Remove 2 screws securing the strain-relief.
5. Remove configuration module.
5.8.3.2 GEA 7100 Configuration Module Installation

1. Place configuration module in position and secure strain relief to GEA backshell with 2 screws.
2. Inspect GEA connector for damage.
3. Reconnect GEA connector.
4. Install the removed PFD/s as defined in section 5.1.2
5. Complete the PFD and GEA functional test procedures as defined in sections 1.1.1 and 5.8.6.
5.8.4 GEA 7100 Software & Configuration Loading
Original GEA 7100(s) Reinstalled
No software or configuration loading is required if the GEA 7100 that was removed is reinstalled in its
original position. This does not include units that were returned for repair as their software and configuration
files are deleted during the repair testing process. Reconfigure the GEA as defined below and perform a
functional test as defined in Section 5.8.6.
Original GEA 7100(s) Swapped for Troubleshooting
No software loading is required if the originally installed GEA 7100 units are re-installed in opposite
positions However, configuration loading is required. Reconfigure the GEA as defined below and perform
a functional test as defined in Section 5.8.6.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
New, Repaired, or Exchange GEA 7100(s) Installed
If a GEA 7100 being installed is new, repaired, or exchanged, the correct software and configuration files
must be loaded to the unit. Complete the following steps to reload the GEA7100 software and configuration
files.
System Upload page.
field.
Table 5-23, GEA 7100 Software / Configuration / Options Files
EIS N/A √
DAT N/A √
GEA 7100 1 SYS SW √ √
GEA 7100 2 SYS SW √ √
System N/A √
Airframe N/A √
Manifest N/A √
Enable Collins ALT-55B RAD ALT

If GEA 1 was
replaced reload: Enable L3 F1000 FDR
these options (if
equipped) Enable Honeywell RT-300 RAD ALT

190-02313-01 Revision 2
(Reference section
Enable Honeywell SSFDR
3.3.4.1)
Enable Baggage Smoke CAS
Enable Smoke Detect CAS
If GEA 2 was Enable Honeywell SSFDR

replaced reload these
options (if equipped): Enable LAV Smoke Detect CAS
(Reference section
3.3.4.1) Enable L3 F1000 FDR
Enable Collins ALT-55B RAD ALT
Enable Honeywell RT-300 RAD ALT
by the following:
each product.
17. Complete the functional checks defined in section 5.8.6.
5.8.5 GEA 7100 Troubleshooting Aid

The section is only provided as a troubleshooting aid if an issue is suspected with the GEA inputs. No
5.8.5.1 GEA Discrete Input Check

If desired, perform the instructions in the Action column of Table 5-24 for each parameter while monitoring
the DATA TYPE/DATA field and verify the letter F (to denote false) or T (to denote true) changes state
when the Action is performed. The suggested actions in Table 5-24 are provided as an aid to
troubleshooting the various GEA I/O that interface with the system and are not mandatory actions that must
be completed.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Table 5-24, GEA 1 Discrete Inputs
Suggested Action required to

GEA 1 Channel Data Type validate
DISCRETE IN
Accomplish the Cabin Door Interface

DISCRETE IN* 1
Cabin Door Open Check in Section 6.12.5.
Accomplish the Nose Access Doors

DISCRETE IN* 2 ACC Door Unlocked - Nose
Interface Check in Section 6.12.1.
Accomplish the Tail De-ice Pressure

DISCRETE IN* 3 Tail De-Ice Fail LH
CAS Interface Check in Section 6.1.1.
Accomplish the Hydraulic Low Flow

DISCRETE IN* 4 Hydraulic Flow Low LH
Accomplish the AC Generator Bearing

DISCRETE IN* 5 Bearing Fail LH AC Gen
Accomplish the Fuel Filter Impending

DISCRETE IN* 6 Fuel (Filter) Impending Bypass LH
Bypass Interface Check in Section 1.
Accomplish the Fire Bottle Interface

DISCRETE IN* 7 L / R Fire Bottle Low
Check in Section 6.3.3.
Accomplish the Fire Detection System

DISCRETE IN* 8 Fire Detect Fail LH Engine
Accomplish the Engine Vibration

DISCRETE IN* 9 Engine Vibration LH
Accomplish the EEC Manual Mode

DISCRETE IN* 10 LH EEC MANUAL
Accomplish the Engine and Wing Anti-

DISCRETE IN* 11 Eng A/I Switch On LH ice System CAS Interface Check in
Section 6.1.2.
Accomplish Speed Brake Operational

DISCRETE IN* 12 Hydraulic Pressure Norm
Accomplish the Hydraulic Low Fluid

DISCRETE IN* 13 Hydraulic Fluid Level Low
Level Test in Section 6.7.4.
Accomplish the Fuel Cross Feed

DISCRETE IN* 14 Fuel Xfeed Not Selected

DISCRETE IN* 15 Eng Fan/Stator Valve Closed LH ice System CAS Interface Check in
Section 6.1.2.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Accomplish the AHRS Auxiliary

DISCRETE IN* 16 AHRS 1 AUX POWER Battery Power Interface Check in
Section 6.11.7.1.
Set the Pitot & Static switch to ON.

Ensure Left Pitot Static circuit breaker
is closed. Open the Left Pitot Static on
DISCRETE IN* 17 P/S Heater Fail LH
the pilot’s circuit breaker panel to
observe a P/S HTR L CAS message is
annunciated on the G5000.
Accomplish the Aft J-Box Limiter

DISCRETE IN* 18 J-Box Current Limit 1
Accomplish the Aft J-Box Interface

DISCRETE IN* 19 J-Box Start CB 1
Accomplish the Tail De-ice Pressure

DISCRETE IN* 20 Tail De-Ice Pressure On LH
Accomplish the Two-Position

DISCRETE IN* 21 Stab Position Fail Horizontal Stabilizer Operational

DISCRETE IN* 22 Wing Cold LH ice System CAS Interface Check in
Section 6.1.2.
Accomplish the Cabin Door Interface

DISCRETE IN* 24 Cabin Door Seal Low Press
Accomplish the Oil Pressure Indication

CONFIG DISCRETE IN HC 3 Oil Pressure Low LH
Functional Check in Section 6.13.10.
Accomplish the Oil Filter By-Pass

CONFIG DISCRETE IN HC 4 Oil Filter (Actual) Bypass LH
Accomplish the Extinguishing System

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 1 Fuel F/W S/O Valve LH – F/W Shutoff Interface Check in
Section 6.3.1.
Accomplish the Extinguishing System

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 2 Hyd F/W S/O Valve LH – F/W Shutoff Interface Check in
Section 6.3.1.
Accomplish the Bleed Air Over Heat

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 3 Bleed Air Overheat LH

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 4 Stab Position External M/C Trigger Horizontal Stabilizer Operational

190-02313-01 Revision 2

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 5 Fuel X-Feed Valve Closed

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 6 Fuel X-Feed Valve Open
Accomplish the Emergency Pressure

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 7 Emergency Pressurization
Accomplish the Bleed Air Over Heat

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 8 Wing Bleed Air Xflow SW
Accomplish the Fire Warning Interface

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 9 Engine Fire Annunciator LH
Accomplish the Honeywell AA-300

Radar Altimeter Functional Check in
Section 6.11.8.1.
CONFIG DISCRETE IN 10 Rad Alt Warning Flag Or
Accomplish the Collins ALT-55B
Radar Altimeter Functional Check in
Section 6.11.8.3.

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 11 Wing/Eng A/I On LH ice System CAS Interface Check in
Section 6.1.2.
Accomplish the Wing Over Heat CAS

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 12 Wing Overtemp LH
Accomplish the Engine Sync Check in

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 13 Engine Sync - Light
Section 6.13.7
Accomplish the Air Cycle Machine

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 14 ACM Overheat
Accomplish the Engine Ignition and

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 15 LH Engine Start
Start Check in Section 6.13.6.
Accomplish the Engine Ignition and

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 16 L Ignition Indication
Start Check in Section 6.13.6.
Accomplish the Battery Temperature

DIGITAL IN* 8 BATT O'TEMP >160
Interface check in Section 6.3.7.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Table 5-25, GEA 2 Discrete Inputs
GEA 2 Channel Data Type Action required to validate
DISCRETE IN
Accomplish the Cabin Door

DISCRETE IN* 1 Cabin Door Open
Interface Check in Section 6.12.5
1. Monitor PFD 1 Configuration

page, Alert Configurations,
Blobs, ID 20 “apu_start”.
DISCRETE IN* 2 APU Start 2. Perform a normal start of the
APU.
3. Verify Blob ID 20 changes
from false to true.
Accomplish the Tail De-ice
DISCRETE IN* 3 Tail De-Ice Fail RH Pressure CAS Interface Check in
Section 6.1.1.
Accomplish the Hydraulic Low

DISCRETE IN* 4 Hydraulic Flow Low RH
Flow Test in Section 6.7.5.
Accomplish the AC Generator

DISCRETE IN* 5 Bearing Fail RH AC Gen Bearing Interface Check in
Section 6.2.1.
Accomplish the Fuel Filter

DISCRETE IN* 6 Fuel (Filter) Impending Bypass RH Impending Bypass Interface
Check in Section 1.
Accomplish the Fire Detection

DISCRETE IN* 8 Fire Detect Fail RH Engine System Interface Check in
Section 6.3.2.
Accomplish the Engine Vibration

DISCRETE IN* 9 Engine Vibration RH
Accomplish the EEC Manual

DISCRETE IN* 10 RH EEC MANUAL Mode Interface Check in Section
6.13.2.
Accomplish the Engine and Wing

DISCRETE IN* 11 Eng A/I Switch On RH Anti-ice System CAS Interface

DISCRETE IN* 12 Stab Position Fail Horizontal Stabilizer Operational
Accomplish the Engine Ground

DISCRETE IN* 13 Ground Idle
idle Interface Check in Section 1.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Place the Rotary Test switch in

the AVN position and verify the
DISCRETE IN* 14 Fan Fail Radome
RADOME FAN CAS message is

DISCRETE IN* 15 Eng Fan/Stator Valve Closed RH Anti-ice System CAS Interface
Accomplish the AHRS Auxiliary

DISCRETE IN* 16 AHRS 2 AUX POWER Battery Power Interface Check in
Section 6.11.7.1.
Set the Pitot & Static switch to

ON. Ensure Left Pitot Static circuit
breaker is closed. Open the Left
Pitot Static on the pilot’s circuit
DISCRETE IN* 17 P/S Heater Fail RH breaker panel to observe a P/S
HTR R CAS message is

DISCRETE IN* 18 Wing Cold RH Anti-ice System CAS Interface

DISCRETE IN* 19 Eng A/I Cold RH Anti-ice System CAS Interface
Accomplish the Tail De-ice

DISCRETE IN* 20 Tail De-Ice Pressure On RH Pressure CAS Interface Check in
Section 6.1.1.
Optional - Accomplish the

DISCRETE IN* 21 Baggage Smoke Detector Baggage Smoke Detector
Optional - Accomplish the Smoke

DISCRETE IN* 22 Lavatory Smoke Detector Detector Interface Check in
Section 6.3.5.
Optional - Accomplish the FDR

DISCRETE IN* 23 FDR FAIL Input
Fail Check in Section
Accomplish the Rudder Bias

DISCRETE IN* 24 Rudder Bias Heater Fail Heater Interface Check in Section
6.5.2.
This input has already been

DIGITAL IN* 10 RUD BIAS HTR FAIL verified with the above
DISCRETE IN* 24.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Accomplish the Oil Pressure

CONFIG DISCRETE IN HC 3 Oil Pressure Low RH Indication Functional Check in
Section 6.13.10.
Accomplish the Oil Filter By-Pass

CONFIG DISCRETE IN HC 4 Oil Filter (Actual) Bypass RH
Accomplish the Extinguishing

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 1 Fuel F/W S/O Valve RH System – F/W Shutoff Interface
Accomplish the Extinguishing

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 2 Hyd F/W S/O Valve RH System – F/W Shutoff Interface
Accomplish the Bleed Air Over

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 3 Bleed Air Overheat RH Heat CAS Interface Check in
Section 6.1.3.

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 5 Wing/Eng A/I On RH Anti-ice System CAS Interface

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 6 Stab Position External M/C Trigger Horizontal Stabilizer Operational
Optional – Only U.K. configured

Citation Excel / XLS aircraft.
CONFIG DISCRETE IN 7 APU FUEL VALVE
Accomplish the APU Fuel Valve

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 8 Rudder Bias Valve Command
Accomplish the Fire Warning

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 9 Engine Fire Annunciator RH
Accomplish the Honeywell AA-

300 Radar Altimeter Functional
Check in Section 6.11.8.1.
CONFIG DISCRETE IN 10 Rad Alt Warning Flag OR
Accomplish the Collins ALT-55B
Radar Altimeter Functional Check
in Section 6.11.8.3.

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 11 Rudder Bias Valve Closed

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 12 Rudder Bias Valve Open

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Accomplish the Wing Over Heat

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 13 Wing Overtemp RH CAS Interface Check in Section
6.1.8.
Accomplish the Air Cycle Machine

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 14 ACM Overheat CAS Interface Check in Section
6.1.4.
Accomplish the Engine Ignition

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 15 RH Engine Start
and Start Check in Section 6.13.6.
Perform an engine start

CONFIG DISCRETE IN 16 R Ignition Indication Accomplish the Engine Ignition
and Start Check in Section 6.13.6.
5.8.6 GEA 7100 Functional Test

1. Observe the MFD in normal mode and verify all engine instruments are displayed and indicate valid
values and markings. Reference figure below for normal EIS Display.
2. Set the MFD reversion switch on the DISPLAY FORMAT / DIM panel to the REV position.
3. Observe the MFD in reversion mode and verify all engine instruments are displayed and indicate valid
values and markings. Reference figure below for reversion mode EIS display.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Normal EIS Display Reversionary EIS Display
4. If an engine indication appears inaccurate or amber dashed perform the applicable engine indicating
functional test steps in Section 6.13.
5.9 GSD 41 Data Concentrator

5.9.1 GSD 41 Removal
1. Remove LH or RH nose electronic compartment door from the airplane. (Reference Textron Model
560XL Maintenance Manual chapter 52-00-00).
2. Open the Data CONC 1 or Data CONC 2 circuit breakers.
3. Unlock the GSD handle by loosening the Phillips screw on the handle.
4. Loosen the captive screws that attach the GSD to the main instrument panel.
CAUTION
Pull straight out when removing the GSD from the rack. A sideways or up-and-
down motion can cause damage to the Connector pins.
5. Pull the handle upward to unlock the GSD and gently remove the unit from the rack.
5.9.2 GSD 41 Installation


190-02313-01 Revision 2
2. Gently insert the GSD into its rack. The handle should close the dogleg track.
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when inserting the GSD 41 into the rack. This may
felt during installation, stop! Remove the GSD 41 and identify the source of
3. Press down on the GSD handle to lock the unit into the rack.
4. Lock the handle to the GSD body using the Philips screw.
reconnected.
6. Close the LH or RH nose electronic compartment door. (Reference Textron Model 560XL Maintenance
Manual chapter 52-00-00).
7. Close the Data CONC 1 or Data CONC 2 circuit breakers.
8. Configure and test the GSD as defined in Section 5.9.3.
5.9.3 GSD 41 Software & Configuration Loading

Original GSD 41(s) Reinstalled
No software or configuration loading is required if the GSD that was removed is reinstalled in its original
position. This does not include units that were returned for repair as their software and configuration files
are deleted during the repair testing process. Continue to Section 5.9.4.
Original GSD 41(s) Swapped for Troubleshooting
No software loading is required if the originally installed GSD units are re-installed in opposite positions
However, configuration loading is required. Continue to Section 5.9.3.
New, Repaired, or Exchange GSD 41(s) Installed
If a new, repaired, or exchange GSD is installed, the correct software and configuration files must be
loaded to the unit. Continue to Section 5.9.3.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
System Upload page.
field.
Table 5-26, GSD 41 Software / Configuration / Options Files
GSD41 1 SYS SW √ √
GSD41 2 SYS SW √ √
System N/A √
Airframe N/A √
Manifest N/A √
Reference section 3.3.4 and reload the following options if installed
Enable ELT/Cabin Entertainment 429 Output
Enable L3 FA2100 CVR GMT A429 Output

If GSD 1 was
Enable #1 ADF-4000
replaced reload:
Enable #1 DME-4000
Enable #2 ADF-4000
Enable #2 DME-4000
If GSD 2 was
replaced reload:
Enable GDR 66 VHF Voice/ Datalink Transceiver
by the following:
each product.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
17. Complete GSD 41 Functional Tests as defined section 5.9.4.
5.9.4 GSD 41 Functional Check

1. Power up the PFD1 in configuration mode.
2. On the PFD1, select the GSD page group using the GCU large PFD knob.
3. Using the GCU inner PFD knob select the GSD Status page.
4. Activate the cursor and select the applicable GSD.
5. Select ENT key.
a. Verify the MAIN STATUS items are valid (green check marks) for the GSD tested.
6. Restart the G5000 System in Normal Mode.
Figure 5-20, GSD Status Page
5.9.4.1 GSD 1 Discrete Input Troubleshooting Aid

The section is only provided as a troubleshooting aid if an issue is suspected with the GSD inputs. No
1. If desired, activate the cursor on GCU 1 and highlight the GSD1 field and press the ENT button.
changes state when the Action is performed. The suggested actions in Table 5-27 are provided as an
aid to troubleshooting the various GSD I/O that interface with the system and are not mandatory
actions that must be completed.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Table 5-27, GSD 1 Discrete Inputs
GSD 1 Channel Data Type Starting State Action required to change state
DISCRETE IN

IN* 1 ANNUNC TEST False panel to observe data state change from False to
True.
Initiate the over speed test from the rotary test

ROTARY TEST
IN* 2 False panel to observe data state change from False to
OVRS
True.
Accomplish the Speed Brake Operational Test in

GENERIC 36 Section 6.7.1 to observe data state change from
IN* 3 True True to False.
Speed Brake
Retracted Note: Only applicable to aircraft with JAA
SSFDR.
Accomplish the Thrust Reverser Operational

Check in Section 6.7.7 to observe data state
GENERIC 26
IN* 4 False change from False to True.
LH T/R Deploy
Note: Only applicable to aircraft with JAA
SSFDR.
Accomplish the Thrust Reverser Operational

Check in Section 6.7.7 to observe data state
LH THRST REV change from True to False.
IN* 5 True
STOW
Note: Only applicable to aircraft with JAA
SSFDR.
Place the L WINDSHIELD switch to the ON

LH Windshield position. Initiate the W/S TEMP test from the
IN* 9 False
OH rotary test panel to observe data state change
from False to True.
Placed the Left Windshield switch to OFF

LH
IN* 11 False position then back to ON to observe data state
WINDSHIELD AI
Place the Anti-Skid switch in the ON position.

GENERIC 2 Open the PWR BRKS circuit breaker.
IN* 12 Brake Pressure False Continuously pump the left and right brake
Low pedals to observe data state change from False
to True.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Accomplish Flap Operational Test in Section

AFCS GEN
IN* 16 False 6.7.2 to observe data state change from False to
FLAP P0
True.
GENERIC 5 Accomplish Gear Down/Locked Operational Test

IN* 18 Landing Gear True in Section 6.7.3 to observe data state change
Down/Locked from True to False.
IN* 20 TEMP DUCT H False Ground pin N at PB809
Accomplish Flap Operational Test in Section

AFCS GEN
IN*24 False 6.7.2 to observe data state change from False to
FLAP P1
True.
GENERIC 34 Accomplish Flap Operational Test in Section

IN 8A Flaps Selected False 6.7.2 to observe data state change from False to
Down True.
Position Left Fuel Boost switch from OFF

LH FUEL
IN 11A False position to the ON position to observe data state
BOOST ON
Accomplish Speed Brake Operational Test in

LH SPEED
IN 12A False Section 6.7.1 to observe data state change from
BRAKE EX
False to True.
3. Activate the cursor on GCU 1 and highlight the GSD2 field and press the ENT button.
4. Perform the instructions in the Action column of Table 5-27 for each parameter while monitoring the
DATA TYPE/DATA field and verify the letter F (to denote false) or T (to denote true) changes state
when the Action is performed. Once verification for each item is complete, perform the opposite action
(e.g. open a circuit breaker, de-select a switch, set a switch to the OFF position) as required to return
to the previous state.
5.9.4.2 GSD 2 Discrete Input Check

Table 5-28, GSD 2 Discrete Inputs
DISCRETE IN
Independently open and close the Aft Baggage

TAIL ACCESS
IN* 1 False Door, Tailcone Door and Battery Door to observe
DOOR

190-02313-01 Revision 2

GENERIC 27
Section 6.7.1 to observe data state change from
IN* 3 RH Speed Brake True True to False.
Retracted
Note: Only applicable to aircraft with JAA SSFDR.
Accomplish the Thrust Reverser Operational Check

GENERIC 28 in Section 6.7.7 to observe data state change from
IN* 4 False False to True.
RH T/R Deploy
Accomplish the Thrust Reverser Operational Check

RH THRST REV in Section 6.7.7 to observe data state change from
IN* 5 True True to False.
STOW
GENERIC 29 Accomplish Speed Brake Operational Test in

IN* 6 Speed Brake True True to False.
Command -
Retract Note: Only applicable to aircraft with JAA SSFDR.
GENERIC 30 Accomplish Speed Brake Operational Test in

IN* 7 Speed Brake False False to True.
Command –
Extend Note: Only applicable to aircraft with JAA SSFDR.
Place the R WINDSHIELD switch to the ON

RH
position. Initiate the W/S TEMP test from the rotary
IN* 9 WINDSHIELD False
test panel to observe data state change from False
OH
to True.
Placed the Right Windshield switch to OFF position

RH
IN* 11 False then back to ON to observe data state change from
WINDSHIELD AI
False to True.
AFCS GEN Accomplish Flap Operational Test in Section 6.7.2 to

IN* 16 False
FLAP P2 observe data state change from False to True.
GENERIC 31
IN* 20 Cockpit Air Duct False Ground pin 48 at PB336
Overheat
RH FUEL Set the Right Boost Pump switch to ON to observe a

IN* 21 True
PRESSURE data state change from True to False.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
EMER DOOR Open and close the Emergency Door to observe

IN* 22 False
OPEN data state change from False to True.
AFCS GEN Accomplish Flap Operational Test in Section 6.7.2 to

IN*24 True
FLAP P3 observe data state change from True to False.
GENERIC 4 Accomplish Lavatory Door Interface Check Test in

IN* 2A False Section 6.12.3 to observe data state change from
Lav Door False to True.
GENERIC 35
Accomplish Flap Operational Test in Section 6.7.2 to
IN 8A Flaps Selected False
observe data state change from True to False.
Down
GENERIC 33
IN 9A True Apply 28V+ to pin 16 at JF010
APU Gen Off
Position Right Fuel Boost switch from OFF position

RH FUEL
IN 11A False to the ON position to observe data state change
BOOST ON
from False to True.

RH SPEED
IN 12A False Section 6.7.1 to observe data state change from
BRAKE EX
False to True.
GENERIC 32 Move right thrust lever from cutoff position to idle

IN* 20A True position to observe data state change from True to
RH Fuel Cutoff False.
Open ANTISKID circuit breaker and PWR BRAKE

IN* 21A ANTI SKID FAIL False circuit breaker to observe data state change from
False to True.
5.9.4.3 Airshow
This installation provides a provisional A429 LS bus to facilitate Airshow In-Flight Entertainment system. It
is the responsibility of the installer to obtain airworthiness approval of this interface. For proper Airshow
functionality, including the display of a Flight Plan and various other parameters when interfacing with the
G5000, it will be necessary to access the Airshow Maintenance page and change the Navigation Data
Format to ‘429 ILT1’. Once the provisional A429 bus from the G5000 is connected to the Airshow unit
configure the Airshow as follows:
1. Connect a USB Mouse into either USB port on the front of the Airshow 4000 unit. If an older Airshow
unit is installed, it will be necessary to connect an RS-232 Mouse without any type of adapter (i.e. USB
adapter) into the Airshow unit. Reference the Airshow installation manual for the specific Mouse type.
2. Hold down both mouse buttons for up to 30 seconds to access Airshow Maintenance menu.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3. Select Settings.
4. Select NAVIGATION DATA FORMAT.
5. Select ‘429 ILT1’ from the drop-down menu.
NOTE: The 429 ILT1 Navigation Data Format setting will display an aircraft symbol at the present
position, and when a Flight Plan is programmed and executed in the FMS, the Airshow will display a
total route map showing aircraft origin waypoint and each waypoint in the flight plan.
6. Select SAVE and EXIT to Map
Figure 5-21, Airshow Maintenance Menu

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.10 GSR 56 Iridium Satellite Transceiver & Dual-Element Antenna
5.10.1 Removal
5.10.1.1 GSR 56 Iridium Satellite Transceiver

1. Open the LH nose electronic compartment door. (Reference Textron Model 560XL Maintenance
2. Open the Iridium WX Phone circuit breaker.
3. Pull back on the GSR 56 lockdown mechanism on the front of the rack and simultaneously turn
counterclockwise until free.
4. Remove the GSR 56 from the rack.
5.10.1.2 Dual-Element Antenna

1. Gain access to the antenna coaxial cable connector (J1/Yellow for Iridium Connext WXR, TEL, SMS)
located near FS 253.20. Reference applicable Garmin Antenna drawing listed in Table 1-1 for additional
location information.
2. Disconnect the antenna coaxial cable.
3. Remove the antenna mounting screws.
4. Remove antenna.
5.10.2 Installation
5.10.2.1 GSR 56 Iridium Satellite Transceiver

2. Insert the GSR 56 into the installation rack.
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when inserting the GSR 56 into the rack. This may
felt during installation, stop! Remove the GSR 56 and identify the source of
3. Lift the lockdown mechanism collar to place on the GSR 56 lockdown hook and hand turn lockdown
mechanism knobs clockwise until the GSR 56 is secure.
reconnected.
5. Close the Iridium WX Phone circuit breaker.
6. Close the LH nose electronic compartment door. (Reference Textron Model 560XL Maintenance
Manual chapter 52-00-00)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
7. If a new GSR 56 is installed, re-activate the with Garmin Connext subscription per Section 5.10.4.
8. No configuration is required for the GSR 56. Test the GSR 56 according to Section 5.10.5.
5.10.2.2 Dual-Element Antenna
1. Install the GSR 56 Iridium antenna as defined in the applicable Garmin Antenna drawing listed in Table
1-1.
2. Perform an electrical bond check of the re-installed unit per Section 5.19.3 using the antenna mounting
screws. The reading should be no more than double the installation requirement of 2.5 milli-volts (2.5
mΩ) or 5 milli-volts (5 mΩ). If the bonding checks fails, i.e. the resistance is higher than 5 milli-volts (5
mΩ), then clean and rebond as necessary. Re-attach equipment racks and complete electrical bonding
test based on the original installation requirements. Refer to the applicable installation drawing for how
to prepare electrical bonding surfaces. After bonding checks are complete, ensure all electrical
connectors are reconnected.
3. Perform the functional test of the system as defined in section 5.10.5.
5.10.3 GSR 56 Software and Configuration Loading

Load the required GSR 56 options as shown in Table 3-2 using the procedures defined in section 3.3.4.
5.10.4 Activation of Garmin Connext

To activate the optional GSR 56 for Garmin Connext, contact Garmin Product support at one of the following
numbers (M-F, 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. Central Standard Time, - Central USA):
 1-866-739-5687 (toll free in USA)
 1-913-440-1135 (worldwide)
Have the following information ready prior to calling:
 Aircraft tail number, serial number, manufacturer, and model
 GSR 56 serial number
 G5000 system ID number
 Name of aircraft owner and contact information
 Credit card information
To obtain the G5000 system ID number and GSR 56 serial number, accomplish the following:
1. Position aircraft outside with unobstructed view of Iridium satellite constellation.
2. On GTC1, touch the following sequence: Home → Utilities → Setup → Avionics Status
3. On GTC1, touch the ‘Airframe’ tab
4. Record the ‘System ID’ number shown in the ‘System ID’ window on the ‘Avionics Status’, ‘Airframe’
tab. This number is unique for each G5000 system.
5. On GTC1, touch the ‘LRU Info’ tab
6. Use GTC1 as required to scroll to the ‘GSR1’ button on the ‘Avionics Status’, ‘LRU Info’ tab.
7. Touch the ‘GSR1’ button
8. Record the GSR 56 serial number shown in the ‘S/N:’ field

190-02313-01 Revision 2
NOTE
Garmin will provide an Access Code during the activation process. This Access
Code is required to complete the registration process on board the aircraft. Record
this access code. Once the access code is provided complete the registration
process in the remaining steps.
9. On GTC1, touch the ‘Connext® Registration’ then ‘Register’ buttons.

10. Enter the access code on GTC1 then touch the ‘Enter’ button.
11. Once registration is complete, proceed to Section 5.10.5 to perform to functionally check.
5.10.5 GSR 56 Functional Test
5.10.5.1 Cockpit Telephone, SMS Messaging and Connext WXR Applications
NOTE
This section verifies proper functionality of the GSR 56 installation and does not
activate a Garmin Connext account. If a Garmin Connext account is not registered,
no telephone, SMS text messaging or Connext weather services will be available.
To verify if the account is activated access the Connext® Registration page on
either GTC (’Home’ → ‘Utilities’ → ‘Setup’ → ‘Connext® Registration’) and verify
the registration information is presented and accurate.
1. Position the aircraft outside, away from hangars or buildings, with a clear line of sight between the
Iridium antenna and the Iridium satellite constellation.
2. Ensure all circuit breakers are engaged.
4. Open the IRIDIUM TX/RX circuit breaker and verify the white “GSR1 FAIL GSR1 has failed”. system
message is displayed on the GTCs.
5. Close the IRIDIUM TX/RX (if installed) circuit breaker and verify the white “GSR1 FAIL GSR1 has
failed”. system message extinguishes.
6. From the GTC1 and GTC2 home pages, touch the following key sequence: Services → Telephone
and verify the green signal strength bars are displayed on the Iridium #1 button.
7. From the GTC1 Telephone page, touch Cockpit → Dial buttons and enter the desired phone number
in the following format: Country Code + City/Area Code + telephone number and then press the SEND
button.
8. Answer the test phone and verify two-way communication is established.
9. Terminate the call.
10. From a test cell phone send a text message to the aircraft and verify the text message is received by
the aircraft.
11. Access the Connext Weather page (‘Home’ → ‘Weather’ → ‘Weather Selection’ → ‘Connext Weather’)
and verify the amber ‘WEATHER LINK UNAVAILABLE’ message is not displayed on the applicable
PFD or MFD MFW.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.11 GDL 69A XM Receiver & Antenna
5.11.1 Removal
5.11.1.1 GDL 69A Receiver

1. Remove the LH nose electronic compartment door from the airplane. (Reference Textron Model
2. Open the XM Broadcast WX circuit breaker.
3. Unlock the GDL 69A handle by loosening the Phillips screw on the handle.
4. Pull the handle upward to unlock the GDL 69A. Gently remove the unit from the rack.
5.11.1.2 Antenna
1. Remove the XM antenna as defined in Section 5.21.1.
5.11.2 Installation
5.11.2.1 GDL 69A Receiver

2. Access the GDL 69A rack assembly behind the right side GDU 1450W display unit and gently insert
the GDL 69A into the rack. The handle should Close the dogleg track.
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when inserting the GDL 69A into the rack. This may
felt during installation, remove the GDL 69A and identify the source of resistance.
The rear plates are designed to float in the unit rack. Check to ensure the rear
plates are not bound by the connectors or spring clip.
3. Press down on the GDL 69A handle to lock the unit into the rack.
4. Lock the handle to the GDL 69A body using the Philips screw.
5. Close the XM Broadcast WX circuit breaker.
reconnected.
8. Configure and test the GDL 69A according to Section 5.11.3.
5.11.2.2 Antenna
1. Install the XM antenna as defined in Section 5.21.2.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.11.3 GDL 69A Software and Configuration Loading
4. Activate the GROUP field drop down menu and Scroll to ‘XL Base’ or ‘XLS Base’, as applicable to
the installation, and select using the ENT key.
System Upload page.
field.
Table 5-29, GDL 69A Baseline Software and Configuration Files

GDL 69 √ √
11. Observe the software loading progress and verify software load completes without errors as
indicated by the following:
each product.
17. Complete GDL 69 Functional Tests as defined section 5.11.5.
5.11.4 GDL 69A Troubleshooting
5.11.4.1 GDL 69A Symptoms
No SiriusXM® audio is heard  Ensure the following items are not preventing the audio panel
from distributing SiriusXM® audio (reference applicable G5000
No SiriusXM® weather Pilot’s Guide):
information is displayed

190-02313-01 Revision 2
√ Verify the SiriusXM® volume is not muted on the Music
Volume page on the GTC.
√ Verify the COM squelch is not open.
√ Verify the ICS squelch is not open.
√ Verify the marker beacon tones are not being received.
√ Verify the headphone (if equipped) volume is turned up.
 Go to the Avionics Status page on the GTC and ensure unit is
online.
1. If a red X is present, verify the unit is receiving power at the
rack connector.
 Ensure there are no GDL system messages displayed on the
GTC System Messages Notifications page. If there is a
message for software or configuration error or mismatch, reload
the file noted in the Message.
 Restart the PFD’s and MFD in configuration mode and go to the
GDL page.
√ Verify unit is active.
√ Verify the Signal number is “2” or “3”. If it is “0” or “1” check
the GDL 69A antenna and cabling for faults.
√ Reseat the GDL 69A to verify the coax connector is fully
seated.
√ If unit is not active, go to www.siriusxm.com/refresh and
enter the XM radio ID numbers (there are two) to have a
refresh signal sent to the XM unit. Also verify with
SiriusXM® the correct Weather package (Aviator Lite or
Aviator) is on the account, and that no traffic service has
been activated against that Radio ID. The unit must be on
for approximately one hour after the request for the refresh
has been sent to receive the signal.
√ If there are still problems receiving weather products after
performing the above step, call SiriusXM® for further
troubleshooting on the SiriusXM® account.
√ Verify there is a good ground connection through the aircraft
between the MFD and the GDL69A unit. Reference the
Aircraft Maintenance Manual for instructions on how to
check bonding and ground points.
√ If problem persists, replace the GDL 69A.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.11.4.2 GDL 69A Alerts
 Replace GDL 69A.

 Check GDL 69A antenna and
GDL 69 FAIL – GDL 69 has The system has detected a
cabling.
failed. failure in the GDL 69A.
 Check the GDL 69A and MFD
interconnect.
 Reload configuration file. See

Section 5.11.3 for the
Configuration Procedure.
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 The system has detected a
configuration error. Config GDL 69A configuration  If problem persists, replace
service req’d. mismatch. master configuration module,
check config module harness
for faults and replace if
necessary.
MANIFEST – GDL software The system has detected an  Load correct software version.
mismatch. Communication incorrect software version See Section 5.11.3 for the
halted. loaded in the GDL 69A. Software Load Procedure.
5.11.5 GDL 69 Functional Test

This test must be performed where the aircraft can receive SiriusXM® signals.
NOTE
This section verifies correct installation in the aircraft. It does not activate the
GDL 69A data link SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. If the SiriusXM® Radio is
activated, the channel list will contain more channels than the three that are
shown for a radio that has not been activated.
Complete instructions for activating the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio can be found
in “GDL 69/69A SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Activation Instructions” listed in Table
1-1.
1. Connect headsets to the pilot and co-pilot stations.
2. On both GTCs, touch the following button sequence: ‘Home’ → ‘Services’ → ‘Music’.
3. Touch the desired radio channel in the channel list. If the ‘Volume’ button displays a cyan Muted,
then touch the following button sequence: ‘Volume’ → ‘Music’. Verify the following:
a. The selected channel is shown in the ‘Now Playing’ field on both GTCs.
b. Music from the selected channel can be heard over the pilot and copilot headsets.
4. On either GTC, access the SiriusXM Weather Page (‘Home’ → ‘Weather’ → ‘Weather Selection →
SiriusXM Settings’) to display XM weather on an MFW.
5. Press the NEXRAD button and verify the NEXRAD icon (e.g. ‘US’) with valid time stamp is displayed
in the upper right corner of each MFW and the depiction of NEXRAD weather data is displayed on
the MFW.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.12 GDL 59 Datalink Transceiver
5.12.1 GDL 59 Removal
1. Remove the LH nose electronic compartment door from the airplane. (Reference Textron Model 560XL
2. Unlock the GDL 59 handle by loosening the Phillips screw on the handle.
3. Pull the handle upward to unlock the GDL 59. Gently remove the unit from the rack.
5.12.2 GDL 59 Installation

1. Visually inspect the connectors to ensure there are no bent or damaged pins. Repair any damage.
2. Gently insert the GDL 59 into the rack. The handle should Close the dogleg track.
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when inserting the GDL 59 into the rack. This may
felt during installation, stop! Remove the GDL 59 and identify the source of
3. Press down on the GDL 59 handle to lock the unit into the rack.
4. Lock the handle to the GDL 59 body using the Philips screw.
reconnected.
6. Configure and test the GDL 59 as defined in sections 5.12.3 and 5.12.4.
7. Close the LH Nose electronic compartment door.. (Reference Textron Model 560XL Maintenance
5.12.3 GDL 59 Software & Configuration Loading

Original GDL 59 Reinstalled
No software or configuration loading is required if the removed GDL 59 is re-installed. This does not include
units that were returned for repair as their software and configuration files are deleted during the repair
New Repaired or Exchanged GDL 59 Installed
If a New Repaired or Exchanged GDL 59 is installed, the correct software and configuration files must be
loaded to the unit. Load the required GDL 59 option as shown in Table 3-2 using the procedures defined in
section 3.3.4.
5.12.4 GDL 59 Functional Test

1. Position the aircraft outside, away from hangars or buildings, with a clear line of sight between the
Iridium antenna and the Iridium satellite constellation.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4. Ensure the IRIDIUM TX/RX (if installed) circuit breaker is closed and the white “GSR1 FAIL GSR1 has
failed”. GTC system message is not displayed.
5. From the GTC1 and GTC2 home pages, touch the following key sequence: Services → Telephone
and verify the green signal strength bars are displayed on the Iridium #1 button.
6. From the GTC1 Telephone page, touch Cabin → Dial buttons and enter the desired phone number in
the following format: Country Code + City/Area Code + telephone number and then press the Enter
button.
7. Answer the test phone and verify two-way communication is established.
8. Terminate the call.
9. Open the CABIN PHONE circuit breaker on the pilots forward circuit breaker panel.
a. Verify on the GTC that a ‘GDL 59 FAIL’ system message is displayed.
10. Close the CABIN PHONE circuit breaker.
a. Verify the ‘GDL 59 FAIL’ GTC system message extinguishes.
I

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.13 GDR 66 VHF Transceiver & Antenna
5.13.1 Removal
5.13.1.1 GDR 66 VHF Transceiver

1. Open the RH Nose electronic compartment door. (Reference Textron Model 560XL Maintenance
2. Disconnect the two electrical D-sub connectors.
3. Disconnect the coaxial cable connector.
4. Pull back on the lockdown mechanism and simultaneously turn counterclockwise until free.
5. Open the lockdown mechanism collar from the GDR unit lockdown hook and slide the GDR unit forward
to remove the unit from the rack.
5.13.1.2 GDR 66 Antenna

1. Gain access to the antenna coaxial cable connector by removing the baggage compartment liner.
(Reference Textron Model 560XL Maintenance Manual). Refer to the Antenna Install drawing listed in
2. Disconnect the antenna coaxial cable.
3. Remove the antenna mounting screws.
4. Remove antenna.
5.13.2 Installation
5.13.2.1 GDR 66 VHF Transceiver

1. Visually inspect the connectors to ensure there are no bent or damaged pins. Repair any damage.
2. Place the unit on the mounting rack ensuring the GDR 66 rear feet are aligned in the mounting rack
slots.
3. Slide the GDR unit back until the feet are fully engaged with the mounting rack.
4. Lift the lockdown mechanism collar to place on the GDR 66 lockdown hook and hand turn the lockdown
mechanism knob clockwise until the GDR 66 is secure and cannot be ratcheted any tighter by hand.
5. Connect the two electrical D-sub connectors.
6. Connect the coaxial cable connector.
reconnected.
8. Configure and test the GDR 66 according to Section 5.13.3 and 5.13.4.
9. Close the RH Nose electronic compartment door. (Reference Textron Model 560XL Maintenance

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.13.2.2 GDR 66 Antenna
1. Install antenna using retained mounting screws.
2. Connect the antenna coaxial cable.
3. Perform an electrical bond check of the re-installed unit per Section 5.19.3 using the antenna mounting
screws. The reading should be no more than double the installation requirement of 2.5 milli-volts (2.5
mΩ) or 5 milli-volts (5 mΩ). If the bonding checks fails, i.e. the resistance is higher than 5 milli-volts (5
mΩ), then clean and rebond as necessary. Re-attach equipment racks and complete electrical bonding
test based on the original installation requirements. Refer to the applicable installation drawing for how
to prepare electrical bonding surfaces. After bonding checks are complete, ensure all electrical
connectors are reconnected.
4. Fillet seal around antenna. Refer to the applicable Garmin Antenna drawing listed in Table 1-1
5. If required, re-install the baggage compartment liner. (Reference Textron Model 560XL Maintenance
Manual).
5.13.3 GDR 66 Software & Configuration

Original GDR 66 Reinstalled
No software or configuration loading is required if the removed GDR 66 is re-installed. This does not include
units that were returned for repair as their software and configuration files are deleted during the repair
New Repaired or Exchanged GDR 66 Installed
If a New Repaired or Exchanged GDL 59 is installed, the correct software and configuration files must be
loaded to the unit. Load the required GDL 59 option as shown in Table 3-2 using the procedures defined in
section 3.3.4.
5.13.4 GDR 66 Functional Test
5.13.4.1 Datalink
The following is only for FAA Data Comm and third VHF COMM, as ACARS functionality is not included in
this STC.
1. Position the aircraft outside.
4. On the COM 3 menus page (Home-> Audio & Radios -> COM3 Control Column) select the DATALINK
button and verify DATALINK is displayed in cyan on the COM3 Control Column.
5. If within an FAA Datacom DCL capable area, on either GTC select Home  Services  ACARS and
verify the Link Status is green.
5.13.4.2 VHF COM 3

1. Position the aircraft outside or obtain a portable VHF handheld radio.
4. On both GTCs, touch the Audio & Radios page and scroll down to the GDR line-item.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
5. On the GDR line-item touch the 'Datalink' field and acknowledge the ‘Disable Datalink Mode?’ pop-up
message to display the frequency tuning window.
6. On both GTCs, touch the MIC button adjacent to the ‘GDR’ button to activate COM3 audio.
7. Use the pilot and copilot hand MIC or PTT switches on each control wheel to establish two-way
communication with a ground station using COM 3 from the pilot and copilot stations.
5.14 DME-4000 DME Receiver

5.14.1 DME-4000 Receiver Removal
1. Disengage the DME 1 or DME 2 circuit breaker on the right circuit breaker panel.
2. Open the left or right-side nose avionics compartment door.
3. Loosen the knurled nut that attaches the DME-4000 Receiver to the mounting tray.
4. Lift the handle and carefully pull the DME-4000 Receiver out to disengage it from the electrical
connector (P150 DME 1, P151 DME 2) in the rear of the mounting tray.
NOTE
The electrical connector (P150 DME 1, P151 DME 2) is attached to the rear of the
mounting tray.
5. Remove DME-4000 Receiver from the airplane.
5.14.2 DME-4000 Receiver Installation

1. Put the DME-4000 Receiver into position on the mounting tray.
CAUTION
Make sure that the electrical connector (P150 DME 1, P151 DME 2) is aligned correctly
to prevent damaged or bent pin contacts
2. Carefully push the DME-4000 Receiver to the rear of the mounting tray until it is tight.
3. Make sure that the electrical connector (P150 DME 1, P151 DME 2) is engaged.
4. Tighten the knurled nut to attach the DME-4000 Receiver to the mounting tray.
5. Close the left or right-side nose avionics compartment door.
6. Engage the DME 1 or DME 2 circuit breaker on the right circuit breaker panel.
5.14.3 DME-4000 Antenna Removal
NOTE
The DME Antennas are installed on the bottom of the airplane. The DME 1
Antenna is installed at FS 175.71 and BL 0.0. The DME 2 Antenna is installed at
FS 248.95 and BL 0.0. The removal and installation procedures for the DME
Antennas are typical.
1. Remove the DME Antenna.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
2. Make sure that the ELECTRICAL BATT ON/OFF switch/light on the left tilt panel is in the OFF position.
3. Disengage the DME 1 or DME 2 circuit breaker on the right circuit breaker panel.
4. Get access to the coaxial cable connector for the DME Antenna.
5. Remove the fairing panel 153BC for the DME 1 Antenna. Refer to the Textron Aviation Model 560XL
Maintenance Manual, C56MM Chapter 6, Access Plates and Panels Identification - Description and
Operation listed Section 1.5.
6. Remove the fairing panel 163AC for the DME 2 Antenna. Refer to the Textron Aviation Model 560XL
7. Disconnect the coaxial cable connector (PY1059 or GPY1059 DME 1, PY1041 or GPY1041 DME 2)
from the DME Antenna.
8. Put a cap or cover on the coaxial connector.
9. Remove the screws that attach the DME Antenna to the fairing panel.
10. Carefully pull the DME Antenna away from the fairing panel.
11. Remove the DME Antenna from the airplane.
12. Carefully remove the sealant from the DME Antenna and the fairing panel. Refer to the Textron Aviation
Model 560XL Maintenance Manual, C56MM, Chapter 20, Fuel, Weather, Pressure, and High-
Temperature Sealing - Maintenance Practices listed Section 1.5.
5.14.4 DME-4000 Antenna Installation

1. Install the DME Antenna.
2. Make sure that the antenna, spacer, and airplane are prepared for electrical bonding. Refer to the
Section 5.22.
3. Apply a 1/4-inch bead of Type XV, Class B conductive sealant around the base of the antenna. Refer
to the Textron Aviation Model 560XL Maintenance Manual, C56MM, Chapter 20, Fuel, Weather,
Pressure, and High-Temperature Sealing - Maintenance Practices listed Section 1.5.
4. Put the DME Antenna in the correct position on the fairing panel.
5. Install the screws that attach the DME Antenna to the fairing panel.
6. Remove cap or cover on the coaxial connector.
7. Connect the coaxial cable connector (PY1059 or GPY1059 DME 1, PY1041 or GPY1041 DME 2) to
the DME Antenna.
8. Apply a 1/4-inch bead of Type XV, Class B conductive sealant to make a 1/4-inch fillet seal around the
perimeter of the antenna and connector cutout. Refer to the Textron Aviation Model 560XL
Maintenance Manual, C56MM, Chapter 20, Fuel, Weather, Pressure, and High-Temperature Sealing -
Maintenance Practices listed in Section 1.5.
9. Do an electrical bonding test. Refer to the Section 5.22.
10. Install the access panels.
11. Install the fairing panel 153BC for the DME 1 Antenna. Refer to the Textron Aviation Model 560XL

190-02313-01 Revision 2
12. Install the fairing panel 163AC for the DME 2 Antenna. Refer to the Textron Aviation Model 560XL
13. Engage the DME 1 or DME 2 circuit breaker on the right circuit breaker panel.
14. Do a test of the DME system, refer Section 6.11.
5.15 ADF-4000 ADF Receiver

5.15.1 ADF-4000 ADF Receiver Removal
1. Disengage the ADF 1 or ADF 2 circuit breaker on the right circuit breaker panel.
2. Open the left or right-side nose avionics compartment door.
3. Loosen the knurled nut that attaches the ADF-4000 Receiver to the mounting tray.
4. Lift the handle and carefully pull the ADF-4000 Receiver out to disengage it from the electrical connector
(P152 ADF 1, P153 ADF 2) in the rear of the mounting tray.
NOTE
The electrical connector (P152 ADF 1, P153 ADF 2) is attached to the rear of the
mounting tray.
5. Remove ADF-4000 Receiver from the airplane.
5.15.2 ADF-4000 Receiver Installation

1. Put the ADF-4000 Receiver into position on the mounting tray.
CAUTION
Make sure that the electrical connector (P152 ADF 1, P153 ADF 2) is aligned correctly
to prevent damaged or bent pin contacts
2. Carefully push the ADF-4000 Receiver to the rear of the mounting tray until it is tight.
3. Make sure that the electrical connector (P152 ADF 1, P153 ADF 2) is engaged.
4. Tighten the knurled nut to attach the ADF-4000 Receiver to the mounting tray.
5. Close the left or right-side nose avionics compartment door.
6. Engage the ADF 1 or ADF 2 circuit breaker on the right circuit breaker panel.
5.15.3 ADF-4000 ADF Antenna Removal
NOTE
Removal and installation of ADF antennas are typical. ADF antennas are found
on top of the fuselage at FS 295.75 for ADF 1 and FS 270.20 for ADF 2, if
installed.
1. Remove the Antenna.
2. Disengage ADF 1 and ADF 2 circuit breakers on right circuit breaker panel.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3. Remove the sealant from the top of the screws.
4. Remove screws securing antenna to antenna adapter.
5. Remove antenna from antenna adapter.
6. Disconnect electrical connector, P2521 for ADF 1 and P2531 for ADF 2.
7. Put a cap or cover on the coaxial connectors.
8. Remove screws securing antenna adapter to airplane skin.
9. Remove antenna adapter from airplane.
NOTE
Antenna adapter is fay‐sealed to the airplane skin and to the antenna with Type
1, Class C sealant.
5.15.4 ADF-4000 Antenna Installation
1. Install Antenna.
2. Make sure that the antenna and airplane are prepared for electrical bonding. Refer to the Section 5.22.
3. Apply a 1/4-inch bead of Type XV, Class B conductive sealant around the base of the antenna adapter.
Refer to the Textron Aviation Model 560XL Maintenance Manual, C56MM, Chapter 20, Fuel, Weather,
Pressure, and High-Temperature Sealing - Maintenance Practices listed Table 1-1.
4. Secure antenna adapter to airplane fuselage with screws.
5. Ensure seal for antenna connector is installed in antenna adapter.
6. Remove cap or cover on the coaxial connectors.
7. Hold antenna in position and connect the electrical connector, (P2521 for ADF 1 and P2531 for ADF
2).
8. Secure antenna to antenna adapter with screws.
9. Fill the top of the screws with white RTV to keep out moisture.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.16 GDC 7400 Air Data Computer
5.16.1 GDC 7400 Removal
1. Open the LH (GDC1) or RH (GDC2) nose electronic compartment door. (Reference Textron Model
2. Disconnect the pitot and static lines.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the GDC 7400.
4. Loosen the hold-down knob that attaches the GDC 7400 to the mounting tray and remove the GDC
from the aircraft.
5.16.2 GDC 7400 Installation
1. Inspect the connector to ensure there are no bent or damaged pins. Repair any damage.
2. Install the GDC 7400 in the mounting tray and tighten the hold-down knob finger tight.
3. Connect the pitot and static lines to the GDC 7400.
4. Connect the electrical connector.
reconnected.
6. Close the LH (GDC1) or RH (GDC2) nose electronic compartment door (Reference Textron Model
7. Configure and test the GDC 7400 as defined in Section 5.16.3 and 5.16.4.
5.16.3 GDC 7400 Software & Configuration
Original GDC 7400 is Reinstalled
No software or configuration loading is required if the removed GDC 7400 is reinstalled in the same location.
This does not include units that were returned for repair as their software and configuration files are deleted
during the repair testing process. Continue to GDC 7400 Functional Test Section 5.16.4.
Original GDC 7400 Installed in Opposite Locations for Troubleshooting
No software loading is required if the original GDC #1 and GDC #2 are installed in opposite locations.
Continue to GDC 7400 Functional Test Section 5.16.4.
New, Repaired or Exchange GDC 7400 is Installed
If a new, repaired or exchange GDC 7400 is installed, the correct software and configuration files must be
loaded to the unit. Reload GDC 7400 software and configuration as defined below.
New GDC 7400 Configuration Module is Installed
The correct configuration files must be loaded if the GDC 7400 configuration module has been replaced.
Reload GDC 7400 configuration as defined below.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
System Upload page.
field.
Table 5-30, GDL 69A Baseline Software and Configuration Files

GDC 7400 1 SYS SW √ √
GDC 7400 2 SYS SW √ √
11. Observe the software loading progress and verify software load completes without errors as
indicated by the following:
each product.
17. Complete the GDC 7400 Functional Tests as defined section 5.16.4.
5.16.4 GDC 7400 Functional Test
5.16.4.1 Pitot Static System Leak Checks
5.16.4.2 Pitot Leakage Check

1. On the copilot’s circuit breaker panel, disengage the XPDR 1 and XPDR 2 circuit breakers.
2. Connect the Air Data Test Set (ADTS) to the pilot’s and copilot’s pitot/static systems per the Textron
Aviation Inc. Maintenance Manual Section 34-11-06.
3. Verify airspeed and altitude displays on both PFDs are present with no indication of failure.
4. Ensure the barometric correction setting for PFD1 and PFD2 is inHg. Set the barometric correction
setting to 29.92 inHg as required for each PFD.
5. Set the ADTS to GND and allow the test set to stabilize for at least 30 seconds.
6. While in pitot control mode, set the pitot target on the ADTS to 250 knots and activate the pitot target
value as required.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
7. Once stabilized at 250 knots for a minimum of 30 seconds change the pitot mode on the ADTS from
control to leak and initiate the leak check as required.
8. Verify a leak rate of less than 5 knots is achieved over a leak check period of 3 mins.
9. Set the ADTS to GND.
5.16.4.3 Static Leakage Check

1. Verify airspeed and altitude displays on both PFDs are present with no indication of failure.
2. Ensure the barometric correction setting for PFD1 and PFD2 is inHg. Set the barometric correction
setting to 29.92 inHg as required for each PFD.
3. Set the ADTS to GND and allow the test set to stabilize for at least 30 seconds.
4. On the ADTS, set the pitot target on the ADTS to 150 knots (do not activate the pitot target value).
5. On the ADTS, set the static target to 31,420 ft and activate the pitot/static target values
simultaneously.
6. On the ADTS, allow both the pitot and static to stabilize for at least 30 seconds at their target values.
7. Once stabilized, change the static mode on the ADTS from control to leak (while the pitot mode
remains in control mode) and initiate the leak check as required.
8. Verify a leak rate of less than 220 ft is achieved over a leak check period of 1 minute.
9. Set the ADTS to GND.
Table 5-31, Altitude/Airspeed Validation
Aircraft S/N: _____________________ Date: __________________ Operator: ___________________
ADTS ADC1 ADC2
Make: ___________________________ Model: GDC 7400 Model: GDC 7400
Model: ____________________________ P/N: 011-02337-01 P/N: 011-02337-01
S/N: _____________________________ S/N: ___________________ S/N: ___________________
Cal. Date: __________________________ Cal. Date: _________________ Cal. Date: _________________
Leak Check Static System at 31,420 ft, 0 kts (pass if <220 ft in 1 min)
___________ Feet/Min
Leak Check Pitot System at 250 kts (pass if <5 KIAS in 3.0 min)
___________ KIAS/Min
5.16.4.4 Air Data Validation Test

Verification of the altimeter and airspeed must be performed using an air data test set (ADTS). The pitot /
static system and altimeter must be verified in accordance with Title 14 of the Code of Federal
Regulations (CFR) § 91.411 and Part 43 Appendix E.
When the GDC 7400 is tested in accordance with 14 CFR Part 43, Appendix E, note the following
exceptions:
 For paragraph (b)(1)(i) Scale Error, use Table 5-32 of this section instead of Appendix E, Table I
190-02313-01 Revision 2
 Do not perform paragraph (b)(1)(iv) Friction
 Do not perform paragraph (b)(1)(vi) Barometric Scale Error
The following Air Data Tests are to be performed in addition to or in conjunction with any other regulated
tests. This test must be performed on both pilot and copilot systems with a calibrated Air Data Test Set
(ADTS) with a combined accuracy/repeatability specification or less than ± 20 feet for the test altitude
range.
To prepare the G5000 System for Part 43 Appendix E testing:
2. Use the PFD softkeys as required to ensure ADC1 is the selected sensor on PFD1 and ADC2 is the
selected sensor on PFD2.
3. Use GCU1 and GCU2 and set the BARO correction to STD BARO for both PFD1 and PFD2.
5.16.4.5 Air Data Accuracy Check

1. Verify the PFD1 and PFD2 altimeter BARO settings are set to 29.92 inHg (1013.25 mb).
2. Enter the altitude and airspeed values shown in the ‘Air Data Test Set Input’ column of Table 5-32
and verify the indicated airspeed and altitude values on PFD1 and PFD2 are within the tolerances
specified in the ‘Expected SSEC Corrected Values’ column shown in Table 5-32.
3. The airspeeds in parenthesis in Table 5-32 indicate an overspeed condition. Verify for those test
points, the overspeed barber pole extends down below the current airspeed, the airspeed digits are
displayed as red, and an overspeed tone sounds.
Table 5-32, Calibrated Altitude Indications (SSEC Corrected)
Air Data Test Set
Expected SSEC Corrected Values PFD1 PFD2
Input
SSEC
Altitude Airspeed SSEC SSEC Altitude Altitude Airspeed Altitude Altitude Airspeed
Airspeed
(ft) (kts) Altimeter (ft) Altimeter (m) (ft) (m) (kts) (ft) (m) (kts)
(kts)
-1000 200 -972 (±20) -297 (±6) 201 (±2)
0 200 29 (±20) 9 (±6) 202 (±2)
2000 200 2031 (±20) 619 (±6) 202 (±2)
10000 185 10035 (±22) 3059 (±6) 187 (±2)
11000 80 10991 (±23) 3350 (±7) 79 (±3)
11000 120 11004 (±23) 3354 (±7) 120 (±2)
11000 160 11025 (±23) 3360 (±7) 161 (±2)
11000 200 11043 (±23) 3366 (±7) 202 (±2)
11000 240 11056 (±23) 3370 (±7) 242 (±2.4)
11000 (310) 11079 (±23) 3377 (±7) 312 (±10)
15000 185 15041 (±23) 4585 (±7) 187 (±2)
15000 (310) 15080 (±23) 4596 (±7) 312 (±10)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Air Data Test Set
Expected SSEC Corrected Values PFD1 PFD2
Input
SSEC
Altitude Airspeed SSEC SSEC Altitude Altitude Airspeed Altitude Altitude Airspeed
Airspeed
(ft) (kts) Altimeter (ft) Altimeter (m) (ft) (m) (kts) (ft) (m) (kts)
(kts)
20000 (310) 20073 (±24) 6118 (±7) 311 (±10)
25000 185 25051 (±31) 7635 (±9) 186 (±2)
26520 (310) 26565 (±33) 8097 (±10) 311 (±10)
30000 (290) 30039 (±39) 9156 (±11) 291 (±2.9)
35000 185 35062 (±50) 10687 (±15) 186 (±2)
35000 260 35049 (±50) 10683 (±15) 260 (±2.8)
41000 80 41017 (±65) 12502 (±19) 81 (±2.9)
41000 120 41043 (±65) 12510 (±19) 121 (±2)
41000 160 41063 (±65) 12516 (±19) 161 (±2)
41000 200 41064 (±65) 12516 (±19) 201 (±2)
41000 225 41039 (±65) 12509 (±19) 225 (±2.2)
45000 185 45061 (±70) 13734 (±21) 186 (±2)
45000 (205) 45039 (±70) 13727 (±21) 205 (±2)
5.16.4.6 Vertical Speed (Rate of Climb) Test

1. Command the ADTS to change the altitude at the rates defined in Table 5-33.
2. Wait for the ADTS to report the target rates have been achieved.
3. Verify the Rate of Climb reported by the Vertical Speed tape on PFD1 and PFD2 are within the
tolerances specified in Table 5-33:
Table 5-33, Vertical Speed
Vertical Speed (ft/min) Allowed tolerance (ft/min)
6000 ±100
3000 ±100
1000 ±50
0 N/A (No VS Display)
-1000 ±50
-3000 ±100
-6000 ±100

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.17 GTX 3000 Transponder
5.17.1 GTX 3000 Removal
1. Open the LH nose electronic compartment door. (Reference Textron Model 560XL Maintenance
2. Disconnect the two electrical connectors.
3. Disconnect the two coaxial cable connectors, making note of which cable is for the top (TOP) antenna
and which cable is for the bottom (BTM) antenna.
4. Pull back on the lockdown mechanism and simultaneously turn counterclockwise until free.
5. Open the lockdown mechanism collar from the GTX unit lockdown hook and gently slide the GTX unit
from the mounting rack.
5.17.2 GTX 3000 Installation

2. Place the GTX unit on the mounting rack.
3. Slide the GTX unit back until the foot is fully engaged with the mounting rack.
4. Lift the lockdown mechanism collar to place on the GTX unit lockdown hook and hand turn lockdown
mechanism knobs clockwise until the GTX unit is secure.
5. Connect the two electrical connectors.
6. Connect the two coaxial cable connectors.
reconnected.
8. Configure and test the GTX 3000 according to Section 5.17.9.2 and 5.17.9.3.
Manual chapter 52-00-00.)
5.17.3 GTX 3000 Bottom Antenna Removal

1. Remove Transponder Antenna.
2. Open left (antenna 1) or right (antenna 2) nose bay door to gain access to antenna.
3. Disconnect coax connector (PN1096, antenna 1 or PN1097, antenna 2).
5. Remove screws securing antenna to structure.
6. Using plastic scraper, cut fillet seal between mounting base and airplane skin.
7. Remove antenna from mounting surface.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.17.4 GTX 3000 Bottom Antenna Installation
1. Install Transponder Antenna.
2. Make sure that the antenna and airplane are prepared for electrical bonding. Refer to Section 5.22.
Pressure, and High-Temperature Sealing - Maintenance Practices listed in Section 1.5.
4. Position antenna on structure and secure with screws.
6. Make sure there is a good electrical bond between the antenna base and the airplane skin. Refer to
Section 5.23.
8. Connect coax connector (PN1096, antenna 1 or PN1097, antenna 2).
9. Perform transponder operational test, refer to Section 5.17.7.
10. Fillet seal mating surfaces with Type 1 sealant. Refer to the Textron Aviation Model 560XL Maintenance
Manual, C56MM, Chapter 20, Fuel, Weather, Pressure, and High-Temperature Sealing - Maintenance
Practices listed in Section 1.5.
11. Close nose bay door.
5.17.5 GTX 3000 Diversity Antenna Removal
NOTE
Diversity transponder antennas are located on top of airplane at FS 234.25, LBL
11.20 for diversity transponder antenna 1, and FS 234.25, RBL 11.20 for diversity
transponder antenna 2.
1. Remove Diversity Transponder Antenna.
2. Remove headliner. Refer to the Textron Aviation Model 560XL Maintenance Manual, C56MM, Chapter
25, Sidewall, Side Ledge, Headliner and Window Reveal Panels - Maintenance Practices listed in
Section 1.5.
3. Disconnect coax connector (PC1002, antenna 1 or PF1046, antenna 2).
5. Remove screws securing antenna to structure.
6. Using plastic scraper, cut fillet seal between mounting base and airplane skin.
7. Remove antenna from mounting surface.
5.17.6 GTX 3000 Diversity Antenna Installation

1. Install Diversity Transponder Antenna.
2. Make sure that the antenna and airplane are prepared for electrical bonding. Refer to Section 5.22.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3. Apply a 1/4-inch bead of Type XV, Class B conductive sealant around the base of the antenna. Refer
to the Textron Aviation Model 560XL Maintenance Manual, C56MM, Chapter 20, Fuel, Weather,
4. Position antenna on structure and secure with screws.
5. Apply a 1/4-inch bead of Type XV, Class B conductive sealant to make a 1/4-inch fillet seal around the
perimeter of the antenna and connector cutout. Refer to the Textron Aviation Model 560XL
Maintenance Manual, C56MM, Chapter 20, Fuel, Weather, Pressure, and High-Temperature Sealing -
Maintenance Practices listed Section 1.5.
6. Make sure there is a good electrical bond (Type I) between the antenna base and the airplane skin.
Refer to the Section 5.23.
8. Connect coax connector (PC1002 for transponder 1, antenna1 or PF1046, antenna 2).
9. Perform transponder operational test, refer to Section 5.17.7.
10. Fillet seal mating surfaces with Type 1 sealant. Refer to the Citation Standard Practices Manual,
Chapter 20, Fuel, Weather, Pressure, and High-Temperature Sealing - Maintenance Practices.
11. Install headliner. Refer to the Textron Aviation Model 560XL Maintenance Manual, C56MM, Chapter
25, Sidewall, Side Ledge, Headliner and Window Reveal Panels - Maintenance Practices listed in
Section 1.5.
5.17.7 GTX 3000 Software & Configuration Loading

If Original GTX 3000 is Reinstalled
No software or configuration loading is required if the removed GTX 3000 is re-installed. This does not
include units that were returned for repair as their software file is deleted during the repair testing process.
Continue to GTX 3000 Functional Check (Section 5.17.9).
If Original GTX 3000 Installed in Opposite Locations for Troubleshooting
No software loading is required if the original GTX #1 and GTX #2 are installed in opposite locations.
Continue to Transponder Configuration (Section 5.17.8).
If New, Repaired or Exchange GTX 3000 is Installed
If a new, repaired or exchange GTX 3000 is installed, the correct software file must be loaded to the unit.
Continue to Transponder Configuration (Section 5.17.7).
System Upload page.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
9. Using the inner DCK on GTC1 and the ENT key on GTC1, select the following files to load:
a. SYSTEM Configuration file
b. GTX3000 (1 or 2 for unit replaced) - Software and Configuration files
10. After the files are selected, press the LOAD softkey.
the following:
a. A Green “PASS” or white “N/A’ in the SOFTWARE and CONFIGURATION columns adjacent
to each product.
12. Push the ENT key on GTC1 to acknowledge the “Upload and Crossfill Complete” pop-up window.
13. Update the aircraft registration information as defined in 3.4 and ensure the GTX1 and GTX2 boxes
on the Aircraft Configuration page display a green check mark. If not, perform section 5.17.8.
14. Confirm the aircraft configuration per Section 3.5.
15. Perform the Transponder functional test per sections 5.17.9.2 and 5.17.9.3.
5.17.8 GTX 3000 Transponder ‘Set GTX’ Configuration

1. If not applied, apply power to the G5000 system.
2. Restart PFD1 in configuration mode, select the SYSTEM page group and then then the AIRCRAFT
CONFIGIFURATION page on PFD1 (Figure 5-22).
3. Ensure the GTX1 and GTX2 boxes in the ‘LRU CONFIGURATION STATUS’ field show green check-
marks. If not, do the following steps:
a. Push the SET GTX softkey to configure the targeted transponder.
NOTE
The GTX transponder requires the aircraft registration (N-number) and ICAO
address to be configured manually by the user. If not configured, a red-X will be
displayed for the GTX1 and GTX2 LRU CONFIGURATION STATUS.
Figure 5-22, Aircraft Registration Configuration

b. Press the ENT key on the GCU to acknowledge the OK prompt.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
i. Verify the aircraft registration number, displayed in the AIRCRAFT REGISTRATION
field, is correct for the aircraft.
ii. Verify the configured GTX transponder is displaying a green check mark in the LRU
CONFIGURATION STATUS field.
c. Power up the G5000 system in normal mode.
d. Continue to Section 5.17.9.
5.17.9 GTX 3000 Functional Check
5.17.9.1 (14 CFR) §§ 91.411 and 91.413 24 Month Functional Check

The transponder/altitude reporting functions of the G5000 system must be verified in accordance with Title
14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) §§ 91.411 and 91.413, every 24 Months, or any time the
transponder is replaced. These tests require the use of a Mode S ramp generator. Specific instructions for
operating the ramp tester are contained in the applicable operator's manual. Refer to 14 CFR Part 43
Appendices E and F for testing criteria. To functionally test the transponders for any other conditions,
complete sections 5.17.9.2 and 5.17.9.3.
NOTE
The aircraft must be in an in-air condition to test the Mode S diversity transmission
channel isolation.
5.17.9.2 Transponder Functional Test

Note – Notify local ATC of intent to test transponders using simulated altitudes
1. Place the IFR 6000 (or equivalent) test set antenna shield on the transponder #1 bottom antenna,
2. Select the Transponder being tested on the GTC Radio Bar.
3. Apply 120 knots with the pitot/static tester and set the aircraft squat switches to ‘in-air’ mode.
4. On the GTC Transponder page, select the TCAS/Transponder mode to Alt Reporting.
5. On the IFR 6000 (or equivalent) test set, select the ‘CONFIG’ softkey to access the IFR 6000 XPDR
– CONFIG setup page.
6. Use the DATA keys to select the ‘MODE S CLASS A’ configuration and press the ‘RETURN’
softkey.
7. Press the ‘SETUP’ button to display the ‘SETUP-XPDR’ screen.
8. Fill out the setup information below for the IFR 6000 (or equivalent) test set:
 Set Antenna to TOP
 Set the RF PORT to ‘Antenna’.
 Set the TOP ANT RANGE to ’20 ft’.
 Set the TOP ANT HEIGHT for vertical distance of ramp tester from aircraft XPDR top antenna.
 Set the BOTTOM ANT RANGE to ’20 ft’.
 Set the BOTTOM ANT HEIGHT for vertical distance of ramp tester from aircraft XPDR bottom
antenna.
 Set the DIR CABLE LOSS to the value marked on the 1 ft coax cable.
 Set ANT CABLE LEN to 1 ft. (ANT CABLE LOSS field should be automatically calculated).
 Set the ANT GAIN to the 1.03 and 1.09 GHz figures marked on the test set antenna.
 Set the UUT ADDRESS to ‘AUTO’.
 Set DIVERSITY TEST to ‘Off’.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
 Set PWR LIM: to ‘FAR 43’.
 Set CHECK CAP to ‘Yes’
9. Press the XPDR button on the IFR 6000 tester to access the XPDR – AUTO TEST
10. On the GTC transponder page set the transponder code to ‘1234’.
11. On the GTC transponder page set the transponder flight ID to ‘N250HP’.
12. Set the BARO correction for PFD1 to STD and note the displayed altitude.
13. Press the RUN TEST softkey to initiate the auto test.
14. Verify the following information is displayed on the auto test screen after test completion:
 A CODE = 1234
 S CODE = 1234
 TAIL = (Aircraft Tail Number)
 FLT ID = (Aircraft Registration (N number))
 VS = IN AIR
 C ALT = Displayed PFD1 altitude ± 50 ft.
 S ALT = Displayed PFD1 altitude ± 50 ft.
 DF17 DETECTED = Yes
 AA = (Aircraft ICAO Address)
 Country = United States
15. Verify that PASS is displayed at the top center of the screen when the test has completed. If PASS
is displayed skip the next step.
16. If Fail is displayed at the top center of the screen, select the individual test that failed and retry any
test that failed individually and verify it passes. If necessary, it’s permissible to move the test
antenna for the test to pass.
5.17.9.3 ADS-B Out Functional Test

1. On both GTCs, touch the ‘MSG’ buttons.
2. Verify the ‘XPDR1 ADS-B FAIL – XPDR1 unable to transmit ADS-B messages. and ‘XPDR2 ADS-B
FAIL – XPDR2 unable to transmit ADS-B messages.’ messages are not present on the ‘System
Messages’ tab of the ‘Notifications’ window on either GTC.
3. On both GTCs, touch the following sequence to display the GPS status for each GPS: ‘Home’ →
‘Utilities’ → ‘GPS Status’ → ‘GPS1’ for GTC1 and ‘GPS2’ for GTC2
4. Using an appropriately equipped Transponder Ramp Test Set, verify the LAT and LON data reported
by each transponder to the test set corresponds to the ‘POSITION’ data displayed on the ‘GPS#
STATUS’ page on the MFWs.
5.18 PA/Speaker Amplifier Removal/Installation

5.18.1 PA/Speaker Amplifier Removal
1. Open the Cabin PA circuit breaker located on the right circuit breaker panel.
2. Gain access to the aft cabin equipment rack.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the speaker amplifier.
4. Remove the four mounting screws that secure the speaker amplifier to the shelf mount.
5. Remove the speaker amplifier.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.18.2 PA/Speaker Amplifier Installation
1. Install speaker amplifier using retained mounting screws.
2. Connect the electrical connector to the speaker amplifier.
3. Close the Cabin PA circuit breaker located on the right circuit breaker panel.
4. Accomplish the VHF Voice, Intercom and Passenger Address Check in Section 5.5.5.1.
5.19 Nose Avionics Cooling Fan Removal/Installation

5.19.1 Nose Avionics Cooling Fan Removal
1. Open the right-side nose avionics compartment door.
2. Disconnect the fan electrical connector from the fan.
3. Disconnect the four cooling fan hoses from the fan.
4. Remove the three mounting screws that secure the fan to the right upper shelf.
5. Remove the fan.
5.19.2 Nose Avionics Cooling Fan Installation

1. Install cooling fan using retained mounting screws.
2. Connect the four cooling hoses to the fan.
3. Connect the fan electrical connector to the fan.
4. Power on the aircraft and verify the fan is operational.
5. Close the right-side nose avionics compartment door.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.20 GWX Processor Weather Radar
NOTE
For installation, ensure the same mounting adapters, bushings and washers are
used from the removed unit. For additional information regarding
removal/installation of the GWX Processor or Antenna Array, refer to the Radar
Install drawing 005-01202-15.
5.20.1 GWX Processor Removal

1. Gain access by removing the nose radome. (Reference Textron Model 560XL Maintenance Manual
chapter 53-10-10)
2. Disconnect the electrical connector from GWX Processor.
3. Holding the GWX Processor, remove the four ¼” nuts attaching the processor to the nose bulkhead.
5.20.2 GWX Processor Installation

1. Inspect electrical connector for damaged pins.
2. Align the GWX Processor with the four studs on the nose bulkhead.
3. Tighten the four ¼” nuts to secure the GWX Processor.
4. Connect electrical connector to processor.
reconnected.
6. Reinstall the nose radome. (Reference Textron Model 560XL Maintenance Manual chapter 53-10-10)
7. Configure and test the GWX Processor according to Section 5.20.5.
5.20.3 GWX Processor Software and Configuration Loading

Original GWX Reinstalled
No software or configuration loading is required if the removed GWX is re-installed. This does not include
units that were returned for repair as their software file is deleted during the repair testing process. Continue
to Section 5.20.5
New, Repaired, or Exchange GWX Installed
If a new, repaired, or exchange GWX is installed, the correct software file must be loaded to the unit.
Perform the steps below.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
System Upload page.
9. Select the following software and configuration items shown below in Table 5-3 from the Product field.
Table 5-34, GWX PROCESSOR Baseline Software and Configuration Files
GWX Processor Key √ N/A
GWX Processor SYS SW √ N/A
GWX Processor Waveform √ √
by the following:
each product.
17. Complete GWX PROCESSOR Functional Tests as defined section 5.11.5.
5.20.4 GWX Processor Troubleshooting
5.20.4.1 GWX Alerts
WARNING
Before energizing the equipment, be sure microwave radiation safety
precautions including both fuel and personnel safety considerations have been
observed. All personnel should maintain a minimum safe distance of 10 feet for
± 90 degrees of the GWX Processor location.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
GWX CONFIG – GWX The system has detected a  Load GWX configuration files,
configuration error. GWX configuration
Configuration service required. mismatch. √ Replace GWX.
 Check Ethernet connection

GWX FAIL – GWX is The system has detected a between the GWX and GDL69A
inoperative. failure in the GWX. for faults.
 Replace the GWX.
GWX SERVICE – Needs The system has detected a

 Replace the GWX.
service. Return unit for repair. failure in GWX.
MANIFEST – GWX software The system has detected an  Load correct software version.
mismatch. Communication incorrect software version See Section 5.20.3 for the
halted. loaded in the GWX. Software Load Procedure.
5.20.5 GWX Processor Functional Test

Operation of the GWX Processor is accomplished using the GTC.
NOTE
For portions of the following test procedure the GWX Processor will be selected
on and emitting microwave radiation. All personnel should maintain a minimum
safe distance of 10 feet for ± 90 degrees of the GWX Processor location.
1. From the GTC home page, touch the following button sequence: Map → Map Settings.
2. Select the sensor tab and enable Weather Radar only.
3. Return to the GTC home page, touch the following button sequence: Weather → Weather Selection →
WX RADAR → WX RADAR Settings. Verify the following:
a. On the GTC the Weather Radar Settings page is shown with the Radar On button not active.
b. The Weather Radar page is displaying OFF on the MFD.
4. From the Weather Radar Settings page select the Radar On button and verify the following:
a. STANDBY is displayed in the top left corner and center of the Weather Radar page.
b. Display Mode button becomes active.
5. Select the Display Mode button and the Ground button.
6. Select OK in the pop-up window and verify the following:
a. GWX Processor antenna is scanning both ways: full left (~60°) to full right (~60°).
7. Select the Radar On button.
5.20.6 Ground Clutter Suppression and Turbulence Detection Functional Check

1. From the GTC home page, touch the following button sequence: Map → Map Settings.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
2. Select the sensor tab and enable Weather Radar.
3. Return to the GTC home page, touch the following button sequence: Weather → Weather Selection
→ WX RADAR → WX RADAR Settings → Radar On.
4. Select the Display Mode button and select Weather mode. Select OK in the pop-up window.
5. Verify the GND Clutter Suppression and Turbulence Detection mode buttons are available for
selection.
6. Select the Radar On button.
5.21 GPS/WAAS/SXM Antennas

5.21.1 GPS or GPS/WAAS/SXM Antenna Removal
1. If required, gain access to the antenna coaxial cable connector by removing the passenger cabin
interior ceiling panel. Refer to the Antenna Install drawing listed in Section 1.5 .
2. Disconnect the antenna coaxial cable(s).
3. Remove the antenna mounting screws
4. Remove antenna.
5.21.2 GPS or GPS/WAAS/SXM Antenna Reinstallation

1. Install antenna using retained mounting screws.
2. Connect the antenna coaxial cable(s).
3. Fillet seal around antenna. Refer to the Antenna Install drawing listed in Section 1.5.
4. If required, re-install passenger cabin interior ceiling panel.
5. Proceed to Section 5.2.4.5 GPS Satellite Acquisition for testing.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.22 G5000 Electrical Connector and Harness Information
This section describes the aircraft harness connectors and associated LRU connectors. The pin
arrangement for each LRU connector is shown and the LRU connector arrangement for units with more
than one connector will be shown in the following sections. LRU connector arrangements will show the
aircraft harness connector designations. Reference the Wire Diagram and Wire Harness Assembly
drawings in Table 1-1 for further detail.
5.22.1 GIA 64E Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors

This section describes the GIA 64E aircraft harness connectors and the interface connectors on the GIA.
The aircraft harness connector arrangement is shown in Figure 5-23.
Figure 5-23, GIA1 and GIA2 Connector Arrangement
5.22.1.1 Aircraft Harness Connectors P1021 (GIA1) and P1041 (GIA2)

The aircraft harness connectors, P1021 (GIA1) and P1041 (GIA2) are 44-pin high-density D-sub plug
connectors and interface to the GIA (COM) connector J601. A pinout arrangement of J601 is shown in
Figure 5-24.
Figure 5-24, View of J601 (COM) Connector from back of GIA

connectors and interface to the GIA (VOR/ILS) connector J602. A pinout arrangement of J602 is shown in
Figure 5-25.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Figure 5-25, View of J602 (VOR/ILS) Connector from back of GIA

connectors and interface to the GIA (Main Serial) connector J603. A pinout arrangement of J603 is shown
in Figure 5-26.
Figure 5-26, View of J603 (Main Serial) Connector from back of GIA

connectors and interface to the GIA (Main Discrete) connector J604. A pinout arrangement of J604 is
shown in Figure 5-27.
Figure 5-27, View of J604 (Main Discrete) Connector from back of GIA

connectors and interface to the GIA (I/O 1) connector J605. A pinout arrangement of J605 is shown in
Figure 5-28.
Figure 5-28, View of J605 (I/O 1) Connector from back of GIA

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.22.1.6 Aircraft Harness Connector P1026 (GIA1)
The aircraft harness connectors, P1026 (GIA1) are 78-pin high-density D-sub plug connector and
interfaces to the GIA (I/O 2) connector J606. A pinout arrangement of J606 is shown in Figure 5-29.
Figure 5-29, View of J606 (I/O 2) Connector from back of GIA

The GPS coax connectors, P10211 (GIA1) and P10411 (GIA2) are straight BNC RF connectors and
interface to the GIA GPS coax connector J611.

The COMM coax connectors, P10212 (GIA1) and P10412 (GIA2) are straight BNC RF connectors and
interface to the GIA COMM coax connector J612.

The NAV coax connectors, P10213 (GIA1) and P10413 (GIA2) are straight BNC RF connectors and
interface to the GIA NAV coax connector J613.

The G/S coax connectors, P10214 (GIA1) and P10414 (GIA2) are straight BNC RF connectors and
interface to the GIA G/S coax connector J614.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.22.2 GEA 7100 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors
This section describes the GEA 7100 aircraft harness connectors and the interface connectors on the
GEA. The three GEA 7100 connectors are designated as P71001, P71002, and P71003. All three
connectors are physically identical except for the keyway positions which are different for each connector
to prevent connecting the wrong harness to a connector. The aircraft harness connectors are designated
as P2131, P2132, and P2133 for GEA1; and P2141, P2142, and P2143 for GEA2.
Figure 5-30, GEA1 and GEA2 Connector Arrangment
5.22.2.1 Aircraft Harness Connectors P2131 (GEA1) and P2141 (GEA2)

The aircraft harness connectors, P2131 (GEA1) and P2141 (GEA2) are 128-pin D38999/26 circular plug
connectors and interface to the GEA connector P71001. A pinout arrangement of P71001 is shown in
Figure 5-31.
Figure 5-31, View of P71001 Connector from front of GEA

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Figure 5-32.

Figure 5-33.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.22.3 GMA 36B Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors
This section describes the GMA 36B aircraft harness connectors and the interface connectors on the
GMA. The two GMA 36B connectors are designated as J3471 and J3472. The aircraft harness
connectors are designated as P1161 and P1162 for GMA1; and P1171 and P1172 for GMA2.
Figure 5-34, GMA1 and GMA2 Connector Arrangment
5.22.3.1 Aircraft Harness Connectors P1161 (GMA1) and P1171 (GMA2)

The aircraft harness connectors, P1161 (GMA1) and P1171 (GMA2) are 78-pin high-density D-sub plug
connectors and interface to the GMA connector J3471. A pinout arrangement of J3471 is shown in Figure
5-35.
Figure 5-35, View of J3471 Connector from back of GMA

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.22.3.2 Aircraft Harness Connectors P1162 (GMA1) and P1172 (GMA2)
The aircraft harness connectors, P1162 (GMA1) and P1172 (GMA2) are 78-pin high-density D-sub plug
connectors and interface to the GMA connector J3472. A pinout arrangement of J3472 is shown in Figure
5-36.
Figure 5-36, View of J3472 Connector from back of GMA

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.22.4 GTX 3000 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors
This section describes the GTX 3000 aircraft harness connectors and the interface connectors on the
GTX. The two GTX 3000 connectors are designated as J3301 and J3302. The aircraft harness
connectors are designated as P1121 and P1122 for GTX1; and P1141 and P1142 for GTX2.
The transponder antenna coax connectors are identified as TOP for the top antenna and BTM for the
bottom antenna on the GTX. The aircraft top transponder coax connector is designated as P112T for
GTX1 and P114T for GTX2; and the aircraft bottom transponder coax connector is designated as P112B
for GTX1 and P114B for GTX2.
Figure 5-37, GMA1 and GMA2 Connector Arrangment
5.22.4.1 GTX1 Aircraft Harness Connectors P1121 (GTX1) and P1141 (GTX2)
The aircraft harness connectors, P1121 (GTX1) and P1141 (GTX2) are 78-pin high-density D-sub plug
connectors and interface to the GTX connector J3301. A pinout arrangement of J3301 is shown in Figure
5-38.
Figure 5-38, View of J3301 Connector looking at the GTX

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.22.4.2 GTX1 Aircraft Harness Connectors P1122 (GTX1) and P1142 (GTX2)
The aircraft harness connectors, P1122 (GTX1) and P1142 (GTX2) are 78-pin high-density D-sub plug
connectors and interface to the GTX connector J3302. A pinout arrangement of J3302 is shown in Figure
5-39.
Figure 5-39, View of J3302 Connector looking at the GTX
5.22.5 GDU 1450W Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors

This section describes the GDU 1450W aircraft harness connector and the interface connector on the
GDU. The GDU connector designation is J14501. The aircraft harness connectors are designated as
P2011 for PFD1, P2021 for PFD2, and P2031 for the MFD.
5.22.5.1 Aircraft Harness Connectors P2011 (PFD1), P2021 (PFD2) and P2031 (MFD)
The aircraft harness connectors, P2011 (PFD1), P2021 (PFD2) and P2031 (MFD) are 62-pin high-density
D-sub plug connectors and interface to the GDU connector J14501. A pinout arrangement of J12001 is
shown in Figure 5-40.
Figure 5-40, View of J14501 Connector from the back of the GDU

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.22.6 GDC 7400 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors
This section describes the GDC 7400 aircraft harness connector and the interface connector on the GDC.
The GDC connector designation is J7400. The aircraft harness connectors are designated as P1081 for
GDC1 and P1091 for GDC2.
5.22.6.1 Aircraft Harness Connectors P1081 (GDC1) and P1091 (GDC2)

The aircraft harness connectors, P1081 (GDC1) and P1091 (GDC2) are 55-pin circular plug connectors
and interface to the GDC connector J7400. A pinout arrangement of J7400 is shown in Figure 5-41.
Figure 5-41, View of J7400 Connector on the GDC

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.22.7 GDL 69A Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors
This section describes the GDL69A aircraft harness connector and the interface connector on the GDL.
The GDL connector designation is J691. The aircraft harness connector is designated as P1111 for GDL.
Figure 5-42, GDL 69A Aft View
5.22.7.1 Aircraft Harness Connector P1111 (GDL69A)

The aircraft harness connector, P1111 (GDL69A) is a 78-pin high-density D-sub plug connector and
interfaces to the GDL connector J691. A pinout arrangement of P1111 is shown in Figure 5-43.
Figure 5-43, View of P1111 Connector

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.22.8 GCU 275 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors
This section describes the GCU 275 aircraft harness connector and the interface connector on the GCU.
The GCU connector designation is J2751. The aircraft harness connectors are designated as P2041 for
GCU1 and P2051 for GCU2.
5.22.8.1 Aircraft Harness Connectors P2041 (GCU1) and P2051 (GCU2)

The aircraft harness connectors, P2041 (GCU1) and P2051 (GCU2) are 15-pin high-density D-sub plug
connectors and interface to the GCU connector J2751. A pinout arrangement of J2751 is shown in Figure
5-44.
Figure 5-44, View of J1 Connector on the GCU
5.22.9 GMC 7200 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors

This section describes the GMC 7200 aircraft harness connector and the interface connector on the
GMC. The GMC connector designation is J72501. The GMC aircraft harness connector is designated as
P2081 and is part of the P2081 GMC7200 Extension harness that is installed to increase the overall
harness length to facilitate this installation.
5.22.9.1 Aircraft Harness Connectors P2081 (GMC GU208)

The aircraft harness connector, P2081X is a 15-pin high-density D-sub plug connector and interfaces to
the GMC connector J72501. A pinout arrangement of J72501 is shown in Figure 5-45.
Figure 5-45, View of J72501 Connector on the GMC

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.22.10 GTC 575 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors
This section describes the GTC 575 aircraft harness connectors and the interface connector on the GTC.
The GTC connector designation is J5705751. The GTC aircraft harness connectors are designated as
P2061 for (GTC1) and P2071 for (GTC2).
5.22.10.1 Aircraft Harness Connectors P2061 (GTC1) and P2071 (GTC2)

The aircraft harness connectors, P2061 (GTC1) and P2071 (GTC2) are a 62-pin high-density D-sub plug
connectors and interface to the GTC connector J5751. A pinout arrangement of J5751 is shown in Figure
5-46.
Figure 5-46, View of J5751 Connector on the GTC

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.22.11 GSD 41 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors
This section describes the GSD 41 aircraft harness connectors and the interface connectors on the GSD.
The two GSD connectors are designated as J411 and J412. The aircraft harness connectors are
designated as P1061 and P1062 for GSD1; and P1071 and P1072 for GSD2. The aircraft harness
connector arrangement is shown in Figure 5-47.
Figure 5-47, GSD1 and GSD2 Connector Arrangment
5.22.11.1 Aircraft Harness Connectors P1061 (GSD1) and P1071 (GSD2)

The aircraft harness connectors, P1061 (GSD1) and P1071 (GSD2) are 78-pin high-density D-sub plug
connectors and interface to the GSD connector J411. A pinout arrangement of J411 is shown in Figure
5-48.
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure 5-48, View of J411 Connector on the GSD
5.22.11.2 Aircraft Harness Connectors P1062 (GSD1) and P1072 (GSD2)

The aircraft harness connectors, P1062 (GSD1) and P1072 (GSD2) are 78-pin high-density D-sub plug
connectors and interface to the GSD connector J412. A pinout arrangement of J412 is shown in Figure
5-49.
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure 5-49, View of J412 Connector on the GSD

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.22.12 GWX Processor Aircraft Harness/LRU Connector
This section describes the GWX PROCESSOR aircraft harness connector and the interface connector on
the GWX. The GWX connector designation is J751. The GWX aircraft harness connector designation is
P1101.
5.22.12.1 Aircraft Harness Connectors P1101 (GWX)

The aircraft harness connector P1101 is a 78-pin high-density D-sub plug connector and interfaces to the
GWX connector J751. A pinout arrangement of J751 is shown in Figure 5-50.
Figure 5-50, View of J751 Connector on the GWX

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.22.13 GSA 9000 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connector
This section describes the GSA 9000 aircraft harness connectors and the interface connectors on the
servo actuator (GSA). The GSA connector designation is J90001 for all GSAs. The GSA aircraft harness
connector designators are P3011 for the Roll GSA, P3021 for the Pitch GSA, and P3031 for the Yaw
GSA.
5.22.13.1 Aircraft Harness Connector P3011 (Roll), P3021 (Pitch), P3031 (Yaw), P3041 (P Trim)
The aircraft harness connector P3011, P3021, P3031 and P3041 are 23-pin circular plug connectors and
interface to each GSA connector J90001. A pinout arrangement of J90001 is shown in Figure 5-51.
Figure 5-51, View of J90001 Connector on the GSA

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.22.14 GDL 59 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors
This section describes the GDL 59 aircraft harness connector and the interface connector on the GDL 59.
The GDL 59 connector is designated as J591. The aircraft harness connector is designated as P1001.
The antenna coax connector is unused for this installation.
Figure 5-52, GDL 59 Connector Arrangment
5.22.14.1 Aircraft Harness Connector P1001

The aircraft harness connector, P1001 is a 78-pin high-density D-sub plug connector and interfaces to
GDL 59 connector J591. A pinout arrangement of J591 is shown in Figure 5-35.
Figure 5-53, View of J591 Connector from back of GDL 59

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.22.15 GDR 66 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connectors
This section describes the GDR 66 aircraft harness connectors and the interface connectors on the GDR
66. The two GDR 66 connectors are designated as J661 and J662. The aircraft harness connectors are
designated as P1221 and P1222 for the GDR 66 and the COAX connector is P1223.
Figure 5-54, GDR 66 Connector Arrangment

The aircraft harness connectors, P1221 is a 44-pin high-density D-sub plug connector and interfaces to
the GDR connector J661. A pinout arrangement of J661 is shown in Figure 5-55.
Figure 5-55, View of J661 Connector from back of GDR

The aircraft harness connector, P1222 is a 62-pin high-density D-sub plug connectors and interfaces to
the GDR connector J662. A pinout arrangement of J662 is shown in Figure 5-56.
Figure 5-56, View of J662 Connector from back of GDR

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.22.16 GSR 56 Aircraft Harness/LRU Connector
This section describes the GSR 56 aircraft harness connector and the interface connector on the GSR.
The designation of the two GSR 56 connectors are J561 (data interface) and J562 (antenna). The GSR
aircraft harness connector designation is P1011 (data interface) and P1012(antenna). The aircraft
harness connector arrangement is shown in Figure 5-57.
Figure 5-57, GSR Connector Arrangment
5.22.16.1 Aircraft Harness Connector P1011 (GSR)

The aircraft harness connector P1011 is a 44-pin high-density D-sub plug connector and interfaces to the
GSR connector J561. A pinout arrangement of J561 is shown in Figure 5-58.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31
Figure 5-58, View of J561 Connector on the GSR

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.23 Electrical Bonding
5.23.1 Choice of Bonding Method
5.23.1.1 Electrical Bond of Feed-Thru Connectors
Figure 5-59, Bonding Surface Preparation
1. Inside Cabin – Use Method A surface preparation, no over sealing is required. Must achieve a maximum
of 2.5 milliohms (0.0025 ohms) bonding.
2. Outside Cabin – Use Method B surface preparation. Must achieve a maximum of 5.0 milliohms (0.0005
ohms) bonding. Seal using method B sealant (conductive).
5.23.1.2 Electrical Bond of Ground studs.

Achieve a maximum of 0.5 milliohms (0.0005 ohms) bonding.
1. Use Method B surface preparation.
2. Once ground stud assembly is torqued to appropriate value, perform a bonding check of the ground
stud.
3. Use conductive sealant per method B sealing.
5.23.1.3 Electrical Bond of Circuit breakers.

Achieve a maximum of 100 milliohms (0.100 ohms) bonding.
1. Use Method B surface preparation.
2. Once circuit breaker is connected to a bus bar and torqued to appropriate value, perform a bonding
check of the circuit breaker case to the circuit breaker panel.
3. No over sealing is required.
5.23.1.4 Electrical Bond of Equipment (brackets, LRU racks, shelves).

(Achieve a maximum of 2.5 milliohms (0.0025 ohms) bonding).
1. If bond is made via fasteners (nut plate, nut, washer), see example in Figure 1 and 2.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
i. Burnish areas of bond in accordance with the installation drawing.
ii. For cabin areas use Method A surface preparation, no over sealing required.
iii. For outside of cabin, if burnish area is greater than the contact area of the fastener, use method
A surface preparation. Measure bonding. Then use method A nonconductive sealing.
iv. For outside of cabin, if burnish area is less than the contact area of the fastener, use method
B surface preparation. Measure bonding. Then use method B conductive sealing.
2. If surface preparation is not practical in an area where fasteners are used, an electrical bond can
be achieved via connection to airframe structure with a minimum of four nut plates, each installed
with at least two rivets.
5.23.2 Surface preparation and sealing
5.23.2.1 E-bond Surface preparation

Notes:
1. A clean area is required to be sure that there is a firm bond and to make inspection easier. A clean
area also gives the most accurate resistance measurement.
2. All bonds between two metal surfaces and bonding jumper attachment points must be free of all
non-conducting material such as paint, primer, grease, foil, corrosion proofing, tape, etc.
3. Conducting material such as IVD coatings, etc. must not be removed. If a coating is present, ensure
the coating is conductive.
4. Files, rotary tools or otherwise, are prohibited.
5.23.2.2 Steel and Aluminum Cleaning

Method A
1. Use medium Roloc surface condition disc pads (Scotchbrite or equivalent) or medium EXL wheel
6A (Scotchbrite or equivalent) that is not more than 0.50 inch (12.70 mm) larger than the diameter
of the bonding surface.
NOTE: 400 through 600 grit emery paper or cloth is permitted for use, or an equivalent fine sandpaper
and/or aluminum oxide paper or cloth, stainless steel wool, or a stainless steel or Monel bonding brush.
Aluminum wool can only be used on aluminum.
2. Use IPA, MPK, or equivalent to clean the bonding surfaces.
3. When cleaning aluminum for electrical bonding, the area being cleaned shall not extend from
between 0.0625 and 0.25 inches (1.58 and 6.35 mm) past the contact area. If the cleaned area is
more than 0.25 inch (12.70 mm) more than the contact area, apply primer, let it dry and then clean
it again.
4. For bare aluminum, before an electrical bond is made, apply a chemical film treatment to the
bonding surface, this will give the bond electrical and some corrosion protection.
Method B
1. Use medium Roloc surface condition disc pads (Scotchbrite) or medium EXL wheel 6A
(Scotchbrite) or equivalent that is not larger than the diameter of the bonding surface of the
connector.
NOTE: 400 through 600 grit emery paper or cloth is permitted, or an equivalent fine sandpaper and/or
aluminum oxide paper or cloth, stainless steel wool, or a stainless steel or Monel bonding brush. Never

190-02313-01 Revision 2
clean more than one type of metal with a stainless-steel brush. Be careful not to remove excess metal.
Deep scratches are not acceptable for an electrical bond. Aluminum wool can only be used on aluminum.
2. Use IPA, MPK, or equivalent to clean the bonding surfaces.
3. The cleaned area must be at least half of the diameter of the bonding area but not larger than the
diameter bonding area. If the cleaned area is larger than the diameter of the bonding surface, the
surface must be primed, dried, then cleaned again.
4. For bare aluminum, before an electrical bond is made, apply a chemical film treatment to the
bonding surface, this will give the bond electrical and some corrosion protection.
5.23.3 Bonding Methods
5.23.3.1 General
1. Bond connections must be installed so that vibration, expansion, contraction, or relative movement
within normal service use will not break or loosen the connection.
2. When direct metal-to-metal bonding of electrical equipment is done, all finishes which are
nonconductive must be removed from the contact area in the ground path before assembly. Refer
to Surface Preparation. A bond check must be done to determine if a finish is nonconductive.
3. After a bond is made, it must be checked. Refer to Bond Inspection.
4. If the bond is acceptable, the surface must be refinished and sealed, if applicable. Refer to
Finishing and Sealing.
5.23.3.2 Direct Metal-to-Metal Surface Bonds

1. Structure
i. Figure 5-60 shows examples of typical structural direct metal-to-metal surface bonding
applications.
2. Equipment
i. If the attach fasteners are more than 3 inches (76.2 mm) apart, only clean an area of 0.5 to
0.75 inches (12.7 to 19.1 mm) in diameter centered on the fastener holes on the mounting
surface.
ii. Figure 5-61 shows a typical electrical bonding of equipment installed with mounting feet.
3. Equipment Enclosures and Supports
i. The bracket supports for electronic parts can act as antennas and should be properly bonded
to equipment chassis or structure.
4. Feed-through Hardware
i. For cabin feed-through hardware and all other hard-mounted hardware that requires an
electrical bond that is outside of the, the nonconducting surface finishes must be removed
between the flange and the structure, refinished and sealed with Method B.
ii. Figure 5-62 shows a typical electrical bonding of feed-through hardware.
5. Driven-Rivet Bonds
i. An electrical bond can be achieved with 0.125-inch (3.175 mm) rivets that join two structural
parts without direct metal-to-metal contact joint preparation.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.23.4 Bond Inspection
1. This inspection is performed with a Keithley Model 580 Micro-ohmmeter or equivalent. Follow all
manufacturer instructions and safety precautions included with the meter.
2. Direct contact between the micro-ohm meter probes and the metallic or conductive composite
surface is necessary. If it is necessary to remove the finish make sure to refinish the surface after
the bond is inspected, refer to Finishing and Sealing.
3. The bond should be inspected with each probe as close as possible to each other.
4. In some installations, such as large panels, it is preferred that more than one check is made in
different locations.
5.23.5 Finishing and Sealing
5.23.5.1 Finishing
NOTE: Verify proper bonding, and ensure it meets the requirements for that application, before finishing
the bonding surfaces.
1. All electrically bonded surfaces that require a protective coating must be brushed with chem film
and exposed areas must be refinished with the original finish in as short of a time as possible.
Refinishing is highly recommended within 24 hours.
2. If the area already has chem film applied, it is not necessary to remove this finish and reapply
unless the bonding requirement cannot be met.
3. Only refinish the area once the electrical bond has been inspected and approved.
5.23.5.2 Sealing
NOTE: Verify proper bonding, and ensure it meets the requirements for that application, before sealing the
bonding surfaces.
1. Sealant is used to prevent moisture from getting into electrical contact areas, and in some cases,
it provides the electrical bond.
2. Some, but not all, typical areas where sealant may be required is as follows:
i. Pressure bulkhead feed-thru connectors and hardware.
ii. Electrical ground studs.
iii. Antennas installed on the exterior of the airplane.
3. The bonded area must be finished before sealant is applied.
4. Sealant is not required if Method A surface preparation was used inside the cabin.
Method A (Nonconductive)
1. Apply a fillet seal that extends between 0.0625 and 0.125 inch (1.59 and 3.18 mm) past the
cleaned area given for Method A in Surface Preparation.
2. The type of sealant to apply, in order of preference, is as follows:
i. 3M AC-665 (B-1/2 or B-2); PRC-DeSoto P/S 870 (B-1/2 or B-2). (or equivalent).
ii. PRC-DeSoto P/S 890 or PR-1440 (B-1/2 or B-2); Flame master Corporation CS 3204 or
CS3204R (B-1/2 or B-2); 3M Company AC-236, AC-240 (B-1/2, B-2, B-4); Royal Adhesives
& Sealants (B-1/2, B-1, B-2, B-4). (or equivalent)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
iii. Momentive Performance Materials Inc. RTV-102, RTV-103, RTV-108; Dow Corning 732
RTV, 734 RTV; Silicone Solutions SS-69A. (or equivalent)
Method B (Conductive)
NOTE: Method B is the required method of sealing all ground stud installations and all electrical contact
areas outside the cabin.
NOTE: The Method B (Conductive) sealant procedure is not for high current grounds or high-power
antennas.
1. Apply a fay seal to the bonding area with Flame master Corporation Chem Seal 3209 (or
equivalent) sealant.
2. Wipe away sealant squeeze-out but leave enough to tell that the bonding joint has been sealed.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Figure 5-60, Structural Direct Metal-to-Metal Surface Bonding Applications

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Figure 5-61, Equipment Mount Bonding Applications

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Figure 5-62, Electrical Feed-Thru Bonding.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5.24 Electrical Bonding Test
The following bonding tests are provided for G5000-equipped Cessna Model 560XL aircraft as a
requirement beyond what is given in the aircraft maintenance manual.
NOTE

It is recommended the bonding test be conducted after the visual inspections of
each zone to minimize access requirements
5.24.1 Requirements
All G5000 equipment must be installed. Gain access for the procedure in Section 5.24.3 as required and
in accordance with the Textron Model 560XL Maintenance Manual. Some G5000 equipment must be
temporarily removed in order to gain access to other G5000 equipment.
5.24.2 Test Equipment

A milli-ohm meter and Kelvin probes are recommended for this test. However, a standard voltmeter, power
supply with adjustable current limit, and ammeter may be substituted. The following procedure is written
using the voltmeter, power supply and ammeter. All test equipment must have valid calibration records.
5.24.3 Electrical Bonding Procedure

1. Connect the positive lead of the power supply to a nearby exposed portion of the aircraft metallic
structure, such as a frame, as close as possible to the unit under test. Do not use the unit’s own
installation rack. Connect/touch the positive lead of the voltmeter to the same point.
NOTE

Ensure the voltmeter and power supply probes do not touch, so as not to induce
contact resistance.
2. Touch the negative lead of power supply to each of the test points listed while performing Step 3. At
each point, configure the power supply to produce 1 amp before measuring voltage. (Use an
ammeter to ensure current is within 1 amp ±100 milli-amp at each point. A setting of 1 amp will
convert the milli-volts measured to resistance in milli-Ohms).
3. Set the voltmeter to measure milli-volts and null the reading. Measure the voltage from nearby
aircraft metallic structure (step 1) to the appropriate test points (equipment or structure) and record
the voltage. (Perform Step 2 at each point to ensure 1 amp ±100 milli-amp is present before
measuring.)
TIP: When a 1 amp reference current is used, all the milli-volt readings are the same as milli-Ohms, and
require no further calculation of bond resistance. If 1 amp reference current cannot be maintained and is
higher, divide the measured voltage by current to get the resistance value. Alternatively, calculate the
percentage increase in current and then reduce the measured reading by the same percentage. Example:
If the measured current is 1.2 amps, (20% high from the target 1 amp current) and the measured voltage
is 3.0 milli-volts, then the value recorded will be 3.0 milli-volts reduced by 20% which is 2.5 milli-volts which
is the same as 2.5 milli-Ohms.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
NOTE

Some units are powder coated. Bond checks should be performed from any bare
metal surface of the unit.
Nose Section (Radome)

 GWX Processor body: __________ milli-Ohms
Nose Avionics Compartment

Left Side Bottom Shelf
 Metal case of GIA 64E #1: __________ milli-Ohms
 Metal case of GMA 36B #1: __________ milli-Ohms
 Metal case of GTX 3000 #1: __________ milli-Ohms
Left Side Top Shelf

 Metal case of GSD 41 #1: __________ milli-Ohms
 Metal case of GDC 7400 #1:__________ milli-Ohms
 Metal case of GDL 69A:__________ milli-Ohms
 Metal case of GDL 59 (If installed): __________ milli-Ohms
 Metal case of GSR 56 (If installed):__________ milli-Ohms
Right Side Top Shelf

 Metal case of GSD 41 #2: __________ milli-Ohms
 Metal case of GDC 7400 #2:__________ milli-Ohms
 Metal case of GDR 66:__________ milli-Ohms
 Metal case of ACF 528 Ported Cooling Fan: __________ milli-Ohms
Right Side Bottom Shelf Area

 Metal case of GIA 64E #2: __________ milli-Ohms
 Metal case of GMA 36B #2: __________ milli-Ohms
 Metal case of GTX 3000 #2: __________ milli-Ohms
Pilot Compartment
Instrument Panel
 Top metal case of PFD #1: __________ milli-Ohms
 Top metal case of GCU 275 #1: __________ milli-Ohms
 Top metal case of GMC 7200: __________ milli-Ohms
 Top metal case of MFD: __________ milli-Ohms
 Top metal case of PFD #2: __________ milli-Ohms
 Top metal case of GCU 275 #2: __________ milli-Ohms

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Behind Instrument Panel
 GEA 7100 #1 body: __________ milli-Ohms
 GEA 7100 #2 body: __________ milli-Ohms
Pedestal
 Top metal case of GTC 575 #1: __________ milli-Ohms
 Top metal case of GTC 575 #2: __________ milli-Ohms
 Dimming Panel: : __________ milli-Ohms
Cabin Section
Aft Cabin Section
 Top metal case of Cobham 245-002 PA Amplifier: __________ milli-Ohms
Lower Aft Fuselage and Empennage

 GSA 9000 (Pitch) Servo body: __________ milli-Ohms
 GSA 9000 (Yaw) Servo body: __________ milli-Ohms
 GSA 9000 (Roll) Servo body: __________ milli-Ohms
 GSA 9000 (Pitch Trim) Servo body: __________ milli-Ohms
Aircraft Exterior (Antennas)

 GA 36 GPS antenna mounting screw: __________ milli-Ohms
 GA 37 GPS/WAAS/SXM antenna mounting screw: __________ milli-Ohms
 Iridium antenna mounting screw: __________ milli-Ohms (optional equipment)
 Collins ANT-462 ADF antenna mounting screw: _______ milli-Ohms (optional, 1 or 2 present)
 GDR 66 VHF Datalink Antenna: __________ milli-Ohms (optional equipment)
 GTX 3000 top transponder antennas: __________ milli-Ohms (if installed by this STC)
Ensure at each test point, no more than 2.5 milli-volts (2.5 mΩ) are present. If one or more bonding checks
fails, i.e. the resistance is higher than those listed above, then clean and rebond as necessary. Re-attach
equipment racks/appliance/antenna and complete electrical bonding test based on the original installation
requirements. Refer to the applicable installation drawing referenced in Section 1.5 for how to prepare
electrical bonding and bonding values to be achieved.
After bonding checks are complete, ensure all electrical and coaxial cable connectors are reconnected and
all systems are working properly.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6. INTERFACE TESTING
This section describes the checks that must be completed to verify the various 3rd party systems, that
interface to the G5000 GIFD, function properly. Following the interface verification with the G5000,
additional system checks may be required – refer to the appropriate system installation manual for
additional details.
6.1 Environmental Control and Pressurization Interface Checks

This section validates the environmental control system and anti-ice system interface to the G5000 is
installed and functioning correctly for the G5000 Crew Advisory System (CAS).
6.1.1 Tail De-ice Pressure CAS Interface Check

1. Ensure electrical power has been removed from the aircraft.
2. Apply shop air (100 PSI max.) via the test fitting upstream of the pressure regulating valve. (Reference
C56XMM Maintenance Manual Chapter 30-12-00, TASK 30-12-00-710, Step 3.A.)
3. Ensure the aircraft is in ground mode.
4. Ensure the TAIL DEICE circuit breaker is closed on the LH Circuit Breaker panel.
7. On the ANTI ICE / DEICE control panel, place the TAIL deice switch in the AUTO position and verify
the following:
a. Steady white TL DEICE PRESS L CAS advisory message is displayed during the first 6 seconds,
while the left horizontal stab boot is inflating.
b. The TL DEICE PRESS L CAS message is not displayed during the next 6 seconds while the left
horizontal stab boot is deflating.
c. Steady white TL DEICE PRESS R CAS advisory message is displayed during the next 6 seconds,
while the right horizontal stab boot is inflating;
d. The TL DEICE PRESS R CAS message is not displayed for the last 6 seconds of the AUTO
sequence while the right horizontal stab boot is deflating;
NOTE: The total cycle time may vary between 22-26 seconds.
8. On the ANTI ICE / DEICE control panel, place the TAIL deice switch in the OFF position.
9. Ensure the left and right horizontal stabilizer boot deflate.
10. Open the TAIL DEICE circuit breaker on the LH Circuit Breaker panel and verify the following:
a. TL DEICE FAIL L R CAS message is annunciated on the G5000.
11. Close the TAIL DEICE circuit breaker on the LH Circuit Breaker panel.
12. Remove shop air from the test fitting.
6.1.2 Engine and Wing Anti-Ice System CAS Interface Check

1. Perform the Bleed Air Anti-Ice Systems Operational Check per the C56XMM Maintenance Manual
Chapter 30-11-00.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Note: It is not necessary to measure the leading wing or engine inlet temperatures as referenced in
Maintenance Manual procedure. The intent of this check is to validate the annunciation of the CAS
messages only.
2. Verify the following CAS messages are annunciated on the G5000:
a. ENG ANTI-ICE L
b. ENG ANTI-ICE R
c. WING ANTI-ICE L
d. WING ANTI-ICE R
6.1.3 Bleed Air Over Heat CAS Interface Check

1. Perform the Precooler Overtemperature Switch Annunciation Test per the C56XMM Maintenance
Manual Chapter 36-11-01(Excel Models) or 36-11-02 (XLS Models).
2. Verify the following CAS messages is annunciated on the G5000:
a. BLD AIR O’HEAT L
b. BLD AIR O’HEAT R
6.1.4 Air Cycle Machine CAS Interface Check

3. Gain access to the ACM (ECU) Overheat switch (ST012) located on the aft end of the ECS compressor
outlet duct.
4. Disconnect connector PT038 from the O’Heat switch.
6. Allow all systems to initialize and verify the ACM O’HEAT CAS message annunciates.
8. Reconnect PT038 to the PAC Overheat switch (ST012).
6.1.5 Emergency Pressure CAS Interface Check

4. On the Pilot’s console, place the Oxygen Selector (PASS OXY) switch to the OFF position.
5. On the Pressurization Tilt Panel, place the PRESS SOURCE selector to the EMER position and verify
the EMER PRESS CAS message annunciates.
6. On the Pressurization Tilt Panel, place the PRESS SOURCE selector to the OFF position.
6.1.6 Ram Air Temperature A429 Interface

This check verifies the G5000 is receiving Ram Air Temperature data via ARINC 429 from the right engine
EEC.
1. Confirm a valid RAT indication shown on MFD EIS window.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
2. Open the R EEC circuit breaker on the pilot’s circuit breaker panel.
3. Confirm the RAT indication is amber dashes on the MFD EIS window.
4. Close the R EEC circuit breaker.
5. Confirm the RAT indication returns to show valid temperature data.
6.1.7 Cabin Pressurization

This check verifies the cabin altitude controller is receiving ARINC 429 data from the G5000.
1. Verify the NORM PRESS and DATA CONC 1 circuit breakers located on the pilot’s circuit breaker
panel is closed.
2. On the bezel of the cabin altitude controller, verify the amber annunciator is OFF and an altitude is
displayed in the SET ALT window.
3. Open the DATA CONC 1 circuit breaker.
4. Verify the amber annunciator on the cabin altitude controller is ON and the SET ALT window is
displaying a flight level. Example: FL110 (FL110 is default value for ground).
5. Close the DATA CONC 1 circuit breaker.
6. Verify the amber annunciator on the cabin altitude controller is OFF.
6.1.8 Wing Over Heat CAS Interface Check

3. Remove belly fairing access panel 163AA to gain access to connector PM007.
4. Remove PM007 and connect a jumper wire to JM007, Pin *B.
5. Remove belly fairing access panel 164AA to gain access to connector PS006.
6. Remove PS006 and connect a jumper wire from JS006 Pin *C.
9. Apply an aircraft ground at JM007, Pin *B, and at JS006 Pin *C and verify the WING O’HEAT L-R CAS
message annunciates.
11. Remove jumper wires from connectors JM007, Pin *B, and at JS006 Pin *C.
12. Reinstall connector JM007, then install belly fairing access panel 163AA.
13. Reinstall connector JS006, then install belly fairing access panel 164AA.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.2 Electrical Power Distribution System Interface Checks
This section validates the power distribution interface to the G5000 is installed and functioning correctly for
the G5000 Crew Advisory System (CAS).
6.2.1 AC Generator Bearing Interface Check

3. Disconnect the main battery.
4. Access the Left and Right Power J-Box Relay Panel Assemblies via the Tailcone maintenance access
door.
5. Locate and disconnect the left starter-generator main DC power feeder cable BMD001-HZ005 (00) from
the HZ005 Bus Bar and the right starter-generator main DC power feeder cable BME001-HZ006 (00)
from the HZ006 Bus Bar.
6. Disconnect the Left AC Generator connector PD035 and install jumper wire between Pin K to Pin M.
7. Disconnect the Right AC Generator connector PE036 and install jumper wire between Pin K to Pin M.
9. Allow all systems to initialize and verify the AC BEARING L-R CAS message annunciates:
11. Remove jumper wire from connector PD035, between Pin K and Pin M.
12. Remove jumper wire from connector PE036, between Pin K and Pin M.
13. Re-install connector PD035 to the Left AC Generator.
14. Re-install connector PE036 to the Right AC Generator.
15. Re-connect the left starter-generator main DC power feeder cable BMD001-HZ005 (00) to the HZ005
Bus Bar and the right starter-generator main DC power feeder cable BME001-HZ006 (00) to the HZ006
Bus Bar.
6.2.2 Aft J-Box Interface Check

door.
5. Open and engage each of the four Start Control PCB circuit breakers (HT022, HT023, HT044 and
HT049) and verify the AFT J-BOX CB CAS message annunciates when each circuit breaker is opened
and is extinguished when the respective C/B is closed.
6.2.3 Aft J-Box Limiter Interface Check


190-02313-01 Revision 2
door.
5. Open and Close the LH LIMITER (HT013) circuit breaker and verify the AFT J-BOX LMT CAS message
annunciates when the circuit breaker is opened and is extinguished when the respective C/B is closed.
6. Open and Close the RH LIMITER (HT012) circuit breaker and verify the AFT J-BOX LMT CAS message
annunciates when the circuit breaker is opened and is extinguished when the respective C/B is closed.
6.2.4 G5000 Equipment Electrical Power Checks

The following Electrical Power Checks are provided as an aid to assist the technician with troubleshooting
suspected electrical power or ground faults. The steps described in this section are not a mandatory
requirement and do not have to be completed unless it is stated in another section of this document that a
particular electrical power or ground check defined in this section is required.
Required Test Equipment
 The following test equipment is needed to conduct and complete the procedures in this section: All
test equipment requiring calibration shall be up to date at the time of the test.
 Multimeter
 DC Ground Power Unit
Setup
1. Verify that the aircraft Battery (or Test Battery) is installed (with Battery Cables attached), circuit
breaker HT001 (OVERVOLTAGE) located inboard of External Power Jack and all necessary
electrical and avionics circuit breakers are engaged (closed).
CAUTION
THE BATTERY IS INSTALLED IN THE AIRCRAFT AND CAUTION
SHOULD BE OBSERVED WHILE PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING
PROCEDURES.
2. Verify that the GPU is not connected to the aircraft JT001 EXTERNAL POWER Receptacle.
3. On the pilot and copilot circuit breaker panels, close all DC POWER and AVIONIC DC POWER
distribution circuit breakers.
4. Place the DC POWER BATT switch to the OFF position
5. Place the BATT DISC Switch to “NORM”.
6. Place the STBY PWR Switch to “OFF”.
7. Place the AVIONICS MASTER Switch to “OFF”.
8. Set the VOLTMETER SEL switch to position “BATT”.
9. Verify that the aircraft VOLTMETER displays zero VDC.
10. Place the DC POWER BATT switch to the BATT position.
11. Place the AVIONICS MASTER Switch to “ON”
13. Using a digital multi-meter, verify power and ground at the desired pins identified in Table 6-1. While
verifying voltage at the given pin(s), open the designated circuit breaker as necessary and verify voltage

190-02313-01 Revision 2
is not present and returns upon resetting of the circuit breaker. Depending on the installation, some
circuit breakers may not be present.
NOTE
Unless otherwise noted, the tolerances for the voltage checks are as follows:
Voltage Tolerance
0 VDC + 3 VDC
28 VDC +/- 4 VDC
26 VAC +/- 4 VAC
Unless otherwise noted, the tolerances for the continuity checks are as follows:
Reading to: Tolerance
Ground 0 ohms +3, -0

Open 100K ohms or greater
Table 6-1, Power and Ground Specifications (Normal Power)
PIN(S)
CIRCUIT
EQUIPMENT CONNECTOR
GROUND 28VDC BREAKER
Nose / Radome
GWX P1101 5, 8 18, 20 RADAR
Red Wire /
- AN8011
AN801
Radome Fan GLRSHLD FANS
Black Wire /
AN802 -
AN802
Left Nose Bay
GTX 1 P1122 42, 44 3, 5 XPDR 1
GSD 1 P1061 46, 47 68 DATA CONC 1
54 ADC 1 PRIM
GDC 1 P1081 49, 50
55 ADC 1 SEC
30, 32 AUDIO 1 (PRIM)

GMA 1 P1162 14, 16, 69, 71
53, 55 AUDIO 1 (SEC)
GSR 56 WX PHONE (If IRIDIUM WX

P1011 3, 17 21, 32, 36 PHONE
Equipped)
GDL 59 (If Equipped) P1001 52, 53 71, 72 DATALINK IRIDIUM
LiteF AHRS #1 PN307 2, 10 1, 9 AHRS 1
Honeywell RT-300 Rad

PN832 *B, P *C RAD ALT
Alt (If Equipped)
ALT-55B (If Equipped) PY802 3, 14 9 RAD ALT

190-02313-01 Revision 2
PIN(S)
CIRCUIT
EQUIPMENT CONNECTOR
GDL69A P1111 20, 78 35 XM
ADF 1 (If Equipped) P1521 59, 60 64 ADF 1
DME 1 (If Equipped) P1501 59, 61 58 DME 1
17, 19, 21, 25 COM 1 (PRIM)

P1021 30, 31, 43, 44
23, 27 COMM 1 (SEC)
GIA 1
29, 31 GIA 1 (PRIM)
P1025 76, 78
33, 35 GIA 1 (SEC)
Right Nose Bay
GTX 2 P1142 42, 44 3, 5 XPDR 2
ADF 2 (If Equipped) P1531 59, 60 64 ADF 2
DME 2 (If Equipped) P1511 59, 61 58 DME 2
GMA 2 P1172 14, 16, 69, 71 53, 55 AUDIO 2
LiteF AHRS #2 PN308 2, 10 1, 9 AHRS 2
P1041 30, 31, 43, 44 17, 21 COMM 2
GIA 2 29, 31 GIA 2 (PRIM)

P1045 76, 78
33, 35 GIA 2 (SEC)

PN832 *B, P *C RAD ALT
Alt (If Equipped)
DATA CONC 2
68
(PRIM)
GSD 2 P1071 46, 47
DATA CONC 2
71
(SEC)
GDC 2 P1091 49, 50 54 ADC 2
5, 9, 14, 47 3 AOA
SafeFlight Stall Warning
PN028
Computer AOA HEATER
- 4
GDR 66 P1222 1, 24 28, 30 DATALINK COMM3
TCAS 2000 (If TCAS

PN818 3, 8, 11 10
Equipped)
Nose Avionics GLRSHLD FANS

P1031 2 1
Equipment Fan
PN808 1,2,3,4,9,10 5,6,7,8

TCAS TPU-/67A/67B (If TCAS
Equipped)
PN809 32,57,98 -
Glareshield / Instrument Panel

190-02313-01 Revision 2
PIN(S)
CIRCUIT
EQUIPMENT CONNECTOR
35, 37 PFD 1 (PRIM)

GDU 1 P2011 29, 31, 33
39, 41 PFD 1 (SEC)
GDU 2 P2021 29, 31, 33 35, 37 PFD 2
35, 37 MFD (PRIM)

GDU 3 P2031 29, 31, 33
39, 41 MFD (SEC)
GCU 1 P2041 5, 15 7 PFD 1 CRTL
GCU 2 P2051 5, 15 7 PFD 2 CRTL
GMC 7200 P2081 5, 15 7 AFCS CTRL
STBY ATT
Goodrich GH3000 ESIS (HC019)
PI064 D E
(Citation XLS only) STBY PWR
(HC018)
STBY PWR
Meggitt SFD (HC039)
PI039 5 4
(Citation Excel only) SFD BATT
(HN001)
P2132 5, 7 24, 47 LH GEA (PRIM)

GEA 1
P2133 116, 118 59, 82 LH GEA (SEC)
P2142 5, 7 24, 47 RH GEA (PRIM)

GEA 2
P2143 116, 118 59, 82 RH GEA (SEC)
Pilot Glareshield Fan JI013 2 1

GLRSHLD
FANS
Copilot Glareshield Fan JI033 2 1
HF Control Head
P1575 B, C A HF
(If Equipped)
Pedestal
TOUCH CTRL 1
35
(PRIM)
GTC 1 P2061 27, 29, 31, 33
TOUCH CTRL 1
39
(SEC)
GTC 2 P2071 27, 29, 31, 33 35 TOUCH CTRL 2
C, D E PFD 1 (PRIM)
P2191 N, M P MFD(PRIM)
TOUCH CTRL 1
Dimming Panel G, J H
(PRIM)
C, E D PFD 2
P2192
H, J G TOUCH CTRL 2
190-02313-01 Revision 2
PIN(S)
CIRCUIT
EQUIPMENT CONNECTOR
HF Control Head
P1575 B, C A HF
(If Equipped)
Pilot Side Panel
PC034 2, 13 14 RH FUEL QTY

Fuel Quantity Signal
Conditioner
PC061 2, 13 1 LH FUEL QTY
Fwd. Wing Aero Fairing Access Panel
Collins ALT-55 Rad Alt

(If Equipped)
PY802 3, 14 9 RAD ALT
(Excel S/N 317 and
prior)

Alt (If Equipped) PN832 *B, P *C RAD ALT
(Excel S/N 318 and on)
Aft Wing/Fuselage Fairing Access Panel
GSA (Roll) P3011 Z W AP SERVOSS
Cabin
PA Amp P2561 F G CABIN PA

Aft Baggage Compartment
GSA (Pitch Trim) P3041 Z W AP SERVOSS
A200S CVR
(If Equipped)
-or- PT510 17 9 CVR
FA2100 CVR
(If Equipped)
JAA SSFDR FDR

PT314 38, 6 5 FDR
(If Equipped)
6, 22, 52 5 FDR
F1000 FDR
PT302
(If Equipped)
11 12 FDR 26 VAC
12, 25 13 FDR
Patriot Sys FDR ARINC
PT305
Data Converter
23 11 FDR 26 VAC
HF 950 / HF 1050
HF Controller PI575 B, C A HF
(If Equipped)
1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11 5, 6, 7, 8
TCAS 67A (If Equipped) PT808 TCAS
PT809 32, 57, 98 ----

190-02313-01 Revision 2
PIN(S)
CIRCUIT
EQUIPMENT CONNECTOR
Tailcone Lower Access Panel
GSA (Pitch) P3021 Z W AP SERVOS
GSA (Yaw) P3031 Z W AP SERVOS
* Denotes lower case letter.
6.2.4.1 EMER Bus Power Check

1. Place the BATT switch to the EMER position. Leave the AVIONICS power switch ON.
2. Using a digital multi-meter, verify power and ground at each pin identified in Table 6-2. While verifying
voltage at the given pin(s), open the designated circuit breaker as necessary and verify voltage is not
present and returns upon resetting of the circuit breaker. Depending on installation, some circuit
breakers may not be present.
NOTE
The ELEC EMER BUS HC303 is provided +28.5 VDC from the AVN ELECT BUS
HZ015 (DC Power from BATTERY BUS HZ009 via energized contacts of ELECT
EMER CNTCT Relay KZ011) via the ELEC EMER CB HT052 (Aft Power J Box).
The AVN EMER BUS HF303 is provided +28.5 VDC from the AVN ELECT BUS
HZ015 (DC Power from BATTERY BUS HZ009 via energized contacts of ELECT
EMER CNTCT Relay KZ011) via AVN EMER CNTCT Relay KZ010 (contacts de-
energized) and AVN EMER CB HT053 (Aft Power J Box).
Table 6-2, EMER Bus Power Check (Avionics Power ON)
PIN(S) CIRCUIT METER

EQUIPMENT CONNECTOR
GROUND 28VDC BREAKER READING
Left Nose Bay
GSD 1 P1061 46, 47 68 DATA CONC 1
GDC 1 P1081 49, 50 54 ADC 1 PRIM
GMA 1 P1162 14, 16, 69, 71 53, 55 AUDIO 1 (SEC)
P1021 30, 31, 43, 44 23, 27 COM 1 (SEC)

GIA 1
P1025 76, 78 29, 31 GIA 1 (PRIM)
Right Nose Bay
GMA 2 P1172 14, 16, 69, 71 53, 55 AUDIO 2
GIA 2 P1045 76, 78 29, 31 GIA 2 (PRIM)
DATA CONC 2
GSD 2 P1071 46, 47 68
(PRIM)
GDU 1 P2011 29, 31, 33 35, 37 PFD 1 (PRIM)
GDU 3 P2031 29, 31, 33 35, 37 MFD (PRIM)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
PIN(S) CIRCUIT METER
EQUIPMENT CONNECTOR
GROUND 28VDC BREAKER READING
GCU 1 P2041 5, 15 7 PFD 1 CRTL
GMC 7200 P2081 5, 15 7 AFCS CTRL
GEA 1 P2133 116, 118 59, 82 LH GEA (SEC)
GEA 2 P2143 116, 118 59, 82 RH GEA (SEC)

Pedestal
TOUCH CTRL 1
GTC 1 P2061 27, 29, 31, 33 35
(PRIM)
Cabin
PA Amp P2561 F G CABIN PA
3. Place the AVIONICS power switch to the OFF position.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.2.4.2 STBY PWR / AHRS AUX Battery Power Check
1. Citation Excel – Verify that both LH CB Panel STBY PWR (HC039) circuit breaker and HN001 circuit
breaker (located in Nose) are engaged (closed).
2. Citation XLS – Verify that both STBY PWR (HC018) and STBY ATT (HC019) circuit breakers are
engaged (closed).
3. Depress and hold depressed the STBY PWR Switch to “TEST” (momentary). Verify that the Standby
Gyro Battery Pack “TEST” Lamp is illuminated and the ESIS Flight lighting is illuminated full brilliance.
4. Release the STBY PWR Switch and confirm it returns to the “OFF” position.
5. Verify the Standby Gyro Battery Pack “TEST” Lamp and the ESIS lighting are extinguished.
6. Citation Excel – Open LH CB Panel STBY PWR (HC039) Circuit Breaker.
7. Citation XLS – Open the LH CB Panel STBY ATT (HC019) circuit breaker.
8. Place STBY PWR Switch to “STBY PWR.”
9. Verify Standby Gyro Battery Pack “BATT PWR ON” Lamp is illuminated and ESIS instrument lighting is
illuminated full brilliance.
NOTE
With the BATTERY Switch placed to EMER position, the AVIONICS Power Switch
to OFF position and the STBY PWR Switch to ON –
The AHRS AUX PWR BUS HF304 receives +28.5 VDC from the AHRS AUX
BATTERY via AHRS AUX BATT CB902 (located in nose). The AHRS AUX PWR
BUS HF304 in turn provides Emergency Power to both LiteF AHRS units.
The STBY BATTERY supplies +28.5 VDC to the ESIS standby, standby air data
computer, and to the emergency 5V panel lighting.
Table 6-3, STBY BATT Power Check
PIN(S) CIRCUIT
EQUIPMENT CONNECTOR
LiteF AHRS #1 PN307 4, 12 3, 11 AHRS 1 AUX
LiteF AHRS #2 PN308 4, 12 3, 11 AHRS 2 AUX
Goodrich GH3000 STBY ATT

ESIS PI064 D E
(Citation XLS only) (HC039)
HN001 SFD BATT

Meggitt SFD (Excel)
PI039 5 4
(Citation Excel only) HN018 STBY PWR
(XLS)

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.2.4.3 Ground Dispatch Power Check
1. Place the STBY PWR Switch to “OFF”.
2. Confirm the AVIONICS MASTER Switch is set to “OFF”.
4. Remove power from the GPU and disconnect from the JT001 EXTERNAL POWER receptacle
(reference C56XMM Chapter 20-00-00).
5. On the center pedestal, press the GND COMM switch annunciator.
6. Verify the switch annunciation lights are illuminated.
Table 6-4, Ground Dispatch Power Check
PIN(S) CIRCUIT BREAKER

EQUIPMENT CONNECTOR
GROUND 28VDC (AFT POWER J-BOX)
GDU 1 P2011 - 39, 41

PFD1, T-CTRL1, GIA1
GTC 1 P2061 - 39
(GHT072)
P1025 - 33, 35
GIA 1
P1021 - 23, 27 COM1, AUDIO 1,
SWITCHING
GMA 1 P1162 - 53, 55 (GHT078)
GDU 3 P2031 - 39, 41

MFD, DATA CONC 2
(GHT076)
GSD 2 P1071 - 71
GDR 66 P1222 - 28, 30

COMM3, AUDIO 2
(GHT074)
GMA 2 P1172 - 53, 55
8. On the center pedestal, press the GROUND DISPATCH switch annunciator.

9. Verify the switch annunciation lights extinguish.
10. Upon successful completion of the power, ground, and stray voltage checks, open all circuit breakers
and reinstall/reconnect all equipment previously removed.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.2.4.4 G5000 Electrical Power Checks
The following section will confirm proper G5000 system functionality during the loss of various primary and
secondary power sources.
NOTE
Throughout this test, verify only the appropriate system(s) are affected by the
circuit breaker being opened. When circuit breakers are closed, allow enough time
for each system to re-initialize.
CAUTION
DO NOT RELY ON THE AIRCRAFT BATTERY ONLY FOR THIS TEST. DO NOT
USE A BATTERY CHARGER AS AN EXTERNAL POWER SOURCE.

3. Set the pilot COM radio to COM1 and the copilot COM radio to COM2. Push the right most softkey on
the MFD to acknowledge the MFD power-up screen.
Forward Circuit Breaker Panels
4. Open the ADC 2 circuit breaker and verify GDC2 is not powered by observing invalid air data on PFD2.
5. Close the ADC2 circuit breaker and verify GDC 2 is powered by observing valid air data information
on PFD2.
6. Open the AFCS CONTROL circuit breaker. Touch the MSG icon on both GTCs as required to present
the “Notifications” page.
7. Verify the GMC is not powered by observing a white “GMC 1 FAIL GMC 1 is inoperative.” system
message on GTC1 and GTC2.
NOTE
Touch the System Messages tab on the GTC as required to present new system
messages.
8. Close the AFCS CTRL circuit breaker and verify the GMC is powered by observing a gray “GMC 1
FAIL GMC 1 is inoperative.” system message on GTC1 and GTC2.
9. Open the PFD 1 CTRL circuit breaker and verify GCU1 is not powered by observing a white “GCU1
FAIL GCU is inoperative.” system message on GTC1 and GTC2.
10. Close the PFD 1 CTRL circuit breaker and verify GCU1 is powered by observing a gray “GCU1 FAIL
GCU is inoperative.” system message on GTC1 and GTC2.
11. Open the PFD 2 CTRL circuit breaker and verify GCU2 is not powered by observing a white “GCU2
12. Close the PFD 2 CTRL circuit breaker and verify the GCU2 is powered by observing a gray “GCU2
13. On the left circuit breaker panel, open the AP SERVOS circuit breaker and verify the GSAs are not
powered by observing the white AP-YD FAIL CAS message.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
14. Verify the autopilot and Yaw Damper cannot be engaged by pressing the AP button on the GMC and
observing the autopilot does not engage
15. On the left circuit breaker panel, close the AP SERVOS circuit breaker and verify the GSAs are
powered by observing the absence of the white AP-YD FAIL CAS message.
16. On the right circuit breaker panel, open the AP SERVOS circuit breaker and verify the GSAs are not
powered by observing the white AP-YD FAIL CAS message.
17. On the right circuit breaker panel, close the AP SERVOS circuit breaker and verify the GSAs are
powered by observing the absence of the white AP-YD FAIL CAS message.
18. Open the COMM 1 PRIM and COMM 1 SEC circuit breakers and verify EMERG frequency switch
annunciator extinguishes.
19. Close the COMM 1 PRIM and COMM 1 SEC circuit breakers and verify EMERG frequency switch
annunciator illuminates.
20. Open the COMM 1 PRIM circuit breaker and verify COM1 remains powered by observing the absence
of an amber X in the COM1 field on PFD1.
21. Open the COMM 1 SEC circuit breaker and verify COM1 is not powered by observing an amber X in
the COM1 field on PFD1.
22. Close the COMM 1 SEC circuit breaker and verify COM1 is powered by observing the absence of an
amber X in the COM1 field on PFD1.
23. Close the COMM 1 PRIM circuit breaker.
24. Open the RAD ALT circuit breaker (if installed) and verify the following:
a. The radar altimeter is not powered by observing the amber RA FAIL message in the RA window
on PFD1 and PFD2.
b. An amber TCAS FAIL and GPWS FAIL annunciations post on PFD1 and PFD2.
25. Close the RAD ALT circuit breaker (if installed) and verify the following:
a. The radar altimeter is powered by observing the absence of the amber RA FAIL message in the
RA window on PFD1 and PFD2.
b. The amber TCAS FAIL and GPWS FAIL annunciations are removed on PFD1 and PFD2.
26. Navigate to the Notifications page as required on GTC1 and GTC2.
27. Open the XM circuit breaker and verify the GDL 69 is not powered by observing a white “GDL69 FAIL
GDL 69 has failed.” system message on both GTCs.
28. Close the XM circuit breaker and verify GDL 69 is powered by observing a gray “GLD69 FAIL GDL 69
has failed.” system message on GTC1 and GTC2.
29. Use either GTC to ensure XPDR1 is the active transponder.
30. Navigate to the “Notifications” page as required on GTC1 and GTC2.
31. Open the XPDR 1 circuit breaker and verify GTX1 is not powered by observing a white “XPDR1 FAIL
XPDR1 is inoperative.” system message on GTC1 and GTC2.
32. Close the XPDR 1 circuit breaker and verify GTX1 is powered by observing a gray “XPDR1 FAIL
33. Open the DATA CONC 1 circuit breaker and verify GSD1 is not powered by observing a white “FAILED
PATH A data path has failed.” system message on both GTCs.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
a. A white “GWX FAIL GWX is inoperative.” system message on GTC1 and GTC2.
b. If ADF1 is installed, the “Control” button on the “Audio & Radios” page of both GTCs for ADF1 is
amber X’d.
c. If DME1 is installed, the “Control” button on the “Audio & Radios” page of both GTCs for DME1 is
amber X’d
34. Close the DATA CONC 1 circuit breaker and verify GSD1 is powered by observing the following:
a. A gray “FAILED PATH A data path has failed.” system message on GTC1 and GTC2.
b. A gray “GWX FAIL GWX is inoperative.” system message on GTC1 and GTC2.
c. If ADF1 is installed, the “Control” button on the “Audio & Radios” page of both GTCs for ADF1 is
no longer amber X’d.
d. If DME1 is installed, the “Control” button on the “Audio & Radios” page of both GTCs for DME1 is
no longer amber X’d
35. Navigate to the Notifications page as required on GTC1 and GTC2.
36. Open the AUDIO 1 PRIM circuit breaker and verify the GMA1 is not powered by the following:
a. The absence of an amber X in the COM1 field on PFD1.
b. The absence of an amber X in the Intercom, MIC1 and Mon fields on GTC1.
37. Open the AUDIO 1 SEC circuit breaker and verify the GMA1 is not powered by the following:
a. Presence of an amber X in the COM1 field on PFD1.
b. Presence of an amber X in the Intercom, MIC1 and Mon fields on GTC1.
c. GSD1 is not powered by observing a white “GMA1 FAIL GMA1 is inoperative.” system message
on both GTCs.
38. Close the AUDIO 1 PRIM circuit breaker and verify the GMA1 is powered by observing the following:
b. The absence of an amber X in the Intercom, COM1 MIC and MON fields on GTC1.
c. Observing a gray “GMA1 FAIL GMA1 is inoperative.” system message on GTC1 and GTC2.
39. Close the AUDIO 1 SEC circuit breaker.
40. Open the RADAR circuit breaker and verify the GWX is not powered by observing a white “GWX FAIL
GWX is inoperative.” system message on both GTCs.
41. Close the RADAR circuit breaker and verify the GWX is powered by observing a gray “GWX FAIL
GWX is inoperative.” system message on GTC1 and GTC2.
42. Select the Connext Weather page and both MFD MFWs.
43. Open the IRIDIUM TX/RX circuit breaker (if installed) and verify the following:
a. The GSR is not powered by observing a white “GSR1 FAIL GSR1 has failed.” system message on
GTC1 and GTC2.
b. An amber ‘Weather Link Unavailable’ annunciation illuminates on both Connext Weather pages.
44. Close the IRIDIUM TX/RX (if installed) circuit breaker and verify the following:
a. The GSR is powered by observing a gray “GSR1 FAIL GSR1 has failed.” system message on
GTC1 and GTC2.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
b. The amber ‘Weather Link Unavailable’ annunciation extinguishes on both Connext Weather pages.
45. Select XPDR 2 as the active transponder.
46. Open the XPDR 2 circuit breaker and verify the following:
a. GTX2 is not powered by observing a white “XPDR2 FAIL XPDR2 is inoperative.” system message
on GTC1 and GTC2.
b. The transponder source automatically changes to XPDR1 on GTC1 and GTC2.
47. Close the XPDR 2 circuit breaker and verify GTX2 is powered by observing a gray “XPDR2 FAIL
48. Open the COMM 2 circuit breaker and verify COM2 is not powered by observing an amber X in the
CM2 field on PFD (if selected as the COM source) and both GTCs.
49. Close the COMM 2 circuit breaker and verify COM2 is powered by observing the absence of an amber
X in the COM2 field on PFD2 (if selected as the COM source) and GTC1 and GTC2.
50. Open the TOUCH CTRL 2 circuit breaker and verify GTC2 blanks.
51. Close the TOUCH CTRL 2 circuit breaker and verify GTC2 is powered.
52. Open the AUDIO 2 circuit breaker and verify GMA2 is not powered by the following:
a. An amber X in the COM2 field on PFD2.
b. An amber X in the INTERCOM, MIC and MON fields on GTC2.
53. Close the AUDIO 2 circuit breaker and verify GMA2 is powered by observing the absence of an amber
X in the COM2 field on PFD2 and the INTERCOM, MIC and MON fields on GTC2.
54. Open the TCAS circuit breaker and verify the TCAS unit is not powered by observing the presence of
the amber TCAS FAIL on both PFD HSIs.
55. Close the TCAS circuit breaker and verify the TCAS FAIL annunciation extinguishes.
Aft Ground Dispatch CB Enclosure and Power Junction Box
57. Place the AVIONIC POWER switch to the OFF position.
58. On the center pedestal, set the PFD1 DISPLAY FORMAT / DIM switch to FULL and the MFD DISPLAY
FORMAT / DIM switch in the NORM.
59. On the center pedestal, push the Ground Dispatch switch and verify the following:
a. The GROUND DISPATCH ON annunciator illuminates on the Ground Dispatch switch.
b. PFD1 and MFD power up in normal display mode.
c. GTC1 powers up.
d. The EIS window on MFD provides invalid engine instrument data.
e. COM1 field on PFD1 is valid (no amber X) with appropriate frequency.
f. Audio 1 and Audio 2 are valid (no amber X) in the Intercom, MIC and MON fields on GTC1.
60. Open the GHT072 (PFD 1/T-CTRL 1/GIA 1) circuit breaker in the Ground Dispatch CB Enclosure and
verify power is removed from PFD1 and GTC1.
61. Place the MFD in reversionary mode and verify the COM1 field is shown invalid with an amber X.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
62. Close the GHT072 (PFD 1/T-CTRL 1/GIA 1) circuit breaker in the Ground Dispatch CB Enclosure and
verify the following:
a. Power is restored to PFD1 and GTC1.
b. COM1 field on PFD1 is no longer amber X’d.
63. Open the GHT074, (COMM 3/AUDIO 2) circuit breaker in the Ground Dispatch CB Enclosure and
a. A white “GDR1 FAIL GDR1 has failed.” system message on GTC1.
b. A white “GMA2 FAIL GMA2 has failed.” system message on GTC1.
64. Close the GHT074, (COMM 3/AUDIO 2) circuit breaker in the Ground Dispatch CB Enclosure and
a. A gray “GDR1 FAIL GDR1 has failed.” system message on GTC1.
b. A gray “GMA2 FAIL GMA2 has failed.” system message on GTC1.
65. Open the GHT076, (MFD/DATA CONC 2) circuit breaker in the Ground Dispatch CB Enclosure and
a. Power is lost on MFD.
b. A white “GDR1 FAIL GDR1 has failed.” system message on GTC1.
66. Close the GHT076, (MFD/DATA CONC 2) circuit breaker in the Ground Dispatch CB Enclosure and
a. Power is restored to MFD.
b. A gray “GDR1 FAIL GDR1 has failed.” system message on GTC1.
67. Open the GHT078, (COMM 1/AUDIO 1/SWITCHING) circuit breaker in the Ground Dispatch CB
Enclosure and verify the following:
a. PFD1, MFD and GTC1 go blank.
b. GND COM PUSH switch annunciator extinguishes.
68. Close the GHT078, (COMM 1/AUDIO 1/SWITCHING) circuit in the Ground Dispatch CB Enclosure.
69. Set the DC POWER BATT switch to the BATT position and verify the GND COMM PUSH annunciator
extinguishes.
70. Set the DC POWER BATT switch to the OFF position and verify GND COMM PUSH annunciator
remains extinguished.
6.2.5 G5000 Electrical & Data Path Check

Perform the following steps to verify the following:
6.2.5.1 Primary and Secondary Power Checks (GDC 1)

3. Open the ADC 1 PRIM circuit breaker and verify GDC1 remains powered by observing the absence
of red and amber X’s over the air data information on PFD1.
4. Open the ADC 1 SEC circuit breaker and verify GDC1 is not powered by observing red and amber X’s
over the air data information on PFD1.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
5. Close the ADC 1 PRIM circuit breaker and verify GDC1 is powered by observing the absence of red
and amber X’s over the air data information on PFD1.
6. Close the ADC 1 SEC circuit breaker.
6.2.5.2 Primary and Secondary Power Checks (PFD1, GTC1 and MFD)
3. Open the PFD 1 PRIM circuit breaker and verify PFD1 remains powered.
4. Open the PFD 1 SEC circuit breaker and verify PFD1 blanks.
5. Close the PFD 1 PRIM circuit breaker and verify PFD1 is powered.
6. Close the PFD 1 SEC circuit breaker.
7. Open the TOUCH CTRL 1 PRIM circuit breaker and verify GTC1 remains powered.
8. Open the TOUCH CTRL 1 SEC circuit breaker and verify GTC1 blanks.
9. Close the TOUCH CTRL 1 PRIM circuit breaker and verify GTC1 is powered.
10. Close the TOUCH CTRL 1 SEC circuit breaker.
11. Open the MFD PRIM circuit breaker and verify the MFD remains powered.
12. Open the MFD SEC circuit breaker and verify the MFD blanks.
13. Close the MFD PRIM circuit breaker and verify the MFD is powered.
14. Close the MFD SEC circuit breaker.
6.2.5.3 Primary and Secondary Power Checks (GIA1 and GIA2)

3. Open the GIA 1 PRIM circuit breaker and verify the following:
a. GIA1 remains powered by observing the absence of an amber X in the COM1 field on PFD1,
GTC1 and GTC2.
b. Absence of amber X over the L AOA indication.
c. Absence of Both on GPS2 annunciation on PFD1 and PFD2.
4. Open the GIA 1 SEC circuit breaker and verify the following:
a. GIA1 is not powered by observing an amber X in the COM1 field on PFD1, GTC1 and GTC2.
b. Amber X over the L AOA indication.
c. Both on GPS2 annunciation on PFD1 and PFD2.
5. Close the GIA 1 PRIM circuit breaker and verify the following:
a. GIA1 is powered by observing the absence of an amber X in the COM1 field on PFD1, GTC1 and
GTC2.
b. Absence of amber X over the L AOA indication.
c. When GPS signal is re-acquired the Both on GPS2 annunciation is removed from both PFDs.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6. Close the GIA 1 SEC circuit breaker.
6.2.5.4 Primary and Secondary Power Checks (GIA1 Comm 1)

3. Open the COMM 1 PRIM circuit breaker and verify the following:
a. COMM 1 remains powered by observing the absence of an amber X in the COM1 field on PFD1,
GTC1 and GTC2.
4. Open the COMM 1 SEC circuit breaker and verify the following:
a. COMM 1 is not powered by observing an amber X in the COM1 field on PFD1, GTC1 and GTC2.
5. Close the GIA 1 PRIM circuit breaker and verify the following:
a. COMM 1 is powered by observing the absence of an amber X in the COM1 field on PFD1, GTC1
and GTC2.
6. Close the COMM 1 SEC circuit breaker.
6.2.5.5 Primary and Secondary Power Checks (GEA1 and GEA2)

3. Open the L GEA PRIM circuit breaker and verify GEA1 remains powered by observing the absence
of amber dashes for the left engine indications (e.g. N1, ITT, N2, Oil Pressure, Oil Temperature, Fuel
Flow, Fuel Temperature, Total Fuel Qty, and L Fuel Qty) and the absence of an amber X over the L
AOA indication on the MFD.
4. Open the L GEA SEC circuit breaker and verify GEA1 loses power by observing amber dashes for the
left engine indications and amber X over the L AOA indication on the MFD.
5. Close the L GEA PRIM circuit breaker and verify GEA1 is powered by observing valid LH engine
indications on the MFD.
6. Close the L GEA SEC circuit breaker.
7. Open the R GEA PRIM circuit breaker and verify GEA2 remains powered by observing valid RH engine
and R AOA indications on the MFD.
8. Open the R GEA SEC circuit breaker and verify GEA2 is not powered by observing amber dashes for
the right engine indications on the MFD and amber X over the R AOA indication.
9. Close the R GEA PRIM circuit breaker and verify GEA2 is powered by observing valid RH engine
indications.
10. Close the R GEA SEC circuit breaker.
6.2.5.6 Primary and Secondary Power Checks (GSD2)

3. Open the DATA CONC 2 PRIM circuit breaker and verify GSD2 is powered by observing the
following:
190-02313-01 Revision 2
a. Absence of a white “FAILED PATH A data path has failed.” system message on both GTCs.
b. Absence of a white “GDL 59 GDL 59 has failed.” system message on both GTCs.
c. Absence of a white “GDR 66 GDR 66 has failed.” system message on both GTCs.
4. Open the DATA CONC 2 SEC circuit breaker and verify GSD2 is not powered by observing the
following:
a. A white “FAILED PATH A data path has failed.” system message on both GTCs.
b. A white “GDL 59 GDL 59 has failed.” system message on both GTCs.
c. A white “GDR 66 GDR 66 has failed.” system message on both GTCs.
5. Close the DATA CONC 2 PRIM circuit breaker and verify GSD2 is powered by observing the
following:
a. A gray “FAILED PATH A data path has failed.” system message on GTC1 and GTC2.
b. A gray “GDL 59 GDL 59 has failed.” system message on both GTCs.
c. A gray “GDR 66 GDR 66 has failed.” system message on both GTCs.
6. Close the DATA CONC 2 SEC circuit breaker.
6.2.5.7 AHRS Auxiliary Battery Power Check

3. Ensure AHRS1 is selected as the sensor for PFD1 and AHRS2 is selected as the sensor for PFD2.
4. On the instrument panel, set the STBY PWR switch to ON.
5. On the RH circuit breaker panel, Open the AHRS 2 circuit breaker.
a. Attitude and heading presentation on PFD2 is unaffected.
b. “AHRS AUX PWR 2” white CAS message is annunciated on the G5000.
b. “AHRS AUX PWR 1-2” white CAS message is annunciated on the G5000.
c. “AHRS AUX PWR 2” white CAS message is extinguished on the G5000.
9. On the RH circuit breaker panel, Close the AHRS 1 circuit breaker.
a. Attitude and heading presentation on PFD1 and PFD2 are unaffected.
b. “AHRS AUX PWR 1-2” white CAS message is extinguished on the G5000.
c. “AHRS AUX PWR 2” white CAS message is annunciated on the G5000.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
b. “AHRS AUX PWR 2” white CAS message is extinguished on the G5000.
6.2.5.8 GMA1 Primary Power Check

3. Open the AUDIO 1 PRIM circuit breaker and verify the GMA1 is not powered by the following:
b. The absence of an amber X in the Intercom, MIC1 and Mon fields on GTC1.
4. Open the AUDIO 1 SEC circuit breaker and verify the GMA1 is not powered by the following:
a. Presence of an amber X in the COM1 field on PFD1.
b. Presence of an amber X in the Intercom, MIC1 and Mon fields on GTC1.
c. GSD1 is not powered by observing a white “GMA1 FAIL GMA1 is inoperative.” system
message on both GTCs.
5. Close the AUDIO 1 PRIM circuit breaker and verify the GMA1 is powered by observing the following:
b. The absence of an amber X in the Intercom, COM1 MIC and MON fields on GTC1.
c. Observing a gray “GMA1 FAIL GMA1 is inoperative.” system message on GTC1 and GTC2.
6. Close the AUDIO 1 SEC circuit breaker.
6.2.5.9 G5000 HSDB Data Path Verification

1. Place PFD1 in configuration mode.
2. In the SYSTEM page group, scroll to the SYSTEM DATA PATHS CONFIGURATIONS selection to
access the System Data Paths page.
3. On PFD1, press the HSDB softkey (#5) and verify the following ports show a green check mark in the
Status column for each.
Table 6-5, G5000 HSDB Data Paths
Source LRU (Port) Destination LRU / Port
PFD1 (#1) R PFD
PFD1 (#2) L GTC
PFD1 (#3) L GIA
PFD1 (#4) L GSD
PFD2 (#1) L PFD
PFD2 (#2) R GTC
PFD2 (#3) R GIA
PFD2 (#4) R GSD

190-02313-01 Revision 2
MFD (#1) L GTC
MFD (#2) R GTC
MFD (#3) GDL 69
MFD (#4) R GSD
MFD (#5) R PFD
MFD (#6) L PFD
MFD (#7) L GIA
MFD (#8) R GIA
GSD1 (#1) L PFD
GSD1 (#2) R GSD
GSD1 (#4) GWX
GSD2 (#1) R PFD
GSD2 (#2) L GSD
GSD2 (#3) GDL59 (if installed)
GSD2 (#4) MFD
GTC1 (#1) L PFD
GTC1 (#2) MFD
GTC1 (#3) L GMA
GTC2 (#1) R PFD
GTC2 (#2) MFD
GTC2 (#3) R GMA
GIA1 (#1) L PFD
GIA1 (#2) R GIA
GIA1 (#3) MFD
GIA2 (#1) R PFD
GIA2 (#2) L GIA
GIA2 (#3) MFD

190-02313-01 Revision 2
GSD1 (#1) L PFD
GSD1 (#2) R GSD
GSD1 (#4) GWX
GSD2 (#1) R PFD
GSD2 (#2) L GSD
GSD2 (#3) GDL 59 (if installed)
GSD2 (#4) MFD
6.2.5.10 Air Data and AHRS Data Path Verification

1. Place PFD1 in configuration mode.
2. In the GIA page group, scroll to the GIA SERIAL CONFIGURATION selection to access the RS-
232/ARINC 429 CONFIG page.
3. With GIA1 selected in the SELECT UNIT window verify the following:
a. The RS-232 Channel 1 (GDC7400 #1) data block displays a green check-mark.
b. The ARINC 429 IN 5 (GDC74 #1) and ARINC 429 IN 3 (GDC74 #2) data block displays a green
check-mark.
4. With GIA2 selected in the SELECT UNIT window verify the following:
a. The RS-232 Channel 1 (GDC7400 #2) data block displays a green check-mark.
b. The ARINC 429 IN 5 (GDC74 #2) and ARINC 429 IN 3 (GDC74 #1) indicators are green.
5. In the GDU page group, go to the RS-232/ARINC 429 CONFIG page.
6. With PFD1 selected in the SELECT UNIT window.
a. Verify the ARINC 429 IN 1 (AHRS #1) and ARINC 429 IN 2 (GDC74 #1) indicators are green.
7. With PFD2 selected in the SELECT UNIT window.
a. Verify the ARINC 429 IN 1 (AHRS #2) and ARINC 429 IN 2 (GDC74 #2) indicators are green.
8. Cycle power to PFD1 and restart in normal mode.
6.2.5.11 PFD and MFD Ethernet connection check

(Includes ARINC connection check between ADC1 and MFD and between AHRS and MFD, and the
Reversion Mode Check)
1. On the RH circuit breaker panel, open the MFD PRIM and MFD SEC circuit breakers:
a. Verify NAV 1, COM 1, NAV 2 and COM 2 remain valid on both GTCs.
2. Close the MFD PRIM and MFD SEC circuit breakers and wait for MFD to initialize:
3. Open the PFD 2 circuit breaker:
a. Verify NAV 2, COM 2, NAV 1 and COM 1 remain valid on both GTCs.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
4. Close the PFD 2 circuit breaker and wait for PFD 2 to initialize.
5. Open the PFD 1 PRIM and PFD 1 SEC circuit breakers.
a. Verify NAV 1, COM 1, NAV 2 and COM 2 remain valid on both the MFD and PFD 2.
b. Verify ADC1 data and AHRS1 data can be displayed on the MFD in reversion mode.
6. Close the PFD 1 PRIM and PFD 1 SEC circuit breakers.
6.2.5.12 AHRS1 Data Path Connection to PFD 1

1. Set the MFD to be in REV mode as required.
2. On the left-hand circuit breaker panel, disengage the GIA 1 (PRIM), DATA CONC 1, GIA 2 (PRIM),
DATA CONC 2 (PRIM), and MFD (PRIM) circuit breakers.
3. On the right-hand circuit breaker panel, disengage the GIA 1 (SEC), MFD (SEC), GIA 2 (SEC), AHRS
2, AHRS 2 AUX, PFD 2, and DATA CONC 2 (SEC) circuit breakers.
a. Verify AHRS1 data is shown on PFD1.
4. Engage the GIA 1 (PRIM), DATA CONC 1, GIA 2 (PRIM), DATA CONC 2 (PRIM), MFD (PRIM), GIA
1 (SEC), MFD (SEC), GIA 2 (SEC), AHRS 2, AHRS 2 AUX, PFD 2, and DATA CONC 2 (SEC) circuit
breakers.
6.2.5.13 AHRS2 Data Path Connection to PFD 2

1. On the left-hand circuit breaker panel, disengage the GIA 1 (PRIM), DATA CONC 1, GIA 2 (PRIM),
DATA CONC 2 (PRIM), PFD 1 (PRIM) and MFD (PRIM) circuit breakers.
2. On the right-hand circuit breaker panel, disengage the GIA 1 (SEC), MFD (SEC), GIA 2 (SEC), AHRS
1, AHRS 1 AUX, PFD 1 (SEC), and DATA CONC 2 (SEC) circuit breakers.
a. Verify AHRS2 data is shown on PFD2 (via AHRS2  PFD2 data path).
3. Engage the GIA 1 (PRIM), DATA CONC 1, GIA 2 (PRIM), DATA CONC 2 (PRIM), PFD 1 (PRIM),
MFD (PRIM), GIA 1 (SEC), MFD (SEC), GIA 2 (SEC), AHRS 1, AHRS 1 AUX, PFD 1 (SEC), and
DATA CONC 2 (SEC) circuit breakers.
4. Set the PFD1 sensor to AHRS1 and the PFD2 sensor to AHRS2.
6.2.5.14 G5000 Ground Point Check Procedure

1. Using a digital multi-meter, verify a ground signal of 0 ohms (+3 ohms) is present at each of the pins
identified in Table 6-6.
NOTE
Perform this check with power removed from the aircraft.
Based on the installed options, some ground points may not
be applicable.
Table 6-6, G5000 Ground Points
Equipment Connector Ground
Nose / Radome
GWX P1101 5, 8

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Left Nose Bay
GTX 1 P1122 42, 44

GSD 1 P1061 46, 47
GDC 1 P1081 49, 50
GMA 1 P1162 14, 16, 69, 71
GSR 56 WX PHONE P1011 3, 17

GDL 59 P1001 52, 53
GDL69A P1111 20, 78
P1021 30, 31, 43, 44
GIA 1
P1025 76, 78
Right Nose Bay

GTX 2 P1142 42, 44
ADF 2 P1531 59, 60
DME 2 P1511 59, 61
GMA 2 P1172 14, 16, 69, 71
P1041 30, 31, 43, 44
GIA 2
P1045 76, 78
GSD 2 P1071 46, 47
GDC 2 P1091 49, 50

GDR 66 P1222 1, 24
GDU 1 P2011 29, 31, 33
GDU 2 P2021 29, 31, 33
GDU 3 P2031 29, 31, 33

190-02313-01 Revision 2
GCU 1 P2041 5, 15
GCU 2 P2051 5, 15
GMC 7200 P2081 5, 15
P2132 5, 7
GEA 1
P2133 116, 118
P2142 5, 7
GEA 2
P2143 116, 118
Pedestal
GTC 1 P2061 27, 29, 31, 33
GTC 2 P2071 27, 29, 31, 33

C, D
P2191 N, M
Dimming Panel G, J
C, E
P2192
H, J
6.2.5.15 G5000 Left and Right Engine Primary Data Backup Path Check Procedure
Perform the following steps to verify the backup engine data path through GSD2 is valid.
1. Apply external electrical power to the airplane (optional).
3. Start both engines per the appropriate AFM procedure.
4. Allow the engine parameters to stabilize with the engines at idle.
5. Open the GIA 1 (PRIM) and GIA 1 (SEC) circuit breakers and verify that the LH and RH N1, N2, Oil
Temp, Oil Pressure, and ITT indications remain unchanged and valid on all displays.
6. Open the GIA 2 (PRIM) and GIA 2 (SEC) circuit breakers and verify that the LH and RH N1, N2, Oil
Temp, Oil Pressure, and ITT indications remain unchanged and valid on all displays.
7. Close the GIA 1 (PRIM), GIA 1 (SEC), GIA 2 (PRIM), and GIA 2 (SEC) circuit breakers and verify that
the LH and RH N1, N2, Oil Temp, Oil Pressure, and ITT indications are displayed and valid on all
displays.
8. Shut down both engines per the AFM procedure.
9. Remove power from the aircraft.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.3 Fire Detection and Extinguishing System Interface Checks
This section validates the fire detection and extinguishing system interface to the G5000 is installed and
functioning correctly for the G5000 Crew Advisory System (CAS).
6.3.1 Fire Extinguishing System - F/W Shutoff Interface Check

1. Perform the Extinguishing System adjustment/Test per the C56XMM Maintenance Manual Chapter 26-
21-00.
2. Verify the following CAS messages is annunciated on the G5000:
a. F/W SHUTOFF L
b. F/W SHUTOFF R
6.3.2 Fire Detection System Interface Check

3. Remove connector PT021 from the LH Fire Detect Control Unit (UT021).
4. Remove connector PT020 from the RH Fire Detect Control Unit (UT020).
7. Apply an aircraft ground at PT021, Pin 6, and at PT020 Pin 6 and verify the FIRE DET SYS L-R CAS
message annunciates:
9. Remove ground wires from connectors PT021, Pin 6, and at PT020 Pin 6.
10. Re-install connector PT021 on the LH Fire Detect Control Unit (UT021).
11. Re-install connector PT020 on the RH Fire Detect Control Unit (UT020).
6.3.3 Fire Bottle Interface Check

3. Remove connector PT112 from the Forward Engine Fire Bottle and install a jumper wire between Pin
A and Pin C.
5. Allow all systems to initialize and verify the FIRE EXT BOTL LOW CAS message annunciates:
7. Remove jumper wire from connector PT112.
8. Remove connector PT113 from the Aft Engine Fire Bottle and install a jumper wire between Pin A and
Pin C.
10. Allow all systems to initialize and verify the FIRE EXT BOTL LOW CAS message annunciates:

190-02313-01 Revision 2
12. Remove jumper wire from connector PT113.
13. Re-install connectors PT112 and PT113 on the Forward and Aft Engine Fire Bottles.
6.3.4 Fire Warning Interface Check

1. Place the Rotary Test switch to the FIRE WARN position and verify the following:
a. Both ENGINE FIRE switch lights illuminate.
b. The red ‘FIRE’ annunciations are displayed inside the LH and RH ITT arcs on the EIS.
2. Position the rotary TEST switch to the OFF detent.
6.3.5 Smoke Detector Interface Check - Optional

The optional Lavatory Smoke Detector system was available as optional equipment for various Model
560XL ‘Excel’ and XLS aircraft. The annunciations are intended to be used for back up fire detection
purposes.
2. Allow all systems to initialize and verify the SMOKE DETECT or LAV SMOKE DETECT CAS message
(whichever was previously installed) is extinguished:
3. Position the rotary test switch to the FIRE position and verify the SMOKE DETECT or LAV SMOKE
DETECT CAS message (whichever was previously installed) illuminates.
6.3.6 Baggage Smoke Detector Interface Check - Optional

The optional Baggage Smoke Detector system was available for all Model 560XL aircraft.
2. Allow all systems to initialize and verify the BAGGAGE SMOKE CAS message is extinguished.
3. Position the rotary test switch to the FIRE position and verify the following BAGGAGE SMOKE CAS
message illuminates.
6.3.7 Battery Temperature Interface Check

For all aircraft without the optional lead-acid battery, a 44-ampere hour nickel-cadmium (NICAD) battery is
installed. Battery temperature is monitored by a temperature gauge installed in the right-side instrument
panel. A CAS message, red BATT O’TEMP >160, will be displayed if the battery temperature becomes
excessive. Test the interface to the G5000 as follows:
1. Position the rotary TEST switch to the BATT TEMP detent.
a. The flashing red BATT O’HEAT >160 CAS message is displayed in the CAS window.
b. The battery temperature gauge (copilot’s right inst. panel) indicates 160°F.
c. The flashing red MASTER WARNING annunciators are illuminated and are cancelable (push to
reset).

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.4 Stall Warning Functional Test
This check verifies that the G5000/Stall Warning Computer interface is operating correctly.
2. Place the rotary test switch to STICK SHAKER position and verify the following:
a. The AOA indicator pointer slews from the 0 position (or current position) to 1.0 position.
b. When the AOA indicator pointer moves, the pilot's and copilot’s control column Stick Shaker
activates.
c. Verify that when the AOA computer is valid and USP is not installed, the autopilot will disconnect
when the stick shaker is activated and will remain connected when USP is installed.
3. Position the rotary test switch to OFF and verify the AOA indication returns to 0 (or previous position)
and the Stick Shakers deactivate.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.5 Rudder Bias Checks
This section validates rudder bias system interface to the G5000 is installed and functioning correctly for
the G5000 Crew Advisory System (CAS).
6.5.1 Rudder Bias Operational Interface Check

1. Perform the Rudder Bias Operational Check per the C56XMM Maintenance Manual Chapter 27-20-
05-2.
2. Verify the RUDDER BIAS CAS message annunciates.
6.5.2 Rudder Bias Heater Fail Interface Check

3. Place the Rotary Test Switch in the ANNUN position and verify the steady amber BIAS HEATER FAIL
CAS message is displayed on the G5000 and the MASTER CAUTION annunciators remaining
extinguished.
4. Place the Rotary Test Switch in the OFF position and verify the amber BIAS HEATER FAIL CAS
message extinguishes on the G5000.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.6 Fuel Interface Functional Tests
6.6.1 Fuel Quantity Signal Conditioner Calibration
2. Level airplane to within +5 or -5 degrees in pitch and +2 or -2 degrees in roll.
3. De-fuel the aircraft following the procedure in Chapter 12 of 56XMM.
4. Place unusable fuel in the fuel tanks, following the instructions in Section 28-41-00 of 56XMM.
5. Apply external electrical power to the airplane and allow the G5000 system to initialize.
6. Check the EIS left and right fuel quantity indications on the MFD.
7. If the left and right fuel quantity indications do not show 0 pounds, turn the left and/or right E
potentiometer on the fuel quantity signal conditioner until the fuel quantity gauges both shows 0
pounds. Reference Section 28-41-00 of 56XMM.
6.6.2 Low Fuel Level Annunciation Functional Test
The intent of this test procedure is to validate the left and right Lo Fuel Level wiring interface to the G5000.
1. With the aircraft defueled in the previous section, verify the LO FUEL LEVEL L-R CAS message is
2. Add 400 pounds of fuel to each wing fuel tank. Refer to Chapter 12 of 56XMM. Let the fuel stabilize
for 15-minutes between each tank.
3. Verify the LO FUEL LEVEL L, LO FUEL LEVEL R and LO FUEL LEVEL L-R CAS messages are
extinguished on the G5000.
4. Transfer 50 pounds of fuel from the right tank to the left tank. Let the fuel stabilize for 15-minutes.
5. Verify the LO FUEL LEVEL R message annunciates on the G5000.
6. Transfer 100 pounds of fuel from the left tank to the right tank. Let the fuel stabilize for 15-minutes.
7. Verify the LO FUEL LEVEL R message extinguishes and a LO FUEL LEVEL L CAS message
illuminates.
8. Transfer 50 pounds of fuel from the right tank to the left tank. Let the fuel stabilize for 15-minutes.
9. Verify Lo Fuel Level L message extinguishes on the G5000.
6.6.3 Fuel Quantity Functional Test
1. Verify the airplane is level to within +5 or -5 degrees in pitch and +2 or -2 degrees in roll.
2. Measure specific weight (density) of fuel in pounds per gallon by filling a bucket with enough fuel to
allow an Aviation Fuel Hydrometer to float freely. Record the specific weight (density) of fuel.
3. Using the specific weight of the fuel shown in Table 6-7, determine the number of gallons of fuel
required to add 500 pounds.
4. Add 500 pounds of fuel to the left wing, allow 10 minutes for fuel to drain to its lowest point. Verify left
wing and total fuel quantity has increased 500 pounds ±100 pounds.
5. Add fuel to the left wing in 500-pound steps and verify indicated fuel quantity as specified in step 4
until 2000 pounds of fuel has been added to the left wing.
6. Add 500 pounds of fuel to the right wing, allow 10 minutes for fuel to drain to its lowest point. Verify
right wing and total fuel quantity has increased 500 pounds ±100 pounds.
7. Add fuel to the right wing in 500-pound steps and verify indicated fuel quantity as specified in step 6
until 2000 pounds of fuel has been added to the right wing.
8. Add 500 pounds of fuel to the left wing, allow 10 minutes for fuel to drain to its lowest point. Verify left
wing and total fuel quantity has increased 500 pounds ±100 pounds.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
9. Add 500 pounds of fuel to the right wing, allow 10 minutes for fuel to drain to its lowest point. Verify
right wing and total fuel quantity has increased 500 pounds ±100 pounds.
10. Add fuel to the left and right wing until the fuel level is at the top of the holes in the filler standpipe.
11. Verify the indicated left and right wing for full fuel quantity is within the range specified in Chapter 28-
41-00 of 560XL Maintenance Manual. If the indicated full left or right fuel quantity does not fall within
specified limits, adjust fuel quantity full indication per Chapter 28-41-00 of the 560XL Maintenance
Manual.
Table 6-7, Fuel Weight Conversion
To Add 500 Pounds of
Specific
Fuel
Weight
(LBS/GAL) (Gallons)
7.4 67.5
7.3 68.5
7.2 69.4
7.1 70.4
7.0 71.4
6.9 72.4
6.8 73.5
6.7 74.6
6.6 75.5
6.5 76.9
6.4 78.1
6.3 79.3
6.2 80.6
6.1 81.9
6.0 83.3
5.9 84.7
5.8 86.2
5.7 87.7
6.6.4 Fuel Filter Impending Bypass Interface Check

3. Open the L EEC and R EEC circuit breakers on the pilot’s circuit breaker panel, if not already open.
4. Disconnect the LH Engine EEC connector (P3) and place a ground wire on P3, Pin 26.
5. Disconnect the RH Engine EEC connector (P3) and place a ground wire on P3, Pin 26.
6. Apply external electrical power to the airplane. and allow the G5000 system to initialize.
7. Close the L EEC and R EEC circuit breakers on the pilot’s circuit breaker panel.
8. Ensure no FUEL FLTR BP CAS messages are displayed.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
9. Connect the ground wire from LH Engine EEC connector P3, Pin 26 to airframe ground.
10. Connect the ground wire from RH Engine EEC connector P3, Pin 26 to airframe ground and verify the
FUEL FLTR BPT L-R CAS message annunciates.
12. Remove the ground wire from LH Engine EEC connector P3, Pin 26 to airframe ground and re-install
LH Engine EEC connector (P3).
13. Remove the ground wire from RH Engine EEC connector P3, Pin 26 to airframe ground and re-install
RH Engine EEC connector (P3).
6.6.5 Fuel Cross Feed Interface Check

3. Place L and R FUEL BOOST switches to NORM position.
4. On the pilots switch panel, place the CROSSFEED selector (CCW) to the L TANK-----R ENG position
and verify the FUEL XFEED and FUEL BOOST L CAS messages illuminate.
5. On the pilots switch panel, place the CROSSFEED selector (CW) to the R TANK-----L ENG position
and verify the FUEL XFEED CAS message and FUEL BOOST R CAS messages are illuminated and
the FUEL BOOST L CAS is extinguished.
6. Open the FUEL CONTROL circuit breaker located on the LH Circuit Breaker panel.
7. Place the CROSSFEED selector to the OFF position and verify the FUEL XFEED CAS message
extinguishes.
8. After 10 (+/- 2) seconds, verify the flashing white FUEL XFEED CAS message annunciates.
9. Press either MASTER CAUTION annunciator and verify the flashing white FUEL XFEED CAS message
changes to a steady state and the MASTER CAUTION annunciators extinguish.
10. Close the FUEL CONTROL circuit breaker on the Pilot’s Circuit Breaker panel and verify the FUEL
XFEED and FUEL BOOST CAS message are removed.
6.6.6 Fuel Temperature 981 Module (005-01202-1C-1) Functional Check

The following section provides instructions for verifying proper functionality of the resistors and Transient
Voltage Suppressor Zener diodes installed on the LH and RH Fuel Temperature 981 Modules located at
Flight Station (FS) 370 LH & RH (Reference Garmin Wire Harness/Routing drawing 005-01202-06 for
additional component location information and Garmin Assy Drawing 005-01202-1C for additional electrical
interface definition).
2. Access the LH (GU306) and RH (GU308) Fuel Temperature 981 modules located at F.S. 370.
3. Disconnect connector P3061 from the LH Fuel Temperature 981 Module.
4. Disconnect connector P3081 from the RH Fuel Temperature 981 Module.
5. Visually inspect each module for signs of damage and condition and security of sealant. Replace if
damaged. If the module fails any of the following checks, replace the module. (Ref drawing 005-
01202-1C)
6. Using a calibrated digital multi-meter, verify the defined resistance values are present between each
of the pins identified below on the LH and RH Fuel Temperature 981 Modules.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
a. 100 ohms ± 0.1 ohms between pins B and *z.
b. 150 ohms ± 1.5 ohms between pins Z and *q
c. 150 ohms ± 1.5 ohms between pins R and *i.
d. 150 ohms ± 1.5 ohms between pins P and J.
e. 150 ohms ± 1.5 ohms between pins S and AA.
7. Using the Diode-Check function on a digital multi-meter verify a reading of 0.5V (+/- 0.2V) is present
between each of the pins identified below on the LH and RH Fuel Temperature 981 Modules.
a. Red (+) lead connected to pin LL and the black (-) lead connected to A.
b. Red (+) lead connected to pin DD and the black (-) lead connected to *a.
c. Red (+) lead connected to pin T and the black (-) lead connected to X.
d. Red (+) lead connected to pin H and the black (-) lead connected to D.
8. Reverse the red (+) and black (-) leads to each of the pins identified above in step 7 and verify no
voltage drop ie. no continuity (open) is present between the pins.
9. If the test above fails, replace the module.
10. Reinstall connector P3061 on the LH Fuel Temperature 981 Module.
11. Reinstall connector P3081 on the RH Fuel Temperature 981 Module.
12. Verify Electrical bond of P3061 and P3081 connectors per section 5.18.
13. Apply external electrical power to the airplane and verify valid LH and RH Fuel Temperature indications
are present on the EIS.
6.6.7 Fuel Low Level 981 Module (005-01202-1C-2) Functional Check

The following section provides instructions for verifying proper functionality of the resistors and Transient
Voltage Suppressor Zener diode installed within the LH and RH Fuel low level 981 Modules located at
Flight Station (FS) 370 LH & RH (Reference Garmin Wire Harness/Routing drawing 005-01202-06 for
additional component location information and Garmin Assy Drawing 005-01202-1C for additional electrical
interface definition).
2. Access the LH (GU307) and RH (GU309) Fuel Low Level 981 modules located at F.S. 370.
3. Disconnect connector P3071 from the LH Fuel Low Level 981 Module.
4. Disconnect connector P3091 from the RH Fuel Low Level 981 Module.
5. Visually inspect each module for signs of damage and condition and security of sealant. Replace if
damaged. If the module fails any of the following checks, replace the module. (Ref drawing 005-
01202-1C)
6. Using a calibrated digital multi-meter, verify the defined resistance values are present between each
of the pins identified below on the LH and RH Fuel Low Level 981 Modules.
a. 3.0k ohms ± 30 ohms between pins B and K.
b. 3.0k ohms ± 30 ohms between pins C and J.
c. 5.0k ohms ± 50 ohms between pins A and L.
7. Using the Diode-Check function on a digital multi-meter verify a reading of 0.5V (+/- 0.2V) is present
between each of the pins identified below on the LH and RH Fuel Temperature 981 Modules.
a. Red (+) lead connected to pin F and the black (-) lead connected to *D.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
voltage drop i.e. no continuity (open) is present between the pins.
9. Reinstall connector P3071 on the LH Fuel Low Level 981 Module.
10. Reinstall connector P3091 on the RH Fuel Low Level 981 Module.
12. Apply external electrical power to the airplane and verify valid LH and RH Fuel Quantity indications
6.6.8 Fuel Quantity System BIT Fault Out 981 Jumper Plug Functional Check
(005-W0035-09-7 or 005-W0035-02-7)
The following section provides instructions for verifying proper functionality of the Transient Voltage
Suppressor Zener diodes installed on the LH and RH Fuel Quantity BIT Fault Out 981 jumper plug
assemblies located adjacent to the Fuel Quantity Signal Conditioner. (Reference Garmin Wire
Harness/Routing Drawings in Section 1.5 for additional component location information and Garmin Assy
Drawings also in Section 1.5 for additional electrical interface definition).
2. Access the LH (GU228) and RH (GU229) BIT Fault Out 981 jumper plug assemblies located near the
UC016 Fuel Quantity Signal Conditioner on the Pilots side wall aft of the circuit breaker panel.
3. Disconnect connector P2281 from the LH (NO1) BIT Fault Out 981 jumper plug assembly.
4. Disconnect connector P2291 from the RH (NO2) BIT Fault Out 981 jumper plug assembly.
5. Visually inspect each module for signs of damage and condition and security . Replace if damaged.
If the module fails any of the following checks, replace the jumper plug. (Ref drawing 005-W0035-09).
6. Using the Diode-Check function on a calibrated digital multi-meter verify a reading of 0.5V (+/- 0.2V)
is present between each of the pins identified below on the LH and RH BIT Fault Out 981 jumper plug
assemblies.
a. Red (+) lead connected to pin 7 and the black (-) lead connected to 3.
b. Red (+) lead connected to pin 8 and the black (-) lead connected to 4.
voltage drop ie. no continuity (open) is present between the pins.
8. Reinstall connector P2281 to the LH (NO1) BIT Fault Out 981 jumper plug assembly.
9. Reinstall connector P2291 to the RH (NO2) BIT Fault Out 981 jumper plug assembly.
11. Apply external electrical power to the airplane and verify valid LH and RH Fuel Quantity indications
6.6.9 APU Fuel Valve Interface Check – Optional

This check is only applicable to Citation Excel aircraft configured to the U.K. build standard (reference
Cessna Configuration Code S57-AA), and optionally equipped XLS aircraft.
1. Perform the Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) Operational Check per the C56XMM Maintenance Manual
Chapter 49-10-00.
2. Verify the APU FUEL VLV FAIL CAS message annunciates.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.7 Hydraulic-Dependent Systems
This section validates the hydraulic system interface to the G5000 is installed and functioning correctly.
2. Place the DC POWER BATT switch to the BATT position
3. Place the AVIONIC POWER switch to the ON position.
5. Set both engine thrust levers to the CUT OFF position.
6. Ensure the guarded SPEED BRAKE switch on the center pedestal is in the RETRACT position.
7. Before power on the hydraulic system and verify the LO HYD FLOW L-R message is posted.
Test Setup
Set up hydraulic power source for testing per Chapter 29 of 56XMM. Hydraulic power is required to
complete the tests in this section.
6.7.1 Speed Brake Operational Test

1. Position SPEED BRAKE switch (SC027) to the EXTEND position.
a. Verify during speed brake transit the HYD PRESS message is posted to the G5000 CAS display
window.
b. Verify the SPD BRK EXTEND message is posted to the G5000 CAS display window when both
speed brakes are extended.
c. Verify when the speed brakes are extended the HYD PRESS message is extinguished on the
G5000 CAS display window.
2. Put the SPEED BRAKE switch (SC027) to RETRACT.
a. Verify during speed brake transit the HYD PRESS message is posted to the G5000 CAS display
window.
b. Verify the SPD BRK EXTEND message is extinguished on the G5000 CAS display window when
both speed brakes are retracted.
c. Verify when the speed brakes are retracted the HYD PRESS message is extinguished on the
6.7.2 Flap Operational Test

1. Make sure the FLAP CONTROL and HYD CONTROL circuit breakers are engaged, located on the left
circuit breaker panel.
2. Move the flap preselect to the 35-degree detent position.
a. Verify during flap movement the HYD PRESS message is posted to the G5000 CAS display
window.
b. Verify when flap movement ceases the HYD PRESS message is extinguished on the G5000 CAS
display window.
3. Move the flap preselect to the 0-degree detent position.
a. Verify during flap movement the HYD PRESS message is posted to the G5000 CAS display
window.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
b. Verify when flap movement ceases the HYD PRESS message is extinguished on the G5000 CAS
display window.
6.7.3 Landing Gear Down/Locked Operational Test

1. Lift the airplane with jacks until the tires clear the ground (reference C56XMM Chapter 7).
2. Ensure the GEAR WARN, GEAR CONTROL and HYD CONTROL circuit breakers are closed, located
on the left circuit breaker panel.
3. Retract the landing gear.
a. Verify the HYD PRESS CAS message is posted to the G5000 CAS display window during gear
movement and extinguishes when the landing gear are in the retracted position.
4. Extend the land gear.
a. Verify the HYD PRESS CAS message is posted to the G5000 CAS display window during gear
movement and extinguishes when the landing gear are in the extended position.
6.7.4 Hydraulic Low Fluid Level Test

1. Empty the hydraulic reservoir.
a. Verify the LO HYD LEVEL message is posted to G5000 CAS display window.
2. Re-service the hydraulic power system. (reference C56XMM Chapter 12-12-01)
a. Verify the LO HYD LEVEL message is extinguished on the G5000 CAS display window.
6.7.5 Hydraulic Low Flow Test

1. Ensure electrical power has been removed from the aircraft.
3. Open the following circuit breakers on the LH Circuit Breaker panel:
a. SPEED BRAKE
b. PWR BRKS
c. L THRUST REVERSER
d. R THRUST REVERSER
4. Remove bottom fuselage access panel 313DC to gain access to tailcone/fairing connectors PM003
and PS002.
5. Disconnect PM003 (LH) and connect an airframe ground to JM003, Pin E.
6. Disconnect PS002 (RH) and connect an airframe ground to JS002, Pin B.
8. Allow all systems to initialize and verify the LO HYD FLOW L R CAS message annunciates:
10. Remove aircraft ground from JM003, Pin E and JS002, Pin B.
11. Reconnect PM003 and PS002.
12. Re-install access panel 313DC.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.7.6 Two-Position Horizontal Stabilizer Interface Check
1. Perform the Two-Position Horizontal Stabilizer Operational Check per the C56XMM Maintenance
Manual Chapter 27-40-00-5. and verify the STAB MISCOMP CAS message annunciates on the
G5000 when required in the maintenance manual procedure.
6.7.7 Thrust Reverser Interface Check

This section validates the thrust reverser interface to the G5000 is installed and functioning correctly.
1. Perform the Operational Check of the Thrust Reverser System per the C56XMM Maintenance Manual
Chapter 78-90-30.
6.8 Landing Gear Functional Tests

6.8.1 Gear Warning Horn
1. Make sure the GEAR WARN, FLAP CONTROL, HYD CONTROL, AND GEAR CONTROL circuit
breakers are engaged.
2. Lift the airplane with jacks. (Refer to Chapter 7 of the C56XMM Maintenance Manual)
3. Connect an external hydraulic power cart to the airplane.
4. Open the FLT HR METER circuit breaker.
WARNING
Make sure that personnel are clear of the areas around the landing gear, flaps,
speed brakes, and horizontal stabilizer before applying hydraulic pressure to the
airplane systems. The movement of these systems can cause injury to personnel.

6. Put the BATT switch (SI022) to BATT.
7. Make sure the elevator trim indicator is in the takeoff trim band.
8. Make sure the speed brakes are retracted.
9. Open the RAD ALT circuit breaker.
10. Place the flap handle in 15 degrees.
11. Using an air data test set, set the airspeed to indicate 155 knots.
12. Retract the landing gear and verify the landing gear warning horn remains silent.
13. Advance the left throttle lever to the IDLE detent and verify the landing gear warning horn remains
silent.
14. Using an air data test set, set the airspeed to indicate 148 knots and verify the landing gear warning
horn sounds.
15. Place the left throttle lever to the CUTOFF detent and verify the landing gear horn silences.
16. Advance the right throttle lever to the IDLE detent and verify the landing gear warning horn sounds.
17. Place the right throttle lever to the CUTOFF detent and verify the landing gear horn silences.
18. Place the flap handle in 35 degrees and verify the landing gear warning horn sounds immediately after
leaving the 15-degree position and continues to sound.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
19. Extend the landing gear and verify the landing gear horn silences when the three green down and
locked indicator lights illuminate.
20. Lower airplane and remove the jacks. Reference Chapter 7 of 56XMM.
21. Put the BATT switch to OFF.
22. Disconnect the external power cart from the airplane.
23. Disconnect the hydraulic cart from the airplane.
6.8.2 Landing Gear Warning Logic Test

1. Complete the check of the Landing Gear Warning Logic, Section 3.A of Chapter 32-61-00 of 56XMM.
6.8.3 Takeoff Warning Alert

1. Make sure the GEAR WARN, FLAP CONTROL, HYD CONTROL, AND GEAR CONTROL circuit
3. Connect an external hydraulic power cart to the airplane.
4. Open the FLT HR METER circuit breaker.
6. Put the BATT switch to ON.
7. Ensure the elevator trim indicator is in the takeoff trim band.
8. Place the flap handle to 15 degrees.
9. Ensure the speed brakes are retracted.
10. Ensure the Horizontal Stabilizer is in the takeoff position.
11. Ensure the parking brake is not set.
12. Ensure the No Takeoff CAS message and aural alert are not present.
13. Place the flap handle to 35 degrees and verify the amber ‘NO TAKEOFF’ CAS message illuminates.
14. Advance the left throttle lever to the TAKEOFF detent and verify the amber ‘NO TAKEOFF’ CAS
message remains illuminated and begins flashing and the ‘No Takeoff’ aural alert begins to sound.
15. Place the left throttle lever to the CUTOFF detent and verify the amber ‘NO TAKEOFF’ CAS message
remains illuminated and stops flashing and the ‘No Takeoff’ aural alert silences.
16. Advance the right throttle lever to the TAKEOFF detent and verify the amber ‘NO TAKEOFF’ CAS
message remains illuminated and begins flashing and the ‘No Takeoff’ aural alert begins to sound.
17. Place the left throttle lever to the CUTOFF detent and verify the amber ‘NO TAKEOFF’ CAS message
remains illuminated and stops flashing and the ‘No Takeoff’ aural alert silences.
18. Place the flap handle to 15 degrees and verify the amber ‘NO TAKEOFF’ CAS message extinguishes
at 16 (+3 or -1) degrees.
19. Place the flap handle to 7 degrees and verify the amber ‘NO TAKEOFF’ CAS message illuminates.
20. Place the flap handle to 15 degrees and verify the amber ‘NO TAKEOFF’ CAS message extinguishes
at 16 (+3 or -1) degrees.
21. Extend the speed brakes and verify the amber ‘NO TAKEOFF’ CAS message illuminates.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
22. Retract the speed brakes and verify the amber ‘NO TAKEOFF’ CAS message extinguishes.
23. Move the Horizontal Stabilizer out of the takeoff position and verify the amber ‘NO TAKEOFF’ CAS
24. Put the Horizontal Stabilizer into the takeoff position and verify the amber ‘NO TAKEOFF’ CAS
message extinguishes.
25. Move the elevator trim indicator out of the takeoff trim band and verify the amber ‘NO TAKEOFF’ CAS
26. Move the elevator trim indicator back into the takeoff trim band and verify the amber ‘NO TAKEOFF’
CAS message extinguishes.
27. Release the parking brake and verify the amber ‘NO TAKEOFF’ CAS message illuminates.
28. Set the parking brake and verify the amber ‘NO TAKEOFF’ CAS message extinguishes.
29. Put the BATT switch to OFF.
30. Disconnect the external power cart from the airplane.
31. Disconnect the external hydraulic power cart to the airplane.
6.8.4 Overspeed Protection Test
WARNING
Make sure that all equipment and personnel are clear of the flap area before
proceeding with these procedures.
NOTE
Rate of acceleration for airspeed on ADTS should not exceed 120 kt/min.
1. Place airplane on jacks and apply hydraulics per the ML-C-560XL Aircraft Maintenance Manual.
2. Streamline the left AOA vane.
3. Retract the landing gear.
4. Set the flaps to 0°.
6. Set the air data test set to 28,000 ft and 240 knots airspeed with the pitot/static tester and verify the
overspeed barber pole is displayed at 250 knots.
7. Reduce the air data test set to 190 knots airspeed.
8. Set the flaps to the 7° position and verify an overspeed barber pole is displayed at 200 knots.
9. Set the flaps to the 15° position and verify an overspeed barber pole remains displayed at 200 knots.
10. Reduce the air data test set to 165 knots airspeed.
11. Set the flaps to the 35° position and verify an overspeed barber pole is displayed at 175 knots.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.9 Lighting Checks
CAUTION
DO NOT RELY ON THE AIRCRAFT BATTERY TO LOAD SOFTWARE. DO NOT
USE A BATTERY CHARGER AS AN EXTERNAL POWER SOURCE. Power loss
during a software upgrade may cause an LRU to become corrupted and
unresponsive requiring replacement. Remove power only when told to do so in the
procedure.

3. On the Light Panel select the Panel Light Switch to the “ON” position.
4. On the DISPLAY DIMMING panel, rotate the PFD1 DIM/BRT knob clockwise (CW) and counter-
clockwise (CCW).
a. Verify PFD1’s backlighting increases with CW movement and decreases with CCW movement.
5. On the DISPLAY FORMAT / DIM panel, rotate the MFD DIM/BRT knob CW and CCW.
a. Verify the MFD’s backlighting increases with CW movement and decreases with CCW movement.
6. On the DISPLAY FORMAT / DIM panel, rotate the PFD2 DIM/BRT knob CW and CCW.
a. Verify PFD2’s backlighting increases with CW movement and decreases with CCW movement.
7. On the DISPLAY FORMAT / DIM panel, rotate the GTC1 DIM/BRT knob CW and CCW.
a. Verify GTC1’s backlighting increases with CW movement and decreases with CCW movement.
8. On the DISPLAY FORMAT / DIM panel, rotate the STBY DIM/BRT knob CW and CCW.
a. Verify the standby indicator’s backlighting increases with CW movement and decreases with CCW
movement.
9. On the DISPLAY FORMAT / DIM panel, rotate the GTC2 DIM/BRT knob CW and CCW.
a. Verify GTC2’s backlighting increases with CW movement and decreases with CCW movement.
10. On the Light Panel rotate the Left Panel Lighting knob CW and CCW.
a. Verify the left panel lighting increases with CW movement and decreases with CCW movement.
b. Verify both DC Amp indicators and the DC Volts indicator back lighting increases with CW
movement and decreases with CCW movement.
11. On the Light Panel rotate the Center Panel Lighting knob CW and CCW.
a. Verify the center panel lighting increases with CW movement and decreases with CCW
movement.
b. Verify Cabin Temperature indicator digits and the Selected Altitude indicator back lighting
increases with CW movement and decreases with CCW movement.
12. On the Light Panel rotate the Right Panel Lighting knob CW and CCW.
a. Verify the right panel lighting increases with CW movement and decreases with CCW movement.
b. Verify APU System indicator back lighting increases with CW movement and decreases with CCW
movement.
13. On the Light Panel rotate the EL Panel Lighting knob CW and CCW.
a. Verify the EL panel lighting increases with CW movement and decreases with CCW movement.
14. On the Light Panel select the Panel Light Switch to the “OFF” position.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.10 Crew Alerting System Tests
This section validates the crew alerting system (CAS) system interface to the G5000.
6.10.1 Master Caution / Master Warning
2. Position the rotary TEST switch to the ANNU detent and verify the following:
a. Steady red MASTER WARNING and steady amber MASTER CAUTION annunciators are
activated for the duration of the test and are not cancellable.
3. Position the rotary TEST switch to the OFF detent and verify the following:
a. The MASTER WARNING and MASTER CAUTION annunciators extinguish.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.11 Navigation System Functional Tests
6.11.1 ELT
This check verifies the emergency locator transmitter (ELT) is receiving ARINC 429 data from the G5000.
1. From the “Home” page select the “Utilities” button, then select the “GPS Status” button. Select GPS 1
in the GPS Info box. GPS 1 status will display on the MFD. Verify that GPS 1 signals are acquired
and valid.
2. From the “Home” page select the “Utilities” button, then select the “GPS Status” button. Select GPS 2
in the GPS Info box. GPS 2 status will display on the MFD. Verify that GPS 2 signals are acquired
and valid.
3. Record the Aircraft’s Latitude and Longitude.
Latitude
Longitude
4. Gain Access to ELT and disconnect connector PT557 from the ELT housing.
5. Connect the ARINC 429 reader to PT557 pin 5 (hi) and 17(Lo).
6. Record ARINC LS 429 Label 310 value for Latitude.
Latitude
7. Record ARINC LS 429 Label 311 value for Longitude.
Longitude
8. Verify that the aircraft LAT/Long recorded above matches the Label 310 and 311 recorded above.
9. Remove the ARINC 429 reader from connector PT557 and reconnect ELT connector PT557.
6.11.2 TCAS
6.11.2.1 ACSS TCAS 2000 or TPU67 Configuration

Follow this procedure to enable the ACSS TCAS 2000 or TPU 67() traffic system function for the G5000
system if required. See General Arrangement drawing referenced in Table 1-1 for the list of supported non-
Garmin traffic systems.
1. Ensure the loader card is inserted into top card slot of PFD1. Ensure all GDUs and GTCs are in
configuration mode (reference Section 3.1).
2. From the “SYSTEM UPLOAD” page on PFD1, activate cursor as required and use the inner PFD1
knob on GTC1 to highlight the GROUP field.
3. Use the inner PFD1 knob on GTC1 as required to scroll through the GROUP list and highlight ‘Options’.
4. Push the Enter button on GTC1 to select the ‘Options’ GROUP.
5. Once the GROUP is selected, the cursor moves to the ITEM window. Rotate the inner PFD1 knob on
GTC1 to activate the drop-down menu.
6. Use the inner PFD1 knob on GTC1 as required to scroll through the ITEM list and highlight ‘Enable
TCAS 2000 or TPU67’.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
7. Push the Enter button on GTC1 to select the ‘Enable TCAS 2000 or TPU67’ ITEM.
8. Push the LOAD softkey.
the following:
product.
b. “Upload and Crossfill Complete” pop-up window.
10. Push the Enter button on GTC1 to acknowledge the “Upload and Crossfill Complete” pop-up window.
11. Deactivate cursor.
6.11.2.2 TPU 67 – Configuration Module Programming

Follow this procedure to configure the TPU 67() traffic system to interface correctly with the G5000 system.
This procedure must be followed for all TPU 67() traffic system installations.
NOTE
This section requires the use of the TPU diagnostic connector and a diagnostic computer
running TCASDIAG (Version 01/10 or later) program.
1. Ensure the airplane is not powered.

2. Connect the TCAS II TPU diagnostic connector to the diagnostic computer running TCASDIAG using
the 9-pin serial COM port connection.
3. Apply external power to the airplane. Place the BATTERY and AVIONICS POWER switches to ON.
4. Ensure the LED on the right side of the TPU blinks when power is applied to the unit.
5. Begin the TCASDIAG program (automatically links to the TPU).
6. Use TCASDIAG on the laptop to highlight Config Mod and press the Enter key. Highlight the Modify
Strap Data selection and press the Enter key.
7. Highlight the ‘Intruder File Type’ option and change to ‘ARINC 735’ if required.
8. Highlight the ‘Audio Tone Enable/Voice Muting’ option and change to ‘Voice Muting’ if required.
9. Press the Esc key on the laptop, and then press the Enter key.
10. Wait for the TPU to reboot and initialize. Press the Esc key, then select Misc on the main menu and
press the Enter key. Highlight Exis and press the Enter key to exit the TCASDIAG program.
11. Place the BATTERY and AVIONICS POWER switches to OFF. Remove power from the airplane.
6.11.2.3 TCAS Functional Check

1. From the “Home” page on the GTC select “Traffic” > “Traffic Settings” and verify the Verify the “Traffic
Settings” page is displayed on the GTC with the following buttons available: AUTO, TA Only, Altitude
Reporting, On, Standby, Unrestricted, Above, Normal, Below, Relative, and Absolute.
NOTE

190-02313-01 Revision 2
If the correct buttons are not displayed, the G5000 has not been properly
configured for the traffic system. Reference section 3.3.4 to load the correct TCAS
II Traffic System Option Configuration.
2. Verify that TCAS FAIL is not displayed in the center of the traffic map over the aircraft symbol on the
MFD MFW panel.
3. Press the Standby button and verify the “STANDBY” annunciation is displayed in the center and upper
right corner of the traffic map and the “TCAS STANDBY” annunciation is displayed on both PFDs.
4. Press the TA Only button.
a. Verify that “TA ONLY” annunciation is displayed in the upper right corner of the traffic map.
b. Verify that “TA ONLY” annunciation is displayed on both PFDs.
5. From the “Home” page on the GTC select “Aircraft Systems > System Tests”.
6. Press the TCAS softkey.
a. Verify that the traffic system enters a self-test.
b. Verify upon successful completion of the test, that “TCAS TEST PASS” is heard over the
cockpit speaker.
7. Open the TCAS circuit breaker on the forward circuit breaker panel.
a. Verify on the traffic map that “TCAS FAIL” annunciation is displayed after several seconds.
b. Verify that “TCAS FAIL” annunciation is displayed on both PFDs.
8. Close the TCAS circuit breaker on the forward circuit breaker panel.
a. Verify that “TCAS FAIL” annunciation is removed after several seconds.
6.11.2.4 TCAS Intruder Functional Check

Note – Notify local ATC of intent to test TCAS using simulated altitudes
1. On GTC1 from the ‘Home’ page select the ‘Traffic’ button followed by the ‘Traffic Settings’ button to
display the TCAS page on an MFW.
2. Set the TCAS/Transponder mode to ‘Auto’.
3. Set the aircraft squat switches to ‘in-air’ mode
4. Set the pitot / static tester altitude to 13,000 ft.
5. Connect the IFR 6000 directional antenna to the IFR unit with the short 1 ft coax cable.
6. Position the IFR test unit approximately 10 degrees to the left of the aircraft nose in line of sight of the
top TCAS directional antenna.
7. Power on the IFR 6000 tester and use the ‘SETUP’ button to access the IFR 6000 TCAS setup page.
a. Set the RF PORT to ‘Antenna’.
b. Set the ANT RANGE for horizontal distance of ramp tester from aircraft TCAS antenna.
c. Set the ANT HEIGHT for vertical distance of ramp tester from aircraft TCAS antenna.
d. Set the UUT ADDRESS to ‘AUTO’.
e. Set the ANT CABLE LOSS to the value marked on the 1 ft coax cable.
f. Set the ANT GAIN to the 1.03 and 1.09 GHz figures marked on the test set antenna.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
g. Set PWR Limits to ‘FAR 43’.
8. Press the ‘TCAS’ mode select button on the IFR 6000 tester to access the TCAS test screen.
a. Set the SCENARIO to ‘Custom’.
b. Set the TCAS TYPE to ‘TCAS II’.
c. Set the %REPLY to ‘100’.
d. Set the INTRUDER TYPE to ‘Mode S’.
e. Set the RANGE START to ‘12 nm’. Set the RANGE STOP to ‘0.1 nm’.
f. Set the RANGE RATE to ‘400 kts’.
g. Select ALT START to 13,225 ft’.
h. Select CONVERGE to ‘Off’.
i. Select ALT DETECT to ‘Off’.
9. Ensure synthetic vision is selected for displays on the PFDs.
10. Press the ‘RUN TEST’ softkey on the IFR 6000 to start the intruder scenario and verify the following:
a. An intruder appears on the synthetic vision display of both PFDs and increases in size at the target
nears own aircraft. The intruder classification (OA, PA, TA or RA) matches that displayed on the
TCAS traffic map.
b. The intruder on the synthetic vision display changes from a yellow circle to a red box when the
intruder changes from a traffic advisory to a resolution advisory.
c. The intruder appears on the synthetic vision display relative to the position of the TCAS test set
antenna.
d. An intruder appears on the TCAS Traffic Map on right MFD MFW pane first as an (OA) unfilled
white diamond with ‘+02’ text displayed immediately above it.
e. At approximately 6 NM from own aircraft the intruder transitions to a (PA) filled white diamond and
appears on the TCAS Traffic Map on the left MFD MFW.
f. The intruder transitions to a (TA) yellow filled circle between 2 and 4 NM.
o A black on yellow background TRAFFIC annunciation is displayed on both PFDs to the
right of the bottom of the airspeed tape.
o The intruder appears on PFD1 and the right MFD Traffic Maps as an off-scale target (circle
target at 2 NM with yellow half inside 2 NM range ring and black half outside 2 NM range
ring) at the relative bearing to the aircraft.
o A “TRAFFIC, TRAFFIC” aural alert is heard over the cockpit speakers and headphones.
g. The intruder transitions to a (RA) red filled square.
o The black on yellow background TRAFFIC annunciation is replaced with a white on red
background TRAFFIC annunciation on both PFDs.
o A “Descend, Descend” aural is heard over the cockpit speakers and headphones.
o A vertical resolution advisory command appears on the vertical speed tape with a green
band ‘Fly-To vertical speed range for negative vertical speed and a red band ‘No-Fly
vertical speed range for positive vertical speed.
o A pitch RA advisory is displayed on the ADI.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
h. After the intruder reaches its closest point of approach and begins diverging from own aircraft
a “Clear of Conflict” aural alert may issue.
11. Press the ‘STOP TEST’ softkey on the IFR 6000 to stop the intruder simulation.
6.11.3 DME 1 Functional Check (Optional)

This check verifies that the G5000 / DME 1 interface operates correctly.
NOTE
Support for a single or dual DME system is provided as an option in the G5000.
1. From the “Home” page on the GTC use the “Audio & Radio” button to access NAV1 tuning and tune
NAV1 to a frequency of 108.00.
2. On the pilot’s PFD select NAV1 as the primary navigation source using the “Active NAV” softkey.
3. On the NAV Test Set, set the frequency to 108.00 enter a 50 NM distance.
4. Verify that the displayed DME distance on PFD1 matches the test set.
5. Touch the DME Mode Control Button and select “HOLD Mode”.
6. Tune NAV1 to 110.00.
7. Verify that the DME distance display remains valid and matches the test set distance.
8. Touch the DME Mode Control Button and select “NAV1 Mode”.
9. Verify the DME distance display turns to dashes.
6.11.4 DME 2 Functional Check (Optional)

This check verifies that the G5000 / DME 2 interface operates correctly.
NOTE
Support for a single or dual DME system is provided as an option in the G5000.
1. From the “Home” page on the GTC use the “Audio & Radio” button to access NAV2 tuning and tune
NAV2 to a frequency of 108.00.
2. On the copilot’s PFD select NAV2 as the primary navigation source using the “Active NAV” softkey.
3. On the NAV Test Set, set the frequency to 108.00 enter a 50 NM distance.
4. Verify that the displayed DME2 distance on PFD2 matches the test set.
5. On the GTC touch the DME Mode Control Button and select “HOLD Mode”.
6. Tune NAV2 to 110.00.
7. Verify that the DME2 distance display remains valid and matches the test set distance.
8. Touch the DME2 Mode Control Button and select “NAV2 Mode”.
9. Verify the DME2 distance display turns to dashes.
10. Verify that the DME distance on PFD2 match the test set.
6.11.5 ADF 1 Functional Check (Optional)

This check verifies that the G5000 / ADF 1 interface operates correctly.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
1. Press the PFD Settings softkey on PFD1 and PFD2. Toggle the BRG1 and BRG2 softkey until the
ADF1 bearing is shown on PFD1 and PFD2.
2. Select ADF1 on GTC1 using the “Audio & Radios” buttons and select a known valid local ADF frequency
or local AM radio station. Select ADF mode.
3. Verify that the ADF1 bearing pointer moves towards a bearing and stabilizes.
4. Select ANT mode for ADF1 on GTC1.
5. Verify the ADF1 pointer declutters.
6. Ensure ADF1 audio is enabled by selecting the ADF1 button as required (green status bar on ADF
button indicates audio enabled).
7. Verify that the audio from the station tuned can be heard on the pilots and copilot’s headset and cockpit
speaker.
8. Increment the ADF volume control from full low to full high on GTC1.
9. Verify the volume increases and decreases appropriately over pilots and copilot’s headset and cockpit
speaker.
10. Deselect ADF1 audio and change the mode back to ADF.
6.11.6 ADF 2 Functional Check (Optional)

This check verifies that the G5000 / ADF 2 interface operates correctly.
1. Press the PFD Settings softkey on PFD1 and PFD2. Toggle the BRG1 and BRG2 softkey until the
ADF2 bearing is shown on PFD1 and PFD2.
2. Select ADF2 on GTC2 using the “Audio & Radios” buttons and select a known valid local ADF frequency
or local AM radio station. Select ADF mode.
3. Verify that the ADF2 bearing pointer moves towards a bearing and stabilizes.
4. Select ANT mode for ADF2 on GTC2.
5. Verify the ADF2 pointer declutters.
6. Ensure ADF2 audio is enabled by selecting the ADF2 button as required (green status bar on ADF
button indicates audio enabled).
7. Verify that the audio from the station tuned can be heard on the pilots and copilot’s headset and cockpit
speaker.
8. Increment the ADF volume control from full low to full high on GTC2.
9. Verify the volume increases and decreases appropriately over pilots and copilot’s headset and cockpit
speaker.
10. Deselect ADF2 audio and change the mode back to ADF.
6.11.7 AHRS Checkout

2. Ensure AHRS1 is selected as the sensor for PFD1 and AHRS2 is selected as the sensor for PFD2
3. Verify AHRS attitude and heading information is valid on both PFDs.
6.11.7.1 AHRS Auxiliary Battery Power Interface Checkout

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3. Ensure AHRS1 is selected as the sensor for PFD1 and AHRS2 is selected as the sensor for PFD2.
4. On the instrument panel, set the STBY PWR switch to ON.
b. “AHRS AUX PWR 2” white CAS message is annunciated on the G5000.
b. “AHRS AUX PWR 1-2” white CAS message is annunciated on the G5000.
c. “AHRS AUX PWR 2” white CAS message is extinguished on the G5000.
b. “AHRS AUX PWR 1-2” white CAS message is extinguished on the G5000.
c. “AHRS AUX PWR 2” white CAS message is annunciated on the G5000.
b. “AHRS AUX PWR 2” white CAS message is extinguished on the G5000.
6.11.8 Radar Altimeter Functional Check
NOTE
These checks only verify the data output to the G5000 system. Any
equipment/wiring added that is not part of the installation data will need separate
testing and verification not covered as part of this document.
This functional check applies to only those radar altimeters specified as third-party
interfaces by General Arrangement drawing listed in Table 1-1.
6.11.8.1 Honeywell AA-300 Radar Altimeter Functional Check

This check verifies that the G5000 and Honeywell AA-300 Radar Altimeter interface is operating correctly.
1. From the GTC “Home” page select the “Aircraft Systems > System Tests” buttons
2. Select the Radio Altimeter button on the GTC.
a. Verify that the “GPWS INH” annunciation is displayed on both PFDs.
b. Verify that the “TCAS FAIL” annunciation is displayed on both PFDs.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
c. Verify 100 feet is displayed in the RA display window for five seconds then decreases to 0 feet, +5
feet or -5 feet (0 m, +1.5 m or -1.5 m) on both PFDs.
3. When the Radio Altimeter test concludes very the following
a. Verify that the “RA TEST” annunciation is extinguished on both PFDs.
b. Verify that the “GPWS INH” annunciation is extinguished on both PFDs.
c. Verify that the “TCAS FAIL” annunciation is extinguished on both PFDs.
a. Verify on PFD 1 and PFD 2 that an RA FAIL message is displayed.
5. Close the RAD ALT circuit breaker.
a. Verify on PFD1 and PFD2 the RA FAIL annunciation extinguishes.
6.11.8.2 Honeywell AA-300 Radar Altimeter Zero Height Check and Adjustment
This check verifies that the G5000 and Honeywell AA-300 Radar Altimeter interface is operating correctly.
If problems are occurring with the display of RAD ALT information, or if the Honeywell AA-300 Radar
Altimeter or its antennas are replaced, an Operational Test, Zero Height Check and possibly a Zero Height
Adjustment is required as defined below. Also reference section 34-12-02 of the C56XMM Maintenance
Manual to use as additional guidance while performing the checks shown below if desired.
2. Ensure the RAD ALT circuit breaker is closed.
NOTE
After power is applied to the aircraft, ensure the radio altimeter digital readout is
stable.
3. On both PFDs, verify the RAD ALT shows 0 feet, +5 feet or -5 feet (0 m, +1.5 m or -1.5 m).
4. If the displayed RAD ALT does not show 0 feet, +5 feet or -5 feet (0 m, +1.5 m or -1.5 m), accomplish
the Steps 5 through 9, otherwise proceed to Step 9.
CAUTION
Do not turn on power unless connecting the antenna or an applicable load (50-
ohm termination) to the transmitter connector. The transmit and receive antennas
must be connected to do the zero-height adjustment.
5. Turn the zero-height potentiometer counterclockwise until a minus (-) 5 shows in the RAD ALT display.
NOTE
The zero-height potentiometer is located just above electrical connector J1 on the
transceiver.
6. Turn the zero-height potentiometer clockwise (count the number of turns), until a plus (+) 5 shows in
the RAD ALT display.
7. Turn the zero-height potentiometer back counterclockwise one-half of the number of turns previously
counted.
8. Make sure that the PFD RAD ALT shows 0 feet.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
9. Remove the external electrical power source.
6.11.8.3 Collins ALT-55B Radar Altimeter Functional Check

This check verifies that the G5000 and Collins ALT-55B Radar Altimeter interface is operating correctly. If
problems are occurring with the display of RAD ALT information, or if the Collins ALT-55B Radar Altimeter
transceiver or if one or both antennas are replaced an Operational Test is required. Also reference section
34-12-01 of the C56XMM Maintenance Manual to use as additional guidance while performing the checks
shown below if desired.
1. From the GTC “Home” page select the “Aircraft Systems > System Tests” buttons
2. Select the Radio Altimeter button on the GTC.
a. Verify that the “RA TEST” annunciation is displayed on both PFDs.
b. Verify 50 feet is displayed in the RA display window on both PFDs.
3. Press the Radio Altimeter button again.
a. Verify the RA readout window decreases to 0 feet on PFD1 and PFD2.
a. Verify on PFD 1 and PFD 2 that an RA FAIL message is displayed.
5. Close the RAD ALT circuit breaker.
a. Verify on PFD1 and PFD2 the RA FAIL annunciation extinguishes.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.12 Aircraft Doors Interface Checks
This section validates the aircraft door interface to the G5000 is installed and functioning correctly.
6.12.1 Nose Access Doors Interface Check
2. Ensure that the forward and aft latches on the LH and RH Nose Access Doors are closed and the ACC
DOOR UNLOCKED NOSE message is extinguished on the G5000 CAS display window.
3. Unlatch the forward latch on the LH nose bay door.
a. Verify the ACC DOOR UNLOCKED NOSE message is posted to G5000 CAS display window.
4. Re-secure the forward latch on the LH nose bay door.
a. Verify that the ACC DOOR UNLOCKED NOSE message is extinguished on the G5000 CAS display
window.
5. Unlatch the aft latch on the LH nose bay door.
a. Verify the ACC DOOR UNLOCKED NOSE message is posted to the G5000 CAS display window.
6. Re-secure the aft latch on the LH nose bay door.
window.
7. Unlatch the forward latch on the RH nose bay door.
a. Verify the ACC DOOR UNLOCKED NOSE message is posted to the G5000 CAS display window.
8. Re-secure the forward latch on the RH nose bay door.
window.
9. Unlatch the aft latch on the RH nose bay door.
a. Verify the ACC DOOR UNLOCKED NOSE message is posted to G5000 CAS display window.
10. Re-secure the aft latch on the RH nose bay door.
window.
6.12.2 Tail Access Doors Interface Check

2. Ensure that the following access doors are properly secured, and the ACC DOOR UNLOCKED TAIL
message is extinguished on the G5000 CAS display window.
a. Aft Baggage Door - forward and aft upper latches are closed;
b. Tailcone Door - closed and latched;
c. Battery Door - closed and locked. (Applicable to aircraft serial numbers 560-5000 to 560-5187 with
SB560XL-52-9 and all subsequent models up to serial number 560-6000.)
3. Unlatch the forward latch on the aft baggage door.
a. Verify the ACC DOOR UNLOCKED TAIL message is posted to G5000 CAS display window.
4. Re-secure the forward latch on the aft baggage door.
a. Verify that the ACC DOOR UNLOCKED TAIL message is extinguished in the G5000 CAS display
window.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
5. Unlatch and open the tailcone door.
6. Close and latch the tailcone door.
a. Verify that the ACC DOOR UNLOCKED TAIL message is extinguished on the G5000 CAS display
window.
7. Unlock the battery access door.
8. Relock the battery access door.
a. Verify that the ACC DOOR UNLOCKED TAIL message is extinguished on the G5000 CAS display
window.
6.12.3 Lavatory Doors Interface Check

2. Ensure that the left and right lavatory doors are both in the stowed position, the flap preposition handle
is in the UP position, WOW is On-Ground, and that the LAV DOOR message is extinguished on the
3. Un-stow the right lavatory door from the right divider pocket.
a. Verify the LAV DOOR message is posted to G5000 CAS display window.
4. Re-stow the right lavatory door into the right divider pocket.
a. Verify that the LAV DOOR message is extinguished on the G5000 CAS display window.
5. Un-stow the left lavatory door from the left divider pocket.
a. Verify the LAV DOOR message is posted to G5000 CAS display window.
6. Re-stow the left lavatory door into the left divider pocket.
a. Verify that the LAV DOOR message is extinguished on the G5000 CAS display window.
6.12.4 Emergency Exit Door Interface Check

2. Ensure the Emergency Exit Door is installed with the locking pin removed and that the amber EMER
EXIT CAS message is not being displayed in the CAS display window.
3. Remove the inside handle cover and pull down the door release D-Handle.
4. Rotate the D-Handle clockwise to release the latch pin.
a. Verify the EMER EXIT message is posted to G5000 CAS display window.
5. Rotate the exit window D-Handle fully counter-clockwise to re-Close the latch pin.
a. Verify that the EMER EXIT message is extinguished on the G5000 CAS display window.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.12.5 Cabin Door and Door Seal Interface Check
2. Close and lock the main cabin door and verify the following:
a. The CABIN DOOR message is extinguished in the G5000 CAS display window. (Note that it may
take up to approximately 18-seconds for the vent door to close, until which time the CABIN DOOR
message will still be displayed in the G5000 CAS display window. This can be cross-checked
against the Vent Door LED on the Cabin Door Post Switch.)
3. Open the main cabin door and verify the following:
a. The CABIN DOOR and DOOR SEAL messages are posted in the G5000 CAS display window.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.13 Engine Indicating Checks
This section validates the interface between the G5000 and the left and right engine parameter sensors.
2. Observe the MFD in normal mode and verify all engine instruments are displayed and indicate valid
values and markings. Reference figure below for normal EIS Display.
3. Set the MFD reversion switch on the DISPLAY FORMAT / DIM panel to the REV position.
4. Open L IGNITION, R IGNITION, L FUEL BOOST, R FUEL BOOST, SKID CONTROL, FLT HR METER,
AOA, and AOA HEATER circuit breakers on the left circuit breaker panel and ensure all other circuit
5. Ensure the ANTI ICE/DEICE PITOT & STATIC switches are in the OFF position.
6. Observe the MFD in reversion mode and verify all engine instruments are displayed and indicate valid
values and markings. Reference figure below for reversion mode EIS display.
6.13.1 Engine Vibration Interface Check

3. Remove connector PT069 from the Engine Vibration Monitor (UT030) located in the forward upper
baggage compartment and connect PT069, Pins B and E to airframe ground.
5. Allow all systems to initialize and verify the ENG VIB L-R CAS message annunciates.
7. Remove ground wires from connector PT069, Pins B and E.
8. Re-install connector PT069 to the Engine Vibration Monitor (UT030).
6.13.2 EEC Manual Mode Interface Check

2. Remove external electrical power to the airplane. >. Remove connector PT009 from the lower LH Aft
J-Box and connect a ground wire from PT009, Pin *S to airframe ground.
3. Remove connector PT012 from the lower RH Aft J-Box and connect a ground wire from PT012, Pin *H
to airframe ground.
5. Allow all systems to initialize and verify the EEC MANUAL L-R CAS message annunciates:
7. Remove ground wires from connector PT009, Pin *S and connector PT012, Pin *H.
8. Re-install connector PT009 to the lower LH Aft J-Box.
9. Re-install connector PT012 to the lower RH Aft J-Box.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.13.3 EEC A429 Input Verification
This check verifies the electronic engine controller (EEC) is receiving ARINC 429 data from the G5000.
1. Disconnect the RH EEC connector P1 and connect the “A” (+) receive channel 1 input of an ARINC
429 Data Reader to pin Z of the RH EEC P1 connector and the “B” (-) receive channel 1 input of an
ARINC 429 Data Reader to pin G of the RH EEC P1 connector.
2. Connect and apply external power as defined in C56XMM Chapter 24–00–00.
3. On the Main Electrical Switch Panel, set the BATT switch to the ON position and ensure the voltmeter
indicates 28 VDC (+/– 2 VDC).
4. Set the AVIONIC POWER switch to the ON position.
5. Allow all systems to complete power–up initialization.
6. On the ARINC 429 Data Reader, verify Labels 203 (Pressure Altitude), 205 (Mach), and 211 (TAT)
match the respective data on the PFDs and MFD.
6.13.4 Oil Filter By-Pass Interface Check

2. Disengage the L EEC and R EEC circuit breakers on the pilot’s circuit breaker panel, if not already
disengaged.
to ON.
4. Allow all systems to complete power-up sequences and verify the following CAS messages are not
annunciated on the G5000:
a. OIL FLTR BP L
b. OIL FLTR BP R
c. OIL FLTR BP L R
5. Place the BATTERY and AVIONICS POWER switches to OFF. Remove external electrical power to
the airplane.
6. Disconnect the LH Engine EEC connector (P3).
to ON and verify the OIL FLTR BP L CAS message is annunciated.
the airplane.
9. Re-install LH Engine EEC connector (P3).
10. Disconnect the RH Engine EEC connector (P3).
to ON and verify the OIL FLTR BP L CAS message is extinguished and the OIL FLTR BP R CAS
message is annunciated.
the airplane.
13. Re-install RH Engine EEC connector (P3).
to ON and verify no OIL FLTR BP CAS messages are displayed.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.13.5 Engine Ground Idle Interface Check
2. Open the L EEC and R EEC circuit breakers on the pilot’s circuit breaker panel, if not already open.
4. Disconnect the LH Engine EEC connector (P3) and connect a ground wire to P3, Pin 29 but do not
connect to airframe ground.
5. Disconnect the RH Engine EEC connector (P3) and connect a ground wire to P3, Pin 29 but do not
connect to airframe ground.
8. Apply an aircraft ground to the wire at the LH Engine EEC connector P3, Pin 29 and verify the GND
IDLE CAS message annunciates
9. Remove the airframe ground wire from LH Engine EEC connector (P3), Pin 29 and verify the GND
IDLE CAS message extinguishes.
10. Apply an aircraft ground to the wire at the RH Engine EEC connector P3, Pin 29 and verify the GND
IDLE CAS message annunciates:
11. Remove the airframe ground wire from RH Engine EEC connector (P3), Pin 29 and verify the GND
IDLE CAS message extinguishes.
13. Re-install LH Engine EEC connector (P3).
14. Re-install RH Engine EEC connector (P3).
6.13.6 Engine Ignition and Start Check

1. During left and right engine start verify START and IGN annunciations post on the EIS display for
each engine during its respective start. A green IGN and green START annunciation should post
next to the ITT display. Verify the IGN and START annunciations extinguish after the engine start
sequence is performed.
2. Place the L GEN switch to the RESET position and then to the OFF position, verify the GEN OFF L
CAS message is annunciated on the G5000.
3. Place the L GEN switch to the ON position, verify the GEN OFF L CAS message extinguishes on the
G5000.
4. Place the R GEN switch to the RESET position and then to the OFF position, verify the GEN OFF R
CAS message is annunciated on the G5000.
5. Place the R GEN switch to the ON position, verify GEN OFF R CAS message extinguishes on the
G5000.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.13.7 Engine Sync Check
6.13.7.1 Test Set-Up

Note: This procedure will require a ground power unit and a hydraulic mule.
2. On the DFD Panel, set the PFD1 and PFD2 FORMAT knobs to the REV position and the MFD
FORMAT knob to the NORM position.
3. Open L IGNITION, R IGNITION, L FUEL BOOST, R FUEL BOOST, SKID CONTROL, FLT HR
METER and AOA HEATER circuit breakers on the left circuit breaker panel and ensure all other
circuit breakers are closed.
4. Ensure the ANTI ICE/DEICE PITOT & STATIC switches are in the OFF position.
6.13.7.2 Test Procedure

1. Disconnect P2 of the RH engine EEC and insert, but do not ground yet, a jumper in pin t (lower
case).
2. Disconnect PT012 in the RH J-Box and insert, but do not ground yet, a jumper in pin i (lower
case).
3. Connect the hydraulic mule to the aircraft. Reference Chapter 29 (29-11-07) of the Aircraft
Maintenance Manual (AMM).
4. Lift the airplane with jacks. Reference Chapter 7 of the Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
5. Ensure Landing Gear Handle is in the Down position, and nose & main landing gear are
extended.
6. Connect and apply external power as defined in AMM C56XMM, Chapter 20-00-00 Standard
7. On the instrument panel, set the VOLTAGE SEL switch to the BATT position.
8. On the instrument panel, set the DC POWER BATT switch to the ON position and ensure the DC
VOLTS voltmeter indicates 28.5 VDC (+/- 0.5 VDC).
9. On the instrument panel, set the AVIONIC POWER switch to the ON position.
10. Allow the G5000 system to initialize.
11. On the MFD, push the lower right softkey as required to accept the splash screen.
12. On the DFD Panel, set the PFD1 and PFD2 FORMAT knobs to the REV position and the MFD
FORMAT knob to the NORM position.
13. Ensure the ENGINE SYNC switch is in the OFF position.
14. Verify proper N1 FAN and N2 TURB ‘SYNC’ indications are displayed in the EIS window between
the N1 and N2 indications as defined in the table below:

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Table 6–8 – ‘SYNC’ Icon Logic Verification (XLS)
COCKPIT RH
RH J-BOX LANDING
ENGINE ENGINE EXPECTE
PT012 GEAR PASS FAIL
SYNC EEC P2 D RESULT
PIN i POSITION
SWITCH PIN t
Down and
OFF Open Open No Icon
Locked
Down and
FAN Grounded Open No Icon
Locked
Down and N1 SYNC
FAN Grounded Grounded
Locked (Amber)
Down and N1 SYNC
FAN Grounded Grounded
Locked (Amber)
Down and
Locked
Down and
TURB Open Open No Icon
Locked
Down and N2 SYNC
TURB Grounded Grounded
Locked (Amber)
Down and N2 SYNC
TURB Grounded Grounded
Locked (Amber)
Down and
TURB Open Open No Icon
Locked
Down and
Locked
N2 SYNC
TURB Grounded Grounded Up (Note 1)
(Green)
N1 SYNC
FAN Grounded Grounded Up (Note 1)
(Green)
Note 1: Connector PT012 will need to be temporarily reconnected to swing the gear.
15. Set the AVIONIC POWER switch to the OFF position.

16. On the Main Electrical Switch Panel, set the BATT switch to the OFF position.
17. Reconnect RH EEC connector, P2.
18. Reconnect PT012 in the RH J-Box.
6.13.8 Fuel Flow Indication Functional Check

The tools and equipment listed in Table 6-9 are provided for reference only and are not specifically required.
Any product conforming to the specification listed may be used. It is the responsibility of the technician or
mechanic to determine the applicable specification prior to testing.
Table 6-9, Fuel Flow Indication Test Equipment
Name Requirement
Signal Generator (2-channel) 0 – 10VDC / 0 – 1kHz
NOTE
The following steps are required to be completed on both engines.

2. Remove the engine cowling to gain access to the engine fuel flow transmitter connectors (PD007 – Left
and PE018 – Right).

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3. Connect the signal generator channel 1 to pin 1 (Drum) and channel 2 to pin 3 (Impeller) of both PD007
(left) & PE018 (right) connectors.
4. Connect the low side of the signal generator to pin 2 (Common) of both PD007 (left) & PE018 (right)
connectors.
6. Apply power to the signal generator and configure to output a 3 Vpk–pk sine wave.
7. On the signal generator generate a frequency of 0 Hz on Channel 1 and 2.
8. On the signal generator, set the phase of both signals to 0° and align the phase of the two signals.
9. Enable Channel 1 and Channel 2 Output Control buttons signal outputs.
10. Enter each of the frequency and phase shift input values listed in Table 6-10 and verify the LH Fuel
Flow digital readout value is displayed in the EIS window of each display as shown below.
11. NOTE: Both Channel 1 and Channel 2 signals should be set to the same frequency at all times.
Table 6-10, LH/RH Fuel Flow Digital Readout Test Points (XLS)
EXPECTED
INPUT
RESULT
SIGNAL SIGNAL
GENERATOR CH 1 GENERATOR CH 2 SIGNAL GENERATOR CH 1 FUEL FLOW
(DRUM) (IMPELLER) (PHASE SHIFT DEGREES) (PPH)
(HZ) (HZ)
6.45 6.45 0° 0 ± 20.0
25 25 112.5° 500 ± 20.0
12 12 108° 1000 ± 20.0
9 9 121.5° 1500 ± 20.0
6.45 6.45 116.1° 2000 ± 20.0
13. Remove the test equipment and reconnect the connectors removed for simulating the fuel flow sensor.
6.13.9 Fuel Temperature Functional Check
The tools and equipment listed in Table 6-11 are provided for reference only and are not specifically
required. Any product conforming to the specification listed may be used. It is the responsibility of the
technician or mechanic to determine the applicable specification prior to testing.
Table 6-11, Fuel Temperature Test Equipment
Name Requirement
Decade Box 0 – 1kΩ
NOTE
The following steps are required to be completed on both engines. An open or
shorted fuel temperature circuit results in the GEAs detecting a fault and thus
disabling the fuel temperature function and providing amber dashes in place of the
fuel temperature indication. If this occurs, Open then Close the GEA CBs as
required to present valid fuel temperature.

2. Open the LH GEA PRIM, LH GEA SEC, RH GEA PRIM, and RH GEA SEC circuit breakers.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
3. Gain access to the fuel temperature sensors by removing access panels 313AL and 314AR (center
belly fairing panels).
4. Disconnect the fuel temperature sensor connectors PM011 (left) and PS008 (right).
5. Connect the Decade Box between pins A and B of each connector.
6. Close the LH GEA PRIM, LH GEA SEC, RH GEA PRIM, and RH GEA SEC circuit breakers.
7. Observe the MFD and verify the ‘FUEL TEMP °C’ indications on the EIS window and ‘Summary’ page
match those values listed in Table 6-12 within the specified tolerances.
Table 6-12, Fuel Temperature Test Points
Decade Box Resistance (Ω) Indication (°C)
71.19 ±1 -60 ± 4
90.38 ±1 0±4
97.31 ±1 20 ± 4
112.28 ±1 60 ± 4
116.7±1 70 ± 4
9. Remove the test equipment and reconnect the connectors removed for the simulating the fuel
temperature sensor.
6.13.10 Oil Pressure Indication Functional Check
Name Requirement
Fluke 725 Multifunction Process
Voltage Source
Calibrator or Similar
NOTE: Acceptable to use a precision power supply to simulate the
volts listed in parenthesis below in Table 6-13.

2. Open the LH GEA PRIM, LH GEA SEC, RH GEA PRIM, and RH GEA SEC circuit breakers.
3. Gain access to the oil pressure sensors by removing the lower engine cowlings. Refer to 56XMM
Chapter 71, Engine Cowling - Maintenance Practices.
4. Disconnect the oil pressure sensor connectors PD006 (left) and PE007 (right).
5. Connect the process calibrator to Pin 2 (Output +) and Pin 3 (Output -) of both connectors PD006
(left) and PE007 (right).
6. Close the LH GEA PRIM, LH GEA SEC, RH GEA PRIM, and RH GEA SEC circuit breakers.
7. Apply the voltages to the oil pressure transmitters as specified in Table 6-13.
a. Verify LO OIL PRESS CAS message is annunciated when corresponding left and right oil pressure
indication is less than 20 PSI.
b. Verify the corresponding left and right oil pressure displays per Table 6-13 for the EIS display on
all three display units.
Table 6-13, Oil Pressure Test Points
Test Point (Vdc) Indication (PSI)

0.00 ± 0.06 0
0.40 ± 0.06 20 ± 2.0
2.00 ± 0.06 100 ± 2.0

190-02313-01 Revision 2
Test Point (Vdc) Indication (PSI)
2.80 ± 0.06 140 ± 2.0
5.00 ± 0.06 250 ± 2.0

9. Remove the test equipment.
10. Reinstall the oil pressure transmitters. Reference 56XMM Chapter 79, Engine Oil Pressure System.
6.13.11 Oil Temperature Indication Functional Check
Table 6-14, Oil Temperature Indication Test Equipment
Name Requirement
Decade Box (Optional 2) 0 – 1kΩ
NOTE
The following steps are required to be completed on both engines. An open or
shorted oil temperature circuit results in the GEAs detecting a fault and thus
disabling the oil temperature function and providing amber dashes in place of the
oil temperature indication. If this occurs, Open then Close the GEA CBs as
required to present valid oil temperature.

2. Open the LH GEA PRIM, RH GEA PRIM, LH GEA SEC and RH GEA SEC circuit.
3. Gain access to the oil temperature sensors by removing the lower engine cowlings. Refer to 56XMM
Chapter 71, Engine Cowling - Maintenance Practices.
4. Disconnect the oil temperature sensor connectors PD005 (left) and PE006 (right).
5. Connect the Decade Boxes to pins A (+) and B (-) of the PD005 (left) and PE006 (right) connectors.
NOTE
If only one decade box is used the left and right sides must be done separately.
6. Close the LH GEA PRIM, RH GEA PRIM, LH GEA SEC and RH GEA SEC circuit breakers.
7. Set the resistance of the decade box to the values specified in Table 6-15.
a. Verify the corresponding left and right oil temperature displays per Table 6-15 for the EIS display
on all three display units.
Table 6-15, Oil Temperature Test Points
Test Point (Ω) Indication (°C)

77.39 ± 1 -40
90.38 ± 1 0
137.78 ± 1.5 120
157.00 ± 1.5 160

190-02313-01 Revision 2
9. Remove the test equipment and reconnect the connectors removed for the simulating the engine oil
temperature sensor.
6.13.12 ITT Indication Functional Check

Table 6-16, ITT Indication Test Equipment
Name Requirement
Fluke 725 Multifunction Process
Temperature Calibrator
Calibrator or Similar
NOTE: Acceptable to use a precision power supply to simulate the
millivolts listed in parenthesis below in Table 6-17.

2. Disconnect the P3 (left) and (right) LH and RH engine pylon disconnects to gain access to the ITT
signal input to the GEAs.
3. Connect the temperature calibrator as a type K thermocouple to pins 60 (-) and 36 (+) of the P3
engine pylon disconnect.
NOTE
If the left side and the right side are done separately then the GEA1 circuit breakers
must be reset with the ITT simulator connected to the left side and the GEA2 circuit
breakers must be reset with the ITT simulator connected to the right side. If the
GEA senses an open circuit on power up it will invalidate the ITT signal until the
next power up.
5. Set the temperature calibrator to the values specified in Table 6-17.

a. Verify the corresponding left and right ITT displays per Table 6-17 for the EIS display on the
MFD.
Table 6-17, ITT Test Points
Test Point (°C) / millivolts Indication (°C)

0 / (0 mv) 0+5
300 / (12.21 mv) 300 ± 5
500 / (20.64 mv) 500 ± 5
620 / (25.75 mv) 620 ± 5
700 / (29.13 mv) 700 ± 5

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.13.13 N1 Indication Functional Check
Table 6-18, N1 Indication Test Equipment
Name Requirement
Signal Generator 0 – 10VDC / 0 – 1kHz
NOTE
The following steps are required to be completed on both
engines.

2. Disconnect the P3 (left) and (right) LH and RH engine pylon disconnects to gain access to the N1
3. Connect the signal generator to pins 30 (-) and 15 (+) of the P3 engine pylon disconnect.
5. Set the signal generator amplitude to a 5-volt peak to peak sine wave.
6. Set the frequency of the signal generator to the values specified in Table 6-19.
a. Verify the corresponding left and right N1 displays per Table 6-19 for the EIS display on all three
display units.
Table 6-19, N1 Test Points
Test Point (Hz) Indication (% RPM)

0 0 ± 0.0
1890 (± 25Hz) 30 ± 0.3
3780 (± 25Hz) 60 ± 0.3
6300 (± 25Hz) 100 ± 0.3
6930 (± 25Hz) 110 ± 0.3

8. Remove the test equipment and reconnect the connectors removed for the simulating the N1 sensor.
6.13.14 N2 Indication Functional Check
Table 6-20, N2 Indication Test Equipment
Name Requirement
Signal Generator 0 – 10VDC / 0 – 1kHz
NOTE
The following steps are required to be completed on both engines.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
2. Disconnect the P3 (left) and (right) LH and RH engine pylon disconnects to gain access to the N2
3. Connect the signal generator to pins 60 (-) and 36 (+) of the P3 engine pylon disconnect.
5. Set the signal generator amplitude to a 5-volt peak to peak sine wave.
6. Set the frequency of the signal generator to the values specified in Table 6-21.
a. Verify the corresponding left and right N2 displays per Table 6-21 for the EIS display on all three
display units.
Table 6-21, N2 Test Points
Test Point (Hz) Indication (% RPM)

0 0 ± 0.0
1472 (± 25Hz) 20 ± 0.3
7327 (± 25Hz) 100 ± 0.3
7985 (± 25Hz) 109 ± 0.3

8. Remove the test equipment and reconnect the connectors removed for the simulating the N2 sensor.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.14 Autopilot Functional Tests
The following procedure will verify the proper operation of the G5000 AFCS after maintenance to one of its
associated components has been done or to satisfy a time-limited inspection. The technician performing
these checks must be familiar with the autopilot. Information regarding the autopilot installation and
operation can be found by referencing the following, also referenced in Table 1-1.
G5000 Cockpit Reference Guide, Textron Model 560XL, P/N 190-02538-00
Roll Servo Install, Textron Model 560XL, P/N 005-01202-11
Pitch Servo Install, Textron Model 560XL, P/N 005-01202-12
Yaw Servo Install, Textron Model 560XL, P/N 005-01202-13
Pitch Trim Servo Install, Textron Model 560XL, P/N 005-01202-14
NOTE
In the sections that follow, an Autopilot disconnect should be accompanied by
an aural “Autopilot” alert.
6.14.1 Pre-Flight Test

1. Power on the G5000 system in normal mode.
a. Verify the autopilot begins an automatic pre-flight test after AHRS and ADC parameters
become valid.
b. Verify that a white ‘PFT’ annunciation is displayed on PFD1 and PFD2, as shown in Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1, Pre-Flight Test

2. Upon successful completion of the test, the aural “Autopilot” alert will sound and the annunciation
will clear. The aural “Autopilot” alert is generated by either GIA 64E #1 or GIA 64E #2, alternately,
with each system power-up. Thus, the PFT sequence must be run twice to verify both GIA units
are providing the aural “Autopilot” alert.
3. Repeat Steps 1 - 2 to test the PFT single autopilot disconnect tone for the other GIA 64E.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.14.2 AFCS Switch Checks
NOTE
To determine if Underspeed Protection is installed, cycle power to the MFD and
the text, ‘With Underspeed Protection Enabled’ will be displayed under the
airframe variant name on the splash screen if the aircraft has Underspeed
Protection installed.
NOTE
The check requires disconnecting the autopilot. Ensure the control wheel is
properly secured prior to disconnecting the autopilot.
Verify that the AFCS system buttons and switches are operating correctly by performing the following:
1. Set the Test Rotary Knob to the ‘ANNU’ position and verify all GMC indicators illuminate while the test
is in progress.
2. Return the Rotary Knob to the OFF position.
3. Manually set the pitch trim control wheel on the pedestal into the Take Off (TO) band.
4. Center the control column and control wheel
5. Ensure the autopilot is coupled to GIA1 by verifying the arrowhead next to the ‘CPL’ key on the AFCS
mode controller is pointing to the pilot’s side.
6. Engage the autopilot by pressing the ‘AP’ key on the AFCS mode controller.
7. On the AFCS mode controller rotate the pitch control wheel in the UP direction and verify the pitch trim
control wheel on the center pedestal begins moving aft (in the nose-up direction).
8. On the pilots control wheel move the left half of the PITCH TRIM switch to the NOSE DOWN position
and the following:
a. Amber AP annunciation flashes for 5 seconds in the AFCS Mode Status window of both
PFDs and then extinguishes.
b. A single autopilot disconnect aural alert sounds.
c. Yaw damper remains engaged.
d. Flight director command bars remain in view.
e. Pitch trim control wheel on the center pedestal stops movement.
10. Center the control column and control wheel.
11. Engage the autopilot.
12. On the AFCS mode controller rotate the pitch control wheel in the DN direction and verify the pitch trim
control wheel on the center pedestal begins rotating forward (in the nose-down direction).
13. On the pilots control wheel move the left half of the PITCH TRIM switch to the NOSE UP position and

190-02313-01 Revision 2
18. On the pilots control wheel move the right half of the PITCH TRIM switch to the NOSE DOWN position
and verify the following:
control wheel on the center pedestal begins moving forward (in the nose-down direction).
23. On the pilots control wheel move the right half of the PITCH TRIM switch to the NOSE UP position and
28. On the copilots control wheel move the left half of the PITCH TRIM switch to the NOSE DOWN position
190-02313-01 Revision 2
32. On the AFCS mode controller the pitch control wheel in the DN direction and verify the pitch trim control
wheel on the center pedestal begins moving forward (in the nose-down direction).
33. On the copilot’s control wheel move the left half of the PITCH TRIM switch to the NOSE UP position
38. On the copilot’s control wheel move the right half of the PITCH TRIM switch to the NOSE DOWN
position and verify the following:
control wheel on the center pedestal begins moving forward (in the nose-down direction).
43. On the copilot’s control wheel move the right half of the PITCH TRIM switch to the NOSE UP position
190-02313-01 Revision 2
45. On the pilot’s control wheel press and hold the CWS switch and validate the following:
a. Verify the pilot or copilot control wheel and control column move freely when moved
manually.
b. Verify the yaw damper remains engaged.
c. Verify the green ‘AP’ at the top of PFD1 and PFD2 is replaced by a white ‘CWS’.
46. Release the CWS switch and press the AP YD DISC TRIM INTRPT switch on the pilots control wheel.
a. Verify the autopilot disengages with a flashing amber ‘AP’ annunciation on PFD1 and
PFD2, accompanied by an aural alert.
b. Verify that the control wheel is free in pitch and roll axes.
c. Verify the yaw damper disengages.
48. Disengage A/P SERVOS circuit breaker on the RH CB Panel.
a. Verify the autopilot disconnects and the abnormal disconnect is provided, consisting of a
continuous aural “Autopilot” alert and a flashing red/white ‘AP’ annunciation.
b. Verify no AFCS annunciations (e.g. AFCS, PFT, Mistrim) remain on PFD1 or PFD2.
c. Verify a white AP-YD FAIL message is posted to CAS.
49. Press the AP YD DISC TRIM INTRPT switch on the pilots control wheel to cancel the abnormal alert.
50. Engage the A/P SERVOS circuit breaker to restore power to the system and wait for completion of the
servo pre-flight test sequence to continue.
52. Disengage A/P SERVOS circuit breaker on the LH CB Panel.
continuous aural “Autopilot” alert and a flashing red/white ‘AP’ annunciation.
b. Verify no AFCS annunciations (e.g. AFCS, PFT, Mistrim) remain on PFD1 or PFD2.
c. Verify a white AP-YD FAIL message is posted to CAS.
53. Press the AP YD DISC TRIM INTRPT switch on the pilots control wheel to cancel the abnormal alert.
54. Engage the A/P SERVOS circuit breaker to restore power to the system and wait for completion of the
servo pre-flight test sequence to continue.
56. Ensure the autopilot is coupled to GIA1 by verifying the arrowhead next to the ‘CPL’ key on the AFCS
mode controller is pointing to the pilot’s side. If the arrowhead points to the copilot’s side, press the
‘CPL’ key.
57. Disengage GIA1 (PRIM) and GIA1 (SEC) circuit breakers.
a. Verify the autopilot disconnects with a continuous aural alert and a flashing red/white ‘AP’
annunciation.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
58. Press the AP YD DISC TRIM INTRPT switch on the copilots control wheel to cancel the alert and
annunciation.
59. Engage the GIA1 (PRIM) and GIA1 (SEC) circuit breakers and wait for completion of the pre-flight test
sequence to continue.
Note: At initial powerup the MFD splash screen annunciates if underspeed protection is installed or not
installed.
61. Press the GO AROUND button on the left thrust lever.
a. For those aircraft not modified with underspeed protection, verify the autopilot disconnects
with a single aural alert and a flashing amber ‘AP’ annunciation.
b. The autopilot remains engaged for those aircraft equipped with Underspeed Protection.
c. Verify ‘TO’ is annunciated on PFD1 and PFD2 for both PITCH and ROLL modes and the
command bars should be at 8 degrees nose up and wings-level.
62. Press the Pilot’s Flight Director (FD) key on the AFCS mode controller to deactivate the GA mode.
63. Press the GO AROUND button on the right thrust lever.
a. For those aircraft not modified with underspeed protection, verify the autopilot disconnects
with a single aural alert and a flashing amber ‘AP’ annunciation.
b. The autopilot remains engaged for those aircraft equipped with Underspeed Protection.
c. Verify ‘TO’ is annunciated on PFD1 and PFD2 for both PITCH and ROLL modes and the
command bars should be at 8 degrees nose up and wings-level.
64. Press the Co-pilot’s Flight Director (FD) key on the AFCS mode controller to deactivate the GA mode.
66. Press the Pilot’s or Co-pilot’s CWS button for a minimum of 5 seconds and release.
a. Verify there is no residual force on the control column for the pitch axis.
67. Disengage the autopilot by pressing the AP YD DISC TRIM INTRPT switch on the co-pilot’s control
wheel.
68. Couple the autopilot to GIA2 by verifying the arrowhead next to the ‘CPL’ key on the AFCS mode
controller is pointing to the copilot’s side. If the arrowhead points to the pilot’s side, press the ‘CPL’
key.
69. Engage the autopilot by pressing the AP key on the AFCS mode controller.
70. On the copilot’s control wheel press and hold the CWS switch and validate the following:
a. Verify the pilot or copilot control wheel and control column move freely when moved
manually.
b. Verify the yaw damper remains engaged.
c. Verify the green ‘AP’ at the top of PFD1 and PFD2 is replaced by a white ‘CWS’.
71. Release the CWS.
72. Disengage GIA2 (PRIM) and GIA2 (SEC) circuit breakers.
continuous aural alert and a flashing red/white ‘AP’ annunciation.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
73. Press the Co-pilot’s AP YD DISC TRIM INTRPT switch to cancel the alert and annunciation.
74. Engage the GIA2 (PRIM) and GIA2 (SEC) circuit breakers and wait for completion of the pre-flight test
sequence to continue.
75. Press the Co-pilot’s FD key on the AFCS mode controller and verify the mode annunciations and
command bars are presented on the display.
6.14.3 Autopilot/Underspeed Protection & Stall Warning System Interface

Verification
Verify the interface between the G5000 autopilot and existing stall warning system is valid by performing
the following functional test:
1. Open the AOA circuit breaker and verify the AOA Fail message is posted to CAS.
2. Close the AOA circuit breaker and verify the AOA Fail message extinguishes.
3. Set the aircraft squat switches to ‘in-air’ mode.
4. Ensure the AOA Vane is approximately level and the stick shaker is not active.
6. Slowly rotate the trailing edge of the AOA vane in an upward direction until the Stall Warning Shaker
activates and verify the following:
a. (For aircraft NOT equipped with Underspeed Protection) The autopilot disconnects with a
single aural “Autopilot” alert and a flashing amber ‘AP’ annunciation.
b. (For aircraft equipped with Underspeed Protection)
i. The autopilot remains engaged.
ii. Yellow ‘MINSPD’ annunciation displayed in the target box above the airspeed tape.
iii. Red ‘UNDERSPEED PROTECT ACTIVE’ CAS warning message illuminates.
iv. Continuous “AIRSPEED” aural alert.
v. Current active FD modes in AFCS Mode status window will turn white and the FD command
bars will move to a wings level roll attitude and 0° pitch attitude.
7. Rotate the trailing edge of the AOA vane downward until the Stall Warning Shaker stops.
8. For those aircraft equipped with Underspeed Protection verify the following:
a. USP visual and aural alerts remain active when the Stall Warning Shaker stops.
b. When the autopilot is disengaged all USP alerts are removed.
6.14.4 Manual Electric Pitch Trim Speed Check

2. Secure an inclinometer on the elevator trim tab, aligning inclinometer perpendicular to the trailing
edge of the elevator trim tab.
3. Push both pilot’s control wheel trim control switches forward. Drive the tab to the upper limit.
4. Set control lock.
5. Zero the inclinometer. Verify that inclinometer indicates 0.0°.
6. Rotate the pedestal trim wheel full aft. Verify trim tab inclinometer displays 20 ±2°
7. Record measured travel in Table 6-22 in the “Measured Degrees” column.
8. Set both pilots and copilots barometric setting to STD BARO.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
9. Using a timing device, start time and pull both pilot’s control wheel control Trim switches aft (nose up
trim). Drive the tab to the lower limit. Record Time results in Table 6-22.
10. Divide Measured degrees by time and record results in table below. Verify that calculated Degrees
per second is within the requirement stated.
Table 6-22, Manual Electric Trim Times
Pressure
Degrees per
Altitude
TAS Measured Degrees Time (Sec.) second. (Meas. Requirement
(Set
Degrees / Sec.)
29.92/STD)
0 Field 0.38°/sec to 0.48°/sec
Elevation
300 20000 0.2°/sec to 0.3°/sec
11. Using the Air Data test set, increase pressure altitude to 20,000ft and increase airspeed until 300
Knots TAS is indicated on the lower left of the HSI on each PFD.
12. Push both pilot’s control wheel trim control switches forward. Drive the tab to the upper limit.
13. Using a timing device, start time and pull both pilot’s control wheel control Trim switches aft (nose up
trim). Drive the tab to the lower limit. Record Time results in Table 6-22.
14. Divide Measured degrees by time and record results in Table 6-22 Verify that calculated Degrees
per second is within the requirement stated.
15. Using the Air Data test set, Reduce Airspeed and altitude to ambient conditions.
6.14.5 Autopilot Operational Checks
1. Engage the Autopilot by pressing the AP key on the AFCS mode controller. Push the HDG knob to
synchronize the heading bug to the current aircraft heading. Select HDG mode by pressing the HDG
key on the AFCS mode controller.
2. Verify the command bars are level and the control wheel is stationary. (There may be some roll motion
in the control wheel if the aircraft not perfectly level).
3. Turn the HDG knob to the left and right and verify the command bars move in the correct direction and
the control wheel follows the command bars.
4. Push and hold the CWS button and pull the control wheel to the center of the pitch control range.
Release the CWS button.
5. Verify the autopilot servos re-engage.
6. Rotate the pitch wheel on the AFCS mode controller two clicks in the UP direction to increase the pitch
reference and verify the command bars on the PFD move upward and the pitch trim control wheel on
the center pedestal begins moving aft. (In some aircraft, the down spring may require manual
assistance to get aft control stick movement).
7. Press and hold the pilots CWS button and re-center the control wheel and control column.
8. Release the CWS button and verify the AP re-engages.
9. Rotate the pitch wheel on the AFCS mode controller two clicks DN to decrease the pitch reference.
Verify the command bars on the PFD move downward and the pitch trim control wheel on the center
pedestal begins moving forward.
10. Press the CWS button and re-center the control wheel and control column.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
11. With the CWS button still pressed, move the pitch trim control wheel on the center pedestal to its aft
limit.
12. Release the CWS button and apply continuous forward pressure to the pilots or copilots control wheel.
13. Verify the pitch trim control wheel on the center pedestal begins moving in a trim up direction.
14. Press the CWS button on either control wheel and verify the pitch trim control wheel stops.
15. With the CWS button still pressed, move the pitch trim control wheel on the center pedestal to its forward
limit.
16. Release the CWS button and pull the pilots control wheel aft and verify the pitch trim control wheel on
the center pedestal begins moving in a trim down direction.
17. Relieve pressure on the wheel and verify the trim motion stops.
18. Firmly hold the control wheel/column and press the AP YD DISC TRIM INTRPT switch to disconnect
the autopilot.
6.14.6 Autopilot Mistrim Operational Checks
6.14.6.1 ELE Mistrim

1. Manually set pitch trim into the TO band on the pitch trim indicator.
2. On the AFCS mode controller press the CPL button to couple the AP to the LH FD.
3. On the AFCS mode controller press the AP button to engage the autopilot.
4. Apply aft pressure to the control column in the NOSE UP direction to restrict movement and verify the
following:
a. Pitch trim wheel runs.
b. The amber ↑ ELE mistrim indication is displayed on the pilots and copilots PFD.
Note – If the red ↑ ELE mistrim annunciates, in lieu of the amber ↑ ELE mistrim indication, decrease control
column pressure slightly until the amber ↑ ELE mistrim annunciation appears.
5. Increase the force to restrict movement on the control column and verify the red ↑ ELE mistrim
indication replaces the amber ↑ ELE mistrim indication on both PFDs after approximately 5 seconds.
6. Release pressure on the pilots control column and verify the red ↑ ELE mistrim indication is removed
from both PFDs.
7. Apply forward pressure on the control column in the NOSE DN direction.
8. When the control column starts moving restrict movement and verify the following:
9. Pitch trim wheel runs.
10. The amber ↓ ELE mistrim indication is displayed on the pilots and copilots PFD.
Note – If the red ↓ ELE mistrim annunciates, in lieu of the amber ↓ ELE mistrim indication, decrease control
column pressure slightly until the amber ↓ ELE mistrim annunciation appears.
11. Increase the force to restrict movement on the control column and verify the red ↓ ELE mistrim
indication replaces the amber ↓ ELE mistrim indication on both PFDs after approximately 5 seconds.
12. Release pressure on the control column and verify the red ↓ ELE mistrim indication is removed from
both PFDs.
13. On the AFCS mode controller press the CPL button to couple the AP to the RH FD.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
14. Apply aft pressure to the control column in the NOSE UP direction to restrict movement and verify the
following:
16. The amber ↑ ELE mistrim indication is displayed on the pilots and copilots PFD.
Note – If the red ↑ ELE mistrim annunciates, in lieu of the amber ↑ ELE mistrim indication, decrease control
column pressure slightly until the amber ↑ ELE mistrim annunciation appears.
17. Increase the force to restrict movement on the control column and verify the red ↑ ELE mistrim
indication replaces the amber ↑ ELE mistrim indication on both PFDs after approximately 5 seconds.
18. Release pressure on the pilots control column and verify the red ↑ ELE mistrim indication is removed
from both PFDs.
19. Apply forward pressure on the control column in the NOSE DN direction.
20. When the control column starts moving restrict movement and verify the following:
22. The amber ↓ ELE mistrim indication is displayed on the pilots and copilots PFD.
Note – If the red ↓ ELE mistrim annunciates, in lieu of the amber ↓ ELE mistrim indication, decrease control
column pressure slightly until the amber ↓ ELE mistrim annunciation appears.
23. Increase the force to restrict movement on the control column and verify the red ↓ ELE mistrim
indication replaces the amber ↓ ELE mistrim indication on both PFDs after approximately 5 seconds.
24. Release pressure on the control column and verify the red ↓ ELE mistrim indication is removed from
both PFDs.
25. Disengage the autopilot and yaw damper.
6.14.6.2 AIL Mistrim

1. On the AFCS mode controller press the CPL button to couple the AP to the LH FD.
3. On the AFCS mode controller press the HDG button to engage heading mode and rotate the HDG knob
so the FD command bars show a LWD command on both PFDs.
4. Apply pressure to the control wheel to restrict movement and verify that the amber ← AIL mistrim
indication is displayed on the pilots and copilots PFD.
Note – If the red ← AIL mistrim annunciates, in lieu of the amber ← AIL mistrim indication, decrease control
wheel pressure slightly until the amber ← AIL mistrim annunciation appears.
5. Increase the force to restrict movement on the control wheel and verify the red ← AIL mistrim indication
replaces the amber ← AIL mistrim indication on both PFDs after approximately 5 seconds.
6. Release pressure on the control wheel and verify the red ← AIL mistrim indication is removed from
both PFDs.
7. On the AFCS mode controller rotate the HDG knob so the FD command bars show a RWD command
on both PFDs.
8. Apply pressure to the control wheel to restrict movement and verify that the amber AIL → mistrim
Note – If the red AIL →mistrim annunciates, in lieu of the amber AIL →mistrim indication, decrease control
wheel pressure slightly until the amber AIL →mistrim annunciation appears.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
9. Increase the force to restrict movement on the control column and verify the red AIL → mistrim
indication replaces the amber AIL → mistrim indication on both PFDs after approximately 5 seconds.
both PFDs.
12. On the AFCS mode controller press the CPL button to couple the AP to the RH FD.
14. On the AFCS mode controller press the HDG button to engage heading mode and rotate the HDG knob
so the FD command bars show a LWD command on both PFDs.
15. Apply pressure to the control wheel to restrict movement and verify that the amber ← AIL mistrim
Note – If the red ← AIL mistrim annunciates, in lieu of the amber ← AIL mistrim indication, decrease control
wheel pressure slightly until the amber ← AIL mistrim annunciation appears.
16. Increase the force to restrict movement on the control wheel and verify the red ← AIL mistrim indication
replaces the amber ← AIL mistrim indication on both PFDs after approximately 5 seconds.
both PFDs.
18. On the AFCS mode controller rotate the HDG knob so the FD command bars show a RWD command
on both PFDs.
19. Apply pressure to the control wheel to restrict movement and verify that the amber AIL → mistrim
Note – If the red AIL →mistrim annunciates, in lieu of the amber AIL →mistrim indication, decrease control
wheel pressure slightly until the amber AIL →mistrim annunciation appears.
20. Increase the force to restrict movement on the control column and verify the red AIL → mistrim
indication replaces the amber AIL → mistrim indication on both PFDs after approximately 5 seconds.
both PFDs.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.15 HF-SELCAL Function Check (Optional)
This check verifies that the G5000/HF-SELCAL interface operates correctly.
CAUTION
Power carts may regulate poorly when subjected to strong RF fields. If more than
20% fluctuations in power cart voltages are noted when transmitting, do not
continue testing with power cart.
NOTE
Ensure power cart is set to 28V DC and current set to approximately 750 amps
with the aircraft battery connected to the electrical system prior to HF testing.
1. Move aircraft outside, clear of hangars and other large metal building structures.
to ON.
3. Allow approximately two minutes for HF controller to perform self-test.
a. Verify no failures are displayed on the HF controller.
4. On HF controller, adjust the volume and squelch to desirable levels.
5. Set the SELCAL tester for HF SELCAL with a frequency of 10.045 MHz and SELCAL code to “CGBS”.
6. On the HF control head, tune HF frequency to 10.045 MHz. On GTC1
select HF as the active COM. On GTC2 select COM2 as the active COM.
7. Select the HF MIC on the GTC1. Then momentarily key the pilot’s MIC to initiate antenna tuning.
8. On GTC1 Audio & Radios page scroll down to and select SPEAKER to ON.
a. Verify green bar illuminates below SPEAKER on GTC1 Audio & Radios page.
9. On GTC1 Audio & Radios page scroll down to and select SELCAL.
b. Verify green bar illuminates below SELCAL on GTC1 Audio & Radios page.
10. On GTC2 select Audio & Radios page and scroll down to SELCAL.
a. Verify green bar is below SELCAL on GTC2 Audio & Radios page.
11. Touch the GTC1 SELCAL Code button, input ‘CGBS’ and touch ‘Enter’.
a. Verify SELCAL code CGBS is displayed on both GTC Audio and Radios pages.
12. On the SELCAL tester, set the RF level to -17dB. Set the TX mode to “Single” and press START.
a. Verify a SELCAL tone of a1000 Hz chime followed by an 850 Hz chime is heard on the pilot’s
headset and speaker.
b. On GTC1 and GTC2 Audio & Radios Page, verify that the HF window is replaced with a green
SELCAL and a white ACK.
c. Verify a white SELCAL HF CAS message is displayed.
13. On GTC2 select the ACK button.
a. Verify SELCAL ACK is removed.
b. Verify that the white SELCAL HF CAS message extinguishes.
14. On the SELCAL tester, press STOP.
15. Remove power from aircraft.

190-02313-01 Revision 2
6.16 JAA SSFDR Interface Function Check (If Equipped)
1. Ensure power has been cycled to the G5000 system.
2. Set up hydraulic power source for testing per Chapter 29 of 56XMM. Hydraulic power is required to
complete the tests in this section.
3. Place all three GDUs and GTC2 in configuration mode as defined in Section 3.1. GTC1 is to remain
powered off.
4. Place the GTC1 in Rigging Mode by holding down on the joystick and right knob at the same time while
powering up GTC1.
5. Select the Rigging button on GTC1.
NOTE
After the Rigging button is selected, the GEA configuration will load. If the GEA
load fails, select the Back button to re‐select the Rigging button until the GEA
configuration is successfully loaded. The GEA configuration will successfully load
when a GEA Rigging page is shown on GTC1.
6. Select the GEA2 tab on GTC1, then select the Flap Position button.
7. Select the UP detent flap position.
8. Push the 1 button on GTC1.
9. Select the Rig button, then after the rigging process has completed the OK button.
11. Select the T. O. / 200 KIAS detent flap position.
14. Select the T. O. / APPR / 200 KIAS detent flap position.
17. Select the LAND / 175 KIAS detent flap position.
19. Select the Execute button on GTC1 then OK.
20. Cycle the flap lever between the LAND / 175 KIAS and UP detent positions and verify a green numerical
value is displayed for a Raw indication for each position.
NOTE
Green dashes displayed at UP or LAND / 175 KIAS positions means the flap position
out of range. Green dashes are acceptable for these positions.
21. Select the UPDT CFG softkey on the System Upload page on GDU1 followed by the ENT button on
GCU1 to save the configuration. Select the ENT button on GCU1. Wait a minimum of 30 seconds prior
to performing the remaining steps.
22. Rotate the inner PFD knob on GCU1 as required to select the “Configuration Manager” page on PFD1.
190-02313-01 Revision 2
23. Push the CNFRM CFG softkey.
24. Push the ENT key on GCU1 to acknowledge the “Confirm configuration as expected configuration?”
prompt.
25. Cycle power to all three GDUs and both GTCs.

190-02313-01 Revision 2

Garmin G5000

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Garmin G5000

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL

System Maintenance Manual

Contains Instructions for Continued

190-02313-01 June 2019 Revision 2

Garmin (Europe) Ltd.

Garmin AT, Inc.

Revision Revision Date Description

1 6/7/2019 Initial Release

2 6/14/2019 Update definition for fuel sleeving color tracer.

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL System Maintenance Manual Page 2

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL System Maintenance Manual Page 3

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL System Maintenance Manual Page 4

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL System Maintenance Manual Page 5

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL System Maintenance Manual Page 6

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL System Maintenance Manual Page 7

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL System Maintenance Manual Page 8

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL System Maintenance Manual Page 9

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL System Maintenance Manual Page 10

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL System Maintenance Manual Page 11

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL System Maintenance Manual Page 12

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL System Maintenance Manual Page 13

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL System Maintenance Manual Page 14

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL System Maintenance Manual Page 15

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL System Maintenance Manual Page 16

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL System Maintenance Manual Page 17

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL System Maintenance Manual Page 18

1.5 Reference Publications

Document Title Document Number

Master Drawing List, G5000, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-00

General Arrangement, G5000, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-02

Antenna Install, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-03

Wire Harness Routing/Inst, Nose, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-04

Wire Harness Routing/Inst, Cabin, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-05

Wire Harness Routing/Inst, Tail, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-06

Nose Bay Avionics Install, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-07

Main Instrument Panel Install, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-08

Circuit Breaker Panels Modification, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-09

Lighting Panel Modification, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-0N

Aft J-Box Mod, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-0P

Roll Servo Installation, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-11

Pitch Servo Installation, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-12

Yaw Servo Installation, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-13

Pitch Trim Installation, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-14

Radar Install, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-15

Pedestal Install, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-16

Pitot-Static Installation, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-17

Fuel Suppression Installation, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-19

Assy Drawing, 981-Module, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-1C

PA Amp Install, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-1G

Control Wheel Modification, Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-43

DFD Panel Assembly 005-01202-44

G5000 in Textron Model 560XL System Maintenance Manual Page 19

Electrical Load Analysis, G5000 Textron Model 560XL 005-01202-77

GDL 69 Series SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Activation instructions 190-00355-04

GDL 69 Series TSO Installation Manual 190-00355-07

GSR 56 Satellite Radio Installation Manual 190-00836-00

Garmin Pilot for iOS User’s Guide 190-01501-00

Garmin Pilot for Android User’s Guide 190-01532-00

User's Guide, Garmin Pilot for Android (Phone) 190-01532-01

Textron Aviation Model 560XL Maintenance Manual C56MM

Textron Aviation Model 560XL Structural Repair Manual 50/56SR

Table 1-2 – Required Documents – Excel

Document Title Document Number